JP2023122486A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine with an improved program.SOLUTION: In a game machine, a game-disabled state in which a game cannot be executed can be generated when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Performance control means can execute a predetermined performance related to display of a specific image in a game that can generate a game state advantageous to a player. Game control means includes arithmetic processing means for performing a predetermined arithmetic process by a program, multiple registers in which values are stored when the arithmetic processing means performs the arithmetic process, and update information storage means capable of storing information updated by the arithmetic processing means. The arithmetic processing means does not use a specific call instruction that can call a subroutine at an arbitrary address when calling a process related to the execution of the game, does not use the specific call instruction when calling a process related to the output of external information to the outside of the game machine, and uses the specific call instruction when calling a process related to the output of a test signal related to the game machine.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 136

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there are gaming machines capable of executing games (for example, Patent Literature 1).

JP 2009-195760 A

However, in conventional gaming machines, there is room for improving the programs used for control and the like.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with an improved program.

In one representative form of the present invention, an effect control means capable of displaying a plurality of specific images on a display means as an effect related to a game, and a game control means capable of executing the game, are provided to provide an advantage to the player. In a gaming machine capable of generating such a game state, it is possible to generate a game impossible state in which a game cannot be executed by establishment of a predetermined condition, and the effect control means is a game capable of generating a game state advantageous to the player. , a predetermined effect related to the display of the specific image can be executed, and the game control means includes program storage means for storing a program, arithmetic processing means for performing predetermined arithmetic processing by the program, and the arithmetic processing. and an update information storage means capable of storing information updated by the arithmetic processing means, wherein the arithmetic processing means calls a process related to execution of the game. when calling a process related to outputting external information to the outside of the gaming machine without using a specific calling instruction that can call a subroutine at an arbitrary address, without using the specific calling instruction, without using the gaming machine The specific call command is used when calling the process related to the output of the test signal.

According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with an improved program.

It is a perspective view of the game machine viewed from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production|presentation control system of a game machine. 10 is a flowchart (part 1) showing a procedure of main processing; 10 is a flowchart (part 2) showing the procedure of main processing; 10 is a flowchart (part 3) showing a procedure of main processing; It is a figure which shows the structure of RAM of the microcomputer for a game. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a safety device information initialization process. 9 is a flow chart showing a procedure of performance display editing processing; 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing a procedure of output processing; It is a flow chart showing the procedure of a winning opening switch/state monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of fraud & prize-winning monitoring processing. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of winning number counter update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a gaming machine state check process. 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure game process. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a starting port switch monitoring process; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure starting mouth switch common process. 9 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a specific area switch monitoring process; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure usual process. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big-hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of small hit determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of support hit determination processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop design setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a variation pattern setting process. 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of 2-byte allocation processing; 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of sorting processing; 9 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a change start information setting process; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during a special figure fluctuation|variation. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of time saving end setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of production mode information check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of processing during special figure display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of processing during a special figure display. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a support operation setting process; 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a role game process; It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the accessory usual processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big-hit completion|finish setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal figure game processing. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of gate switch monitoring processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general electric prize-winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal figure usual processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of process transition setting processing during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process during a normal figure display. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the process during normal per figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal electric operation transition setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal electric remaining bulb processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of end processing per normal figure. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of external information editing processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half of the external information editing process; FIG. 4 is a time chart showing how external information or test signals are transmitted; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a safety device related process. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of an out-of-area integration process; 4 is a flowchart showing the procedure of performance display device control processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of difference ball confirmation processing. 4 is a flowchart showing a procedure of safety device operation monitoring processing; It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of the production control device. 9 is a flowchart showing received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing; 10 is a flowchart showing single-shot command processing; It is a flow chart showing a look-ahead pattern system command process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing look-ahead variation command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows design system command processing. 10 is a flowchart showing variable command processing; It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of hit system command processing. It is an example of a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state. It is another example of the game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. It is a table showing the number of times of time reduction corresponding to the symbol that is the type of hit of the special figure fluctuation display game, the prescribed number of remaining reservations, and the like. It is a diagram showing the characteristics of the normal map fluctuation display game and the normal electric operation. Timing chart showing game state, normal pattern probability (normal pattern per probability), normal pattern state, general pattern state, special figure 2 reservation number, special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation), etc. is. Timing chart showing game state, normal pattern probability (normal pattern per probability), normal pattern state, general pattern state, special figure 2 reservation number, special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation), etc. is. Timing chart showing game state, normal pattern probability (normal pattern per probability), normal pattern state, general electric state, special figure 2 reservation number, special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation), etc. is. In the second embodiment, it is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating the transition of the game state. In the second embodiment, it is a table showing the number of time-savings corresponding to the symbol that is the type of winning of the special figure variation display game, the prescribed number of remaining reservations, and the like. In 2nd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows about the characteristics etc. of a normal figure fluctuation display game and normal electric operation|movement. In the second embodiment, from the time saving state as a specific game state to the transition state (normal game state to digest the remaining hold), the game state, the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation), the general figure state, the general electric state, It is a timing chart showing the number of special figures 2 pending. It is a front view of a game board according to a third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating transitions of game states in the third embodiment; In the third embodiment, it is a table showing the number of times of time reduction corresponding to the symbol that is the type of hit of the special figure fluctuation display game, the prescribed number of remaining reservations (the number of prescribed remaining reservations), and the like. In 3rd Embodiment, it is the table which put together the operation|movement situation of time saving about the case where the operation opportunity of new time saving has generate|occur|produced from each game state. It is a figure explaining the display of the batch display apparatus which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows about the characteristics etc. of the normal figure fluctuation display game in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows about the characteristics etc. of normal electric operation|movement in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure information setting processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of variation pattern setting processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a change start information setting process according to the third embodiment; FIG. It is a table showing the setting situation of the variation pattern table according to the third embodiment with respect to each game state and special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2). FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an effect screen of a display device according to a third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half of the external information editing process according to the third embodiment; FIG. In the third embodiment, it is a time chart showing the on/off state of jackpot 1 to 4 signals as external information. In the third embodiment, it is a time chart showing how the test signal is output to the test-firing test device. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating winning easy state signals 1 to 4 corresponding to medium support and high support in the third embodiment; FIG. 11 is a table showing how a firing position specifying signal is output according to the third embodiment; FIG. It is a time chart which shows the state of the output of the firing position designation|designated signal which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. In the third embodiment, in the case of a small hit result of the special figure 1 variable display game, it is a time chart illustrating the opening operation of the upper big winning opening, the ON / OFF operation of the lever solenoid, and the like. In 3rd Embodiment, in the case of the small hit result of a special figure 2 fluctuation display game, it is a time chart which illustrates opening operation|movement of an upper big prize-winning opening, ON/OFF operation|movement of a lever solenoid, etc. FIG. In the fourth embodiment, it is a table showing the mode of the production system device according to the state of the safety device. FIG. 11 is an example (example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in chronological order in the fourth embodiment (part 1); FIG. FIG. 11 is an example (example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in chronological order in the fourth embodiment (part 2); FIG. FIG. 11 is another example (example 2) of the screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device in chronological order in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a screen transition diagram illustrating an example of an operation notice display that differs depending on the game state in the fourth embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation notice display before and after reach during variable display in the fourth embodiment; In the fourth embodiment, it is a diagram illustrating an operation notice display during customer waiting. In the fourth embodiment, the display screen of the display device in the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is illustrated. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example (example 1) of a specific model display that is displayed other than an image in the fourth embodiment; FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example (example 2) of a specific model display that is displayed other than a video in the fourth embodiment; FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of a CPU according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of a flag register according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a memory map according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 10 is an instruction table (example 1-1) illustrating an LD instruction for transferring 1-byte data among transfer instructions; FIG. FIG. 10 is an instruction table (example 1-2) exemplifying an LD instruction for transferring 2-byte data among transfer instructions; FIG. An instruction table (example 1-3) illustrating an LDW instruction that transfers a 2-byte immediate value among transfer instructions, and an instruction table (example 1-4) illustrating other transfer instructions (LDD instruction, LDY instruction) be. FIG. 10 is an instruction table (example 2-1) illustrating a CP instruction for comparing 1-byte data among comparison instructions; FIG. FIG. 11 is an instruction table (example 2-2) illustrating a CP instruction for comparing 2-byte data among comparison instructions; FIG. FIG. 10 is an instruction table (example 2-3) illustrating a CPJ instruction among comparison instructions; FIG. FIG. 11 is an instruction table (example 2-4) illustrating a CPW instruction for comparing 2-byte data among comparison instructions; FIG. It is an instruction table (example 3-1) exemplifying a JRR instruction that jumps to a near address, and an instruction table (example 3-2) exemplifying a JR instruction that can jump to a distant address. An instruction table (example 4-1) exemplifying a CALL instruction that can call a subroutine at an arbitrary address, and an instruction table (example 4-2) exemplifying a CALLT instruction and a CALLR instruction that cannot call a subroutine at an arbitrary address. 5 is an instruction table (Example 5-1, Example 5-2) illustrating a return instruction returning from a subroutine, interrupt processing, or the like; FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of output processing according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the procedure of out-of-area integration processing according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the procedure of test signal output processing according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a program list which shows the program structure of a part of main processing program. 4 is a program list showing the program structure of a timer interrupt processing program; It is a program list explaining the program list|wrist which shows the program structure of a special figure game processing program, and a special figure game sequence branch table. 2 byte decrement processing program, 2 byte data acquisition processing program, 1 byte data acquisition processing program, it is the program list which shows the program structure of the special figure state check processing program. 4 is a program list showing a program structure of a part of a start switch monitoring processing program; 4 is a program list showing the program structure of a hard random number acquisition processing program; It is a program list showing the program structure of the special figure starting mouth switch common processing program. It is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the special figure reservation information determination processing program. It is a program list which shows the program structure of a big-hit determination processing program. It is a program list which shows the program structure of a special figure usual processing program. It is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the processing program during special figure display. It is a program list which shows the program structure of another one part of a processing program during a special figure display. 4 is a program list showing a program structure of a starting port signal editing processing program; It is a program list which shows the program structure of a safety device related processing program. 4 is a program list showing the program structure of an out-of-area integration processing program; 4 is a program list showing the program structure of a test signal output processing program; 4 is a program list showing the program structure of a part of the difference ball confirmation processing program. It is a program list which shows the program structure of a safety device operation|movement monitoring processing program. It is an instruction table|surface which illustrates the comparison instruction which CPU of a production|presentation control apparatus performs. FIG. 11 is an example (example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in chronological order in relation to the sixth embodiment (part 1); FIG. 11 is an example (example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in chronological order (part 2) in relation to the sixth embodiment; FIG. 11 is an example (example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in chronological order in relation to the sixth embodiment (part 3); FIG. 11 is an example (example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in chronological order in relation to the sixth embodiment (part 4); FIG. 11 is an example (example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in chronological order in relation to the sixth embodiment (part 5); FIG. 11 is an example (example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in chronological order in relation to the sixth embodiment (part 6); FIG. 16 is another example (example 2) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in chronological order in relation to the sixth embodiment (part 1); FIG. FIG. 12 is another example (example 2) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in chronological order in relation to the sixth embodiment (part 2); FIG. FIG. 16 is another example (example 2) of the screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device in chronological order in relation to the sixth embodiment (part 3); FIG. In the sixth embodiment, it is a table for explaining the degree of winning expectation depending on the combination of panels. In the sixth embodiment, it is a table for explaining the degree of winning expectation depending on the combination of panels. FIG. 11 is a table for explaining the degree of expectation of winning by effect production at the time of over-winning in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a table for explaining the contents of dialogue effects corresponding to the colors of the hand icons in the icon movement effect in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a table for explaining the contents of meter circumference effect colors corresponding to the colors of the meter graduations of the meter in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a table for explaining the contents of the color of the meter decrease number displayed on the display screen (the display color of the decrease number) corresponding to the decrease number of the meter scale of the meter in the sixth embodiment; FIG. 19 is a table for explaining the contents of the meter decrease number corresponding to the color of the icon of the hand that moves in the icon moving effect in the sixth embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, in the final special figure fluctuation display game (time saving final game) of the specific game state, the stop pattern becomes a time saving pattern, and then it becomes a specific game state (time saving state) again. be.

[First embodiment]
Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. Note that front, back, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to directions seen by the player during the game.

[General view of game machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The game machine 10 has an opening/closing frame attached to the frame 11 fixed to the island equipment via a hinge 16 so as to be freely opened/closed. The opening/closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (body frame) and a glass frame 15 (front frame unit). In addition, the left end of the opening/closing frame is a shaft attachment end to be attached to a hinge, and the right end is an open end to be opened by rotation. Note that the frame 11 and the front frame 12 constitute an outer frame unit 17 .

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that makes a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible. Note that the cover glass 14 is shown as an example of a transparent member, and a plastic cover may be used instead of the cover glass 14 . The glass frame 15 functions as a transparent member holding frame that holds the transparent member.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Also, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like arranged on the back side of the game board 30. can be done.

Various frame-constituting members are arranged on the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14 .

Decoration devices 18a, 18b, and 18c capable of emitting light according to the game state are arranged in the upper center, right side, and left side of the glass frame 15. As shown in FIG. The decoration devices 18a, 18b, 18c are
It is a production device that accommodates lighting members such as LEDs inside and performs light emission production according to the game state. The illumination members arranged inside these decoration devices 18a, 18b, and 18c constitute part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

The decoration device 18a is a top unit extending in the horizontal direction of the game machine 10 above the glass frame 15 (or opening/closing frame) and protruding obliquely upward and forward. The decoration device 18a has a substantially flat front surface 456 having various indicia such as the model name. decoration device 1
8a is fixed and does not move in this embodiment, but in order to reduce the feeling of pressure on the player, it projects from the retracted initial position (normal position) to forward, upward, or oblique operating positions only when necessary. Alternatively, it may move forward and backward or up and down. When the decoration device 18a (here, the top unit) operates (moves), it becomes a frame effect device (movable accessory) that can move from the initial position to the operating position.

The decoration device 18b is a protruding effect unit (front frame light emitting unit) that extends vertically on the right side of the glass frame 15 and protrudes forward. The decoration device 18c is a projecting effect unit (front frame light emitting unit) that extends vertically on the left side of the glass frame 15 and projects forward. The decoration devices 18b and 18c irradiate the player with light toward the central side (inside) of the gaming machine 10, and the light leaks to the outside of the gaming machine 10 through a plurality of openings.

An upper speaker 19a is arranged at the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15, respectively. Two lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower part of the game machine 10 separately from the upper speakers 19a. The lower speaker 19 b is arranged at the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12 . These upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like. The left and right upper speakers 19a are covered with right and left speaker decoration members 470, respectively.

An upper plate unit 20 having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls (game media) is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15 . The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an opening at the top. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied to the ball shooting device one by one.

The upper tray unit 20 includes a performance operation device that receives an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that receives an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 2 that performs light-emitting performance etc. according to the game state.
2 and .

The production operation device is an operation device including the production button 25, the cross key switch 450, and the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b. is provided. The production button 25 is an operation panel 49
0 is positioned within the opening of the operation panel 490 . The operation panel 490 is
It is possible to reflect light by plating the surface with metal or by making the whole metal, and has, for example, metallic luster of silver (silver). When the production button 25 emits light, the light from the production button 25 is reflected by the surrounding operation panel 490, and the lighting production of the production button 25 becomes effective.

The effect button 25 may include a built-in effect button switch 25a and a touch panel 25b provided on the surface.

Volume adjustment button switches 451 a and 451 b are provided on the operation panel 69 of the upper tray unit 20 .
0, and adjusts the volume of the speaker 19 (the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b) by increasing or decreasing (+-). The cross key switch 450 (cross key SW) is provided adjacent to the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b on the upper left side of the operation panel 490 of the upper tray unit 20, and adjusts the brightness of the performance LED, for example. The cross key switch 450 may also be called a directional key switch, and may be a general one composed of a plurality of (for example, four) switches arranged in the front, back, left, and right. For example, while waiting for a customer and/or playing (during a game)
In such a predetermined state, the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b may be pressed to adjust the volume of the speaker 19, and the front or rear switch of the cross key switch 450 may be pressed to produce an effect. The amount of light (brightness, brightness) of the LED for display may be adjustable. The cross key switch 4 can be used without providing the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b.
The volume of the speaker 19 may be adjustable by pressing the left or right switch of 50 .

The display device 41 is operated by the player by operating the effect operating device (especially the effect button 25).
(See FIG. 2), it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in a special figure variation display game or the like. For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode), or execute an advance notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to a special figure variable display game.

Also, the effect pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device while the game is not being executed.

The game state when the variable display game is executed consists of a plurality of game states. The normal game state (normal state) is a game state in which no special game state occurs. In addition, the special game state is, for example, a state with a high probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a time-saving state or a variable display game as a specific game state (variable state, probability variable state), a big hit state (
Special game state), small hit game state (small hit state). As described above, the game machine 10 has a plurality of game states with different occurrence probabilities of special results, and the game control device 100 (game state selection means,
The setting means) can select (set) one game state from among the plurality of game states and set it as the current game state.

Here, the probability variable state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and There is one that continues until a predetermined probability fall lottery is won (fall lottery type).

Furthermore, it is also possible to always generate the variable probability state when a big hit occurs without determining whether or not to generate the variable probability state by the big win symbol random number.

The ball rental operation device is an operation device operated when a player borrows game balls, and is provided on the upper right side of the operation panel 490 of the upper tray unit 20 . The ball lending operation device includes a balance display section 490a, a ball lending button 27, and a return button . Balance display section 490a
is a display area where the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed. A ball lending button 27 is a button operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and a return button 28 is used when ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. These are buttons operated by the player.

The decoration device 22 is provided in the upper tray unit 20 and is a device that accommodates an illumination member such as an LED inside and performs light emission effect or the like according to the game state. The illumination member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Below the glass frame 15 including the above-described upper tray unit 20 and the like, and below the front frame 12, an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored. A lower tray unit 29 including a lower tray 23 and the like is provided. The lower tray unit 29 and the upper tray unit 20 are matched in shape and arranged side by side in the vertical direction. By operating the upper tray operation part 435 of the upper tray unit 20, the game ball on the upper tray 21 can be caused to flow down to the lower tray 23. - 特許庁

The operating handle 24 is arranged in the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the right lower speaker 19b. The ball shooting device shoots game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30 when the player rotates the operation handle 24 . The shooting speed of the game ball shot from the ball shooting device is set so as to increase as the rotation amount of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball shooting device can change the shooting force (speed) of shooting the game ball to the game area 32 in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and can perform various shooting modes with different shooting force. Can shoot game balls. The shooting modes include left hitting (normal hitting) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right hitting in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32 .

The lower tray 23 of the lower tray unit 29 is arranged below the upper tray unit 20 with a predetermined gap therebetween. The lower plate 23 has a ball removal hole 23a vertically passing through the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening/closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball removal hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation part 23b to open the ball removal hole 23a, the lower tray 2 is opened.
3 can be discharged to the outside through the ball extraction hole 23a.

In addition, on the back side of the front frame 12, there are a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices, an upper tank 448 that stores game balls supplied from a supply device (not shown) installed in the island facility, and a tank from the upper tank 448. A payout device (payout unit) or the like for paying out the game balls that have flowed down to the upper tray 21 is arranged.

[Game board]
Next, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 3 that serves as an attachment base for various members.
0a. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin.
A game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is provided on the front surface of the . The gaming machine 10
A game is played by shooting game balls from a ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31. - 特許庁In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball.

At approximately the center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 is attached to form a window portion that serves as a display area for the variable display game. At the rear of the window formed in the center case 40, there is an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information.
A display device 41 is arranged. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40 . The display device 41 is not limited to having a liquid crystal display, and may have a display such as an EL or a CRT.

A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbols) and characters for producing a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big win display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

In addition, the center case 40 is equipped with a game ball flowing down the game area 32 .
An inflow port 40a to a warp passage 40e for guiding the game ball to the inside and a stage portion 40b on which game balls that have passed through the warp passage 40e can roll are provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting prize opening 36 and the normal variable prize winning device 37,
A game ball rolled on the stage portion 40b is likely to enter the starting prize-winning port 36 or the normal variable prize-winning device 37. - 特許庁

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided in the upper part and the right part of the center case 40, respectively. Upper production unit 40c and side production unit 40d
constitutes a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board rendering device 44 (see FIG. 4).

A normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . Inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed.

A general prize winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40 , and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40 . Winning of game balls to these general winning openings 35 is achieved by a winning opening switch (SW) provided in the general winning opening 35
) 35a-35n (see FIG. 3).

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a starting winning opening (starting opening 1, first starting winning area) 36 that provides a condition for starting the special figure variation display game. center case 40
In the game area 32 on the right side of the normal figure start gate 34, a normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric accessories, normal electric) equipped with a second start winning opening (starting opening 2, second starting winning area) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts to a state in which game balls can easily flow in by rotating forward. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game balls cannot win the normal variable winning device 37.例文帳に追加When the game ball wins the starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, a special figure variable display game is executed as an auxiliary game. A game ball is more likely to enter the start winning hole 36 when hitting to the left, and a game ball is more likely to enter the normal variable winning device 37 when hitting to the right.

The movable member 37b is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory, and operates via a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal pattern variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. It opens and changes to an open state (win easy state advantageous to the player) in which game balls tend to flow into the normal variable winning device 37.例文帳に追加If the movable member 37b is not in the open state (easy winning state),
A closed state (non-easy-winning state, difficult-to-win state) in which game balls are difficult to flow into the normal variable winning device 37 is established. In addition, in the present embodiment, the starting winning port 36 differs from the normal variable winning device 37,
It does not have a movable member (opening/closing member) and is always in an open state (open state), but a configuration having a movable member (opening/closing member) is also possible.

The movable member 37b is controlled by a game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 shortens the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game or makes the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game higher than usual, thereby increasing the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state, or special games. By making the occurrence time of the easy-to-win state longer than the easy-to-win state generated in the normal game state in which the game is not performed, the time-saving state (general electric support state) is generated as the above-mentioned specific game state. In addition, even in the probability variable state (excluding the latent probability variable state), a time-saving state (general electric support state) occurs in duplicate.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the start winning opening 36, there is a lower big winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3)
A first special variable prize winning device 38 (special electric accessory) having an attacker type open/close door 38c that opens a lower prize winning opening by retracting from the front to the back side is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the state in which the large winning port is closed (closed state unfavorable to the player) to an open state (game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variable display game. By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the big winning hole, the player is given a predetermined game value (for example, prize balls or the number of reduced time/variable number of times after the end of the big win). A lower special winning opening switch 38a (count switch) is provided in the lower special winning opening as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. It should be noted that the first special variable prize winning device 38 makes it easier for a game ball to win a prize when hitting to the right.

In the game area 32 above the normal variable winning device 37, there is an upper big winning opening solenoid 39b (Fig. 3
), there is provided a second special variable winning device 39 having an opening/closing door 39c that opens the upper big winning opening by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the right. Second special variable winning device 39
, depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the state of closing the big prize hole (disadvantageous closed state for the player) is changed to the open state (advantageous special game state for the player), and the game ball into the big prize hole By facilitating the inflow of the game, the player is given a predetermined game value (for example, the number of prize balls or the number of time reduction/variable number of times after the end of the big hit). An upper special winning opening switch 39a (count switch) (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the special winning opening as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. It should be noted that the second special variable winning device 39 makes it easier for the game ball to win when hitting to the right. Also, the lower special winning opening switch 38a and the upper special winning opening switch 39a are collectively referred to as a special winning opening switch 43.

A specific area 86 (so-called V winning opening) is provided inside the second special variable winning device 39 . When the game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning opening) after the open/close door 39c is opened by the small win, the big win is decided. The specific area 86 may be opened for a long time only during a small hit so that the game ball can easily pass through. In addition, the game control device 100
Passage of the game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning) can be detected via a sensor (specific area switch 72 described later) or the like. Information indicating that there was a V prize (specified region passing command, etc.) is transmitted to the effect control device 300, which will be described later. Then, the effect control device 300 can notify V winning on the display device 41 or the like.

That is, in the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine (1+2 type machine). In this embodiment, by opening the second special variable winning device 39 with a small hit, the second
A game ball V wins in a specific area 86 (V winning opening) in the special variable winning device 39, and a big hit occurs.

General winning gate 35, starting winning gate 36, normal variable winning device 37, and special variable winning device 38
, 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges the number of prize balls from the payout device to the upper tray 21 according to the type of the winning prize opening. In addition, the lower game area 32 is provided with an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize such as a prize winning port. In addition, the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39, and their vicinity are provided with LEDs (board decoration device to be described later) that can emit light when a game ball wins. 46) are provided.

In addition, outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a, a special figure variation display game (a special figure 1 variation display game, a special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 configured from LED lamps (light emitting units, light emitting members) and displaying information such as the current game state.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure variation display unit 51 (special figure 1 indicator, lamp D1) and a second special figure variation for a variation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) Display unit 52 (special figure 2 indicator, lamp D2), variation display unit 53 for normal figure variation display game (normal figure indicator, lamps D8, D10, D18), and start (hold) of each variation display game Storage display unit for notifying the number of memories (special figure 1 reservation indicator 54, special figure 2 reservation indicator 55, general figure reservation indicator 56
) and The special figure 1 reservation indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12.
Special figure 2 reservation indicator 55 is configured by lamps D13 and D14. Normal map holding display 56
is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

In addition, the collective display device 50 has a first game state display unit 57 (first game state display, lamp D7),
A second game state display unit 58 (second game state indicator, lamp D17) that lights up when a time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time saving state, and when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the probability state of a big hit becomes a high probability state. 3rd game state display unit 59 (third game state display unit, probability state display unit, lamp D9) for displaying that the game is on, and the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of times the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are opened and closed) is displayed. A round display portion 60 (lamps D3-D6) is provided.

In the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 are not limited to such segment type display units,
It may be composed of an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, and when executing a variable display, all LEDs provided as indicators may be all lit and all extinguished (simultaneous blinking of all LEDs), or cyclic lighting (any One LED may be turned on and off in a predetermined order every predetermined time), or a predetermined number of LEDs out of a plurality of LEDs may be lit and extinguished (blinking) or cyclically lit. Also in the normal figure display device 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. In addition, the normal figure indicator 53 is also the special figure 1 indicator 5
1. It is possible to configure appropriately in the same manner as the special figure 2 display 52.

Lamp display device 80, the lamp display units 1, 2 (LED) to perform a variable display (blinking) that repeats lighting display and extinguished display as symbols (fourth special symbol, fourth symbol to be described later), and each special figure variation It has a lamp display section 3-6 (LED) for notifying the number of start (hold) memories of the display game. Note that the lamp display device 80 is controlled by an effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (milliseconds)) as a variable display. In other words, switching between turning off and lighting on the lamp display units 1 and 2 takes 2 cycles of the flashing cycle.
It is performed in a period of 1/(eg, 100 msec). The game control device 1
00, the fluctuation time of the lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80 is measured by the production control device 300 (described later).

Lamp display units 3 and 4 (special figure 1 reserved LED 1, special figure 1 reserved LED 2) display the special figure 1 reserved number (first start memory number) by a combination of off state, lighting state, and blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special figure 2 pending LED1, special figure 2 pending LED2) display the special figure 2 pending number (second start memory number) by a combination of off state, lit state, and blinking state do. The lamp display unit 3-6 terminates the display of the number of reservations due to the occurrence of a big hit, but in cases other than the state of the big hit (including the case where a reach, which will be described later, occurs on the display device 41), the display of the number of reservations is displayed. conduct.

Next, details of the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the normal figure variation display game, and the special figure variation display game will be described.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by shooting game balls toward the game area 32 from a ball shooting device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstructing nails, windmills, etc. arranged at various places in the game area 32, and enters a normal figure start gate 34, a general prize winning opening 35, and a starting winning opening. 36, win or enter the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38, 39, or the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32
and discharged from the game area 32 . When game balls enter the general winning port 35, the starting winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning devices 38, 39, the number of prize balls according to the type of the winning winning port is sent to the payout device. It is discharged to the upper tray 21 through.

The normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 . When the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal pattern variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the hit determination random number value extracted at this time.

A state where the normal pattern fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal pattern fluctuation display game has already been played and the normal pattern fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit. When the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, if the normal pattern start memory number (normal pattern reservation number) is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is added ( +1).

The normal pattern start memory (normal pattern suspension) stores a hit judgment random value for determining the hit or miss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and when this hit judgment random value matches the judgment value, A specific result mode (specific result) is derived by winning the normal pattern variation display game.

The normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed by the normal pattern display device 53 provided in the collective display device 50 . The normal figure display 53 is composed of an LED that indicates a hit in the case of a lit state as normal identification information (normal figure), and indicates a deviation in the case of an off state. After a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the normal pattern random number value extracted when passing the normal pattern starting gate 34 is a winning value, the normal pattern (normal pattern) displayed on the normal pattern display device 53 stops in a winning state and becomes a winning state. At this time,
By driving the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted to an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds×2 times), and the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 is prevented. Permissible.

Winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and winning to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The game ball that has won the start prize opening 36 is detected as the start prize ball of the special figure 1 variable display game,
The game balls that have won the normal variable winning device 37 are detected as starting winning balls of the special figure 2 variable display game, and are stored up to the predetermined upper limit.

At the time of detection of the starting prize ball of the special figure variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit pattern random number value, each variation pattern random number value, etc. are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as special figure start winning memory for each predetermined number of times (for example, up to 8 times). The number of memories of the special figure start winning memory is displayed on the special figure 1 reservation display 54 and the special figure 2 reservation display 55 for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50, and the display device 4
1 is also displayed on the display screen.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 indicator 51 based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory (special figure 1 start memory, special figure 1 reservation). . In addition, the game control device 100, based on the winning prize to the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory, special figure 2 reservation), the special figure 2 variable display game with the special figure 2 indicator 52 to run.

The special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) and special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) are identified by the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 ( It is performed by stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode after variably displaying special symbols, special symbols).

Also, in the display device 41, a decorative special figure variation display game is executed in which a plurality of types of identification information (eg, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special figure variation display game.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbols (identification information) composed of the numbers etc. described above are left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol ), the variable display (scroll display) is started in order, and after a predetermined time, the varying symbols are sequentially stopped, and the results of the special figure variation display game are displayed. In addition, the display device 41 performs various presentation displays such as the appearance of a character to enhance interest. Furthermore, in the decorative special symbol variation display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), in the lamp display parts 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80, the fourth special symbol ( 4th pattern) fluctuates. After a predetermined time from the start, the variable display of the lamp display parts 1 and 2 stops with "lights out" in the case of a loss, and "lights up" in the case of a big hit or a small hit.

When the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is a big hit value), as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display pattern, and the jackpot state (
special game state). In response to this, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, the special variable winning device 38, 39 is the big winning opening solenoid (38b, 39b) (
3), the large winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). In other words, the special variable winning device 38, 39 is provided with a large winning opening that opens wide for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls win, during which time the player can win a large number of game balls. Granted.

When the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is a small winning value), a special figure fluctuation display game As a result, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived by the display pattern, and a small win state is entered. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a small hit result mode. In addition, in this embodiment, although a big hit random number value is used also for determination of a small hit, a small hit value (small hit determination value) differs from a big hit value (big hit determination value).

At this time, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are operated by the big winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b (Fig. 3).
), the large winning opening is changed from closed to open for a predetermined short period of time.
In addition, since the total opening time of the big winning opening is shorter in the small winning state (small winning game state) than in the big winning state (special game state), the game in which the player can win more in the small winning state than in the big winning state The value (the number of acquired balls) is small. In both the small winning state and the big winning state, the big winning opening is opened, but the big winning state may be called the first special game state, and the small winning state may be called the second special game state. For simplicity, in this embodiment, the special variable winning device 39 (
Only the upper big winning opening) is converted to the open state, and only the special variable winning device 38 (lower big winning opening) is converted to the open state in the big winning state (including the big winning state due to the V winning during the small winning). explain.

Here, the difference between the big win and the small win will be explained.

A big win is a special result that involves the operation of a conditional device, and a small win is a specific result that does not involve the operation of a conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). It means that a specific flag is set for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38,39. In addition, when the condition device operates, the specific area 86
It may mean that there was a game ball passing through (V winning). The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set, as in the case of simply winning a small prize lottery. However, as will be described later in this embodiment, if there is a V prize during the small hit state, the conditional device is activated. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, the "condition device" is
It is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and is also used in this specification as a term with the same meaning. ing.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. is released.

In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be configured as separate indicators or may be configured as the same indicator, but each special figure variation display game is not executed at the same time. is set to In addition, the special figure 2 variation display game is to be executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, and there is a start memory of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, When the execution of the figure variation display game becomes possible, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (special figure 2 pending priority digestion, special figure 2 priority variation).

Regarding the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be executed on separate display devices or separate display areas, or the same display may be performed. You may make it perform by a device or a display area. In this case, the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may not be executed at the same time.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variation display game.

Also, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36 in the starting winning port 36
a, The starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switches (38a, 39a) in the normal variable prize winning device 37 are provided with coils for magnetic detection, and when metal approaches the coils, a magnetic field is generated. A non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball using a changing phenomenon is used. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the game machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 etc. A microswitch with positive contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. As shown in FIG. The game machine 10 is a game control device 10
0 (main board), the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in general, and has a CPU section having a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. 110, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port and a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU section 110, the input section 120 and the output section 130, and the like.

The CPU unit 110 is a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, and an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating an operating clock for the CPU, a timer interrupt, a reference clock for the random number generation circuit, and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as V, is supplied and enabled.

The power supply device 400 includes an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as 12V or 5V from a voltage of 32V DC, and a normal power supply unit 410. , gaming microcomputer 11
It has a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 1 at the time of power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and control signals such as power failure monitoring signals and reset signals that inform the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery. and a control signal generator 430 for generating and outputting the .

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be configured to be provided on a separate substrate or integrally with the game control device 100, that is, on the main substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 43 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment.
By providing 0, the cost can be reduced by excluding it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the gaming microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data is supplied to the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is turned off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . RAM
When the initialization switch 112 is pressed and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated,
Based on this, the RAM 111c in the game microcomputer 111 and the RA in the payout control device 200
A process of forcibly initializing the information stored in M is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is the game microcomputer 1
It is read repeatedly in the main loop of the main program executed by 11. A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

Also, the game control device 100 (main board) is provided with a setting key switch 93 . When the setting key switch 93 is turned on by an operator's rotating operation or the like, the probability setting value (setting value) corresponding to the setting regarding the game condition (game) can be changed. The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a set value change switch that can change the probability set value according to the operator's operation. In this embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting the winning probability such as the probability of a big hit or the probability of a small hit, but other game conditions (such as effects) other than the probability are also changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible. For example, the winning probability may be increased as the probability setting value is increased. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are used for setting (
setting change means (setting change device 42, setting means) capable of changing the probability setting value). Instead of the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the set value change switch, or a unique set value change switch may be provided exclusively.

The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are arranged on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10 so that they cannot be operated (positions inaccessible) unless the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened. be done. That is, general players cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 .

As will be described later, when the game machine 10 is turned on (recovery from power failure, power recovery), the game machine 10 sets the probability setting value according to the ON/OFF states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to transition to various states such as a changeable (settable) setting variable state (setting change state, settable state, setting change mode) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which probability set values can be confirmed. .

In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is defined, for example, in six stages, and probability setting value 1 (setting 1
), probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5), and probability setting value 6 (setting 6). In general, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player and setting 6 is the most favorable setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the working setting value (setting) in the working setting value area is changed to the setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1).
→ setting value 1 (setting 2, probability setting value 2) → setting value 2 (setting 3, probability setting value 3) → setting value 3 (
Setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5) → setting value 5 (setting 6, probability setting value 6) → setting value 0 (setting 1) → setting value 1 (setting 2) → It is changed as follows. Thus, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a set value change switch. For the convenience of explanation, work set values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to probability set values 1 to 6, respectively, in the setting change state (setting change mode), but the work set values and probability set values are the same. They may be treated as the same by aligning them to a numerical range (ie, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (making the working set value and the probability set value the same numerical value).

Instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value change switch), the setting key switch 93 may be rotated to a predetermined position to change the probability setting value. Moreover, the probability setting value is not limited to six stages. The performance display device 152, which is a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot Dp) display, displays the probability setting values for display corresponding to the selected working setting values 0 to 5, for example. etc. In addition, on the front surface of the gaming machine (eg, all-in-one display device 50), information on set values such as probability set values for display (for example, display for reading probability set values 1 to 6) may be displayed. In addition, on the front of the game machine (for example, the collective display device 50), not only during the setting variable state and the setting confirmation state, but also during execution of game control (during execution of game processing described later), the probability setting value for display, etc. Information about setting values may be displayed.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b and an RA that can be read and written at any time
M (random access memory) 111c.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores constant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control. The RAM 111c is used as a work area for the CPU 111a during game control and as a storage area for various signals and random numbers. can be held and stored. An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or RAM 111c.

Further, the ROM 111b stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. A game state (special game state) in which the game state is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached.
In the gaming machine 10, at a stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed
A display state in which a display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for becoming a special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same identification information This state (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the ready-to-win state.

The ready-to-win state includes a plurality of ready-to-win effects, and normal reach (N reach), normal reach (N reach), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP
2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach.
The degree of expectation (expected value) of the big hit increases in the order of no reach<normal reach<special 1 reach<special 2 reach<special 3 reach<premier reach. Also, the ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when the game becomes a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is lost). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state has occurred is a state with a high possibility of winning a big hit compared to the case in which the ready-to-win state has not occurred.

In addition, the expectation of the production (notice) suggests the probability of a big hit when the production is selected, the selection rate of the production when it is a big hit, and the production when it is not a big hit (when it is lost). It can be calculated based on the selectivity or the like.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or to generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining a jackpot pattern, and a small hit pattern for determining a small hit pattern. Design random number, design random number per sapo for determining the later time-saving design (stop design per sapo),
A random number generation circuit for generating a variation pattern random number, etc. for determining the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (including the execution time of the variation display game in various reach and non-reach variation displays), and an oscillation circuit CPU 1 based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from 113
11a is provided with a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) and a clock for updating the random number generation circuit.

In addition, the CPU 111a uses the ROM 111b in processing related to the special figure variation display game.
Any one variation pattern table is acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the . Specifically, the CPU 111a, the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game (big hit or lose), the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the number of starting memories Any one variation pattern table is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the above. Here, the CPU 11
1a constitutes variation distribution information acquiring means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in ROM 111b when executing a special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to produce a prize ball. control to pay out
Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a gate switch 34a of the normal figure start gate 34, and a start port 1 in the first start winning port 36. Switch 36a, starter 2 switch 37a in second starter winning port 37 (normal variable winning device), winning port switch 35a of general winning port 35, special variable winning device 38
, 39 big winning opening switch 43 (lower big winning opening switch 38a, upper big winning opening switch 39a
), and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V.
, and is provided with an interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 that converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72 , the remaining ball outlet switch 73 and the out ball detection switch 74 . Specific area switch 72
detects the passage of the game ball (V winning) to the specific area 86 (V winning opening). The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 detects game balls passing through the remaining ball discharge port for discharging game balls from the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 . The out ball detection switch 74 detects all game balls that have been shot into the game area and finished playing (that is, all game balls that have passed through the winning opening or the out opening 30b).

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126 and read into the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the prize winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 43 are input to the third input port 124. .

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the second input port 123 .

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the specific area switch 72 , the remaining ball outlet switch 73 , or the out ball detection switch 74 is input to the fourth input port 126 .

Further, the second input port 123 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, and the glass frame opening detection signal provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. Switch 63, a signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), etc., vibration sensor 6 for detecting vibration of game machine 10
5 is input.

Also, the second input port 123 takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 .

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 through the relay board 70 to a test fire test device (not shown). Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the third input port 124 is processed by the enable signal CE when the gaming microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the third input port 124.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changed to valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122, which will be described later.

In addition, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating payout abnormality, a shoot ball cut switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. Overflow switch signal, touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, RAM initialization switch 1
A first input port 122 is provided for taking in a signal from 12 and supplying it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via a data bus 140 . The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that the lower tray 23 is filled with a predetermined amount or more of game balls (that the tray is full). The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal that is output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (body frame). This is a signal indicating whether or not

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from
A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST noise-removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111, and the output section 13
0 to each port. In addition, by outputting the reset signal RST directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output section 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as

Also, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RST is applied to the ports 122 and 123 of the input section 120.
, 124. The data set to each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a trial firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be directly supplied to the test-firing test device, are temporarily taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that it is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. there is The game microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
A chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and signals of ports selectively controlled by the signal CE are supplied to the test-firing apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (general electric solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 for opening the normal variable winning device 37, and a lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (large winning opening) for opening the first special variable winning device 38. Solenoid 1), an upper large winning opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid 2) that opens the second special variable winning device 39, and a lever solenoid 86b that operates a lever and opens a specific area 86 for outputting open/close data. Two output ports 134 are provided.

The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . ON/ON of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting OFF data.

The output unit 130 also includes a sixth output port 141 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the performance display device 152, the performance display device 152, and the performance display device 152. A seventh output port 142 is provided for outputting on/off data for the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Also, the output unit 130 outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71 .
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game parlor, so that information on the game machine 10 can be sent to an external device. It is ready to be fed to the device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, the output unit 130 includes a general-purpose solenoid 37 output from a second output port 134.
A first driver (driving circuit) 138a that receives an opening/closing data signal for the big winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, etc., generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal, and a current supply for the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135. A second driver 138b for outputting an on/off drive signal for the segment line on the side, and a third driver for outputting an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136. 138c and a fourth driver 138d for outputting to the external information terminal 71 an external information signal to be supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device.

Further, the performance display device 152 output from the sixth output port 141 is connected to the output unit 130 .
performance display segment driver 150a for outputting an on/off drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side, and an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current sink side of the performance display device 152 output from the seventh output port 142. A performance display digit driver 150b for output is provided.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Also, the collective display device 50
DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential extracts current from the cathode terminal through a digit line, thereby forming a collective display device. At 50, the power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected by the dynamic driving method to light them. A performance display segment driver 150a that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a performance display digit driver 150b that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through a digit line. In the performance display device 152, the LEDs sequentially selected by the dynamic driving method are supplied with the power supply voltage and lit. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, is supplied with DC 12V to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134,
The first driver 138a and the like may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500 . photocoupler 13
9 is configured to allow two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. It should be noted that since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using a serial communication terminal of the game microcomputer 111 as in a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

In this embodiment, the performance display device 152 includes a plurality (four) of 7-segment type (dot Dp
including 8 segment type) indicator (LED lamp), performance display driver 1
Although 50a and 150b are LED drivers, they are not limited to these.

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board).
It may be provided in other places. For example, the performance display device 152 can display a display probability set value, a role ratio, a ball output rate, and the number of discharged balls.

Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also called the number of out balls).
is the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the winning hole (the number of winning prizes) and the number of game balls that have passed through the out hole 30b. The number of ejected balls is counted by counting the signal of the out ball detection switch 74 etc.
can be obtained by In this embodiment, the winning openings include a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal variable winning opening 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2
), and special variable winning devices 38 and 39 (large winning openings).

The ball output rate is the ratio (percentage) of the total number of prize balls to the number of discharged balls (or the number of fired balls introduced into the game area 32), which is (number of acquired balls / number of discharged balls) x 100 (%). is calculated by That is, the ball output rate is the number of winning balls (total number of prize balls) per 100 discharged balls.

For example, the role ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by entering a prize slot for a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present). It is the ratio (%) (=so-called continuous role ratio) of the number of prize balls (number of winning balls by role) obtained by winning the big prize mouth. In addition, the role ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big win state and the small win state) obtained by winning the big prize hole out of the total number of prize balls (= big prize hole ratio). , or the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the big winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning opening) (= the so-called role ratio (total role ratio )).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 also has a function of a safety device. The safety device is a special figure fluctuation display game, a normal figure fluctuation display game, and a round game (during a big hit or a small hit) as a game, depending on the establishment of operating conditions (predetermined conditions) based on the number of safe balls and the number of discharged balls. A game) is a game stop means (stop means) capable of generating a game stop state (game disabled state, game prohibited state) in which the game) cannot be executed. In the game stop state, a new special figure variation display game and a new normal figure variation display game cannot be started. With the safety device, it is possible to appropriately take countermeasures against fraud when the number of safe balls is abnormally high due to fraud, and it is also possible to suppress the player's addiction to the game. If the immersion is suppressed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In this embodiment, the safety device is software (program) in the game control device 100
It is also called a complete function (or an ending function or a stop function). Of course, the safety device may be provided as hardware such as an electric circuit or a circuit board.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation conditions of the safety device are as follows: (1) the number of difference balls, which indicates the difference between the number of safe balls and the number of discharged balls, has reached the difference reference value (predetermined value); ) It is neither a big hit nor a small hit. The number of difference balls is obtained by subtracting the number of discharge balls from the number of safe balls (number of difference balls = number of safe balls - number of discharge balls). In this way, the operating conditions of the safety device are two-stage conditions (1)
(2). The number of difference balls related to condition (1) is, as mainly described in this embodiment, simply the difference between the number of safe balls and the number of discharge balls from the time of power-on to the present, with the time of power-on being zero. OK. However, the number of difference balls for condition (1) is the number of difference balls in a predetermined period from the time of the lowest value of the number of difference balls to the present, that is, the number of difference balls based on the lowest value (the number of difference balls increased from the increase in number), and may correspond to the maximum increase in the number of difference balls (so-called MY) in a day's sales. Also, other operating conditions may be used. For example, condition (1) may be configured such that the number of safe balls reaches a predetermined value. Further, the condition (2) can be configured such that the special variable prize winning device is not in operation or the big prize winning opening is not in an open state.

In this embodiment, the number of safe balls is set for a predetermined period (for example, the period from power-on to the present)
It is the total number of prize balls determined to be paid out (number of winning balls, balls paid out). If there is an error in the payout of prize balls (game balls), the total number of prize balls determined to be paid out is equal to the total number of prize balls actually paid out to the upper tray 21 via the payout device. However, the total number of prize balls actually paid out may be measured by a detection switch or the like and used as the number of safe balls. The number of discharged balls (number of out balls) is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 in a predetermined period, and can be counted by counting the signal from the out ball detection switch 74 .

Instead of the number of ejected balls, the number of shot balls that are shot and introduced into the game area 32 may be used, and the number of difference balls may be the number of safe balls - the number of shot balls. The number of game balls launched and the number of discharged balls may be collectively called the number of used balls (the number of difference balls = the number of safe balls - the number of used balls). From the number of shot balls, the foul balls that were shot by the ball shooting device but did not reach the game area 32 are excluded. If one ball is produced, +1 will be added. A detection switch (detection sensor) for counting the number of shot balls may be provided near the entrance of the game balls to the game area 32 , that is, near the upper end of the guide passage for the shot game balls on the game board 30 .

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the production control device 300 (sub board) will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 4
2 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10. FIG.

The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output in order to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19 .

The main control microcomputer 311 stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321 consisting of a ROM (programmable read only memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe that can retain memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power failure.
A RAM 323 is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that forms a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year/month/day, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 .

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111 , determines display content, instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video, and controls the sound source LSI 314
It performs processing such as instructing playback sound to, lighting decorative lamps, driving control of motors and solenoids, and managing performance time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From VDP 312 to main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of display device 41 with lighting of decoration lamps provided on glass frame 15 and game board 30 is transmitted.
C. Synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. Note that VDP312
to the main control microcomputer 311. Interrupt signals INT0 to n to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM and a wait to notify that it is waiting for reception of commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . Also, an interrupt signal INT is sent from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
is entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Command I/F3
Via 31, received decoration special figure pending number command, decoration special figure command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from game control device 100 to production control device 300 as production control command signal (production command). . The game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 is DC5
Since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40).
A board production movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling a movable accessory that enhances the production effect in cooperation with the production display in the game. Note that the board decoration device 46 includes the lamp display device 8 described above.
0 may be included.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device (for example, a top unit) such as a motor (such as a motor for moving the top unit) provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 includes a production button switch 25a built in the production button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the production button 25, a cross key switch 450, and a volume control device. button switches 451a and 451b, and the on/off state of the effect accessory switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, and input the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311; A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of a volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is the effect control device 300 having the configuration as described above.
32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs, 32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, and 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs. DC5, which is the power supply voltage of the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC 15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers.

Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC- A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300 . In addition, DC-
A DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314
, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a cooling FA for cooling various parts of the game machine 10
N45 is connected, and cooling FAN45 drives in the state where the power supply of production control device 300 was turned on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. Game control device 1
The CPU 111a of the 00 game microcomputer 111 extracts a random value for determining a hit in a normal game based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal game starting gate 34, and stores it in the ROM 111b. It is compared with the judgment value that is set, and the hit or miss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is judged.

Then, after the identification symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined period of time on the normal pattern display device 53, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is displayed in a stopped manner. When the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the normal pattern display device 53, the general electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is held for a predetermined time (for example, , 3 seconds x 2 times) Control to open is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, the normal pattern display device 53 is controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, the starting winning prize (starting memory) is stored, and based on the starting memory, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game big hit determination The random number for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit or miss of the special figure 1 variable display game.

In addition, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, the start memory is stored, and based on the start memory, the random value for judging the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit or miss of the special figure 2 variation display game.

And CPU111a of the game control apparatus 100 outputs the control signal (production|presentation control command) containing the determination result of a special figure 1 fluctuation display game and a special figure 2 fluctuation display game to the production|presentation control apparatus 300. FIG. Then, after the identification symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, a special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37). form.

Also, the effect control device 300 displays a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100 . Furthermore, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling effects related to games (such as variable display games).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, and generates a special game state. Let In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a
For example, the opening/closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 is opened by the large winning opening solenoid 39b, and control is performed to enable the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening.

Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses after the opening of the big winning opening. 1 round (R) is to open the big winning opening until the condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) control (cycle game) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times). I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening/closing control means for controlling opening and closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost, the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high-probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (variable state) is
It is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the normal probability state. In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result mode of any special figure variation display game of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game Both are high probability states.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, control may be performed to put the normal figure fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 in the time saving operation state, and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 3 per unit time is higher than the normal game state in which no special game is performed.
In order to control the opening time of 7 to be substantially longer, it will be in the general electricity support state. In addition,
Even in a high-probability state (normal probability state) except for the latent probability state, it will be duplicated in a time-saving state and the general electricity support will be performed.

In addition, in the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure variation display game (special figure variation time) can be shortened more than usual, and the time shortening variation of the special figure variation display game can also be executed.

In addition, in the time saving state, the number of openings of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 (the number of openings of the general electric power) is greater than the first number of openings (for example, 2 times) for one hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second number of openings to (eg, 4 times). In addition, in the time saving state, the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability, normal pattern hit probability) is set to a high probability higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state. is possible.

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the open state by changing one or more of the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal pattern stop time, the normal pattern open number of times, the normal pattern open time, and the normal pattern probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, it is easier to win prizes in the normal variable prize winning device 37 than in the normal game state in which special games are not performed, and the number of times the special figure variable display game is executed per unit time is higher than in the normal game state. Can be increased. Also,
It is also possible to set multiple types of time-saving states with different things to change. Also, it may be set so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operation state (normal pattern probability is 0). Alternatively, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected when a win is achieved. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Also, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

[Transitional state at power-on]
As described above, it shifts to four states (modes) depending on the ON/OFF states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on.

When the power is turned on, if the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on, the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed (settable) (setting change state, settable state). state, setting change mode) (see A1030-A1039 in FIG. 5B and FIG. 15).

Next, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed is entered (Fig. 5B A1034-A1039 and FIG. 15).

When the power is turned on, although the setting key switch 93 is off, the RAM initialization switch 11
2 is turned on, transition to the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode);
AM initialization processing (RAM clearing processing) is executed to initialize the RAM 111c (see A1045-A1047 in FIG. 5B).

If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode) is entered and the power is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 is mainly shown in FIGS. 5A, 5B, and 5.
It consists of main processing shown in C and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be explained. 5A, 5B, and 5C show the game control device 100
3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of main processing by . Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In addition, in the flowchart of the processing executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "A****".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Furthermore, a stack pointer setting process is executed to set a stack pointer, which is the top address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Subsequently, the register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, if the RAM address ranges from 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a signal for prohibiting the firing and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). When at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal for prohibiting the shooting, the shooting permission signal is set to a prohibited state, and the shooting of game balls from the ball shooting device is prohibited. ing. After that, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). Namely
Signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets a power delay timer (A1007). A game control device 1 serving as main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in a power delay timer
00 to perform various controls according to the instructions from the sub-control means (e.g., payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) to wait until the program is normally started (e.g., 3
seconds) is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and the sub-control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 3
00 etc.) for setting a predetermined waiting time for waiting for activation.

In addition, the power supply delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area,
Since it is not necessary to perform calculation while excluding the AM region, it is possible to prevent the control from becoming complicated when the power is turned on.

By reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the standby time starts, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the standby time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the power is turned on. It is necessary to keep operating the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 until the waiting time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, even without performing such troublesome operations, a situation in which the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 performed when the power is turned on can be prevented. can be prevented.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes the timing of the waiting time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the waiting time (from A1008 to A
1010).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus, and determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. (A1008). If a power failure occurs (the result of A1008 is "Y"), wait until the game machine is powered off.

If the game control device 100 does not have a power failure (result of A1008 is "N")
, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (A1009), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer is 0 (A1010). If the timer value is not 0 (the result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with troubles at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1010 is "Y"), the game control device 100
), that is, when the standby time is over, access to a readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (A1011), and off data is output to all output ports (no output state). (A1012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1013 ).

Next, the game control device 100 generates a CTC (Counter/Timer C) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
ircuit) Activate the circuit (A1014). Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a CP based on the frequency-divided signal.
For U111a, there is provided a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that provides a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a random number update trigger that is supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Then, the game control device 100, RAM (here RAM111c) indicating the abnormality of RA
The M abnormality flag is set (A1015). Here, a flag indicating an anomaly is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016). And if it is normal (A101
6 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017).

Furthermore, the game control device 100, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (result of A1017 is "Y"), checksum calculation to calculate the checksum of a predetermined area (for example, work area in the area) in the RWM The process is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum at power-off (A1019). If the checksums match (the result of A1019 is "Y"), the RAM is normal, and the RAM abnormality flag indicating RAM abnormality is cleared (A1020). After that, the process proceeds to step A1021.

In addition, the game control device 100, if it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is "N", or the result of A1017 is "N"), if the checksum does not match (the result of A1019 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1021 without clearing the RAM abnormality flag.

Next, the game control device 100 uses the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112
are on (A1021). When both switches are on (result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 shifts to the variable setting state (setting change mode), and executes the process during probability setting change in steps A1030-A1040. .

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), the game control device 100 resets the RAM (RAM
111c) is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag indicating the abnormality is set (A102).
2). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (result of A1023 is "N"), step A103
4-A1040 probability setting confirmation process (setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode), RAM initialization process (RAM clear process) of steps A1044-A1047, or step A
1044, A1048 to A1051 are executed at the time of normal power-on (power recovery).

Game control device 100, when the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023
result is "Y"), a command of main abnormality error notification for notifying that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board, main board) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024)
. The effect control device 300 that has received the command of the main abnormality error notification is the game control device 10
0 anomaly is reported.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 controls the driver 15 of the performance display device 152 to display the 7-segment display data (error display data of "E1") at the time of game stop on the performance display device 152.
Output to 0a and 150b (A1025). Then, ON data of a security signal for notifying the abnormality to an external device (playground internal management device (hall computer), information collecting terminal, etc.) is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, even if the information about the big win remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the big win signal are kept off. After that, the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated to wait, and the setting change operation (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 1) is performed again.
12) and wait for the power to be turned on. It should be noted that, while waiting to repeat the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 and waiting, the interrupt remains prohibited (A1001), timer interrupt processing that can execute special figure 1, 2 game processing and general figure game processing (FIG. 9) cannot be executed, games (special figure fluctuation display game, normal figure fluctuation display game, round game, etc.) cannot be executed.

In this way, setting change operations (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112
If the probability setting changing flag is set even though the two ON operations are not executed, it is assumed that there is an abnormality, and the processing of A1024 to A1026 is executed. For example, if the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting change operation is not performed. be.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, even when the RAM abnormality flag is set (A102
The result of 2 is "Y"), the main abnormality error notification command for notifying that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024), and the 7 segments when the game is stopped. Display data (“E1” error display data) is output to the drivers 150a and 150b of the performance display device 152 (A1025). Output (A1026). It should be noted that, in the same manner as described above, even if the information about the big win remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the big win signal are kept off.

After that, it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1027), and if a power failure has not occurred (the result of A1027 is "N"), the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated to wait. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred (the result of A1027 is "Y"),
Off data is output to all output ports (A1028), and access to read/write memory (RWM) such as RAM and EEPROM is prohibited (A1029). After that, it waits until the game machine is powered off.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (during the variable setting state). First, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1030). If the RAM error flag is set (the result of A1030 is "Y
”), since it is unclear whether the probability setting value is correct, the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c is cleared to the initial value (for example, the minimum setting value “1”) (A1031 ), set the probability setting changing flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed (
A1032). If the RAM error flag is not set (the result of A1030 is "N
”), the probability setting value is not cleared, and the probability setting changing flag is set (A1032).
Next, a command during probability setting change is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1
033), the process proceeds to step A1037. In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the command of changing the probability setting notifies the fact that the probability setting is being changed on the display device 41 or the like.

In the game control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), and the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"). ), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1034). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1034 is "Y"), the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, and the probability setting confirming (setting confirming state) process starts. A probability setting confirming flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (A1035). Then, the production control device 30
0 (effect control board) (A1036), and proceeds to the processing of step A1037. In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the command of changing the probability setting informs that the probability setting is being confirmed on the display device 41 or the like.

After step A1033 or step A1036, the game control device 100 executes the processing from step A1037 to A1043 as common processing during probability setting change and during probability setting confirmation.

The game control device 100 first saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output the security signal during probability setting change and probability setting confirmation (A1037). The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change/confirmation process (FIG. 15) described later. The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the external information editing process (A1319). The security signal is output for at least 50 ms during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation.

Next, the game control device 100 permits interruption (A1038). As a result, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) can be executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A1039). If the setting key switch 93 is ON (the result of A1039 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1040). If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1040 is "N"), the process returns to step A1039. on the other hand,
If a power failure has occurred (the result of A1040 is "Y"), steps A1063-A10
69 is executed when a power failure occurs.

In this way, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and no power failure has occurred, the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed, or the probability setting value can be confirmed. The setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is continued.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the setting key switch 93 is off (A1039
result is "Y"), interrupt is prohibited (A1041), and a command for ending notification is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1042). In addition, the effect|presentation control apparatus 300 which received the command of the information completion|finish complete|finishes the information that it is during probability setting confirmation or probability setting change.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether or not the probability setting is being changed (A1043). If the probability setting changing flag is set (result of A1043 is "Y"), that is, if the probability setting has been changed so far, RAM initialization processing (described later) of steps A1045 to A1047 is executed. do. On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1043 is "N"), that is, if the probability setting has been confirmed until now, when the power is turned on after step A1048 (when the power is restored) normal processing.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1034 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (A1044).
. When RAM initialization switch 112 is on (result of A1044 is "Y"), RA
In M111c, the RAM area other than the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value is set to 0.
Clear (A1045). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0, except for the probability set values stored in the probability set value area. Here, the aforementioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared here. Also, the obtained game ball number area for storing the obtained game ball number which is the number (total) of prize balls obtained within a predetermined time period (here, within one timer interrupt) is cleared to zero. Then, the safety device operating flag area storing the safety device operating flag indicating whether the safety device (described above) is operating is cleared to 0 (safety device operating flag = 0), and the safety device is operating. be released. In step A1045, whether the RAM is cleared with setting change (if the result of A1043 is "Y") or the RAM is cleared without setting change (if the result of A1044 is "Y"), the Although the operation of the safety device is canceled by clearing the device operation flag area to 0, the operation of the safety device may be canceled only in one case. That is, there may be a case where the safety device operating flag area is not cleared to 0 when the RAM is cleared in step A1045.

Also, in addition to the probability setting value area, a configuration that does not clear the stack area and unused area, and a work area for performance display related to performance information and its display (performance display) (a part of the work area outside the area) ) and stack area (outside stack area) do not need to be cleared. The performance information is derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning. be.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1046). And, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to production control device 300 (production control board) (A1047), it moves to the processing of step A1052. Areas not cleared to 0 in step A1045 are excluded from the areas to be initialized.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (A1
044 result is "N"), the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are both off, so normal power-on processing (when power is restored from a power failure) is started, and power failure recovery processing is performed. Save the initial value at the time of power failure recovery (when power is restored) in the area to be initialized (A104
8). Areas to be initialized here include power failure inspection area 1, power failure inspection area 2, and checksum area of the intra-area work area (FIG. 6). In addition, since all errors are re-monitored when the power is turned on normally, the area to be initialized is the area related to error or error monitoring (test signal output data area, etc.). In addition, the aforementioned probability setting confirmation flag is also cleared (initialized) here. Areas to be initialized in step A1048 may be added as necessary. Note that, unlike when the RAM is initialized, when the power is turned on normally, the safety device activation flag area in the work area within the area (Fig. 6) is not cleared (initialized) so that the safety device operation is not canceled. value is preserved.

In addition, safety device related work areas (safety device counter area, safety device operation information area, old operation information area described later) related to safety devices in the work area outside the area are not initialized in step A1048, but safety device information initialization described later is performed. Initialized in the initialization process (A1053). In addition,
By initializing the safety device counter value (information on the number of difference balls) in the safety device counter area, there is room for the operation of the safety device (occurrence of a game stop state) regarding the number of difference balls (allowable range of the number of difference balls, The limit of the number of difference balls) can be increased. The performance display work area of the outside work area is also not initialized in step A1048, but the performance display edit processing (A1059
) may be initialized with

In addition, step A1 when normal power is turned on without RAM initialization (when power is restored from a power failure)
In 048, the ceiling counter area (described later) that stores the ceiling counter value indicating the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in a state other than the probability variation state after the power is turned on or after the end of the jackpot is also disadvantageous to the player. The value may be maintained without being cleared (initialized) so that the As will be described later, when the ceiling counter value reaches the ceiling number of times, it becomes a time saving state (Fig. 36B), but the ceiling counter value is not cleared (initialized), so the time saving state occurs (to the ceiling number of times)
The number of remaining games is not changed by turning on the power, and the player is not disadvantaged.

The number of executions (that is, the ceiling counter value) or the number of games remaining until the ceiling (number of ceilings-number of executions) is displayed on the display device 41 by a fluctuation number display 677 (see FIGS. 92, 100, etc.), which will be described later. In this case, the effect control device 300 may match the change count display 677 with the ceiling counter value of the ceiling counter area when the power is turned on normally, or set the change count display 677 to the initial value 0 without matching. may be displayed. If no match is obtained, the change count display 677 will display a value that does not reflect the ceiling counter value.

Similarly, in step A1048, the remaining execution of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game and special figure 2 fluctuation display game) in the time saving state so as not to be disadvantageous to the game hall side (gaming parlor side) A time reduction variation number 1 area that stores a time reduction variation number 1 (described later) corresponding to the number of times, and a time reduction variation number 2 that corresponds to the remaining number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game in the time reduction state (described later). A value may be maintained without clearing (initializing) the stored time reduction variation count 2 area. In addition, on models that have a probability variation state of the number cut type (ST), in order not to be disadvantageous to the game hall side, special figure fluctuation display games (special figure 1 variation display game and special figure 2 variation display game) in the probability variation state ) may be maintained without being cleared (initialized), in which the number of times of high probability fluctuations (ST counter) is stored. In addition, on models that have a limit on the number of consecutive big wins (the number of consecutive wins described later), the number of consecutive big wins will not be disadvantageous to the amusement center side. The value may be maintained without clearing (initializing) the number of jackpots area in which is stored.

Next, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special game processing etc. described later is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A104
9), the process proceeds to step A1050.

In addition, the command for RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1047 and the command for power failure recovery transmitted in the process of step A1049 include a model designation command indicating the type of game machine, special figures 1 and 2 pending Decoration special figure 1 reservation number command and decoration special figure 2 reservation number command indicating the number, probability information command indicating the presence or absence of probability state (high probability state or low probability state) and time saving state, special figure fluctuation in predetermined production mode It includes a number-of-effects information command indicating the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command indicating that the power has been turned on.

Furthermore, the command for RAM initialization and the command for power failure recovery include a setting value information command (probability setting value information commands) are included. The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the setting value information command to the production control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the production control device 300 refers to the setting value information stored by itself. You can control the production.

The command for RAM initialization includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The effect control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command is, for example,
A customer waiting demonstration is displayed on the display device 41, and RAM
Notification of initialization (RAM clearing) is performed for 30 seconds. Further, the command for restoration from power failure includes a screen designation command for designating the display contents of the screen of the display device 41 . In addition, the command for specifying the screen is during normal processing for both special figures 1 and 2 (when neither fluctuating nor hitting)
, is a customer waiting demo command, and otherwise, a recovery screen command may be used. Also, the command at the time of power failure recovery may include a command indicating the ceiling counter value in order to match the fluctuation count display 677 and the ceiling counter value as described above.

Next, it is determined whether or not the safety device is in operation (A1050). For example, it can be determined that the safety device is operating when "1" indicating that the safety device is operating is saved in the safety device operating flag area as the safety device operating flag (safety device Active flag=1). Then, when the safety device is in operation (the result of A1050 is "Y"), a safety device in operation command indicating that the safety device is in operation is sent to the production control device 300 (production control board). (A1051), the process proceeds to step A1052. If the safety device is not in operation (the result of A1050 is "N"), the process proceeds directly to step A1052.

Then, the information (value) of the flag register is saved (PUSHed) to the stack area within the area (A
1052), and executes safety device information initialization processing for initializing safety device information (safety device counter value, safety device operation information, old operation information, etc., which will be described later) related to the safety device (A1053
). Thereafter, the information in the flag register is restored (POP) (A1054). In addition, RAM
Except when the game is stopped due to an abnormality (A1025-A1026), the safety device information (safety device counter value, etc.) is unconditionally initialized (cleared) when the power is turned on. If the power is turned on while pressing the continuation switch, the safety device information does not need to be initialized (cleared).

In addition, as described later, when shifting to safety device information initialization processing, the stack pointer is related to safety device information, performance information and performance display (display of performance information) from the stack area in the area related to game control Switch to out-of-bounds stack region. At that time, when the stack pointer for game control is stored in the stack pointer storage area of the RAM 111c, the flag of the flag register (especially the zero flag) may change, so the information of the flag register is saved in advance in step A1052. put. The flag register is a flag in which each bit of 8 bits takes a value of 0 or 1. Regarding the flag register, please refer to JP-A-2013-
Those disclosed in JP-A-233299, JP-A-2018-94101, etc. can be used.

Next, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1055). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. In the present embodiment, the random number generation circuit includes, as random numbers updated only by hardware, a jackpot random number, a hit pattern random number (a jackpot pattern random number, a small hit pattern random number, a support pattern random number, etc.), a general pattern hit random number , and generate variation pattern random numbers 1-3. These random numbers may be so-called "high-speed counters" that are updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock.

The bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines

In this embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit permutation pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be able to set them arbitrarily.

Next, the game control device 100 prohibits interruption (A1056), and determines whether or not the game is stopped (A1057). When the safety device is activated (when the safety device is in operation flag = 1), there is a strong error 2 (described later) that requires stopping the game (special figure fluctuation display game, normal figure fluctuation display game, round game, etc.) If it occurs, it can be determined that the game is stopped.

When the game is not stopped (result of A1057 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves (PUSH) the information (value) of the flag register to the stack area within the area (A1058),
Execute performance display edit processing for calculating performance information such as base value (payout rate) (A1059
). Here, performance information (accessory ratio, payout rate, etc.) may be calculated. Also, if there is an error in the performance display work area (a part of the outside work area) related to the performance information or its display (performance display), it may be cleared. After that, restore the information in the flag register (POP)
(A1060) to allow interrupts (A1061). In addition to the case where no error has occurred at all, even if a weak error (described later) or a strong error 1 (described later) which is an error other than the strong error 2 has occurred, the game is not stopped and the performance display editing process is performed. including step A1058
- The processing of A1060 is executed. It should be noted that a configuration is also possible in which the processes of steps A1058 to A1060 are not executed when a weak error or a strong error 1 has occurred.

In addition, as described later, when moving to the performance display editing process, the stack pointer is moved from the stack area within the area related to game control to outside the area related to safety device information, performance information, and performance display (display of performance information) Switch to stack area. At that time, when the stack pointer for game control is saved in the stack pointer save area of the RAM 111c, the flag of the flag register (
In particular, since there is a possibility that the zero flag) will change, the information in the flag register is previously saved in step A1058.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the game is stopped (the result of A1057 is "Y")
, the interrupt is permitted without executing the performance display editing process, etc. (A1061). That is, when the safety device is activated or when a strong error 2 occurs, the performance display editing process (particularly, the base value calculation process during the performance display editing process) is not executed, so the performance information such as the base value is It is not newly calculated and does not change. It should be noted that, even if the strong error 2 occurs, it is also possible to execute the performance display editing process without stopping the game. In addition, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) can be executed by permitting interrupts.

In this embodiment, errors are classified into three categories: weak error, strong error 1, and strong error 2. In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the error/injustice system command sets error notification of different strength corresponding to the weak error, the strong error 1, and the strong error 2 in the error/injustice setting process (B1316). can run.

For example, the production control device 300 controls the volume of the error notification sound from the speaker, or the luminance (brightness) of the LED (the production LED of the board decoration device 46 or the frame decoration device 18) that emits light for error notification. , weak error<strong error 1≦strong error 2. Note that the sound volume of the speaker or the brightness of the LED may be the same for the strong error 1 and the strong error 2. FIG. In addition, when a weak error occurs, the effect control device 300 sets the volume of the notification sound to the volume (below the maximum volume) adjusted in the hall/player setting mode processing (B0011), and strong error 1 and strong error 2. occurs, the volume of the notification sound may be set to the maximum volume.

The weak error is a shot ball exhaustion error such that a shot ball exhaustion switch signal is generated in response to a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow switch signal is generated in response to the bottom tray 23 becoming full. Including overflow errors like In a weak error, no external information signal is output to the external information terminal 71 (see FIG. 54A). Further, the weak error may include a switch abnormality error and a payout abnormality error in which a status signal indicating a payout abnormality is generated.

A strong error 1 is a frame open error related to frame opening, and includes a glass frame open error and a body frame open error (front frame open error). In strong error 1, a door/frame open signal (A9305) is output to the external information terminal 71 as an external information signal (see FIG. 54A).

Severe error 2 is a fraudulent error related to fraud, and it is preferable to stop the game. Including electric fraud. In strong error 2, the security signal (A93
22) is output to the external information terminal 71 (see FIG. 54A). Also, the strong error 2 may include the remaining ball error. When a strong error 2 occurs, the game (special figure fluctuation display game, normal figure fluctuation display game, round game, etc.) is stopped, and it can be determined that the game is stopped (A1
057). Also, when a strong error 2 occurs, the same as when the safety device is activated,
It is possible to generate a game stop state (game impossible state, game prohibited state) in which a special figure fluctuation display game, a normal figure fluctuation display game, a round game (a game during a big hit or a small hit), etc. cannot be executed as a game. .

After step A1061, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1062). If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1062 is "N"), the process returns to step A1056. As a result, step A1056-
The loop processing of A1062 is repeated. Until a power failure occurs, performance information such as the base value can be repeatedly calculated in the performance display editing process (A1059) unless the game is stopped, that is, unless the safety device is activated or a strong error 2 occurs.

Since the repetition period of the loop processing is considerably shorter than the interrupt period of the timer interrupt (predetermined time period, eg, 4 msec), the performance display editing process is executed many times during the interrupt period. Therefore, when a game ball wins a prize or the number of discharged balls changes (a game ball enters the out port 30b), the performance information such as the base value can be changed immediately.

When a power failure occurs (the result of A1062 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts the process at the time of power failure, temporarily prohibits interrupts (A1063), and outputs off data to all output ports ( A1064). After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1065), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (
A1066). Further, a checksum calculation process is executed to calculate a checksum when the RWM is powered off (A1067), and the calculated checksum is saved in the checksum area (A1068). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to RWM is executed (A106
9) Wait until the game machine is powered off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. A decision can be made at the time of re-insertion.

Although the main processing has been described above, for example, steps A1056-A106
If the setting key switch and the RAM initialization switch are turned on during the process of step A1021, the same determination process as in step A1021 is performed to set the probability setting changing flag in the same manner as in step A1032. 10, it may be possible to switch to the setting variable state (setting change mode) any number of times while 10 is activated.

[Configuration example of RAM area]
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 111c of the gaming microcomputer 111 (memory map in address space). As shown in FIG. 6, the work area inside the area, the unused area, the stack area inside the area, the unused area, the work area outside the area, the unused area, and the stack area outside the area are arranged in order from the top address of the RAM 111c in the address space. . Unused area between the work area inside the area and the stack area inside the area (stack area for game control, stack area for inside the area) and unused area between the work area outside the area and the stack area outside the area (stack area for outside the area) There can be no region.

The work area within the area of the RAM (work area for game control, first area) is a work area for game control that is read and written by the program within the area and read by the program outside the area. In-area work areas include probability set value area, test signal output data area (including error test signal output data area), random number area, switch control area, segment area, power failure inspection area 1, power failure inspection area 2, check In addition to the thumb area, there is a safety device operating flag area that indicates whether the safety device is operating (whether it has operated), and one timer interrupt (for example, 4 ms
c) includes an acquired game ball number area for storing the number of acquired game balls acquired as prize balls.

The out-of-area work area (second area) of the RAM is an area that is read and written by the out-of-area program and read by the in-area program. The work area outside the area is the safety device counter area that stores the safety device counter value (number of difference + initial value) corresponding to the number of difference balls, and the safety device activation information that stores the safety device activation information corresponding to the state of the safety device. Areas, including an old actuation information area that stores old actuation information, and is capable of storing safety device information associated with the safety device. Safety device counter area (
3 byte size) is basically not read by the program in the area, but when the safety device counter value or information on the number of difference balls is sent to the production control device 300 with the difference ball command, it is read by the program in the area. It is sometimes referred to as In this embodiment, the safety device counter value is a value obtained by adding a predetermined initial value (100,000) to the number of difference balls in proportion to the number of difference balls (safety device counter value=number of difference balls+100,000). However, the safety device counter value is not limited to this as long as it is associated with the number of difference balls and suggests the number of difference balls. Separating the outside work area from the inside work area makes it possible to improve the efficiency of program development, and also makes it easier to differentiate and initialize these areas.

Furthermore, the outside work area includes a performance display work area related to performance information and performance display, and can store information related to performance information and performance display. Additionally, the extra-area work area may store information related to test signals and information related to error monitoring. In addition,
In the outside work area, safety device related work area related to safety device information (including safety device counter area, safety device operation information area, old operation information area) and performance display work related to performance information and performance display The areas may be clearly divided and arranged, or may be mixed.

Then, the out-of-area stack area is shared by the processing related to performance information and performance display and the processing related to the safety device. The out-of-area stack area is also used when performing processing related to test signals and processing related to error monitoring.

The internal program (internal processing program) and the external program (external processing program) are arranged in this order from the top address side in the address space of the ROM 111b. are arranged with an unused area between them. The program in the ROM area consists of a game control program, game control data, etc., and includes a main program corresponding to main processing (FIGS. 5A-5C) and an interrupt processing program corresponding to timer interrupt processing described later. An unused area may be interposed between the game control program area and the game control data area (data area). A subroutine of the main program or the interrupt processing program is basically a program within the area (or a program within the area unless otherwise specified), but may exceptionally be a program outside the area. The programs outside the ROM area include a safety device information initialization program corresponding to safety device information initialization processing, a performance display editing processing program corresponding to performance display editing processing,
It includes an out-of-area integration processing program corresponding to out-of-area integration processing described later.

[Safety device information initialization process]
Next, details of the safety device information initialization process (A1053) in the main process will be described. FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing the procedure of safety device information initialization processing. In the safety device information initialization process, the safety device counter area, safety device operation information area, and old operation information area are initialized or cleared, and the safety device information such as the safety device counter value, safety device operation information, and old operation information is initialized. Make it a value (initial information). The safety device actuation information is information indicating the current state, and the old actuation information indicates the previous state (mainly before one interruption).

The game control device 100 first saves the stack pointer in the stack pointer saving area of the work area outside the area (A1101), and sets the value of the stack area outside the area (stack area for outside the area) to the stack pointer as the top of the stack area outside the area. Set an address value that indicates (
A1102). As a result, the stack pointer indicating the stack to be used is switched from the inner stack area to the outer stack area.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the information (value) of the register to the stack area outside the area (P
USH) (A1103). The registers to be saved may be only the registers to be protected (registers used in the safety device information initialization processing), or all general-purpose registers may be saved. To save all general-purpose registers, save (PUSH) both register bank 0 and register bank 1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the initial value (100,000) in the safety device counter area, and the safety device counter value becomes the initial value (A1104). When the number of difference balls decreases from 0, such as when a big hit does not occur, the safety device counter value (= number of difference balls + initial value) may be smaller than the initial value, so the initial value is set larger than 0. However, any value other than 100,000 may be used. In this way, when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), the safety device counter value is initialized (cleared) so as not to be disadvantageous to the player. Unless the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on, the ceiling counter value indicating the number of times that the ceiling counter has been set does not need to be initialized (cleared) when the power is restored. When the safety device counter value (information on the number of difference balls) is initialized (cleared), there is a margin (tolerance of the number of difference balls, the number of difference balls limit) can be increased to the player's advantage.
On the other hand, as mentioned above, the ceiling counter value is not cleared (initialized) when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), so the remaining number of games (up to the ceiling count) until the time saving state occurs does not change depending on the power on. , to the player's advantage. Then, safety device non-operating information (value 0) corresponding to the non-operating state (normal state) of the safety device is saved as safety device operating information in the safety device operating information area (A1105). Further, the safety device inoperative information (value 0) is saved as old operation information in the old operation information area (A1106).

Next, the game control device 100 restores the saved register (A1107), loads it from the stack pointer saving area, sets the stack pointer (A1108), and terminates the safety device information initialization process. The set stack pointer indicates the address of the stack area within the area.

In the above safety device information initialization process, if the information is directly written to the RAM without using the register, the register is not saved/restored. In this case, since the register is not saved to the RAM, the stack pointer-related processing (A1101, A1102, A1103, A1
107, A1108) are also unnecessary. In addition, the saving/restoring of the flag register (A1052, A1054) before and after the safety device information initialization process becomes unnecessary.

In the present embodiment, when the safety device counter value is 0 to 189999 (safety device counter = 0 to 189999), the safety device activation information indicates the non-activated state (activation notice) in which the safety device is not activated (normal). state, operation warning state, normal state (not operating state), and the safety device non-operating information (value 0). When the safety device counter value is 190000 to 194999 (safety device counter = 190000 to 194999), the safety device activation information is the safety device activation notice information (value 1) corresponding to the activation notice state that announces the activation of the safety device. Become.

Also, the safety device counter value is the counter reference value of 195000 (safety device counter =
195000), the safety device operation warning information (value 2) corresponding to the operation warning state for warning the operation of the safety device when the game is not in a state where the game can be stopped.
becomes. In this case, even if the number of difference balls (= number of safe balls - number of discharged balls) reaches the reference value of 95000, the above condition (1) is established, but the condition ( This corresponds to the case where 2) is not established and the operating condition of the safety device is not established.

Further, when the safety device counter value reaches 195000 (safety device counter = 195000) and the game is stopped, the safety device activation information corresponds to the operating state (operating state) in which the safety device is in operation. It becomes safety device operating information (value 3). In this case, the difference ball number reaches the difference ball reference value 95000, and there is neither a big hit nor a small hit, so the above condition (1
) and (2) are satisfied, which corresponds to the case where the operation condition of the safety device is satisfied.

[Performance display editing process]
Next, details of the performance display editing process (A1059) in the main process will be described.
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of performance display editing processing.

The game control device 100 first saves the stack pointer in the stack pointer saving area of the outside work area (A1201), and sets the stack pointer to the top of the outside stack area (outside stack area) as the value of the outside stack area. Set an address value that indicates (
A1202). As a result, the stack pointer indicating the stack to be used is switched from the inner stack area to the outer stack area.

Next, the game control device 100 saves (PUSH) the register information (value) to the outside stack area for both the register bank 0 and the register bank 1 (A1203). Here, it is preferable to save all general purpose registers. Then, among the work areas outside the area, the performance display work area is judged to be justifiable, and if it is not valid and is abnormal, the performance display work area is initialized (including initial value setting). (A1204).

In the validity determination, if the value stored in the performance display work area is a design-impossible value or deviates from the design value (outside a predetermined range), it can be determined to be invalid. For example, it determines whether or not a specific value (for example, 5Ah) is stored in the performance display RAM initialized flag indicating that the performance display work area has been initialized, and divides the data used for calculating the base value. Determines whether the number for managing the progress of processing is within a predetermined range, determines whether the value of the switch counter is within a range equal to or less than the number of switches to be monitored, and obtains a display period management number indicating the current display period. is within the range of the number of periods (0 to 3), and it is determined whether the total section number indicating the current total section is within the range of the number of sections (0 to 4). In this way, it is preferable to determine whether the value of the area used as the pointer for the data table is within a predetermined range in the validity determination. This can prevent the program from crashing by getting a value that is out of range. Moreover, it is effective because the validity determination is performed for each performance display editing process.

In addition, since the validity judgment is executed each time the performance display editing process is executed, if the performance display work area is not valid, it can be initialized immediately, resulting in an abnormal performance display (abnormal base value). etc.) can be prevented as much as possible.

In addition, initialization of the performance display work area (including initial value setting) targets areas other than the stack pointer storage area so as to protect the stack pointer storage area. Note that the outside stack area is not initialized in this embodiment, but may be initialized. Even when the outside stack area is initialized, the values of the registers saved in the outside stack area are protected and not initialized. The initialization of the performance display work area is performed separately from the initialization of the work area within the area (work area for game control) and the stack area within the area (stack area for game control), so the work area within the area and does not affect the stack area within the area.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is time to switch the tabulation interval for tabulating the data (the number of normal out balls, the number of normal winning balls, etc.) that is the basis of the calculation of the base value (ball output rate). (A1205). A tally section is provided for the total number of out balls (total number of discharged balls, total number of out balls) from power on, and each time the total number of out balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 60000
Each time it increases), the aggregation interval is switched.

For example, the switching timing of the tally section is the timing when the total number of out balls from turning on the power reaches 300, 60,300, 120,300, 180,300, . . . That is, the width of the aggregation interval is basically 60000 except for the first aggregation interval,
1st aggregation interval = 0 to 300, 2nd aggregation interval = 300 to 60300, 3rd aggregation interval = 6
0,300 to 120,300 pieces, 4th tally interval=120,300 to 180,300 pieces, 5th tally interval=180,300 to 240,300 pieces, and so on. The tally section numbers indicating the first to fifth tally sections are 0 to 4, respectively, and the tally section number is maintained at 4 for the sixth and subsequent tally sections. Note that the current aggregate section number is stored in the performance display work area.

The game control device 100, when it is time to switch the tabulation section (the result of A1205 is "Y"), sets the tabulation section switching (A1206). In the aggregation section switching settings,
A total out counter that counts the total number of out balls (total number of outs), a normal out counter that counts the number of normal out balls (number of normal outs), which is the number of out balls (number of discharged balls) in each aggregation section, and each Clear the normal prize ball counter that counts the number of normal prize balls that is the total number of prize balls (number of won balls) in the tally section, or the final base value (or the latest base value) of each tally section to the next tally section or shift (move) to the base value storage area.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a switch input to the input port to be monitored (A120
7). In this embodiment, the input ports to be monitored are the third input port 124 and the fourth input port 126 (see FIG. 3).

Here, the switch rising edge information (copied in step A9603 in FIG. 58) copied to the performance display work area for each input port to be monitored is checked.
Store the copied switch rising edge information for each monitored input port 8
There is a bit area. It can be determined that there is no input when the switch rising edge information for all input ports to be monitored is all 0, and it can be determined that there is an input in other cases. As the switch rising edge information, unless it is masked at the time of copying,
In the input processing (A1303), the bit corresponding to the switch with new input (detection) is set to 1, and the bit corresponding to the switch without new input is set to 0.

The game control device 100 (A12
07 result is "Y"), the input of the switch (target switch) corresponding to the switch counter is checked to obtain the input information (A1208). The target switches here are the lower large winning opening switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper large winning opening switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39, the starting opening 1 switch 36a of the first starting winning opening 36, Starting mouth 2 switch 37a of the second start winning mouth 37 (normal variable winning device), winning mouth switch 35a of the general winning mouth 35 (
A left winning slot switch, a right winning slot switch), an out ball detection switch 74, etc. can change the base value (or ball output rate) by detecting game balls.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is the valid period of the target switch (A
1209). It should be noted that if fraudulent misconduct of the large winning prize or fraudulent use of electric power occurs,
When winning a prize is invalid, that is, the big winning opening switches 38a, 39a and the start opening 2 switch 37a
may not be valid. In addition, there are always effective switches such as the first starting winning port 36 and the out ball detection switch 74 .

If the game control device 100 is valid period of the target switch (the result of A1209 is "
Y"), and determines whether or not there is an input to the target switch corresponding to the switch counter (A1
210). If it is not the effective period of the target switch (result of A1209 is "N") or if there is no input to the target switch (result of A1210 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1218.

The game control device 100, when there is an input to the target switch (the result of A1210 is "Y"
), clear the input information (1 bit) of the bit corresponding to the target switch (A1211),
It is determined whether or not it is in the normal base state (A1212). The normal base state (low base state) is a period during which the base value can be calculated and updated, and is the normal game state in this embodiment.

When the game control device 100 is in the normal base state (normal game state) (A121
2 is "Y"), and if the target switch is a switch to which prize balls are awarded, the number of prize balls corresponding to the target switch is added to obtain the total number of prize balls in the tally section. The number is updated (A1213). Subsequently, by adding 1 when the target switch is the out ball detection switch 74, the number of normal out balls (normal out number, normal discharged ball number), which is the number of out balls in the tally section, is updated (A1214). ). Next, by adding 1 when the target switch is the out ball detection switch 74, the total number of out balls (total number of out balls, total number of discharged balls) is updated (A1215).

In this embodiment, the out ball detection switch 74 detects all game balls discharged from the game area 32 (that is, all game balls that have passed through the winning opening or the out opening 30b). Not only the game ball that entered the out hole 30b, but also the game ball that entered the winning hole (first start winning hole 36, second starting winning hole 37, big winning hole, or general winning hole 35) It is detected by being guided to the out-ball detection switch 74 via a passage or the like.

When the game control device 100 is not in the normal base state which is the normal game state (A121
If the result of 2 is "N"), neither the number of normal prize balls nor the number of normal out balls is updated, and only the total number of out balls is updated (A1215). Therefore, in the high base state (second game state, time saving state, probability variable state or special game state) that is not the normal base state, neither the number of normal prize balls nor the number of normal out balls is updated, and the number of normal prize balls and the normal out ball The base value calculated from the number (the number of normal winning balls / the number of normal out balls) is not updated and does not change. It is also possible to omit the determination processing relating to the normal base state in step A1212 and make the base value updateable (changeable) as the payout rate in all game states.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the switch counter by +1 in order to change the target switch to the next one in the next performance display editing process (A1216). Note that the performance display editing process is executed at time intervals (for example, several microseconds) considerably shorter than the timer interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle, for example, 4 msec) by loop processing in the main processing.
Thus, during the interrupt period, the performance display edit process is repeatedly executed, and the switch counter (eg, 0 to 7) covers all switch bits (eg, bit 0 to bit 7) for each monitored input port. . Also, the switch counter will be 0 after the final value (e.g. 7).
to start checking the input of the switch for the next monitored input port. For example, after first checking the input of the switch with respect to the third input port 124,
The input of the switch is then checked with respect to the fourth input port 126 .

On the other hand, the game control device 100 executes a base value calculation process (predetermined process) for calculating a base value when there is no switch input to any of the input ports to be monitored (the result of A1207 is "N"). (A1217). It should be noted that there is a case where there is no switch input from the beginning to the input port to be monitored. On the other hand, even if some or all of the monitored input ports initially have switch inputs, after the switch inputs have been checked for all monitored input ports, the target switch input Since the information has been cleared (A1211), there is no switch input to any of the monitored input ports.

In the base value calculation process, the base value is the ratio of the number of normal prize balls to the number of normal out balls, and is calculated by the number of normal prize balls/the number of normal out balls. Therefore, the starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36
, normal variable winning device 37), large winning opening, or general winning opening 35, when a ball enters, as a first step, winning opening switches 35a, 36a, 37a, 38a, to which prize balls are awarded, 3
The number of winning balls is updated and changed by the input (detection) of 9a, and the base value is changed. Base value changes. That is, when one game ball enters the winning hole, the base value changes (is affected) in two stages. When a ball enters the out port 30b opening in the game board 30, the number of out balls is updated and changed by the input (detection) of the out ball detection switch 74, and the base value also changes. On the other hand, when there is a ball entering the normal start gate 34, the number of normal prize balls and the number of normal out balls are not updated and do not change by the ball entering itself, so the base value is maintained without changing. be. Even if there is a ball entering the normal figure starting gate 34, the number of prize balls is not normally updated because no prize balls are given.

The base value is output as a performance display to the performance display device 152 by the processing of steps A1624 to A1630 of the output processing regardless of whether or not it has changed. However, when the safety device is activated and the game is stopped, or when the strong error 2 occurs and the game is stopped, the performance display device 152 is turned off by outputting off data.

As a special example, the calculation of the base value may be executed only during the real-time value display period during which the real-time value (bL.) of the base value is displayed. The number of normal prize balls and the number of normal out balls are updated, but the base value is not calculated and does not change.

After step A1216 or A1217, the game control device 100 restores the saved register (A1218), loads it from the stack pointer saving area, sets the stack pointer (A1219), and ends the performance display editing process. The set stack pointer indicates the address of the stack area within the area.

In FIG. 8, the processing of step A1217 is performed immediately after step A1214, and the number of normal prize balls or the number of normal out balls is updated without waiting for the input check of all the switches of the input port to be monitored. A configuration is also possible in which the base value calculation process is performed immediately after the calculation.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM top address in a predetermined register (A1302). By switching from the register bank 0 used in the main process to the register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process, it becomes equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. Note that when the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 receives inputs from various sensors and switches, takes in signals,
That is, an input process for reading the state of each input port is executed (A1303). Next, based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag, it is determined whether the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being checked (A1304). If the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (result of A1304 is "Y"), probability setting change/confirmation processing for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (A1305).

If the game control device 100 is neither changing the probability setting nor confirming the probability setting (A130
4 result is "N"), based on the output data set in various processes, output for driving control of actuators such as solenoids (for example, big winning opening solenoid 39b) and driving control of LEDs (light emission control) Processing is executed (A1306). Note that when a firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, a firing permission signal can be output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes payout command transmission processing for outputting commands (payout commands, etc.) set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 (A1
307). After that, monitor whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 39a, and monitor errors (front frame and glass frame open) (A1308).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game is stopped (A1309). It can be determined that the game is stopped when the safety device is activated (safety device activation flag=1) or when a strong error 2 requiring the game to be stopped occurs.

When the game is not stopped (the result of A1309 is "N"), the game control device 100 performs special figure game processing (A1310), accessory game processing (A1311), normal figure game processing (A131
2) Execute the segment LED editing process (A1313). After that, step A131
4 and subsequent steps are executed. In addition to the case where no error has occurred at all, even when a weak error and a strong error 1 have occurred, the special figure game processing (A1310), the role game processing (A
1311), general-purpose game processing (A1312), segment LED editing processing (A1313)
to run.

In the segment LED editing process, a plurality of segment LEDs forming the collective display device 50
(storage display section, round display section, etc.: LED lamps D3 to D7, D11 to D17) are set for driving. In addition, another part of the collective display device 50 (variation display unit: L
ED lamps (D1, D2, D8, D10, D18) are set for driving and the like are executed in symbol variation control processing (A2615, A2617, A7615). Settings related to the driving of another part of the batch display device 50 (probability state display unit: LED lamp D9), etc.
A1048) and so on.

When the game is stopped (the result of A1309 is "Y"), the game control device 100 performs special figure game processing (A1310), role game processing (A1311), normal figure game processing (A131
2) Step A131 without executing the segment LED editing process (A1313)
It shifts to the processing after 4. In this way, when the safety device is activated, or when the strong error 2 occurs and the game is stopped, the special game processing (A1310) and the normal game processing (A1312
) is not executed, so the number of special figure reservations (A2906, A4611) and the number of general figure reservations (A770
7, A7918) does not change. On the other hand, when a weak error or a strong error 1 occurs, the game is not stopped, and the special figure game process (A1310) and the general figure game process (A1312) are executed, so the number of special figure reservations (A2906, A4611 ) and the number of reserved maps (A7707, A7918
) can be changed by +1 update (when pending occurs) or -1 update (when pending is completed).

In addition, depending on the type of error such as weak error, strong error 1 and strong error 2, special figure game processing (A1310), character game processing (A1311), general figure game processing (A1312), segment LED editing processing ( A1313), a configuration is also possible in which some of them are executed and the others are not executed. For example, only the segment LED editing process may be executed when a strong error 2 occurs.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 transmits safety device operation information corresponding to the state of the safety device to the presentation control device 300 as a production command, and executes safety device related processing capable of setting a flag during safety device operation (A1314). . Then, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 is checked to execute a magnet fraud monitoring process for determining whether or not there is an abnormality (A1315).
). Furthermore, the radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) is executed to check the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1316).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes vibration fraud monitoring processing for monitoring fraud due to vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1317). Next, an abnormal ejection monitoring process for monitoring abnormal ejection from the big winning opening is executed (A1318). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, abnormal discharge of the special variable prize winning device 39 is performed based on inputs from the special variable prize winning device 39 from the large winning prize opening switch 39a, the specific area switch 72 (V winning prize opening switch), and the remaining ball discharge port switch 73. is monitored, and an abnormal discharge flag is set when abnormal discharge occurs. It should be noted that the game ball that has passed through the large winning opening switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39 is the specific area switch 7
2 (V winning opening switch) or the remaining ball discharge opening switch 73 is discharged.

Next, the game control device 100 executes external information editing processing for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1319). Then, as in step A1309 and the like, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped (A1320).

The game control device 100, when the game is not stopped (the result of A1320 is "N"), saves the flag register to the stack area within the area (A1321), and updates the safety device counter value (
Calculation of the number of difference balls) and execution of outside area integration processing such as display control of the performance display device 152 (
A1322). After that, the flag register is restored (A1323), and the timer interrupt processing ends. When the safety device is not activated and the strong error 2 is not generated, the game is not stopped and the processes of steps A1321-A1323 including the outside area integration process are executed.

It should be noted that, as will be described later, when shifting to the outside-area integration process, the stack pointer is switched from the inside-area stack area related to game control to the outside-area stack area. At that time, since there is a possibility that the flag of the flag register (particularly the zero flag) changes when the stack pointer for game control is saved in the stack pointer saving area of the RAM 111c, step A1321
save the flag register in advance.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the game is stopped (the result of A1320 is "Y")
, ends the timer interrupt processing without executing the out-of-area integration processing. That is, when the safety device is activated (when the safety device is in operation flag = 1) or when a strong error 2 occurs, the out-of-area integrated processing is not executed, so the safety device counter value is not updated and the base value The display contents of the performance display such as are not updated. This makes it possible to omit unnecessary control while the game is stopped.

In addition, unlike the above, even if a strong error 2 occurs, the game is not stopped and the special game process (A
1310), accessory game processing (A1311), general-purpose game processing (A1312), and segment LED editing processing (A1313). Further, even if a strong error 2 occurs, a configuration is also possible in which the out-of-area integration process or the like is executed.

Also, when the timer interrupt processing returns, the restoration of the interrupt disabled state and the restoration of the register bank designation are automatically performed. Alternatively, a process of returning the designation of the register bank to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output processing (A1306) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of output processing.

First, the game control device 100 outputs OFF data to the output port 135 (segment output port) (see FIG. 3) that outputs segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50, and resets the output port 135 (A1601 ). Subsequently, output data for turning off all solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, lever solenoid 86b, general electric solenoid 37c) is set (A1602). Then, as in step A1309 and the like, it is determined whether or not the game is being stopped (A1603). It can be determined that the game is stopped when the safety device is activated (safety device activation flag=1) or when a strong error 2 requiring the game to be stopped occurs.

The game control device 100 outputs the data of the big winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, the lever solenoid 86b, and the general electric solenoid 37c to the solenoid output port 134 when the game is not stopped (the result of A1603 is "N"). Data are synthesized (A1604).
Then, the data is output to the solenoid output port 134 (A1605). When the game is stopped (the result of A1603 is "Y"), nothing is done, and the process proceeds to step A1605 to output OFF data (A1602) to the solenoid output port 134. As a result, when the game is stopped, the operation of all solenoids is stopped, and the large winning opening, the specific area 86,
The normal variable prize winning device 37 and the like are closed to be in a closed state. In this way, the big winning opening is closed in the game stop state, and the round game (the game during the big win or the small win) cannot be executed.

Then, the game control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 by +1 within the range of 0 to 3 (adds only 1, but 0 after 3). updated) (A1606). In addition, L corresponding to the value of the digit counter
Digit output data to the ED digit line is obtained (A1607). Then, the acquired digit output data and external information data are combined (A1608), and the combined data is output to the digit output/external information output port 136 (A1609).

Next, the game control device 100 sets off data as segment output data to the segment line (A1610). Then, the output data for prohibiting firing is set (A161
1). Further, as in step A1603 and the like, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped (A
1612).

When the game is not stopped (result of A1612 is "N"), the game control device 100 loads the segment output data from the segment area in the RAM 111c corresponding to the value of the digit counter to the segment line (A1613), and shoots. Set the permission output data (A1
614), and outputs the loaded segment output data to the output port 135 for segment output (A1615). In addition, this segment area may be included in the intra-area work area (game control work area).

In this way, when the game is not stopped, each time the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 3, a new digit line is selected to connect eight segments of digits connected to this digit line. Segment output data is output on line. Digit 0 to digit 3 (digits 0 to 3) are sequentially selected, and a dynamic driving method (dynamic lighting control) for the collective display device 50
is realized.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the game is stopped (the result of A1612 is "Y")
, the OFF data (A1610) is output to the output port 135 for segment output (A1615) without performing the processing of steps A1613 and A1614. As a result, the collective display device 50 is turned off in the game stop state when the safety device is activated (when the safety device activation flag is 1) or when the strong error 2 occurs. As a result, the special figure variation display game and the normal figure variation display game cannot be executed in the game stop state. And collective display device 50
A player who sees can recognize that the game is stopped, that the safety device has been activated, or that a strong error 2 (illegal error) has occurred.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the external information data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1616), and further synthesizes the synthesized external information data and the output data of firing permission or firing prohibition (A1617 ), and outputs the finally combined data to the external information/fire permission signal output port 137 (A1618). Here, when the game is not stopped, the output data becomes shooting permission (A1614), and when the game is stopped, the output data becomes shooting prohibition (shooting stop) (A1611). As a result, in the game stop state when the safety device is activated or when the strong error 2 occurs, the game ball is prohibited from being shot from the ball launching device, while in the game stop state If not, shooting of game balls from the ball shooting device is permitted. It should be noted that it is also possible to permit the shooting of game balls from the ball shooting device even in the game stop state, and not to prohibit shooting (stop shooting).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, and the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 , and outputs the synthesized data (A1619). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A162
0).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, (A1621). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A1622
). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A1623).

Next, the game control device 100 outputs OFF data to the output port 141 (segment output port 2) for outputting segment data of the performance display device (LED) 152 and resets the output port 141 (A1624). Next, the value of the digit counter 2 for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the performance display device 152 is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 3 (only 1 is added, but after 3 it is updated to 0) (A1625). . Further, the digit output data to the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter 2 is obtained (A1626). and,
Output the acquired digit output data to the output port 142 (digit output port 2) (
A1627).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game is stopped (A1628), like step A1603. When the game is not stopped (the result of A1628 is "N"),
The segment output data is loaded from the performance display device segment area in RAM 111c corresponding to the value of digit counter 2 (A1629). The performance display device segment area is included in the performance display work area related to performance information and its display (performance display). Then, the loaded segment output data is output to the output port 141 (segment output port 2) for the performance display device 152 (A1630), and then the output processing is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the game is stopped (the result of A1628 is "Y")
, the output process ends without executing the processes of steps A1629 and A1630. Therefore, when the safety device is activated and the game is stopped (when the safety device is in operation flag = 1) or when the game is stopped due to the occurrence of a strong error 2, the segment output data of the performance display device segment area cannot be output to the output port 141, the OFF data in step A1624 is output to the output port 141 for the performance display device 152 as it is. Then, in this case, when the value of the digit counter 2 cycles through the range of 0 to 3, the performance display device 152 displays all LE
D is forcibly extinguished and hidden, and the person in charge or staff of the game hall who sees the performance display device 152 will know that the game is stopped, that the safety device has been activated, or that there is a strong error 2 (unauthorized error) ) has occurred.

Further, even if a strong error 2 occurs, it is also possible to configure such that the processing of steps A1629 and A1630 is executed without stopping the game.

[Winning gate switch/state monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (A1308
) will be described in detail. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the winning opening switch/state monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first clears the acquired game ball number area included in the intra-area work area to 0 (A2001). As a result, the acquired game ball number area becomes an area for storing the acquired game ball number, which is the number (total) of prize balls acquired within one interruption (within a predetermined time period). The number of acquired game balls is equal to the increase in the number of safe balls within one interruption. Then, a winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to the upper big winning opening switch 39a in the upper big winning opening (special variable winning device 39) is prepared (A2002). Then, even though the upper special prize opening is not open, it monitors whether there is any unauthorized prize winning in the upper special prize opening and executes fraud & winning monitoring processing for detecting normal winning (
A2003).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the lower winning opening switch 38a in the lower winning opening (special variable winning device 38) (A2004). Then, fraud & winning monitoring processing is executed to monitor whether or not there is an illegal winning in the lower special winning opening even though the lower special winning opening is not open, and to detect normal winning (A2005).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37 (A2006). Then, fraud & winning monitoring processing is executed to monitor fraudulent winning and detect normal winning (A2007). Next, prepare a winning gate monitoring table for winning gate switches that can always win and do not require fraud monitoring (A20
08). The winning opening switch that can always win a prize is the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the general winning opening 35, and the like.

Next, the game control device 100 executes winning number counter update processing for updating the winning number (
A2009). Then, the status scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and signals whose status should be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (A2010). The state scan counter is updated with a range of 0-3.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2011). Then, a gaming machine state check process is executed to determine whether an error has occurred or not (A2012).
.

By referring to the game machine state monitoring table 1 for the value of the state scan counter, if the value of the state scan counter is 0, the state (switch abnormality error ) is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (shoot ball out error) based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. If the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the overflow switch signal (overflow error) is set, and if the value of the state scan counter is 3, the state based on the payout error status signal (payout error) is set. monitoring is set. In this way, the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 monitors weak errors.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2013). Then, a gaming machine state check process is executed to determine whether an error has occurred or not (A2014).

By referring to the game machine state monitoring table 2 for the value of the state scan counter, when the value of the state scan counter is 0, the state (glass frame open error) is monitored based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch. is set, and if the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (body frame open error, front frame open error) based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave fraud signal (frame radio wave fraud) is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set. is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2015). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (A2015
result is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2017.

In addition, when the value of the error scan counter is 0, the game control device 100 (A2
The result of 015 is "Y"), and the payout busy signal check process for setting the busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start the payout control is executed ( A2016), and the process proceeds to step A2017.

Note that the processing of step A2016 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter, which is updated for each timer interrupt, is 0, so it is executed once every four timer interrupts. That is, if the timer interrupt is performed every 4ms, A201 will be executed every 16ms.
6 processing will be performed.

Next, the game control device 100 executes V passage timing monitoring processing for monitoring whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area switch 72 at inappropriate timing (A2017). In the V passage timing monitoring process, when the detection signal of the specific area switch 72 is generated at inappropriate timing, it is regarded as a V passage error.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a remaining ball monitoring process for monitoring whether or not game balls remain in the specific area switch 72 (A2018), and ends the winning opening switch/state monitoring process.

It should be noted that the V passage timing monitoring process and the remaining ball monitoring process in the winning hole switch/status monitoring process are necessary for a so-called 1 type 2 type mixed machine (1 + 2 types machine) such as this embodiment, and a normal 1 type pachinko It may not be necessary for the machine.

[Fraud & Winning Monitoring Process]
FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the procedure of fraud & winning monitoring processing. The cheating & winning monitoring process is executed in steps A2003 and A2 in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG.
005, A2007.

The fraud & winning monitoring process includes the lower large winning opening switch 38a in the special variable winning device 38, the upper large winning opening switch 39a in the special variable winning device 39, the winning opening switch in the normal variable winning device 37 (starting opening 2 switch 37a). ). As for the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) and the big winning opening (special variable winning devices 38, 39), it is easy for fraud to be forced to open the opening/closing member, insert game balls, and pay out prize balls. Therefore, in addition to detecting prizes, fraud is monitored.

The game control device 100 first checks the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring (A2101), and determines whether or not it is during the fraud monitoring period (A2102).
For example, the fraud monitoring period is a period in which the winning opening switch to be monitored for error does not detect the game ball. It is a period other than the game state.

Then, if the game control device 100 is in the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is "
Y"), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (A2103). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (the result of A2103 is "N"), the target notification timer update information is loaded (A2112). In addition, if there is an input to the target winning opening switch (the result of A2103 is "Y"), the target fraudulent winning number is updated by +1 (A2104), and the fraudulent winning number after addition is used to determine fraudulent occurrence for monitoring. It is determined whether or not the number (for example, 5) is equal to or more (A2105).

The reason why the determination number is set to 5 is that, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is changed to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the big winning opening, and the game ball passes the effective period of the count switch. This is to avoid judging that the game is fraudulent when the player wins a prize or the signal contains noise, and to prevent the player from easily judging an error even though the game is not fraudulent.

Then, if the game control device 100 is not equal to or greater than the determination number (the result of A2105 is "
N"), and prepares a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch (A2110). Also,
If it is equal to or greater than the determined number (the result of A2105 is "Y"), the number of fraudulent prizes is kept at the fraudulent occurrence determination number (A2106), and the initial value (for example, 60000 ms
) is saved (A2107).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the target fraudulent occurrence command as an effect command (
A2108), and prepare a fraudulent winning occurrence flag as a fraudulent flag (A2109)
. Then, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is not in the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is "N
”), prepares a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch (A2110), and executes winning number counter update processing for setting winning balls (A2111). The details of the winning number counter update process will be described later.

Then, the game control device 100 loads the target notification timer update information (A2112).
, determines whether or not there is permission to update the notification timer (A2113). If the update of the notification timer is not permitted (the result of A2113 is "N"), the illegality & winning monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if update of the notification timer is permitted (result of A2113 is "Y"), if the target notification timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (A2114). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

Updating of the notification timer is permitted when the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the normal variable winning device 37. In addition, when there are two winning opening switches in one special variable winning device (large winning opening), the update of the notification timer is permitted if one of the winning opening switches is subject to error monitoring, and is subject to error monitoring. is not allowed if the winning slot switch is the other. As a result, the update of the notification timer is performed at twice the frequency for fraudulent notification of one special variable winning device, and the prescribed time (for example, 60
000 ms) is prevented from running out.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the notification timer is 0 (A211
5) If the value is not 0 (the result of A2115 is "N"), that is, if the time has not expired, the cheating & winning monitoring process is terminated. Also, if the value of the notification timer is 0 (
If the result of A2115 is "Y"), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the target fraud cancellation command is prepared as an effect command (A2116), and an illegal winning cancellation flag is prepared as a fraud flag ( A2117). And the value of the notification timer is 0
It is determined whether or not it is the moment of becoming (A2118).

When the game control device 100 is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is "Y"), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the fraud & winning monitoring process of this time, clears the target number of illegal winnings (A2119).

In addition, after the process of step A2119 is completed, or if it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is "N"), the game control device 100 detects the illegality & winning monitoring process before the previous time. When the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in step A2120, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area.

Then, when the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (the result of A2120 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the fraud & winning monitoring process. Also,
If the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area do not match (result of A2120 is "N"), save the prepared fraud flag in the target fraud flag area (A2121),
An effect command setting process is executed (A2122). After that, the illegality & prize-winning monitoring process is ended.

By the above processing, the fraud occurrence command is transmitted to the production control device 300 with the occurrence of fraud, the fraud cancellation command is transmitted to the production control device 300 with the cancellation of the fraud, and the start and end of the fraud notification are set. The Rukoto.

[Processing for updating winning number counter]
FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the winning number counter update process. Winning number counter update processing is executed in step A2009 of the winning opening switch/state monitoring processing shown in FIG. 11 and step A2111 of the fraud & winning monitoring processing shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the game is stopped (A2201). It can be determined that the game is stopped when the safety device is activated (safety device activation flag=1) or when a strong error 2 requiring the game to be stopped occurs.

When the game is not stopped (the result of A2201 is "N"), the game control device 100 acquires the number of winning opening switches to be monitored from the winning opening monitoring table (A2202), and there is an input to the target winning opening switch. (A2203). In the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table, the number of winning balls, the address of the winning number counter area 1, the address of the winning number counter area 2, etc. are defined for each winning opening switch to be monitored. If there is no input (A
The result of 2203 is "N"), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A22
15), it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has ended (A2216).

On the other hand, the game control device 100 (A220
The result of 3 is "Y"), the number of acquired game balls is loaded from the acquired game ball number area (A2204), the number of prize balls corresponding to the target winning opening switch is added to the number of acquired game balls (A2205), and addition is performed. The subsequent value is saved in the acquired game ball number area (A2206). As a result, the number of acquired game balls stored in the number of acquired game balls area is updated for each winning opening switch, and the number of acquired game balls finally becomes the number (total) of prize balls acquired within one interruption. Become.

The won game ball number area is located in the work area within the area, and is written by the program for updating the number of winning counters (a part of the program inside the area), and the program for the difference ball confirmation process described later (a part of the program outside the area). ) will only read out. Since the total value of prize balls is less than 255 (1 byte) even if all the winning hole switches are inputted at the same time, the upper limit is not checked for the number of winning game balls.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the value of the target win number counter area 1 (A220
7) Update the loaded value by +1 (A2208). Further, it is determined whether or not the updated value causes an overflow (A2209). Winning number counter area 1 has a size of 2 bytes (0 to 65535).

If no overflow has occurred (the result of A2209 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in winning number counter area 1 (A2210). After the processing of step A2210 is completed, or when an overflow occurs (result of A2209 is "Y"), the value of target win number counter area 2 is loaded (A2211).

After that, the game control device 100 updates the loaded value by +1 (A2212), and determines whether the updated value causes an overflow (A2213). If no overflow occurs (the result of A2213 is "N"), the updated value is saved in winning number counter area 2 (A2214). Winning number counter area 2 has a size of 1 byte (0 to 255).

The game control device 100 updates the table address to the address of the next record after the processing of step A2214 is finished or when an overflow occurs (result of A2213 is "Y") (A2215). Then, it is determined whether or not the monitoring of all switches has ended (A2216).

If the monitoring of all switches has not been completed (the result of A2216 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch in step A2203.
return to the process of Also, when the monitoring of all switches is completed (the result of A2216 is "Y"
), the process of updating the winning number counter is terminated. As a result, the processing of steps A2203-A2216 is repeated until the monitoring of all switches is completed, and the number of won game balls, which is the number (total) of prize balls obtained within one interruption, is obtained. Winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning to each winning opening (each winning area), and winning information is stored.

When the game is stopped (the result of A2201 is "Y"), the game control device 100 does nothing and terminates the win number counter update process. As a result, when the game is stopped, the detection of the game ball by the winning port switch is disabled, the number of acquired game balls is not updated, and the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are not updated. No ball is obtained (not paid out). Note that the payout of prize balls based on the winning information stored before the game is stopped (that is, when the detection of the game ball by the winning port switch is effective) continues even in the game stop state.

The winning number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout of prize balls to the payout control device 200, and the payout command has not yet been transmitted. Winning data corresponding to the missing prize balls is stored. That is, the prize number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command.

The winning number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device each time the number of winning balls generated by winning a prize in the winning opening (scheduled number of payouts) reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). This is an area to be used, and stores prize winning data corresponding to prize balls for which main prize ball signal generation processing has not been performed. That is, the prize number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal.

Each of these winning number counter areas has a winning number counter for each number of prize balls set for each prize opening (for example, 3 prize balls, 2 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). An area is provided, and the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by 1 based on the winning to the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning to the winning opening. Winning number counter area 1 (2 bytes) is replaced by winning number counter area 2 (1 byte).
bytes) are allocated to store more winning data. This is because while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 to which it is sent. This is because data may be accumulated.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the gaming machine state check process. The game machine status check process is step A201 in the winning opening switch/status monitoring process shown in FIG.
2, A2014, and so on.

The game control device 100 first acquires the state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2301). The state scan counter is set to a value ranging from 0 to 3 corresponding to the game state. Incidentally, the relationship between the state monitoring table and the state scan counter is as described in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the signal to be checked is ON (
A2302). If the signal to be checked is not ON (the result of A2302 is "N"), that is, if the signal to be checked is OFF, a state OFF flag is prepared as a state flag (A2303), and the target state OFF command is acquired. and prepare (A2304). Furthermore, the target state OFF monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2305). The state-off flag indicates a normal state with respect to error-related signals, and indicates a no-touch state with respect to touch switch signals.

On the other hand, when the signal to be checked is ON (the result of A2302 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a state ON flag as a state flag (A2306), acquires the target state ON command, prepares (A2307). Furthermore, the target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2308). The state-on flag indicates an abnormal or illegal state for error-related signals, and indicates a touched state for touch switch signals.

When the processing of step A2305 or step A2308 ends, the game control device 100
(A2
309). If they match (result of A2309 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2312. If they do not match (the result of A2309 is "N"), save the acquired signal state in the target signal control area (A2310), and clear the target state monitoring timer (
A2311).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2312).
. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated state monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the corresponding timer comparison value (A2313). If the value of the updated status monitoring timer is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2313 is "N"), the gaming machine status check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the updated state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2313 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by -1, and the timer comparison value - The value remains at 1 (A2314). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2315). If they match (A231
5 is "Y"), the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (the result of A2315 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2316). Finally, an effect command setting process for setting an effect command is executed (A2317), and the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

The effect command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the state ON command is an error type command, the effect control device 300 is made to start error notification. As a state ON command for starting error notification to the effect control device 300, there is a command corresponding to a payout error (included in a weak error) related to the payout of game balls such as a shot ball running out error, an overflow error, and a payout error error. , commands for frame open errors (included in strong error 1) such as glass frame open error and body frame open error, and commands for frame radio wave fraud errors (included in strong error 2).

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability setting change/confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing. In the probability setting change/confirm process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the probability setting value is within the normal range (A2
401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area included in the intra-area work area of the RAM 111c.

Game control device 100, when the probability setting value is within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "
Y"), set the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value (A2402), and output it to the performance display device 152 via the drivers 150a and 150b (A2404). If the probability setting value is not within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "N"), the data for turning off the lights is set as the probability setting value display data (A2403), and the drivers 150a, 15
Output via 0b (A2404).

Here, the probability setting value display data is data of probability setting values for display displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability setting value display data area. In addition, in order to prevent confusion among hall personnel such as game hall managers and attendants, even if the probability setting values are different, if the probability of a big hit (and the probability of a small hit) is the same, the probability setting value for display will be changed to the big hit probability ( and small hit probability) may be made the same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same big win probability (and small win probability).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is set to 1 in step A1037.
28 ms (predetermined time). Subsequently, the external information terminal 71 outputs ON data of a security signal for informing an external device (game hall internal control device (hall computer), etc.) of the abnormality.
(A2406). Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are kept off.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (A2407
result is "N"), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated without doing anything.

Game control device 100, when the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407
result is "Y"), that is, if the probability setting is being changed, it is determined whether or not it is the first timer interrupt process after power-on (A2408). If it is the first timer interrupt process after power-on (the result of A2408 is "Y"), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. This is to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally updated when the RAM initialization switch 112 is kept pressed.

If the game control device 100 is not the first timer interrupt process after turning on the power (A240
8 is "N"), it is determined whether or not there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (A2
409). If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch (the result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated.

When there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112, the game control device 100 (A2409
result is "Y"), the work set value in the work set value area (inside the RAM 111c or register) is updated by +1 within the range in which the work set value can be taken, and the probability setting in the probability set value area is set corresponding to the work set value. The value is updated by +1 (A2410). As a result, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by one. After that, the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. When entering the setting change mode, a value corresponding to the probability setting value read out from the probability setting value area (1 subtracted value) may be stored. Note that if the work set value is 5 (probability set value 6) and is updated by +1, it is possible to return to the work set value 0 (probability set value 1). Therefore, the probability setting values 1 to 6 can be repeatedly updated by +1 and switched. In addition, the possible range of the work setting value is, for example, 0 to 1 or 0 to 5 in the case of multi-step setting in which there are multiple probability setting values, but 0 in the case of single-step setting.
Only. In the case of multi-step setting, the work setting value and the probability setting value are updated to different values each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, but in the case of single-step setting, the values remain the same even if they are updated. Yes (updated to the same value).

Also, every time the probability setting value is updated by +1, or when the game state is switched to a setting variable state, etc., even if a command (setting value information command) that informs the setting value to the effect control device 300 is transmitted. good. Similarly, every time the probability set value is updated by +1, or when the game state is switched to a setting variable state or the like, the test signal may be output to an external test-firing test device. It should be noted that these transmissions and outputs are preferably stopped when there is an abnormality such as a main abnormality in the game control device 100 . In addition, when there is a change in the game state such as a probability variable state, a time saving state or a big hit state, or at the start of a special figure fluctuation display game, a command (set value information command) that informs the setting value to the production control device 300 is transmitted. Alternatively, the test signal may be output to an external test-fire test device.

In the above description, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated corresponding to the update of the working setting value. The probability setting value (setting value for work) during setting change is stored in the area, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change operation is completed (the result of A1039 is "Y").
”), a value corresponding to the work set value in the work set value area may be stored in the probability set value area for the first time. In this way, if a power failure occurs while changing settings (A1040
result is "Y"), the probability setting value (probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area) used for game control, performance control, etc. can be prevented from being changed by an unintended value.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure game processing. In the special figure game processing, monitoring of the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, control of the entire processing relating to the special figure variation display game, and setting of the display of the special figure are performed.

The game control device 100 first executes a starting opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A2600). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in a starting winning opening 36 or a normal variable winning device 37 forming a second starting winning opening, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted, and special figure fluctuation display is performed based on the winning. A game result pre-determination is performed to determine a game result based on a prize winning at a stage before the start of the game. In addition,
The details of the starting port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Subsequently, specific area switch monitoring processing for monitoring the entry of a game ball into the specific area 86 (V winning opening) is executed (A2601). Details of the specific area switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the upper big winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602).
. In the upper big winning opening switch monitoring process, detection of game balls by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the special figure game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (1
is subtracted) (A2603). The special figure game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by -1 update. In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). When the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2619.

The game control device 100, when the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is "
Y"), that is, if the time is up or has already timed up, the special game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special game process number is set in the register (A2605). . Furthermore, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606).
Subsequently, a subroutine call is made by the special game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the special game processing number (A2607).

If the game processing number is "0" at step A2607, the game control device 100
To monitor the start of fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game, set the start of fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game, set the effect, and set the information necessary for processing during the special figure fluctuation. Execute (A2608). In addition, the detail of a special figure usual process is mentioned later.

If the game processing number is "1" at step A2607, the game control device 100
And the setting of the stop display time of the special figure, the processing during the special figure fluctuation which performs the setting of the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure display is executed (A2609). For example, in the special figure fluctuation process, set the necessary information such as a symbol stop command indicating the stop of the special symbol and the stop display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and set the processing number "2" related to the special figure display process Set and save in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "2" at step A2607, the game control device 100
A special figure displaying process for setting information necessary for shifting to a big hit state or a small hit state is executed (A2610). For example, in the special figure display process, if the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is operating is set in the condition device operation information area, and the special figure normal processing Set the processing number "0" related to and save it in the special game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is a small win, set necessary information such as a small win fanfare command and a time before opening a small win, and process number "3" relating to preprocessing for opening a small win.
Set and save in the special game processing number area. If the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost, the processing number "0" relating to the special figure normal processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "3" at step A2607, the game control device 100
Small hit opening pre-processing is executed (A2611). For example, in the small winning opening preprocessing, the opening time of the big winning opening due to the small winning (small winning opening time, for example, 1.6 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area, and saved in the upper big winning opening solenoid output data area. On-data is saved, a command during opening of a small win is set as a performance command, a processing number "4" relating to processing during opening of a small win is set, and saved in a special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "4" at step A2607, the game control device 100
Small hit during opening processing is executed (A2612). For example, in the small hit open process, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 3.0 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "5" related to the small hit remaining ball process is set, and the special figure Save in the game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "5" at step A2607, the game control device 100
Small hit remaining ball processing is executed (A2613). For example, in the small hit remaining ball processing, the processing number "0" relating to the special figure normal processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the processing based on the special figure game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (A2614), then the special figure 1 indicator 51 is executed (A2615). Then, after preparing the special figure 2 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (A2616), the symbol variation control process related to the special figure 2 indicator 52 is executed (A2617). Next, a lever solenoid control process (A2618) for controlling the opening operation of the lever solenoid 86b is executed so as to open the lever solenoid 86b during the small hit, and the special figure game process is ended.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start-up switch monitoring process (A2600) in the special game process will be described. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the starting port switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a prize-winning monitoring table for the starting prize-winning port 36 (starting port 1) (A2701), executes hardware random number acquisition processing (A2702), and executes the starting prize-winning port 36.
(A2703). If there is no winning to the starting winning port 36 (
If the result of A2703 is "N"), the processing after step A2709 is executed. On the other hand, if there is a prize to the starting prize winning port 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the game state is right-handed (A2704).

When the game control device 100 determines that it is not in the right-handed game state (the result of A2704 is "N"), it executes the processing after step A2707. On the other hand, if the gaming state is to hit to the right (the result of A2704 is "Y"), a right hitting instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and effect command setting processing is executed (A2706). In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. - 特許庁

That is, if it is in the general electricity support state (time saving state), regardless of the probability state (high probability state/low probability state) of the variable display game, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and the production command setting process is executed. . In the case of this embodiment, it is easier to win a prize in the starting prize-winning port 36 with a left-handed hit, and a right-handed hit in the normal variable prize-winning device 37 does not win a prize. Moreover, the game ball does not pass through the normal figure start gate 34 unless it is hit to the right. Therefore, in the general electricity support state (time saving state), right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting, but if there is a prize at the start winning opening 36 during the general electricity support state (that is, during the general electricity support state In the case of hitting to the left), a hitting to the right instruction notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 instructs to hit to the right (
warning) is executed on the display device 41 or the like by right-handed instruction display.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on suspension by the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2
708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), hardware random number acquisition processing is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning to the second starting winning opening is determined. Judge (A2711). If there is no prize to the 2nd start prize gate (
When the result of A2711 is "N"), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal electric accessory (normal variable prize winning device 37) is in operation when there is a prize to the second start prize winning port (the result of A2711 is "Y"). That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is in an open state in which the game ball can win (A2712). When the normal electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y"
), the process proceeds to step A2714.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the normal electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "N"), determines whether the normal electric fraud is occurring (A2713). When the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that general electrical fraud is occurring. The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball when it is closed, and can win a game ball only when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit value) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

The game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on suspension by the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) when the electric fraud is not occurring (the result of A2713 is "N") (A2714). , Executes the special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2715), and ends the starting opening switch monitoring processing. Also, if it is determined in A2713 that the electric power irregularity is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second
Prevents further generation of starting memories.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
Next, the special figure start switch common processing in the start switch monitoring process (A2708, A
2715) will be described in detail. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure start opening switch common processing. Special figure starting opening switch common processing, when there is an input of starting opening 1 switch 36a or starting opening 2 switch 37a, is processing that is performed in common for each input.

First, the game control device 100 outputs information about the number of winnings to the monitored starter switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a to a management device outside the gaming machine 10. is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (A2903). If the output count does not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N"),
Save the updated value in the starting signal output count area of RWM (A2904), step A
2905 processing is performed. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (result of A2903 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2905. In this embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting signal output count area. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, the game control device 100, of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, the update target special figure holding number (starting memory number) corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch is the upper limit value (here 4) Determine whether it is less than (A2905). If the special figure pending number to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start opening switch common processing is terminated. Also, if the number of special figures pending to be updated is less than the upper limit (4 here) (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of special figures pending to be updated (number of special figures 1 pending or special figures 2 pending number) is updated by +1 (A2906), and the target starting gate winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 as the RWM jackpot random number. Save in area (A2909). Next, extract the jackpot pattern random number of the special figure fluctuation display game that is started by detecting the start switch to be monitored,
It is saved in the jackpot pattern random number storage area of WM (A2910). Subsequently, the small winning design random number of the special figure fluctuation display game started by the detection of the start opening switch to be monitored is extracted and saved in the small winning design random number storage area (A2911). In addition, the support winning symbol random number for determining the time saving pattern is extracted, and the support winning symbol random number is saved in the support winning symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2912).

In the present embodiment, as described above, the big win is surely generated by the V winning after the small win, so the small win symbol random number need not be used, and step A2911 is an option and may not be executed. In addition, since there is no small hit result in the special figure 1 variation display game, if the starter switch to be monitored is the starter 1 switch 36a, it is not necessary to extract the small hit symbol random number.

In addition, the small hit design random number, the support per design random number, and the big hit design random number are the special figure 1 stop design setting process (A3403) and the special figure 2 stop design setting process (A3503) described later. It is used to determine a stop pattern number at the time of a support hit or a stop pattern number at the time of a big win, and a small hit stop pattern pattern corresponding to these stop pattern numbers, a support hit stop pattern pattern or a big win stop pattern pattern.

In this embodiment, in order to avoid confusion, the small winning symbol random number, the support winning symbol random number, and the big winning symbol random number are provided independently.
One random number (common random number) is shared, and the small hit pattern (stop pattern number at the time of the small hit, the small hit stop pattern pattern), the support pattern (stop pattern number at the time of the support hit, the stop pattern pattern per support)
, jackpot patterns (stop pattern number at the time of jackpot, jackpot stop pattern pattern) may be sorted. That is, when determining a small winning pattern, the range of common random numbers is divided and assigned to each small winning pattern, or when determining a support winning pattern, the range of common random numbers is divided and assigned to each supporting winning pattern. Alternatively, when determining a jackpot pattern, the range of common random numbers may be divided and assigned to each jackpot pattern.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (A2913), and determines the result (game result) of the variation display game in advance. Execute pending information determination processing (pre-determination processing, prefetch processing) (A29
14). In the special drawing reservation information determination process, stop design information (jackpot stop design, small hit stop design, time-saving stop design) , Lost stop pattern) and the first half fluctuation number based on the saved fluctuation pattern random number 1 to 3 (pre-reach fluctuation number)
And set the look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the second half variation number (number of post-reach variation) as a production command. Then, prepare the decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting mouth switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations as a production command (A2915), execute the production command setting process (A2916), common to the special figure start mouth switch End the process. in this way,
The game control device 100 constitutes preliminary determination means capable of determining in advance the result of the variable display game before the variable display game based on the starting memory is executed.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning port 36 or the starting winning region of the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variable display game. It constitutes a start memory means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory. Also,
The starting memory means (game control device 100) stores various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning port (starting winning port 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number as the upper limit. , Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Specific area switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the specific area switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special game process will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of specific area switch monitoring processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a small hit is in progress (A3001). If the special game process number is "4" or "5", it can be determined that the small hit is in progress. If it is a small hit (the result of A3001 is "Y"), it is determined whether the condition device is in operation (A30
02). If the conditional device operation information indicating that the conditional device is in operation is set, it can be determined that the conditional device is in operation.

Game control device 100, when the condition device is not in operation (the result of A3002 is "N"),
It is determined whether or not there is an input to the specific area switch 72 (A3003). When there is an input to the specific area switch 72 (the result of A3003 is "Y"), that is, winning the specific area 86 (
If there is a V prize), the conditional device operation information indicating that the conditional device is in operation is saved in the conditional device operation information area (A3004), and the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated.

If it is not a small hit (the result of A3001 is "N"), if the condition device is in operation (A3
002 result is "Y"), or when there is no input to the specific area switch 72 (A3003
result is "N"), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated without doing anything.

[Special normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (A2608) in the special figure game processing will be described.
FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure normal processing.

First, the game control device 100 is in the middle of an accessory normal process of an accessory game process described later, and
It is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter of the big winning opening is 0 (A3200). If the accessory is not being processed normally, or if the remaining ball counter of the big winning opening is not 0 (the result of A3200 is "N
”), the process proceeds to step A3215 without starting the special figure variation display game.

The game control device 100 is in the normal processing of the accessory, and the remaining ball counter of the big winning opening is 0.
If (the result of A3200 is "Y"), it is determined whether the special figure 2 reservation number (second start memory number) is 0 (A3201). If the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (the result of A3201 is "Y"), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number) is 0 (A3206)
. Then, if the number of special figures 1 pending is 0 (the result of A3206 is "Y"), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (A3211), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not started (A32
If the result of step 11 is "N"), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A
3212).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as an effect command (
A3213), effect command setting processing is performed (A3214), and the process proceeds to step A3215. On the other hand, in step A3211, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (A32
The result of 11 is "Y"), and set "0" related to special figure normal processing as the processing number (A3215
), save the processing number in the special game processing number area (A3216), and clear the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (A3217). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3218), and the special figure normal processing is terminated.

In addition, the game control device 100, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is "N
”), execute the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202), prepare the decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 2 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number as a production command (A3203
), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3204). Then, the processing shift setting processing during the special figure fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed (A3205), and the special figure usual processing is terminated.

In the special figure 2 processing transition setting process, set "1" as the processing number, save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area, clear the customer waiting demonstration flag area, special figure 2 fluctuation control flag Save the fluctuating flag in the area.

In addition, the game control device 100, if the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3206 is "N
”), execute the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3207), prepare the decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 1 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number as a production command (A3208
), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3209). Then, the processing transition setting processing during special figure fluctuation of special figure 1 is executed (A3210), and the special figure usual processing is ended.

In the special figure fluctuation process transition setting process of special figure 1, "1" is set as the processing number, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared, and the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag Save the fluctuating flag in the area.

In this way, by performing the check of the special figure 2 reservation number before the special figure 1 reservation number check, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3202) is executed The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 1 variable display game (special figure 2 pending priority digestion). That is, when the second start memory means (game control device 100) has the second start memory, the game control device 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory to the variable display based on the first start memory. It constitutes a priority control means for executing with priority over the game. In addition, when the special figure 1 change display game is to be executed with priority over the special figure 2 change display game, the determination of step A3201 is performed by special figure 1 reservation number ≠ 0 It suffices to determine whether or not

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3207) in the special figure usual process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (A3401). Subsequently, a big hit flag 1 setting process is executed to set deviation information and big hit information in the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (A3402). The details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) relating to the special figure 1 variable display game (A3403). In the special figure 1 stop pattern setting process, the stop pattern number at the time of losing, the support hit, or the big hit, and the losing stop pattern pattern corresponding to this stop pattern number, the support hit stop pattern pattern, or the big hit stop pattern pattern are saved. do. The stop symbol number at the time of the support win or the big win is determined corresponding to the support win symbol random number and the big win symbol random number, respectively.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern (A3404).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3405 ).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern (variation pattern number) which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406).
. Next, the game control device 100 executes a fluctuation start information setting process for setting the information of the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In the fluctuation start information setting process, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is performed. Also, in the fluctuation start information setting process, the special figure pending number related to the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the special figure variation display game to be started is updated by -1 (decrease by 1).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) in the special figure usual process will be described. Figure 22 is the flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 21 is performed for the second start memory. It is something to do.

The game control device 100 first determines the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2).
To save the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating to the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (A3501). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for performing processing such as setting deviation information and big hit information in the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit is executed (A3502
).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) relating to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (A3503). Furthermore, the special figure information setting processing which sets the special figure information which is the parameter in order to set fluctuation pattern is executed (A3504). Subsequently, prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). Finally, the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the information of the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3507), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves deviation information in the big hit flag 1 area and the support hit flag 1 area (A3601). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1), prepared (A3602), and the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0. (A3603). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here the first among the special figures 1). After that, according to whether or not the prepared big-hit random number coincides with the big-hit judgment value, big-hit determination processing is executed to determine whether or not the game is a big-hit (A3604).

When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3604) is a big hit (the result of A3605 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit flag 1 area where the losing information is saved in step A3601 with the big hit information. Save (A3606) and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

On the other hand, if the judgment result of the big hit judgment process (A3605) is not a big hit (the result of A3605 is "N"), optionally, based on the obtained big hit random number value, whether the special figure fluctuation display game is a support hit is executed (A3607), and it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a support hit (A3608). In this embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for judging the support hit (in other words, the same random number value is used for the judgment of the support hit and the big hit judgment). Here, the per support of the special figure fluctuation display game (time saving per) is the time saving result (specific result) that enters the time saving state from the next special figure fluctuation display game, corresponding to this time saving result, The effect control device 300 can display the time saving pattern on the display device 41 as a result of stopping the decoration special figure variation display game.

If the special figure variation display game is a support hit (the result of A3608 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the support hit information by overwriting the support hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A3601. (A3609), and ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process.
On the other hand, when the special figure variation display game is not a support hit (the result of A3608 is "N"), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated without saving the support hit information in the support hit flag 1 area.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is one of "big hit", "support hit (time saving hit)", and "lose", and there is no "minor hit". It should be noted that steps A3607-A3609 are provided as an option, these may be omitted and the result of the special figure 1 variable display game may not be provided with "support per (time reduction per)".
Also, it is possible to provide a "small hit" as a result of the special figure 1 variable display game.

In the jackpot flag 1 setting process, the support hit information is saved in the support hit flag 1 area, but since the big hit and the support hit do not overlap, the support hit information may be saved in the jackpot flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process.
This process performs the same process as the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 23 for the second start memory.

The game control device 100 first saves deviation information in the big hit flag 2 area, the small hit flag 2 area, and the support hit flag 2 area (A3701). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1), prepare (A3702), and clear the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number 1 reservation) to 0. (A3703). In addition, for the number of reservations 1, information about the special figure start memory (
random numbers, etc.). After that, according to whether or not the prepared big hit random number matches the small hit determination value, a small hit determination process for determining whether or not it is a small hit is executed (A3704).
).

When the judgment result of the small hit determination process (A3704) is a small hit (the result of A3705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 stores the small hit information in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A3701. is overwritten and saved (A3706), and the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the special figure variation display game is not a small hit (the result of A3705 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the special figure variation display game is a support hit based on the acquired big hit random number value. is executed (A3707), and it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a support hit (A3708). In this embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for judging the support hit (in other words, the same random number value is used for the judgment of the support hit and the big hit judgment). Here, the per support of the special figure fluctuation display game (time saving per) is the time saving result (specific result) that enters the time saving state from the next special figure fluctuation display game, corresponding to this specific result, The effect control device 300 can display the time saving pattern on the display device 41 as a result of stopping the decoration special figure variation display game.

When the special figure variation display game is a support hit (the result of A3708 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the support hit information by overwriting the support hit flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A3701. (A3709), and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process.

On the other hand, if the determination result of the support hit determination process (A3707) is not a support hit (A3708
If the result is "N"), optionally, a jackpot determination process may be executed to determine whether or not the prepared jackpot random number matches the jackpot determination value (A371
0). When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3710) is a big hit (the result of A3711 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit flag 2 area where the losing information is saved in step A3701 with the big hit information. Save (A3712) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3710) is not a big hit (the result of A3711 is "N"), the big hit flag 2 setting process is finished while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is one of "small hit", "sapo hit (time saving hit)", and "loss". It is also possible to provide a "jackpot" as a result of the two-variation display game.

In the big hit flag 2 setting process, the small win information is saved in the small win flag 2 area, and the support hit information is saved in the support hit flag 2 area. , small hit information and support hit information may be saved in the big hit flag 2 area.

[Jackpot determination process]
Next, the big hit determination process in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process (
A3604, A3710) will be described in detail. FIG. 25A is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. It should be noted that the big hit determination process is a process common to the big hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in the special figure reservation information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets the upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (A3800
), set the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value (A3801), and determine whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A3802). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot. The upper limit judgment value may differ between the low probability state (normal probability state other than the variable probability state) and the high probability state (variable probability state).

The game control device 100, when the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A380
The result of 2 is "Y"), set the failure (other than the big hit) as the judgment result (A3804), and finish the big hit judging process.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the target jackpot random number value is greater than the upper limit determination value (A3803). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3803 is "
Y"), and set a failure (other than a big hit) as the determination result (A3804). On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3803 is "N"), a big hit is set as the judgment result (A3805). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small hit determination process]
Next, details of the small hit determination process (A3704) in the big hit flag 2 setting process will be described. FIG. 25B is a flow chart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. In addition, the small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in the special figure reservation information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (A3
900), it is determined whether the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 2) is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (A3901). It should be noted that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit. The small hit upper limit judgment value may differ between the low probability state (ordinary probability state other than the variable probability state) and the high probability state (variable probability state).

Of course, in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game becomes a small hit and a big hit, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the above-mentioned big hit judgment It does not overlap with the value range (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In addition, in this embodiment,
Although the small hit random number is not provided uniquely and the big hit random number is used for the determination of the small hit, it is also possible to provide the unique small hit random number.

The game control device 100, when the value of the jackpot random number of the target (special figure 2) is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3901 is "Y"), sets the deviation as the judgment result (A3903),
Finish the small hit determination process.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3901 is "N"), the value of the jackpot random number of the target (special figure 2) is the small hit upper limit judgment value It is determined whether or not it is greater than (A3902). If the value of the big hit random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "Y"), set the deviation as the judgment result (A3903)
. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "
N"), and sets a small hit as the determination result (A3904). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process is terminated. In addition, in the present embodiment, the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value are set so that the small hit probability is 1/8 (= 12.5%), but the small hit probability is another value It's okay.

[Support hit determination process]
Next, the details of the support hit determination processing (A3607, A3707) in the big hit flag 1 setting processing and the big hit flag 2 setting processing will be described. FIG. 25C is a flow chart showing the procedure of the support hit determination process. In addition, the support hit determination process is a process common to the support hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also performed in the special figure pending information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets the support per upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (
A7001). Next, the lower limit judgment value of the support hit judgment value is set (A7002), and it is judged whether or not the target jackpot random number value is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7003). It should be noted that the support hit means that the jackpot random number coincides with the support hit determination value corresponding to the set probability value and the game state. The support hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the support hit judgment value, and the support hit upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the support hit judgment value. In the following cases, it is determined to be a support hit. In addition, the upper limit judgment value per support is
It may be different between the low probability state (normal probability state other than the probability variable state) and the high probability state (variable probability state).

Of course, in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game will be a support hit and a big hit, or a support hit and a small hit, the range of the support hit judgment value (the lower limit judgment value per support and the upper limit judgment value per support) Between) does not overlap with the range of the aforementioned big hit determination value and small hit determination value. In this embodiment, the random number for the support hit is not provided independently, and the random number for the support hit is used to determine the hit for the support.

The game control device 100, when the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the support hit lower limit judgment value (
The result of A7003 is "Y"), and set a failure (other than support hit) as the judgment result (A70
05), the support hit determination process is terminated.

In addition, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the support hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A7003 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value. is determined (A7004). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value for the support (the result of A7004 is "Y"), set the deviation (other than the support) as the judgment result (
A7005). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the support upper limit judgment value (A70
04 result is "N"), and the support hit is set as the determination result (A7006). When the determination result is set, the support hit determination process is terminated.

In the support hit determination process, support hit determination (time reduction determination) is performed by a lottery using a big hit random number value. In the support hit judgment (time reduction judgment) as a lottery, when the big hit random number matches the support hit judgment value (time reduction judgment value), the result of the support hit result (time reduction result, specific result) is obtained and the time reduction is set. be. The support hit determination value is different from the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value.

In addition, in order to make a difference, the probability of winning per support (range of judgment value for support per hit / range of random numbers for jackpot) may be different for each probability setting value, and for convenience, support for each probability setting value The winning probabilities may be the same. Setting 1 (or low setting side) is easy to win per support,
Setting 6 (or high setting side) may set the probability of winning per supporter so that it is difficult to win per supporter to alleviate the disadvantage of low setting, or set it on the high setting side It may match the expectation of the player who expects that he/she can easily win the winning prize. Also, the winning probability per support may be changed monotonously from setting 1 to setting 6, or may not be monotonous, such as changing every two stages of setting. The odd-numbered setting and the even-numbered setting may have different winning probabilities per supporter to increase the player's interest in estimating the probability set value.

In addition, the winning probability of the support may be differentiated between the low probability of the jackpot probability (other than during the variable probability state) and the high probability (during the variable probability state), or may be the same for simplification. In order to make it easier to win during low probability (other than during variable state) and difficult to win during high probability (during variable state),
You can set the winning probability per support to alleviate the disadvantage during the low probability, or set it on the contrary,
It may match the expectation of the player who expects that he/she can easily win the support prize during high probability. for example,
The winning probability for each supporter may be set so that the player wins for each supporter only during the low probability (the winning probability for each supporter is zero during the high probability), thereby alleviating the disadvantage during the low probability.

In addition, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may have different winning probabilities per support for sharpness, or may be the same for convenience. For example, in order to increase the support hit in the general electric support state (time saving state and probability variable state), the winning probability of the support hit in the special figure 2 variable display game may be made larger than the special figure 1 variable display game. Conversely, in order to improve the interest of the game in the normal game state, the probability of winning per support in the special figure 1 variation display game may be made higher than in the special figure 2 variation display game. In short, the probability of winning per support in one of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game is set to zero, and the support hit only in the other special figure variation display game. may occur.

When the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is the support hit result (time saving result), the stop symbol (stop symbol number, stop A time-saving pattern (time-saving pattern number, time-saving pattern pattern) is set as a pattern pattern), and the time-saving state is entered from the next special figure fluctuation display game. That is, in this case, it suddenly becomes a time-saving state without going through a big hit (suddenly time-saving). Also, in this case, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the time saving pattern is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the time saving pattern (decorative time saving pattern) is displayed as the decoration stop pattern by the production control device 300 in the display device 41. .

As the time saving pattern displayed on the display device 41, for example, only the left pattern and the middle pattern are aligned.
1, 1, 3” and so on. There are no restrictions on time-saving patterns if they are decided in advance, but there are regularities such as "1, 2, 3" where the numbers are arranged in order, or "1, 3, 1" where only the left and right patterns are aligned. However, it is preferable because it is easy for the player to remember. A plurality of time saving patterns may be prepared, and the number of special figure fluctuation display games in which the time saving state continues (time saving number of times) may be determined for each time saving pattern.

The lamp display parts 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80 emit light in a specific manner as a fourth special pattern (fourth pattern) in the case of the time saving result (time saving pattern), unlike the case of the big hit result or the small hit result. do. For example, the lamp display units 1 and 2 may emit light in a warm color such as red in the case of a big hit result or a small hit result, and in the case of a time saving result (time saving pattern), a neutral color such as green or blue Light may be emitted in a color system or a cool color system (that is, a color other than a warm color system). Moreover, it will be in a light-extinguishing state in the case of a deviation. Therefore, when a time-saving pattern is displayed as a stop pattern, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that a big win has occurred, and the player can easily grasp that the winning time is short.

In addition, if the number of special figure fluctuation display games executed after the end of the jackpot state (excluding the number of times in the probability state) reaches a predetermined number of times (so-called ceiling number of times, short-time ceiling), even if you do not win the support Enter a time-saving state (play time). At this time, if the result of the special figure variation display game is a loss, the lamp display parts 1 and 2 are turned off, and if a small win or a big win, they emit light in a warm color. At this time, the lamp display parts 1 and 2 may emit light as a fourth pattern in a cold color in order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the time-saving state is entered unless a small win or a big win is made. . The predetermined number of times (ceiling number of times) is, for example, 500 times. In this case, the special figure display device or the display device 41 displays a missing pattern (a time saving pattern may be used) or a small hit pattern (if it is a small hit without a V prize) as a stop pattern, and the next special figure fluctuation display game. Enter the short-time state from. In this case, the time saving pattern displayed on the display device 41 is, for example, "3, 3, 5" in which only the left pattern and the middle pattern are aligned ("1, 1,
3” may be used).

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop design setting process (A3403) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop design setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 indicates a jackpot, that is, whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A4001). jackpot flag 1
is a big hit (result of A4001 is "Y"), the jackpot pattern random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4002). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot design table is set (A4003), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop design number area of RWM (A4004). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table (A40
05), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure indicator (here, special figure 1 indicator 5
This is for setting the symbols to be stopped in 1) and the symbols to be stopped on the display device 41 . Then, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired, saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area of RWM (A4007), the fanfare information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the fanfare information area (A4008). These information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
Save in the time reduction determination data area (A4009). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of a time saving state after the end of the big hit (with or without time saving), and is used in the special figure 1 big hit end process and special figure 2 big hit end process described later. Subsequently, the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (or stop symbol number, symbol A to be described later) is saved (A4010). After that, the process proceeds to step A4020.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4001 is "N"), the game control device 100 optionally determines whether the support hit flag 1 is a support hit (A4
011). If the support per flag 1 is per support (the result of A4011 is "Y"), load a random number from the pattern random number storage area per special figure 1 (reservation number 1) (A4012), per special figure 1 support A pattern table is set (A4013). Then, referring to the special figure 1 per support symbol table, the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4014). Subsequently, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4015). After that, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4016),
The effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (A4017). after that,
The process proceeds to step A4020.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4001 is "N") and the support hit flag 1 is not a support hit (the result of A4011 is "N
”), the stop symbol number at the time of losing is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4018), and the losing stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4019). After that, the process proceeds to step A4020. It should be noted that if the process (A3607-A3609) related to the support hit in the jackpot flag 1 setting process is not executed, if the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of A4001 is "N"), without executing steps A4011-A4017 , to step A4018.

After steps A4010, A4017, and A4019, the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decoration special figure 1 command as a production command in a decoration special figure 1 command area (A4020 ). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes an effect command setting process (A4021). Thereby, the decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the production control device 300 .

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4022), and clears the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) to 0 (A4023). ). After that, the special figure 1 stop design setting process is terminated. It should be noted that, by the symbol variation control process described above, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol pattern or the stop symbol number (jackpot symbol, time-saving symbol, lost symbol, etc.) is stopped and displayed by the special symbol 1 indicator 51.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop design setting process (A3503) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop design setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit, that is, whether or not the small hit information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (A4101). small hit flag 2
is a small hit (result of A4101 is "Y"), the jackpot design random number is loaded from the special figure 2 jackpot design random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4102). Next, a special figure 2 jackpot design table is set (A4103), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop design number area of RWM (A4104). This process selects the type of special result.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball wins V by opening the second special variable winning device 39 with a small hit, and a big win occurs immediately after the small win, so the special figure 2 variable display game is a small win. Even if the small hit flag 2 is a small hit, the big hit pattern random number is loaded. but,
It is also possible to load the small winning design random number (A2911) and acquire the stop design number corresponding to the small winning design random number. In this configuration, when V is won (the result of A3003 in FIG. 19 is "Y")
When it becomes), load the jackpot pattern random number, acquire the stop pattern number, and step A4107
, the processing from A4110 may be executed.

After that, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A41
05), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure indicator (here, special figure 2 indicator 5
This is for setting the symbols to be stopped in 2) and the symbols to be stopped on the display device 41 . In the case of a small hit, a special figure 2 small hit stop design information table may be used instead of the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table. Then, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired, saved in the RWM special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (A4107), the fanfare information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the fanfare information area Save to (A4
108). These information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
Save in the time reduction determination data area (A4109). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of a time saving state after the end of the big hit (with or without time saving), and is used in the special figure 1 big hit end process and special figure 2 big hit end process described later. Subsequently, the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (or stop symbol number, symbol BG to be described later) is saved (A4010). After that, the process proceeds to step A4121.

On the other hand, if the small win flag 2 is not a small win (the result of A4101 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big win flag 2 is a big win, that is, the big win information is saved in the big win flag 2 area. (A4111). If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (the result of A4111 is "Y"), the process moves to step A4102 and later, but the special figure 2 big hit pattern table and the special figure 2 big hit stop pattern information table that are different from the case of the small hit may be used.

If the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4111 is "N
”), and the support hit flag 2 determines whether or not it is a support hit (A4112). When the support per flag 2 is per support (the result of A4112 is "Y"), load the random number from the special figure 2 per support pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4113), and the special figure 2 per support A pattern table is set (A4114). Then, refer to the special figure 2 support per symbol table, acquire the stop design number corresponding to the loaded random number, and save it in the special figure 2 stop design number area (A4
115). Subsequently, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4116), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area ( A4117). Thereafter, the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (A4118), and the process proceeds to step A4121.

In the game control device 100, the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (the result of A4101 is "N")
, If the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4111 is "N") and the support hit flag 2 is not a support hit (the result of A4112 is "N"), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is special figure 2 It is saved in the stop symbol number area (A4119), and the lost stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4120). After that, the process proceeds to step A4121.

In addition, in this embodiment, since "big hit" is not provided as a result of the special figure 2 variation display game, the process of step A4111 is optional and need not be executed. That is, when the big hit flag 2 is not a small hit (the result of A4101 is "N"), the process of step A4112 may be performed without executing step A4111.

After steps A4110, A4118, and A4120, the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decoration special figure 2 command as a production command in a decoration special figure 2 command area (A4121 ). By the above processing, the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes an effect command setting process (A4122). The decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the production control device 300 .

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4123), and clears the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) to 0 (A4124). ). In addition, when the small hit design random number (A2911) is extracted, the special figure 2 small hit design random number storage area (for reservation number 1) may be cleared to 0. After that, the special figure 2 stop design setting processing is ended. It should be noted that, by the symbol variation control process described above, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol pattern or the stop symbol number (jackpot symbol, time-saving symbol, lost symbol, etc.) is stopped and displayed by the special symbol 2 display device 52.

In this way, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning port 36, and the normal variable winning device 37 detects the game ball. A variable display game executing means for executing a special figure 2 variable display game as a variable display game based on. Also, the game control device 100 serves as variable display game execution control means for controlling execution of the variable display game based on the determination result of the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, special figure information setting processing (A340
4, A3504) will be described in detail. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure information setting process. In this embodiment, the probability state (low probability/high probability, with/without time saving) does not directly affect the distribution of fluctuations, but the production mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. One production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence or absence of the time saving state, the progress of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the like. In addition, based on the probability state, the presence or absence of the time saving state, the progress of the special figure variation display game, etc., the variation may be directly distributed.

The game control device 100 first sets the first half variation group selection pointer table (A
4201), acquire the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the production mode information (A4
202). Next, set the first half variation group selection offset table (A4203)
, To acquire the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) and the stop design pattern (A4204).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the first half variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variation distribution information 1 area (A4206
). As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the fluctuation distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the presentation mode is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used for selecting a fluctuation group later. However, although it depends on the specifications of the model, when the number of holds is large, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of loss, so in cases other than loss, the number of holds does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation. A variation group includes multiple variation patterns, and when determining a variation pattern, first select a variation group, and then select one variation pattern from this variation group. ing.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the second half variation group selection pointer table (A
4207), acquire the second half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the presentation mode information (A4
208). Next, set the second half fluctuation group selection offset table (A4209)
, Acquire the offset data corresponding to the target special figure pending number and the stop symbol pattern (A42
10).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the second half fluctuation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4211), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (A4212
), to end the special figure information setting process. As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area, the fluctuation distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the presentation mode is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing fluctuations in the second half (types of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, only in the case of loss, the rate of reach changes according to the number of holds (the rate of reach is lower when the number of holds is large), so in cases other than losses, the number of holds is distributed in the second half as a result. does not affect

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, variation pattern setting processing (A
3406, A3506) will be described in detail. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variation pattern setting process.

The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation form from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half fluctuation pattern is set, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

The game control device 100 first sets the variable group selection address table (A430
1) Acquire the address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to fluctuation distribution information 2, prepare it (A4302), and load fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for reserved number 1) , prepare (A4303). In this embodiment, the structure of the second half variation group table is different for winning and losing. Specifically, the size is 1 byte for winning, and 2 bytes for losing. Since the probability of winning is lower than the probability of losing, and even 1 byte is sufficient, the size of the winning is 1 byte from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity. Therefore, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used at the time of winning. In addition, since the probability of losing is higher than the probability of winning, and it is desired to produce more diverse effects, the size for losing is set to 2 bytes.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special figure variation display game is a loss (A4304), and if it is a loss (the result of A4304 is "Y"), performs 2-byte distribution processing (A4305). Then, the process proceeds to step A4307. Also, if it is not lost (the result of A4304 is "N"), sorting processing (A4306) is performed, and step A
The processing of 4307 is performed.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the address of the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the distribution, prepares (A4307), and stores the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (holding (for formula 1) to load the variation pattern random number 2 and prepare (A4308). Then, the allocation process is executed (A4309), the second half variation number obtained as a result of the allocation is acquired, and saved in the second half variation number area (A4310). Through this processing, the second half variation pattern is set.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation group table (A4311), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the variation allocation information 1 and the second half variation number (A4312). Then, the address of the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation pattern selection table) corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (A4313), and the fluctuation pattern random number from the target fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for reserved number 1) 3 is loaded and ready (A4314). after that,
Perform the allocation process (A4315), acquire the first half variation number obtained as a result of allocation, save it in the first half variation number area (A4316), and end the variation pattern setting process. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte allocation process (A4305) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the procedure of 2-byte allocation processing. 2
The byte distribution process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The game control device 100 first checks whether or not the head data of the selection table (second half variation group table prepared in A4302) is a code without sorting (that is, "0") (A4401). Here, the second half fluctuation group table stores predetermined sorting values in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table.
In the second half fluctuation group table that defines only the second half fluctuation selection table that becomes "no reach" (for example, some fluctuation group tables when the result is lost), there is no need for sorting, so the sorting value is "0" , that is, a code without sorting is specified at the top.

Then, if the leading data of the selection table (second half variation group table) is a code without sorting (the result of A4402 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result. (A4407) to end the 2-byte allocation process. On the other hand, if the top data of the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is not a code without sorting (the result of A4402 is "N"), one sorting specified first in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) Get the value (A4403).

Subsequently, the distribution value obtained in step A4403 is subtracted from the random value prepared in step A4303 (value of variation pattern random number 1) to calculate a new random value (A4404).
, it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405). If the new random number is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "N"), the address of the next distribution value is updated (A4406), and then the process proceeds to step A4403. The following processing is performed. That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is acquired (A4403), and then the previous step A4405
Calculate a new random number by subtracting the sorting value from the random number that has already been judged (A44
04), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405).

In step A4405, the above process is judged to be smaller than "0" (A4
Execute until the result of 405 is "Y"). As a result, any one of the second half fluctuation selection tables is selected from at least one second half fluctuation selection table defined in the selection tables (second half fluctuation group tables). Then, if it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"), the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result is updated (A4407), and 2 bytes End the sorting process.

[Distribution process]
Next, distribution processing (A4306, A4309, A43
15) will be described in detail. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the procedure of sorting processing. In the distribution process, based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2, the second half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is selected from the second half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group), or based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3, the first half fluctuation selection table ( It is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

The game control device 100 first selects the target selection table (the second half variation group table prepared in A4302, the second half variation selection table prepared in step A4307, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A4313). is a code for no sorting (that is, "0") (A4501). Here, the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table are predetermined in association with at least one second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number), or first half variation pattern (first half variation number). However, in the case of a selection table that does not require sorting, the sorting value "0", that is, a code indicating no sorting is specified at the head.

Then, the game control device 100, when the top data of the target selection table (the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table) is a code without sorting (the result of A4502 is "Y"), The address of the data corresponding to the sorting result is updated (A4507), and the sorting process ends. On the other hand, if the head data of the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table, first half variation selection table) is not a code without sorting (the result of A4502 is "N"), the target selection table (
A first sorting value specified in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table) is obtained (A4503).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the sorting value obtained in step A4503 from the random numbers prepared in steps A4303, A4308, and A4314 (variation pattern random number 1, variation pattern random number 2, and variation pattern random number 3). to calculate a new random number (A45
04), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505).
Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "N"),
After updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4506), the process moves to step A4503 and the subsequent processes are performed.

That is, the distribution value specified next in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (A4503), and then the randomness determined in the previous step A4505 A new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the numerical value (A4504), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). In step A4505 of the above process, the new random number is set to "0
” (the result of A4505 is “Y”). As a result, at least one second half fluctuation selection table, second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), or first half fluctuation pattern (first half Any one of the second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number), and first half variation pattern (first half variation number) is selected from among the variation numbers).

Then, when the game control device 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"), it updates the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result. (A4507), the sorting process ends.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the fluctuation start information setting process (A
3407, A3507) will be described in detail. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the change start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the variation display game to be started is the special figure 2 variation display game (A4600a). If the variation display game to be started is not a special figure 2 variation display game but a special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A4600a is "N"), clear the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 ( A4601). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (A4602), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (A4602).
4603). Furthermore, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (A4604), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (A4605).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A460
6), save the added value (total fluctuation time value) in the special game processing timer area (A4607)
. After that, prepare a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (A4608),
Prepare a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number as an effect command (
A4609), effect command setting processing is performed (A4610). Next, update the special figure pending number corresponding to the fluctuation pattern discrimination flag indicating the fluctuation pattern to be started (special figure 1 or special figure 2) by -1 (
A4611), set the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determination flag (A4
612). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4613), the free area after the shift is cleared (A4614), and the fluctuation start information setting process ends.

First, when the variation display game to be started is the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A4600a is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit or a big win. It is determined whether or not (A4600b). If the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit or a big hit (the result of A4600b is "Y"), the variation display game to be started is special figure 1
The processes after step A4601 are executed in the same manner as in the case of the variable display game. It should be noted that, unlike the present embodiment, even if the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a support hit, step A460
The configuration may be such that the processes after 1 are executed.

The game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is neither a small hit nor a big hit (the result of A4600b is "N"), that is, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a losing result, Save the fluctuation time value (total fluctuation time value) corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation count (the execution number of special figure 2 fluctuation display games) after the end of the big hit in the special figure game processing timer area (A4615)
.

Therefore, the fluctuation time value of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation time value of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the case of a small hit or a big hit are time values that are not fixed and set by sorting (lottery), The variation time value of the special figure 2 variation display game in the case is a fixed time value set for each special figure 2 variation number after the end of the big hit. That is, the variable time value of the special figure 2 variable display game is subjected to rotation speed control. It should be noted that it is also possible to configure the variable time value of the special figure 2 variable display game in the case of a small win or a big win to be a fixed time value.

After that, the game control device 100 outputs a variation command (MODE, AC
TION) is prepared as an effect command (A4616), and the processing after step A4610 is executed.

It should be noted that, as in the modification described later, when the support state (support mode, general electricity open pattern) related to the aspect (content) of the general electricity support is variable, the fluctuation time value is the number of special figure 2 fluctuations after the end of the big hit In addition, it may be set corresponding to the support state.

Information about the start of the special figure variation display game is set by the above processing. i.e.
The game control device 100 serves as determination means for determining various random numbers stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Also, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information in the start memory.

Then, the information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 receives the information on the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and responds to the determined fluctuation pattern. Set the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information on the stop pattern, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game A variation command including information about a pattern is mentioned, and a command is transmitted to production control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command earlier than the variation command, the processing in the production control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during special figure fluctuation.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 is being changed (the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed) (A4801). If the special figure 2 is not changing, that is, if the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed) (the result of A4801 is "N"), set the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4802).

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is during special figure 2 fluctuation (the result of A4801 is "Y")
, It is determined whether the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit or a big hit (A480
3). If the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit or a big hit (the result of A4803 is "Y"), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (A4802). The display time (stop display time) is the display time of the stop symbol (stop display) that is the result of the variable display game. It should be noted that, unlike the present embodiment, even if the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is per support, it may be configured to move to the processing of step A4802.

The game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not a small hit or a big hit,
That is, in the case of loss (the result of A4803 is "N"), the number of special figure 2 fluctuations after the end of the big hit (
To set the display time corresponding to the number of executions of special figure 2 fluctuation display game) (A4804).

Therefore, the display time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the display time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the case of a small hit or a big hit are not fixed based on the stop pattern pattern set by lottery, The display time of the special figure 2 variation display game in the case is fixedly set for each special figure 2 variation number (the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game) after the end of the big hit. It should be noted that it is also possible to fix the display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the case of a small hit or a big hit.

In addition, as described later, when the support state (support mode, general electricity release pattern) regarding the aspect (content) of the general electricity support is variable, the display time (stop display time) is the special figure 2 after the end of the big hit
It may be set corresponding to not only the number of fluctuations but also the support state.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the display time set in step A4802 or A4804 in the special figure game processing timer area (A4805). Subsequently, the game control device 10
0 judges whether or not it is during general electricity support (during time saving state) (A4806). If the general electric power is not being supported (the result of A4806 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A4813.
If it is during general electricity support (the result of A4806 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not it is a variation of the special figure 1 variation display game (A4807). If it is a variation of the special figure 1 variation display game (A48
07 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A4810.

If the game control device 100 is a variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A4807 is "N"), the time reduction variation number 2 is updated by -1 (decrease by 1) (A4808), and the time reduction variation It is determined whether or not the number of times 2 is 0 (A4809). If the time reduction variation number 2 is 0 (the result of A4809 is "Y"), execute the time reduction end setting process for setting the end of the time reduction (
A4812).

The game control device 100, if the number of time reduction fluctuations 2 is not 0 (the result of A4809 is "N
”), update the time reduction variation count 1 by −1 (decrease by 1) (A4810), and determine whether or not the time reduction variation count 1 is 0 (A4811). If the number of time reduction fluctuations 1 is not 0 (
If the result of A4811 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A4813. On the other hand, when the time reduction variation number 1 is 0 (the result of A4811 is "Y"), the time reduction end setting process for setting the end of time reduction is executed (A4812). After that, an effect mode information check process, which will be described later, is executed (A4813).

After that, the game control device 100 executes the process shift setting process during special figure display (A4814
). In the special figure displaying process shift setting process, the process number "2" related to the special figure displaying process is set, the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area, and the special figure 1 indicator 51 is related to the fluctuation stop. The stop flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area, and the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 indicator 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area. After that, the process during special figure fluctuation ends.

[Time saving end setting processing]
Next, the details of the time saving end setting process (A4812) in the special figure fluctuation process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the time saving end setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal relating to the time saving end in the external information output data area of the RWM (A4901). Here, the signal related to the time saving end is off data of the big hit 2 signal. As a result, a signal relating to the end of time saving is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) via the external information terminal 71 .

In addition, in the normal game state, the opening time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is very short or the winning probability of the normal pattern variable display game is very low, so there is no winning to the normal variable prize winning device 37 and the second start memory is does not occur. For this reason, at the time of the time saving end, the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory,
When the special figure 2 hold) remains as the remaining hold, the output of the on-data of the jackpot 2 signal is continued (this does not cause any inconvenience), and the special figure fluctuation display game related to the last remaining hold is performed. When the variable display stops, the off data of the two jackpot signals (signal relating to the end of time saving) may be output to the external device.

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the time saving end in the test signal output data area of RWM (A4902). As a result, a signal relating to the end of time saving is output as a test signal to the test-firing test apparatus. The signal related to the time saving end here is, for example, off data of the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, off data of the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal, off data of the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, normal electric role They are OFF data of the object 1 open extended state signal and OFF data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal. Then, save the number without time saving in the game state display number area of RWM (A4903), save the low probability & no time saving flag in the normal game mode flag area of RWM (A4904), RWM special game Save special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the mode flag area (A4905).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 clears the RWM time reduction variation frequency 1 region in which the time reduction variation frequency 1 is stored (A4906), and the RWM time reduction variation frequency 2 region in which the time reduction variation frequency 2 is stored. is cleared (A4907). Then, R
Save in the test signal output data area of WM (A4908), play state display number 2 of RWM
The number in the left-handed state is saved in the area (A4909).

After that, the normal base state information is saved in the normal base state judgment area of RWM (A49
10). Here, the normal base state information is a value indicating a normal game state, which is a period during which a base value (ball output rate in a normal game state) is calculated. After that, the time saving end setting process is ended.

Thus, by executing the time saving end setting process, appropriately from the time saving state (special figure low probability and general electricity support state) normally game state (special figure low probability and general electricity support no state)
can be transferred to

[Production mode information check process]
Next, the details of the production mode information check process (A4813) in the special figure fluctuation process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the procedure of effect mode information check processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (A5001). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (the result of A5001 is "Y"), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games, and the effect mode is selected to continue until the next big hit, for example.

Also, the game control device 100, if the next mode transition information is not an update no code (A50
The result of 01 is "N") updates the number of remaining rotations of the effect which is the executable number of times of the special figure fluctuation display game until the change of the effect mode by -1 (A5002), Whether the remaining number of rotations of the effect has become 0 (A5003). Here, the number of rotations remaining in the effect is updated by -1 only when the main special figure variation display game is executed this time, but is also updated by -1 when it is not the main variation display game. Configurations are also possible.

One of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game is determined as the main variation display game according to the game state and the like. For example, the main variation display game (main variation display game) is the one of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game that is frequently executed, and the variation display game that is not the main variation display game (secondary variation display game) is a special figure 1
It is the one that is not frequently executed between the variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. In addition, the game control device 100 and/or the effect control device 300 may store information (special figure 1 or special figure 2) indicating a main variable display game according to the game state or the like.

If the effect remaining rotation number is not 0 (the result of A5003 is "N"), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In addition, when the number of rotations remaining in the production becomes 0 (the result of A5003 is "Y"), that is, when the production mode is shifted from the next special figure variation display game, the production mode information address table is set (A5004). , acquires the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information (A5005).

Then, the game control device 100 acquires the production mode number of the production mode to be shifted, and RW
Save it in the production mode number area in M (A5006), obtain the production remaining rotation number (initial value) of the production mode to be shifted, and save it in the production remaining rotation number area in RWM (A5007)
, acquires the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transitioned, and saves it in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (A5008).

In addition, when the production mode is shifted by the end of the time saving state (time reduction variation number 1 or 2 = 0), the production remaining number of rotations (initial value) of the production mode to be shifted is the specified remaining number of reservations (for example, 4 to 9). The remaining pending number is the number of special figure 2 pending (remaining pending) that is digested after the time saving state ends, and is the number of special figure 2 fluctuations after the time saving ends. Remaining suspension is caused by winning a prize to the normal variable winning device 37 that is opened by a normal game hit during the time saving state. In this way, it is possible to set the remaining reservation digestion mode (FIG. 54) as a production mode corresponding to the digestion of the remaining reservation (special figure 2 reservation, special figure 2 start memory).

Alternatively, when the production mode is transferred when the opening of the normal variable winning device 37 opened by the normal game in the time saving state (corresponding to the latter half opening described later) is completed, the production of the production mode to be transferred remains. You may set the number of rotations (initial value) to the special figure 2 reservation number at that time. As a result, after the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, which is opened by the normal game in the time saving state, is completed, the mode after the normal electric open end (Fig. 71A) is set as a production mode corresponding to the digestion of the special figure 2 pending. Can be set. Furthermore, in this case, the number of production remaining rotations (initial value) of the production mode to be shifted by the end of the time saving state (time reduction fluctuation number 1 or 2 = 0) is a predetermined value according to the number of times of time saving (for example, the number of times of saving time from 6 subtracted value) to set the pre-commercial power disconnection mode (FIG. 71A).

Furthermore, when the production mode is switched by the end of the time saving state (time reduction fluctuation number 1 or 2 = 0), the production remaining rotation number (initial value) of the production mode to be shifted is the special figure 2 at that time
It may be set to a predetermined number below the number of reservations or the number of special 2 reservations. In this way, as a production mode corresponding to the digestion of the special figure 2 reservation number or the predetermined number of remaining reservations (special figure 2 reservation, special figure 2 start memory) at the end of time saving, the remaining reservation digestion mode (Fig. 71B) can be set. The remaining number of rotations (initial value) of the production mode that shifts after the remaining hold digestion mode during the time saving is set to the specified number of remaining holds (
For example, it can be set to a value (excessive hold number) obtained by subtracting the number of remaining holds digested in the time-saving generation remaining hold digestion mode from 10). In this way, it is possible to set the excessive retention digestion mode (FIG. 71B) as a production mode after the time saving during the occurrence residual retention digestion mode.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command (including information on the probability state, information on the presence or absence of time saving, and information on the production mode) corresponding to the newly set production mode number as a production command (A5009). , determines whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at power failure recovery (A5010). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at power failure recovery (result of A5010 is "Y"), that is, if the probability information command has not changed, the presentation mode information check process is terminated.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area when power is restored (result of A5010 is "N"), save the prepared probability information command in the transmission command area when power is restored (A5011 ), an effect command setting process for setting the probability information command as the effect command is executed (A5012).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed as an effect command (A5013), and executes effect command setting processing (A5014
). Thereby, the production|presentation control apparatus 300 can acquire the production|presentation remaining rotation speed. Next, a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the time reduction variation count 2 is prepared as an effect command (A50
15), effect command setting processing (A5016) is executed. Thereby, the production control device 3
00 can acquire the number of time reduction fluctuations 2. In addition, the game control device 100 may similarly prepare the time reduction variation number 1 as an effect command and execute the effect command setting process.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode when a new effect mode number is acquired in step A5006 (A5017).
If it is not the left-handed mode (the result of A5017 is "N"), the effect mode information check process is terminated. Also, in the case of left-handed mode (result of A5017 is "Y")
, the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A5018), the effect command setting process is executed (A5019), and the effect mode information check process is terminated.

In addition, in the above, the determination result (A500
Regardless of 3), the production rotation speed command corresponding to the updated production remaining rotation speed (A5002) and the time reduction fluctuation frequency command corresponding to the updated time reduction fluctuation frequency 1, 2 (A4808, A4810) are also production commands. , and the effect command setting process may be executed.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure displaying process (A2610) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process during special figure display. FIG. 36A shows the first half of the processing during special figure display, and FIG. 36B shows the second half of the processing during special figure display.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the variation of the special figure 1 is executed this time (A5101). That is, it is determined whether or not the display of the stop symbol (stop display) is related to the special figure 1 variable display game. If the variation of the special figure 1 is executed this time (the result of A5101 is "Y"), load the jackpot flag 1 (A5102), clear the jackpot flag 1 area (A5103), and load the jackpot flag 1 determines whether it is a big hit (A5
104).

When the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot, the game control device 100 (A5104
result is "Y"), conditional device activation information indicating that the conditional device is in operation is saved in the conditional device activation information area (A5105), and the process proceeds to step A5106. When the loaded jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of A5104 is "N"), step A511
Move to the process of 1.

Then, the game control device 100 executes a special figure normal process transition setting process (A5106).
. In the special figure normal processing shift setting process, 0 is set as the processing number related to the special figure normal processing, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area, and the fluctuation symbol determination flag area is cleared. After that, the processing during special figure display is ended.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 (A510
The result of 1 is "N"), the jackpot flag 2 is loaded (A5107), and the jackpot flag 2 area is cleared (A5108). It is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (A5109). If the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (the result of A5109 is "Y"),
The conditional device activation information indicating that the conditional device is in operation is saved in the conditional device activation information area (A5110), and the process proceeds to step A5106. If the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A5109 is "N"), that is, if it is a small hit or a loss, step A5
111 processing.

In addition, in this embodiment, since "jackpot" is not provided as a result of the special figure 2 variation display game, the processing from step A5107 to A5110 is optional and need not be executed. That is, after step A5101, the processing of step A5111 may be performed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is currently in the special figure high probability (during the variable probability state) (A5111). When not in the special figure high probability (the result of A5111 is "N"), whether there is a ceiling reached flag indicating that the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed has reached the ceiling number (time saving ceiling) Determine (A5112).

If the game control device 100 does not have a ceiling reached flag (the result of A5112 is "N"
), the ceiling counter value in the RWM ceiling counter area is updated by +1 (increased by 1) (A51
13). Then, whether the number of times the special figure variation display game (including the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game) has been executed in a state other than the probability variation state (that is, the ceiling counter value) has reached the ceiling number of times is determined (A5114). For example, the ceiling count is 500 times. When the ceiling number of times is reached (the result of A5114 is "Y"), the ceiling time saving activation flag indicating that the ceiling time saving occurs and the ceiling reached flag indicating that the ceiling number of times has been reached are set (on) (A5115 ). In addition, it is also possible to configure the ceiling time reduction activation flag and the ceiling reached flag collectively as one flag.

The ceiling reached flag is cleared when a big win occurs, but is not cleared unless a big win occurs. Therefore, once reaching the ceiling number of times, if the time saving number of times ends without hitting the jackpot, the ceiling reached flag remains set (on), henceforth, the ceiling time saving will not occur, and the ceiling The counter value is also not updated.

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is in the special figure high probability (in the probability variable state) (the result of A5111 is "Y"), if there is a ceiling reached flag (the result of A5112 is "Y"), the number of times of ceiling (The result of A5114 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (A5116).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit fanfare command as an effect command (A5117
), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5118). Then, the decoration special figure 2 command is loaded as a production command from the decoration special figure 2 command area, prepared (A5119), and the production command setting process is executed (A5120). After that, a small hit opening pre-processing shift setting process is executed (A5121), and the process during special figure display is ended.

In the small hit opening pre-processing transition setting process, 3 is set as the processing number related to the small hit opening pre-processing, the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area, and the time before opening the small hit (for example, 300m
s) is saved in the special game processing timer area. In addition, the signal regarding the start of the small winning game (
For example, turning on the jackpot 1 signal (output at jackpot and minor hit)) is saved in the external information output data area.

On the other hand, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit, that is, if the result of A5116 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether there is a ceiling time saving activation flag indicating that the ceiling time saving occurs. (A5122). If there is a ceiling time saving activation flag (the result of A5122 is "Y"), save the initial value that will be the ceiling time saving number (time saving number of times due to ceiling time saving) in the time reduction fluctuation number 1 area and the time reduction fluctuation number 2 area (A5123 ). The initial values (for example, 704 times and 700 times) of the time reduction variation frequency 1 and the time reduction variation frequency 2 in the case of the ceiling time reduction described above are saved here. The initial value may be determined by lottery. Subsequently, in order to generate a time saving state due to ceiling time saving, support operation setting processing is executed (A5127), special figure normal processing transition setting processing is executed (A5128), and processing during special figure display is completed. In the special figure normal process shift setting process, the process number "0" relating to the special figure normal process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

Game control device 100, if there is no ceiling time saving activation flag indicating that the ceiling time saving occurs (the result of A5122 is "N"), the support hit flag 2 determines whether it is a support hit (
A5124). And if the support hit flag 2 is not a support hit (the result of A5124 is "
N"), and the support hit flag 1 determines whether or not it is a support hit (A5125).

If either the support hit flag 1 or the support hit flag 2 is a support hit (the result of A5124 or A5125 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the initial value corresponding to the time reduction determination data to the time reduction variation count. Save to 1 area and 2 areas of time reduction variation count (A5126)
. The initial values (for example, 34 times and 30 times, or 104 times and 100 times) of the time reduction fluctuation number 1 and the time reduction fluctuation number 2 in the case of the support hit result (sudden time reduction) are saved here It will be. Subsequently, in order to generate a time-saving state (suddenly time-saving) by the time-saving design, the support operation setting process is executed (A5127), and the special figure normal process transition setting process is executed (A5128).
, To end the special figure display process.

In addition, the time reduction determination data is set corresponding to the stop design number in the special figure 1 stop design setting process (A3403) and the special figure 2 stop design setting process (A3503). The value (that is, the number of times of time saving) will be determined by lottery based on the pattern random numbers per support.

If both the support hit flag 1 and the support hit flag 2 are not support hit (the result of A5124 and A5125 is "N"), the game control device 100 does not execute the support operation setting process for setting the time saving, Usually, the process transition setting process is executed (A5128), and the process during special figure display is terminated.

As described above, in the processing during special figure display, setting of time saving such as setting of time saving number of times (that is, initial value of time saving variation number of times) is executed with respect to ceiling time saving and sudden time saving. In addition, time saving setting such as setting of the number of times of working hour saving is executed in the jackpot end processing with respect to time saving by the big hit, that is, time saving starting from the end of the big hit state.

In addition, the special figure display process is executed when the special figure game processing timer set by the stop display time (A4805) reaches 0 (A2604, A2610), so the stop result of the special figure fluctuation display game It will be executed when the display ends (or when it ends: including when it ends or just before it ends). Therefore, when the display of the stop result of the special figure fluctuation display game ends (substantially equal when starting the next special figure fluctuation display game if it starts), the number of time reduction fluctuations (A5123, A5126) is set, Time saving state due to ceiling time saving and sudden time saving starts.

[Support operation setting process]
Next, the details of the support operation setting process (A5127) in the process during special figure display will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the support operation setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal relating to the time saving start in the external information output data area (A5301). As a result, at the time of sudden start of time saving due to ceiling time saving and time saving pattern (per support) due to reaching the ceiling number of times, a signal related to time saving start is external information terminal 71 as external information
As a result, it is output to an external device (such as a hall computer). Here, the signal related to the time saving start is the ON data of the big hit 2 signal. Then, the timer initial value (for example, 128 msec) is saved in the time saving signal control timer area (A5302). This timer initial value becomes the time for outputting the big win 3 signal by the later-described external information editing process.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the time saving start in the test signal output data area (A5303). As a result, at the start of the ceiling time saving and sudden time saving, a signal relating to the start of time saving is output as a test signal to the test firing test apparatus. The signal related to the time saving start here is, for example, the ON data of the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, the ON data of the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal, the ON data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, and the normal symbol 1 variation ON data of the time shortening state signal and ON data of the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal. Then, save the number with short working hours in the game state display number area (A5304), save the high probability & short working hours flag in the general game mode flag area (A5305), and save the special figure in the special game mode flag area A time saving flag is synthesized (A5306). Subsequently, a signal relating to right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A5307), and a right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5308).

After that, the game control device 100 sets the effect mode information address table corresponding to the ceiling time saving or sudden time saving (A5309), special figure 1 stop design setting process (A3403) or special figure 2
The address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set in the stop symbol setting process (A3503) is acquired (A5310), and the effect mode number of the effect mode (the effect mode number) is acquired based on the table and saved ( A5311). As a result, you can select the production mode that shifts to the beginning of the ceiling time saving and sudden time saving.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the number of rotations remaining in the effect mode (initial value) based on the table (A5312). For example, the production remaining number of rotations (initial value) is the number of times of reduction in time (initial value of the number of times of reduction in time 1 or the number of times of reduction in time 2). Thereby, for example, the same production mode can be continued until the time saving ends.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the next mode transition information, which is the information about the transition to the next mode of the production mode during the ceiling time reduction or sudden time reduction, based on the table (A5
313). Then, the special game mode flag and the probability information command corresponding to the production mode number newly set this time are prepared as production commands (A5314), and the prepared probability information commands are saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (A5315 ), an effect command setting process for setting the probability information command as the effect command is executed (A5316). here,
The probability information command includes information on the probability state, the presence or absence of time saving (general electric support), and the production mode.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number as an effect command (A5317), and executes an effect command setting process (A5318).
Then, the time reduction variation frequency command corresponding to each of the time reduction variation frequency 1 and the time reduction variation frequency 2 (here, the initial value of the time reduction frequency) is prepared as an effect command (A5319
), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5320).

After that, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction determination data area (A5321),
The effect mode transition information area is cleared (A5322), and the support operation setting process is terminated. Moreover, here, since the ceiling time reduction has been activated, the ceiling time reduction activation flag area in which the ceiling time reduction activation flag is stored may be cleared.

[Accessory game processing]
Next, details of the accessory game process (A1311) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the accessory game process. In the accessory game process, the overall process relating to the big win state is controlled.

The game control device 100 first executes a lower prize winning opening switch monitoring process (A5601).
. In the lower big winning opening switch monitoring process, detection of game balls by the count switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is monitored.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the accessory game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (1
is subtracted) (A5602). By updating -1, the accessory game processing timer counts the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing. Note that the minimum value of the accessory game processing timer is set to zero. Next, it is determined whether or not the role game processing timer is 0 (A5603). If the accessory game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A5603 is "N"), the accessory game processing is terminated.

When the accessory game processing timer is 0 (the result of A5603 is "
Y"), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the role game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the role game process number is set in the register (A5604). . Further, using the role product game sequence branch table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the role product game process number is acquired (A5605).
Subsequently, a subroutine call is made according to the accessory game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the accessory game processing number (A5606).

If the game processing number is "0" at step A5606, the game control device 100
Accessory normal processing for performing settings at the start of the jackpot, etc. is executed (A5607). For example, in the role product normal processing, in a predetermined case, the processing number "1" relating to the fanfare mid-process is set and saved in the role product game processing number area. The details of the accessory normal processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "1" at step A5606, the game control device 100
Processing during fanfare is executed (A5608). For example, during fanfare processing,
Set the processing number "2" for the processing during the interval and save it in the role game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "2" at step A5606, the game control device 100
During interval processing is executed (A5609). For example, in the interval process, the number of rounds is updated by +1, the opening time of the lower grand prize opening is saved in the accessory game processing timer area, the ON data is saved in the lower grand prize opening solenoid output data area, and the round command is issued. It is set as a performance command, a process number "3" relating to the process during jackpot opening is set, and saved in the accessory game process number area.

If the game processing number is "3" at step A5606, the game control device 100
If the jackpot round is not the final round, set the interval command, while if it is the final round, set the ending command, and perform the jackpot open processing that sets the information necessary for the jackpot remaining ball processing. (A5610). For example, in the process during the opening of the big winning opening, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command are set, a process number "4" relating to the jackpot remaining ball process is set, and saved in the role game process number area.

If the game processing number is "4" at step A5606, the game control device 100
If the jackpot round is the final round, execute the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be discharged, and the jackpot remaining ball processing for setting the information necessary for performing the jackpot end processing. (A5611). For example, in the jackpot remaining ball processing, if the final round is not the last round, the interval time is saved in the role game processing timer area, and the processing number "2" relating to the processing during the interval is set and saved in the role game processing number area. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the role product game processing timer area, the processing number "5" relating to the jackpot end processing is set, and saved in the role product game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "5" at step A5606, the game control device 100
Execute jackpot end processing for setting information necessary for executing accessory normal processing (A
5612). For example, in the jackpot end processing, based on the time reduction determination data including the information of the presence or absence of the time saving state after the jackpot end (with or without time saving), the electric power support state (time saving state) after the jackpot state is completed. Set the information and process number "0" related to the usual processing of accessories
is set and saved in the accessory game processing number area.

[Routine processing of accessories]
Next, the details of the character product normal processing (A5607) in the aforementioned character product game processing will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the accessory normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the condition device is in operation (A5801
). If the condition device operation information is saved in the condition device operation information area (A3004,
A5005, A5010), that is, there is jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 or jackpot flag 2, or there is a prize in the specific area 86 (V prize opening) (input to the specific area switch 72, V prize) , it can be determined that the conditional device is active. If the conditional device is not in operation (the result of A5801 is "N"), the usual character processing is terminated.

Game control device 100, when the condition device is in operation (result of A5801 is "Y")
, the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information is saved in the round number upper limit area (A5802). Subsequently, the round LED output pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is saved in the round LED output pointer area (A5803), the probability information command (normal medium) is prepared as an effect command (A5804), and the effect command setting process is executed. Execute(
A5805).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a fanfare command corresponding to the fanfare information as an effect command (A5806), and executes effect command setting processing (A58
07). Then, load the decoration special command (decoration special command 1 command or decoration special command 2 command) from the decoration special command area of the special command that became the big hit or small hit this time, prepare it as a production command (A5808), and produce Command setting processing is executed (A5809).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the signal corresponding to the condition device actuation information in the external information output data area (A5810), and saves the signal corresponding to the condition device actuation information in the test signal output data area (A5811). . Then save the initial value in the round number area (A
5812). The initial value is 0 when the conditional device is in operation according to the jackpot information, and is 1 when the conditional device is in operation due to winning in the specific area 86 (V winning).

Next, the game control device 100 executes processing transition setting processing during fanfare (A581
3), end the normal processing of the accessory. For example, in the mid-fanfare process transition setting process, "1" is set as the process number relating to the mid-fanfare process, the process number is saved in the role game process number area, and the fanfare time is saved in the role game process timer area. .

In the process transition setting process during the fanfare, the game control device 100 has a time shortening variation frequency 1 area in which the time shortening variation frequency 1 is stored, a time shortening variation frequency 2 area in which the time shortening variation frequency 2 is stored, and a ceiling counter value Clear the ceiling counter area where the ceiling counter area is stored, the ceiling time saving activation flag area where the ceiling time saving activation flag is stored, and the ceiling reached flag area where the ceiling reached flag is stored. In addition, the normal low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the normal game mode flag area, and the special low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special game mode flag area. The ceiling counter area that stores the ceiling counter value indicating the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game is executed in a state other than the probability variable state is cleared here when the big hit occurs. (RAM initialization switch 112 is not turned on), it need not be cleared.

Furthermore, in the fanfare mid-process transition setting process, the game control device 100 turns on a signal related to the start of a big win (special game state) (for example, turns on a big win 1 signal (outputs with a big win and a small win), turns on a big win 4 signal (big win )) is saved in the external information output data area. And, a signal related to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is turned off,
Special pattern 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal OFF, normal pattern 1 high probability state signal OFF, normal pattern 1
Turn off the variable time shortening state signal and turn off the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal) are saved in the test signal output data area.

[Jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (A5612) in the aforementioned accessory game processing will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot ending process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the time reduction determination data (A4009, A4109) is data with time reduction (A6001). Data with time saving indicates that it will be in a time saving state (general electric support state) after the end of the jackpot state. The data without time saving indicates that the time saving state (general electric support state) does not occur after the jackpot state ends.

When the time reduction determination data is data without time reduction, the game control device 100 executes jackpot end setting processing 1 in order to shift to the normal game state after the end of the big win (A6002), and the time reduction determination data is data with time reduction. In the case of data, a jackpot end setting process 2 is executed in order to shift to a time saving state (general electric support state) after the jackpot ends (A6003).

The game control device 100 sets the effect mode information address table (A6004), and the effect mode transition information (A4010,
A4110) is obtained (A6005), and the effect mode number (effect mode number) of the effect mode set after the end of the jackpot state is obtained and saved (A6006). As a result, it is possible to select the performance mode to be shifted after the big hit is completed.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the number of rotations remaining in the effect mode (initial value) set after the end of the special game state (A6007). For example, the number of remaining production rotations (initial value) is the number of times of time saving (initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations) or the total number of times of time saving and the prescribed remaining number of reservations (for example, 10 times). Thereby, for example, after the big hit ends, the same production mode can be continued until the time saving ends or until all the special figure 2 variable display games related to the remaining reservation are executed.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires and saves next mode transition information, which is information about transition to the next mode of the presentation mode set immediately after the end of the jackpot state (A6009). Then, the special game mode flag and the probability information command corresponding to the production mode number newly set this time are prepared as production commands (A6009), and the prepared probability information commands are saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (A6010 ), an effect command setting process for setting the probability information command as the effect command is executed (A6011). Here, the probability information command includes the probability state after the end of the jackpot state, the presence or absence of time saving (general electric support), and the information of the production mode.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number as an effect command (A6012), and executes an effect command setting process (A6013).
And the number of time reduction fluctuations (here, the number of time reductions that is the initial value, for example, 5 times or less or 99
time) is prepared as a production command (A6014),
An effect command setting process is executed (A6015).

After that, the game control device 100 clears the effect mode transition information area (A6016),
Accessory product usual processing shift setting processing is executed (A6017), and the big hit end processing is ended. In the character object normal processing transition setting processing, in order to shift to the character object normal processing, the processing number "0" related to the character object normal processing is set, the processing number is saved in the character object game processing number area, and the condition device operation information is set. Clear the area and clear the time reduction judgment data area.

[Jackpot end setting process 1]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (A6002) in the jackpot end process will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1. FIG.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the external information output data area (A6201), and saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6202). For example, as the external information to be output to the external device via the external information terminal 71, the off data of the jackpot 1 signal, the jackpot 2 signal off data, the jackpot 3 signal off data, and the jackpot 4 signal off data are output as external information. Save to data area. Since the jackpot end setting process 1 is a process when there is no time saving after the jackpot state ends, the jackpot 2 signal is turned off. The normal number is saved in the game state display number 2 area as the display data of the second game state display portion 58 (lamp D17) of the collective display device 50 (A6203).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability flag in the normal game mode flag area (A6204), and saves the special figure time saving flag in the special game mode flag area (A6
205). Then, the time reduction variation count area is cleared (A6206), and the collective display device 50
As display data of the first game state display portion 57 (lamp D7), the number in the left hitting state is saved in the game state display number 1 area (A6207), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated.

[Jackpot end setting process 2]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (A6003) in the jackpot end process will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second jackpot end setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the external information output data area (A6401), and saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6402). For example, as the external information to be output to the external device through the external information terminal 71, the OFF data of the jackpot 1 signal, the OFF data of the jackpot 3 signal, and the OFF data of the jackpot 4 signal are saved in the external information output data area. Then, the signal regarding the start of time saving is saved in the external information output data area (A6403), and the signal regarding the start of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (A6404). Since the jackpot end setting process 2 is a process when entering the time saving state (general electric support state) after the jackpot state ends, the ON data of the jackpot 2 signal is saved in the external information output data area as a signal related to the start of the time saving. (In this embodiment, since the 2 jackpot signals are output from the jackpot state, the ON state of the 2 jackpot signals continues).

Next, the game control device 100 displays the second game state display section 58 (lamp D
17) Save the number during the time saving in the game state display number 2 area as the display data (A640
5), save the high probability flag in the normal game mode flag area (A6406), and save the flag during the special time saving in the special game mode flag area (A6407).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has become a big hit after the end of the time saving, that is, whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game related to the remaining hold has become a big hit (
A6408). If the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit or if the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit during the time saving state (the result of A6408 is "N"), the stop pattern pattern ( Alternatively, the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations (number of times of time reduction) corresponding to the stop pattern number (symbols A to F described later) is saved (A6409), and the processing after step A6411 is executed. Here, the time reduction variation count initial value (time reduction count) is the initial value of the time reduction variation count 2 (first predetermined number of times described later). It should be noted that in step A6409, the
In addition to the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations (time reduction number), the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations 1 (
A second predetermined number of times described later) is also saved. For example, the initial value of the time shortening variation number 1 may be the initial value of the time shortening variation number 2 plus the maximum value (eg 4) of the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number).

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes a big hit after the end of the time saving, that is, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game related to the remaining hold becomes a big hit (the result of A6408 is "
Y"), save the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations (time reduction number, 99 here) in the time reduction fluctuation number area (A6410). Also here, the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations (number of times of time reduction) is the initial value of the number of times of reduction fluctuation 2 (first predetermined number of times described later). Note that in step A6410,
In addition to the initial value of the time reduction variation frequency 2 for the time reduction variation frequency 2 (time reduction frequency), the initial value of the time reduction variation frequency 1 (second predetermined number described later) is also saved. For example, the initial value of the time reduction variation count 1 is the initial value of the time reduction variation count 2, the maximum value of the special figure 1 pending number (first start memory number) (
For example, it may be obtained by adding 4).

After that, the game control device 100 displays a stop symbol pattern (or a stop symbol number, a symbol A to be described later).
-G), the type of the support state (support mode, general power open pattern), which is the state (mode) of the general power support, is saved in the support state area (A6411). Note that step A6411
is an option, and is executed when the support state regarding the form (content) of the general electricity support is variable, as in a modified example described later.

Next, the game control device 100 displays the first game state display section 57 (lamp D
As the display data of 7), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 1 area (A6
412), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A6413), effect command setting processing is executed (A6414), and big hit end setting processing 2 is terminated.

[General map game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (A1312) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the general-purpose game process. In the general-purpose game processing, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, and the overall processing related to the general-purpose variation display game is controlled.
Set the display of the normal map, etc.

The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes general electric winning switch monitoring processing for monitoring input from the starting port 2 switch 37a (A7602). The details of the general electric winning switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the normal game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (1
is subtracted) (A7603). In addition, the minimum value of the general-purpose game processing timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

Game control device 100, when the value of the normal game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or has already timed up, to the normal game processing number A general-purpose game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number based on the set general-purpose game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the general-purpose game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the general-purpose game processing number (A7607).

If the game processing number is "0" at step A7607, the game control device 100
Monitor the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, set the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, set the effect, and set the information necessary for processing during normal pattern fluctuation. Execute (A7608). The details of the normal pattern normal processing will be described later.

In addition, when the game processing number is "1" at step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern fluctuation processing for setting information necessary for performing normal pattern display processing ( A7609). For example, in the process during normal map fluctuation, in order to shift to the process during normal map display, set "2" as the game processing number and save it in the normal map game processing number area, Save in the processing timer area.

In addition, when the game processing number is "2" in step A7607, if the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a hit, the game control device 100 sets the normal pattern open time, and executes the normal pattern winning process. (A7610). For example, in the normal pattern display processing, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a hit, in order to shift to the normal pattern winning process, "3" is set as the game processing number and the normal pattern game processing number area is set. On the other hand, in the case of a failure, in order to shift to the normal game process, the game process number is set to "0" and saved in the normal game process number area.

Further, if the game processing number is "3" at step A7607, the game control device 100 continues the processing during normal game winning, or sets information necessary for performing normal electric remaining ball processing. Processing during drawing is executed (A7611). For example, in the normal per game process, after setting for opening the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined number of times, "4" is set as the game process number to shift to the normal electric remaining ball process. Save in normal game processing number area.

In addition, when the game processing number is "4" at step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal electric remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for performing normal per pattern end processing (A7612 ). For example, in the normal electric remaining ball processing, in order to shift to the end processing for the normal game, set "5" as the game processing number and save it in the normal game processing number area, and the normal game ending time Save in the processing timer area.

In addition, when the game processing number is "5" at step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern per end processing for setting information necessary for performing normal pattern normal processing (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the end processing for the general pattern, in order to shift to the normal processing for the general pattern, "0" is set as the game processing number and saved in the general pattern game processing number area.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the normal pattern fluctuation by the normal pattern display device 53 (A7614). After that, a symbol variation control process relating to control of variation of the normal symbol (normal symbol) by the normal symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the normal symbol game process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the value of the normal game processing timer is not 0 (A7604
result is "N"), that is, if the time has not expired, the processing from step A7614 onwards is executed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of gate switch monitoring processing. The gate switch monitoring process is executed at step A7601 in the normal game process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (
A7701). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "
Y"), and it is determined whether or not the game state is for hitting to the right (A7702). The gaming state for hitting to the right is a jackpot state and a time-saving state (general electric support state). If the game state is to hit to the right (the result of A7702 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A7705. If the gaming state is not right-handed (result of A7702 is "N"), a left-handed instruction notification command (left-handed instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A7703), and an effect command setting process is executed (A7704). The effect control device 300 that has received the left-handed instruction notification command executes the notification (warning) to instruct left-handed hitting on the display device 41 or the like by left-handed instruction display.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the normal pattern reservation number and determines whether or not the normal pattern reservation number is less than the upper limit value (1 in this embodiment) (A7705). When the number of reserved normal patterns is less than the upper limit value (the result of A7705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation display game is fluctuating (executing) or in a per normal pattern state. It is determined whether or not (A7706). When neither the normal pattern fluctuation display game nor the normal pattern hit state (the result of A7706 is "N")
, update the number of reserved general patterns by +1 (A7707). In this way, the normal pattern suspension number is updated by +1 only when the normal pattern fluctuation display game is not fluctuating or the normal pattern per state is not in effect. does not accumulate substantially and becomes 1 instantaneously only immediately before the normal pattern fluctuation display game starts (the normal pattern pending number is substantially 0).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the winning random number storage area corresponding to the number of normal pattern reservations after the update (A7708). Then, the winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (A7709), the winning design random number is extracted and saved in the winning design random number storage area (A7710), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if there is no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "N"), if it is determined that the number of normal pattern reservations is not less than the upper limit (the result of A7705 is "N"), Or, when the normal pattern fluctuation display game is fluctuating or in the normal pattern per state (A7
If the result of 706 is "Y"), the gate switch monitoring process ends.

[General electric winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general/universal electric prize switch monitoring process (A7602) in the general/universal diagram game process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the general electric winning switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not normal pattern winning is in progress, that is, whether or not the normal pattern variation display game is in a winning state and the normal variation prize winning device 37 is executing a predetermined number of opening operations. (A7801). And if it is in the middle of the normal pattern (the result of A7801 is "Y")
, start port 2 switch 37a (A7802). If there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7802 is "Y"), the count number of the general electric counter is updated by +1 (A7803).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the count number of the general electric counter after updating to an upper limit value (for example,
10) is reached (A7804). Then, when the count number reaches the upper limit (the result of A7804 is "Y"), the hit end pointer value (for example, 2) is loaded from the normal hit end pointer area in the RWM, and the normal hit end pointer value in the RWM is It is saved in the per figure middle control pointer area (A7805).

Finally, the general-purpose game processing timer is cleared (A7806), and the general-purpose electric prize winning switch monitoring processing is terminated. That is, when there is a general electric winning prize equal to or greater than the upper limit value during the winning state of the general pattern, the winning end value is saved in the processing control pointer area during the general pattern winning at that time, and the normal variable winning device 37 is closed. It is made to end the hit state of the normal figure on the way.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is not in the normal game (the result of A7801 is "N"), when it is determined that there is no input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7802 is "N") ), or if it is determined that the number of counts has not reached the upper limit (A780
4 result is "N"), the general electric prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose normal processing (A7608) in the general-purpose processing will be described.
FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the general/universal pattern normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the normal pattern reservation number is 0 (A7901).
. If the number of reserved patterns is not 0 (the result of A7901 is "N"), the random number is loaded from the random number storage area per general pattern of RWM (for the number of reservations 1), and the random number storage area per pattern of RWM. (
Load the per pattern random number from the reservation number 1), and after loading, clear the general per pattern random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) and the general per pattern random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) to 0 (A7902) . In addition, whether the probability of a hit result in the normal pattern fluctuation display game is higher than normal (in a high probability state), that is, whether it is in a short time state (normal support state) (A7903). In this embodiment, the range of random numbers per hit is 0 to 250, the probability per normal pattern in the high probability is 251/251, and the probability per normal pattern in the low probability is 0/251.
is. In addition, it is not limited to this, and the normal pattern per probability in the low probability may be a value larger than 0% (for example, 2/251 (0.8%)).

If the game control device 100 is not in the normal pattern high probability (the result of A7903 is "N"), it sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (here, 251) which is the lower limit judgment value in the normal pattern low probability (A7904
), in the case of normal pattern high probability (the result of A7903 is "Y"), set the high probability lower limit judgment value (here 0) which is the lower limit judgment value in normal pattern high probability (A7905), step A7906 to process.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (here, 251) (A7906). It should be noted that the upper limit judgment value here is common during normal pattern high probability and during normal pattern low probability. If the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is "Y"), that is,
If not, the process proceeds to step A7908. If the winning random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is "N"), it is determined whether the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7907).

The game control device 100 hits when the random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "
Y"), that is, in the case of a loss, the loss information is saved in the hit flag area (A7908)
. Furthermore, the losing stop pattern number is set as the normal stop symbol number (A7909), the losing pattern information is saved in the normal stop symbol information area (A7910), and the process proceeds to step A7914.

The game control device 100, if the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "
N"), that is, in the case of a hit, the win information is saved in the hit flag area (A7911), the hit stop design number corresponding to the loaded hit design random number is set (A7912), and the hit corresponding to the hit stop design number is set. The stop design information is saved in the normal design stop design information area (A7913), and the process proceeds to step A7914. In this case, there is one type of hit stop pattern (normal hit pattern), but there may be several types in a modified example which will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal pattern stop symbol area (A791
4), save the stop pattern number in the test signal output data area (A7915), shift the random number storage area per normal pattern (A7916), clear the empty area after the shift to 0 (A7917
), and the number of reserved charts is updated by -1 (A7918).

That is, with the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation display game related to the oldest normal pattern reservation number 1, the positions of the normal pattern reservation numbers 2 to 4 that are reserved after the normal pattern reservation number 1 are advanced one by one.
By this process, the value for the normal pattern reservation number 1 in the normal pattern random number storage area is cleared to 0, and the normal pattern reservation number is decremented by 1 and becomes 0.

After that, the game control device 100 loads the information of the support state (support mode, electric power release pattern) (A7919). Note that the processing of step A7919 is optional, and is executed when the support state, which is the state (mode) of the general electricity support, is variable as in a modified example described later.

Next, the game control device 100 sets a fixed normal pattern fluctuation time (for example, 200 msec) and saves it in the normal pattern game processing timer area (A7920). It should be noted that, as in the modification described later, when the support state (support mode, general electricity release pattern), which is the state (mode) of the general electricity support, is variable, set a variable normal figure fluctuation time corresponding to the support state and save it in the normal game processing timer area. And, during the normal figure fluctuation process transition setting processing is executed (A7921), the normal figure usual process is ended. It should be noted that the process transition setting process during normal figure fluctuation will be described later.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the normal pattern reservation number is 0 (the result of A7901 is "
Y"), set "0" as the processing number for shifting to the normal normal processing (A7922),
The process number is saved in the normal game process number area (A7923). After that, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A7924), and the general/universal diagram normal processing is terminated.

[Normal figure fluctuation process transition setting process]
FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process shift setting process during normal pattern fluctuation. The process shift setting process during the normal pattern fluctuation is executed at step A7921 in the normal pattern normal process.

The game control device 100, first, "1" as the processing number for shifting to the processing during normal pattern fluctuation
(A8101), and save the processing number in the normal game processing number area (A8102
).

After that, the game control device 100 sends a signal regarding the start of the normal pattern variation display game (normal pattern 1
Save the fluctuation signal on) in the test signal output data area (A8103), and save the fluctuation flag indicating that the normal pattern fluctuation display game is fluctuating in the normal pattern fluctuation control flag area (
A8104). Then, save the flashing control timer initial value, which is the initial value of the timer of the flashing cycle of the normal pattern display, in the normal pattern flashing control timer area (A8105), and set the initial value (here, 0) to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern number area. Save (A8106). After that, the process transition setting process during normal figure fluctuation is terminated.

[Normal map fluctuation process]
Next, the details of the processing during normal pattern fluctuation (A7609) in the normal pattern game processing will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal pattern fluctuation process.

First, the game control device 100 sets the processing number to "2" as a setting process for shifting to the normal game displaying process (A8301), and saves the processing number in the normal game processing number area (
A8302). After that, the game control device 100 saves the normal pattern display time (normal pattern stop time, for example, 48 msec), which is the display time of the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game on the normal pattern display, in the normal pattern game processing timer area ( A8303).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the normal pattern fluctuation (turns off the signal during normal pattern 1 fluctuation) in the test signal output data area (A8304). Then, the stop flag indicating that the normal pattern fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the normal pattern fluctuation control flag area (A8
305), end the processing during normal pattern fluctuation.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the general-purpose map displaying process (A7610) in the general-purpose map game processing will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process during normal map display.

The game control device 100 first loads the hit flag (hit information or loss information) set in the normal pattern normal process (A8401), and clears the hit flag area of RWM (A84
02). Then, it is determined whether or not winning information is set in the loaded winning flag (A8403).

The game control device 100, when the winning information is set in the winning flag (A8403
The result is "Y"), set the processing setting table during the hit (A8404), acquire the hit start pointer value (here 0) corresponding to the normal pattern stop pattern information, and save it in the control pointer area during the normal pattern (A8405). In addition, it acquires the hit end pointer value corresponding to the normal pattern stop symbol information, and saves it in the normal pattern per end pointer area (A8406). Next, the general electric open time (for example, 3000 msec) corresponding to the general pattern stop pattern information is acquired and saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (A8407). Normal fluctuation winning device 3 in the time saving state by the above processing
7 opening modes are set, and for example, two openings are possible. In addition, the normal pattern stop pattern (
General pattern per pattern) is one type, and the hit start pointer value, the hit end pointer value, and the general electric open time are fixed, but as in the modification example described later, the support state related to general electric support (support mode, If the electric open pattern) is variable, the hit start pointer value corresponding to the support state,
You may set the hit end pointer value, general electric open time, and save it in the general game processing timer area.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the processing number "3
” (A8408), and save the processing number in the normal game processing number area (A840
9). After that, a signal related to the hit of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern 1 per medium signal is turned on)
Then, the signal related to the start of normal electric operation (turn on the signal during normal electric accessory 1 operation) is saved in the test signal output data area (A8410). In addition, in order to output a signal to drive (turn on) the common solenoid, ON data is saved in the common solenoid output data area (A8411).
.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 clears the information in the general electrical count area that stores the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 (A8412), Clear the stored information in the electric fraudulent winning number area (A8413). Finally, a flag that defines the non-fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is saved in the general/electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A8414).

The game control device 100 hits the hit flag when the information is not set (A840
The result of 3 is "N"), and set "0" as the processing number to shift to normal processing (A
8415), and save the process number in the normal game process number area (A8416). after that,
Save the fraud monitoring period flag in the general electricity fraud monitoring period flag area (A8417), and end the general map display process.

[Medium processing per normal pattern]
Next, the details of the processing (A7611) during the normal pattern per game in the normal pattern game processing will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during normal per pattern.

The game control device 100 first loads and prepares the control pointer during the normal pattern (A860
1), it is determined whether or not the value of the loaded normal per pattern control pointer has reached the upper limit value of the normal pattern per per control pointer (hit end pointer value) (A8602).

Then, the game control device 100, when the value of the control pointer during the normal per pattern does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal per pattern (hit end pointer value) (the result of A8602 is "N") , the control pointer is updated by +1 (A8603). Furthermore, normal electric operation transition setting processing is executed (A8604), and processing during the normal pattern per is terminated. The details of the normal electric operation transition setting process will be described later.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the value of the control pointer during the normal per pattern reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal per pattern (hit end pointer value) (the result of A8602 is "Y")
, Without executing the process of updating (+1) the process control pointer area during the normal pattern hit in step A8603, the normal electric operation transition setting process is executed (A8604), and the process during the normal pattern hit ends.

[General electric operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal electric operation transition setting process (A8604) in the normal per normal process will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the procedure of normal electric operation transition setting processing. The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process for controlling the driving of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer.

First, the game control device 100 branches the processing according to the value of the control pointer (the control pointer during normal game per game) (A8701). Note that here, the control pointer is the
Use the value before updating with . An example of a control pointer is shown in FIG. 73 below. If the value of the control pointer is an even number, the process proceeds to step A8702 to control the closing of the normal variable winning device 37, so the wait after closing the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is performed. The time (universal electric interval time, eg, 60000 msec) is saved in the general/universal game processing timer area (A8702). It should be noted that when the support state (support mode, general electricity release pattern) related to the general electricity support is variable as in the modification described later, the wait time (the general electricity interval time) may be set corresponding to the support state. .

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets OFF data in the general electric solenoid output data area in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c (A8703), and ends the general electric operation transition setting process.

In addition, when the value of the control pointer is an odd number, the game control device 100 moves to the process of step A8704 and controls the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, so that the normal fluctuation corresponding to the control pointer The general electric open time, which is the opening time of the winning device 37, is saved in the general game processing timer area (A8704). The electric current disconnection time here may be the same as the value set in step A8407 (for example, 3000 msec). Furthermore, in order to turn on the general electric solenoid 37c, ON data is set in the general electric solenoid output data area (A8705), and the general electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

Furthermore, when the value of the control pointer is the winning end pointer value, the game control device 10
0 sets "4" as the processing number in order to move to step A8706 to end the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 and execute the normal electric remaining ball processing (A7612) (A8706
), and the processing number is saved in the general-purpose game processing number area (A8707).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the normal electric remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 msec) in the normal game processing timer area (A8708). After that, in order to turn off the common solenoid 37c, the OFF data is saved in the common solenoid output data area (A8709
), the normal electric operation transition setting process is terminated. In addition, when the support state (support mode, general electric release pattern) related to the general electric support is variable as in the later-described modified example, the normal electric remaining ball processing time may be set according to the support state.

[Public electric residual bulb treatment]
Next, the details of the general electric remaining ball processing (A7612) in the general electric game processing will be described. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing the procedure of normal electric residual bulb processing.

Game control device 100, first, sets the processing number "5" related to the end processing per normal pattern (A8
901), the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (A8902). After that, the general pattern ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (A8903). In addition, when the support state (support mode, general electric release pattern) related to the general electric support is variable as in the modification described later, the general drawing ending time may be set according to the support state.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the operation of the normal variable winning device 37 (turns off the signal during operation of the normal electric accessory 1) in the test signal output data area (A8904).
Subsequently, clear the general electrical count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 (A
8905), and clears the control pointer area during normal per figure (A8906). After that, the end pointer area per normal figure is cleared (A8907), and the normal electric remaining ball processing is terminated.

[End processing per normal figure]
Next, the details of the general pattern per end process (A7613) in the general pattern game process will be described. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the per-universal pattern end process.

First, the game control device 100 sets the processing number “0” relating to the general pattern normal processing (A910
1) Furthermore, the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (A9102). After that, a signal relating to the end of the hit of the normal pattern variation game (the signal during normal pattern 1 hit is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A9103).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a flag (in-fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 in the general/electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A9104),
After that, end processing per normal figure ends.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (A1319) in the timer interrupt process will be described. 54A and 54B are flowcharts showing the procedure of external information editing processing. FIG. 54A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 54B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, payout command transmission process (A1307), winning mouth switch /
State monitoring process (A1308), magnet fraud monitoring process (A1315), board radio wave fraud monitoring process (
A1316), based on the monitoring results, creates information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal, amusement center internal management device, or a test firing test device, and performs processing such as setting it in an output buffer.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a glass frame open error is occurring (
A9301). If the glass frame open error is not occurring (the result of A9301 is "N"),
Determine whether or not a body frame open error (front frame open error) is occurring (A9302)
. If the body frame open error is not occurring (the result of A9302 is "N"), the OFF data of the door/frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9303), and the OFF data of the security signal is saved as the external information output data. Save to area (A9304).

When the game control device 100 is in the process of opening the glass frame error (the result of A9301 is "Y"), or when the main frame opening error is in the process of occurring (the result of A9302 is "Y"),
The ON data of the door/frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9305), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9306).

After steps A9304 and A9306, the game control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A9307), and checks whether the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the time has expired). Judge (A9308). The initial value of the security signal control timer is stored in the RAM by operating the initialization switch (set value change switch 102).
A predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) is set when the data stored in is initialized (A1046 of the main process). Then, the security signal control timer starts counting from the time of RAM initialization.

If the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9308 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the security signal ON data in the external information output data area (A
9309), and shifts to the processing of step A9310. That is, the external information indicating that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9308 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether magnet fraud is occurring (A9310). If there is a detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, it can be determined that magnet fraud is occurring. If magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A9310 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not board radio fraud is occurring (A9311). If there is a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62, it can be determined that board radio fraud is occurring.

Game control device 100, if board radio fraud is not occurring (result of A9311 is "N")
Furthermore, it is determined whether frame radio wave fraud is occurring (A9312). If there is a frame radio wave fraud signal, it can be determined that frame radio wave fraud is occurring. If frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9312 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not big winning mouth fraud is occurring (A9313). Incidentally, when a fraudulent prize winning occurrence flag relating to the big prize mouth is saved in the fraud flag area by the prize winning port switch/state monitoring process, it can be determined that the big prize mouth fraud is occurring. If the big winning slot fraud is not occurring (the result of A9313 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not the general electricity fraud is occurring (A9314). Incidentally, when the fraudulent winning occurrence flag regarding the second starting winning port of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the fraud flag area by the winning port switch/state monitoring process, it can be determined that the electric fraud is occurring.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the vibration fraud is occurring (A9315) when the electric fraud is not occurring (the result of A9314 is "N"). Incidentally, when there is a detection signal from the vibration sensor 65, it can be determined that the vibration fraud is occurring. If vibration fraud is not occurring (the result of A9315 is "N"), it is determined whether or not an abnormal discharge error is occurring (A93
16). If the abnormal discharge flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1318), it can be determined that an abnormal discharge error is occurring.

If the game control device 100 is not generating an abnormal discharge error (the result of A9316 is "N
”), and it is determined whether or not a V passage error is occurring (A9317). If the detection signal of the specific area switch 72 is generated at inappropriate timing, it can be determined that a V passage error is occurring. If the V passing error is not occurring (the result of A9317 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a remaining ball error is occurring (A9318). If the remaining ball error is not occurring (result of A9318 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the safety device is operating based on the safety device operating flag (A9319). If the safety device is not in operation (the result of A9319 is "N"), it is determined whether a switch abnormality error is occurring (
A9320).

The game control device 100 saves the OFF data of the game machine error state signal in the test signal output data area (A9321) when a switch abnormality error such as disconnection of the switch connector is not occurring (the result of A9320 is "N"). . If a switch abnormality error is occurring (
If the result of A9320 is "Y"), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9323).

On the other hand, if the magnet fraud is occurring (the result of A9310 is "Y
”), if board radio fraud is occurring (result of A9311 is “Y”), if frame radio fraud is occurring (result of A9312 is “Y”), big winning mouth fraud is occurring case (A93
If the result of A9314 is "Y"), if the electricity fraud is occurring (the result of A9314 is "Y"), or if the vibration fraud is occurring (the result of A9315 is "Y"), an abnormal ejection error occurs. If it is (result of A9316 is "Y"), if a V passing error is occurring (result of A9317 is "Y"), if a remaining ball error is occurring (result of A9318 is "Y") ), if the safety device is in operation (result of A9319 is "Y"), the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (A9322), and the gaming machine error state signal ON data is output as the test signal. Save in the data area (A9323). By setting the security signal to ON data, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) via the external information terminal 71 . In this embodiment, the safety device is in operation when the safety device operation flag=1.

Thus, when the safety device is in operation (the result of A9319 is "Y"), the security signal is turned on and output to an external device such as a hall computer (A9322).
, the person in charge or staff of the game hall can recognize that the safety device is in operation. In addition to the configuration in which the security signal is continuously output to the external device while the safety device is operating, it is also possible to output the security signal to the external device for only one pulse (e.g. 256 ms) when the safety device is activated. is. Also, instead of the security signal or in combination with the security signal, external information dedicated to the safety device may be provided, and the dedicated external information may be output to the external device while the safety device is in operation.

In addition, when the safety device is in operation (the result of A9319 is "Y"), the ON data of the game machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area, and the game machine error state signal is used as the test signal by the test firing tester. output to A configuration is also possible in which the test signal (gaming machine error state signal) corresponding to the fact that the safety device is in operation is not output. Also, a test signal different from the gaming machine error state signal may be output to the test-firing test device.

After steps A9321 and A9323, the game control device 100 executes starting gate signal editing processing for editing the winning signal of the starting gate (A9324). Subsequently, a main prize ball signal editing process for setting information about the number of prize balls to be paid out is executed (A9325), and the pattern confirmation number signal generated when the stop pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is decided is sent to the external device. The number of times of design decision signal editing processing to be output to is executed (A9326).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the time saving signal control timer is not 0 (A93
27), it is determined whether or not the time saving signal control timer is 0 (A9328). If the time saving signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9328 is "Y"), the external information editing process is terminated as it is, and if the time saving signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9328 is "N"), big hit 3 The ON data of the signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9329), and the external information editing process ends.

In this way, at the time of sudden start of time saving due to ceiling time saving and time saving pattern (sapo hit) due to reaching the ceiling number of times, the ON data of the 3 jackpot signals is sent to the game hall internal management device (hall computer).
and other external devices via the external information terminal 71 . Here, the ON data of the big hit 3 signal is output during the timer initial value (for example, fixed time of 128 msec) set in the time saving signal control timer area in step A5302 of the support operation setting process. The conventional jackpot 1-4 signals are output during the jackpot period, but the jackpot 3 signal is output for a fixed time (for example, 128 msec) much shorter than the jackpot period.
Therefore, the external device (hall computer, etc.) can recognize that the time reduction has occurred due to the ceiling time reduction due to the number of ceiling times or the sudden time reduction due to the time reduction pattern without confusing it with the big win or the time reduction following the big win.

In addition, as described above, the jackpot 2 signal continues for a long time in the jackpot state and the time saving state following the jackpot state (time saving state due to the jackpot, first specific game state, first time saving state). Output as external information. The short fixed time (for example, 128 msec) jackpot 3 signal is external information indicating the occurrence of a time saving state (second specific game state, second time saving state) due to ceiling time saving or sudden time saving, time saving state caused by a big hit It is output to the external device separately from the external information (2 long-time jackpot signals), and is not confused with the external device.

As another configuration, only one of the ceiling time saving and the sudden time saving may output three jackpot signals for a fixed time at the start of the time saving. In addition, in order to distinguish between the occurrence of the ceiling time saving and the sudden occurrence of the time saving, in one time saving, during the fixed time at the start of the time saving, the big hit 3 signal and the big hit 4
Both signals may be output, and only the jackpot 3 signal may be output in the other short time. For example, 3 jackpot signals and 4 jackpot signals may be output for the ceiling time saving, and only 3 jackpot signals may be output for the sudden time saving (or vice versa). In addition, in order to distinguish between the occurrence of the ceiling time saving and the sudden occurrence of the time saving, at the time of the start of the time saving, output 3 jackpot signals (or 4 jackpot signals) for the ceiling time saving,
You may output 4 jackpot signals (or 3 jackpot signals) for sudden time saving. In this way, the big win 3 signal and the big win 4 signal may be appropriately combined to distinguish between the occurrence of the ceiling time saving and the sudden occurrence of the time saving so that the external device can recognize it.

[Transmission of external information or test signal]
FIG. 55 is a time chart showing how external information or test signals are transmitted.

Figure 55 (A) is the last special figure variation display game in the previous time saving state (special figure variation display game reaching the number of times of time saving), there is a ceiling number of times and stop of the time saving pattern, and the next special figure variation display It shows a case of a time saving state after the game (time saving state due to ceiling time saving or sudden time saving).

In this case, in this embodiment, the timing at which the previous time saving state ends is the timing at which the time saving end setting process (A4812, FIG. 33) is executed within the special figure fluctuation processing, that is, the previous special figure fluctuation display This is the timing when the variable display of the game stops. In addition, the timing when the later time saving state (ceiling time saving and sudden time saving) starts is the number of time reduction fluctuations (A5
123, A5126) is set, that is, the timing at which the display of the stop result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game ends (substantially equal to the timing to start if the next special figure fluctuation display game starts).

In addition, at the timing when the variable display of the previous special figure variation display game stops, the time saving end setting processing in the special figure variation processing will cause the off data of the 2 jackpot signals as a signal related to the time saving end to be placed in the external information output data area. It is set and output to an external device (such as a hall computer) (A4901), and as a signal related to the time saving end, a fluctuation time reduction state signal (special design 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, special design 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal, normal design 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal) is set in the test signal output data area and output to the test firing test apparatus (A4902). Therefore, the two jackpot signals as external information and the variable time shortening state signal as the test signal are turned off after the timing when the variable display of the previous special figure variable display game is stopped (after the previous time saving is completed).

Furthermore, at the timing when the display of the stop result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game ends, the on data of the jackpot 2 signal as a signal related to the time saving start is set in the external information output data area by the support operation setting process. (Hall computer, etc.) (A5301), and as a signal related to the time saving start, the variable time shortened state signal (special symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal, special symbol 2 variable time shortened state signal, normal symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal)
is set in the test signal output data area and output to the test firing test apparatus (A5303). Therefore, the two jackpot signals as external information and the variation time shortening state signal as the test signal are turned on after the timing at which the display of the stop result of the previous special figure variation display game ends.

In this way, when the special figure fluctuation display game (the previous special figure fluctuation display game) in which the time saving ends has just reached the ceiling number or stopped with the time saving pattern, it is clear that the time saving has ended once. become. In addition, by turning off the output of external information (2 jackpot signals) and test signals (variation time reduction state signal, etc.) for the display time (stop display time) of the stop result (stop pattern), time saving When restarting, the ON state of the output of external information and test signals can be clearly identified.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), in the conventional gaming machine, at the timing when the display of the stop result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game ends, the time saving ends by the time saving end setting process in the special figure display processing. do. In the time saving end setting process, the off data of the jackpot 2 signal as a signal related to the time saving end is set in the external information output data area and output to an external device (such as a hall computer), and the variable time reduction state as a signal related to the time saving end Signal OFF data and the like are set in the test signal output data area and output to the test-firing test apparatus.

Therefore, in the conventional game machine, the two jackpot signals as external information and the variation time shortening state signal as the test signal are turned off after the timing at which the display of the stop result of the previous special figure variation display game ends. However, at this timing, the support operation setting process immediately turns on the 2 jackpot signals and the variable time shortening state signal, so they are not substantially turned off (
the on state remains substantially continuous). Therefore, unlike the present embodiment, in the conventional gaming machine, it becomes unclear when the time saving has ended, and when the time saving resumes, the ON state of the output of the external information and the test signal becomes unclear.

[Safety device-related processing]
Next, the details of the safety device-related processing (A1314) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing the procedure of safety device related processing. The safety device-related processing is in-area processing and is executed as part of the above-described in-area program.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the safety device is in operation based on the safety device in operation flag in the safety device in operation flag area included in the intra-region work area (A940
1). If the safety device operating flag=1, it can be determined that the safety device is operating. If the safety device is in operation (result of A9401 is "Y"), the safety device related processing is terminated.

Game control device 100, when the safety device is not in operation (result of A9401 is "N")
, load the safety device activation information from the safety device activation information area contained in the outside work area (
A9402), it is determined whether or not the safety device actuation information is the value of the old actuation information area (A94
03). If the safety device actuation information is the value of the old actuation information area (the result of A9403 is "Y
”), and since there is no change in the safety device actuation information, the processing proceeds to step A9409 without setting (transmitting) the performance command.

If the safety device activation information is not the value of the old activation information area, the game control device 100 (A94
03 result is "N"), and since there is a change in the safety device activation information, a safety device activation-related command table that associates the safety device activation information with the command is set (A9404 ), command corresponding to safety device activation information (ACTION part)
(A9405). Then, it is determined whether there is no command definition (A94
06). In the safety device activation-related command table, the command corresponding to the safety device non-activation information (value 0) is not defined (because there is no command), so the safety device activation information is the safety device non-activation information (value 0) , it can be determined that there is no command definition. If there is no command definition (result of A9406 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A9409 without setting (transmitting) an effect command.

Game control device 100, when there is a command definition (the result of A9406 is "N"), prepares a safety device operation-related command (MODE section) as an effect command (A9407).
When the safety device activation information is safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), and safety device activation information (value 3), it can be determined that there is a command definition. Then, an effect command setting process for setting (transmitting) an effect command is executed (A9408). Note that the effect command consists of a MODE section and an ACTION section. In addition, in the safety device operation-related command table, the command corresponding to the safety device non-operation information (value 0) is defined to omit the determination in step A9406, and the safety device non-operation information (value 0) is also safe. Device operation-related commands may be set (transmitted).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the safety device operation information is safety device operation information (value 3) (A9409). If the safety device activation information is not the safety device activation information (value 3) (the result of A9409 is "N"), the safety device related processing is terminated as it is. on the other hand,
If the safety device activation information is the safety device activation information (value 3) (the result of A9409 is "Y
'), "1" indicating that the safety device is in operation is saved in the safety device in operation flag area as a safety device in operation flag (A9410), and then the safety device related processing is terminated. If the safety device in-operation information (value 3) is saved in step A9804 (described later) in the previous timer interrupt process, the result of step A9409 will be "Y" in the next timer interrupt process.

As described above, when the safety device activation information changes to safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), and safety device activation information (value 3), safety The production control device 3
00. When the ACTION part is safety device activation warning information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), and safety device activation information (value 3), the safety device activation-related command corresponds to the activation notification state respectively. The operation warning command corresponding to the operation warning state, the operation warning command corresponding to the operation warning state, and the operating command corresponding to the operation state.

By receiving the operation notice command, the performance control device 300 can display the operation notice display (for example, the characters "I will stop soon") on the display device 41 in the operation notice state of the safety device. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally receiving a disadvantage by notifying the player in advance of the possibility of the game being stopped and urging the player to finish the game.
In addition, it is possible to give a surprise to a person who is committing fraud and encourage him/her to stop the fraud.

When the performance control device 300 receives the operation warning command, the operation warning display (for example, the characters "It will stop after winning") can be displayed on the display device 41 in the operation warning state of the safety device. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player in advance that the game will be stopped after the end of the small win or the big win, and warn the player of the disadvantage such as the stopping of consecutive wins. It should be noted that consecutive chance means that the jackpot state and the specific game state continue, for example, without passing through the normal mode (or normal game state). In addition, the actuation warning state can surprise the cheater and prompt them to stop cheating.

By receiving the operating command, the effect control device 300 can display the operating display 513 (for example, "stopping" characters) on the display device 41 in the operating state (operating state) of the safety device. Therefore, it is possible to prevent new players (guests) from using the gaming machine 10, and to stop cheating if there is someone who is cheating.

In addition, when the safety device activation information is maintained at 0, 1, 2, 3 without changing (0→0, 1→1
, 2 → 2, 3 → 3), the safety device activation related command is the production control device 300
not sent to 190 after the safety device counter value reaches 190000 to 194999
Even when the safety device activation information is less than 000 and changes from 1 to 0 (at the time of change from 1 to 0), the safety device activation-related command is not transmitted without command definition. It should be noted that the change of the safety device actuation information from 2 to 1 or from 3 to 2 (change from 2 to 1 and 3 to 2) is removed by the later-described extra ball confirmation processing and safety device actuation monitoring processing.

When the safety device operation information changes from 0 to 1 (at the time of change from 0 to 1), an operation notice command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 among the safety device operation related commands. When the safety device operation information changes from 1 to 2 (at the time of change from 1 to 2), an operation warning command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 among the safety device operation related commands. When the safety device actuation information changes from 2 to 3 (at the time of change from 2 to 3), the operating command is transmitted to the production control device 300 among the safety device actuation related commands. When the safety device activation information changes from 2 to 3, the result of step A9403 becomes "Y" only once immediately after, and steps A9404 to A9410
The operating command is transmitted through and the safety device operating flag is set to 1, so the safety device is operating (result of A9401 is "Y"), and in the subsequent timer interrupt processing, step A940
4-Safety device activation-related commands are not transmitted without passing through A9410.

In addition, the direct change of the safety device activation information from 1 to 3 itself (the change itself from 1 to 3)
is removed by the difference check processing and the safety device operation monitoring processing described later, but the safety device operation information may change instantaneously from 1 to 2 to 3 (2 is an instantaneous value and no activation warning condition occurs). This change from 1 to 2 to 3 corresponds to the fact that the safety device counter value reaches 195000 and the operation notice state is changed to the operation state when neither the big win nor the small win is made. Then, in response to the transition from the operation notice state of the safety device to the operation state, the operating command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as a safety device operation related command (A94
05, A9407).

[Outside area integration processing]
Next, details of the out-of-area integration processing (A1322) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the out-of-area integration process. The out-of-area integration process is an out-of-area process and is executed as part of the above-described out-of-area program.

The game control device 100 first saves the stack pointer in the stack pointer saving area of the outside work area (A9501), and sets the stack pointer to the top of the outside stack area (outside stack area) as the value of the outside stack area. Set an address value that indicates (
A9502). As a result, the stack pointer indicating the stack to be used is switched from the inner stack area to the outer stack area.

Next, the game control device 100 saves (PUSH) the register information (value) to the outside stack area for both register bank 0 and register bank 1 (A9503). Here, it is preferable to save all general purpose registers. Then, performance display device control processing for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 and the like is executed (A9504). Subsequently, difference ball confirmation processing (A9505) for updating the difference ball number (safety device counter value) and setting the safety device operation information corresponding to the difference ball number (safety device counter value) is executed. Next, safety device activation monitoring processing for monitoring the activation of the safety device is executed (A9506).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 restores the saved register (A9507), loads it from the stack pointer saving area, sets the stack pointer (A9508), and ends the performance display editing process. The set stack pointer indicates the address of the stack area within the area.

[Performance display device control process]
Next, the details of the performance display device control process (A9504) in the out-of-area integration process (FIG. 57) will be described. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing the procedure of performance display device control processing. The performance display device control process is an out-of-area process and is executed as part of the above-described out-of-area program.

The game control device 100 first executes a validity determination to determine the validity of the performance display work area, and if it is not valid and abnormal, initializes the performance display work area (including initial value setting).
(A9601). The processing of step A9601 is the same as the processing of step A1204 in FIG.

In addition, since the validity determination is executed each time the performance display device control process is executed, if the performance display work area is not valid, it can be initialized immediately, and an abnormal performance display (abnormal base display of values, etc.) can be prevented as much as possible.

In addition, initialization of the performance display work area (including initial value setting) targets areas other than the stack pointer storage area so as to protect the stack pointer storage area. Note that the outside stack area is not initialized in this embodiment, but may be initialized. Even when the outside stack area is initialized, the values of the registers saved in the outside stack area are protected and not initialized. The initialization of the performance display work area is performed separately from the initialization of the work area within the area (work area for game control) and the stack area within the area (stack area for game control), so the work area within the area and does not affect the stack area within the region.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes initial display timer update processing (A9602).
In the initial display timer update process, a timer is set for all blinking control (initial display control) to blink all the LEDs of the indicators of each digit of the performance display device 152 for about 5 seconds at the start of the performance display (after the power is turned on). make an update.

Next, the game control device 100 copies the switch rising edge information of the input port for which the base value is to be calculated to the performance display work area (A9603). The switch rising edge information is acquired in the input process and stored in the intra-area work area (particularly the switch control area) (A1303). As described above, in the present embodiment, the third input port 124 and the fourth input port 126 are the target input ports for base value calculation (input ports to be monitored). The copied switch rising edge information is processed for performance display editing (Fig. 8).
used in

In addition, even if a game ball is detected, the number of normal prize balls or the number of normal out balls does not change directly, and the rising edge information (bit) of the switch that is not subject to the calculation of the base value is copied in a clear state ( mask). For example, the gate switch 34a and the specific area switch 72
, remaining ball discharge port switch 73, etc. are copied in a cleared state. As a result, the processing related to these switches (at least the clear processing of A1211) can be omitted in the performance display editing processing.

It should be noted that the number of normal out balls is temporarily the winning opening switches 35a, 36a, 37a, 38a,
39a, out ball detection for detecting all game balls discharged from the game area 32 when updated by the input (game ball detection) itself from the gate switch 34a, the specific area switch 72, or the remaining ball discharge port switch 73. The switch 74 is redundantly updated, and the base value is calculated as an erroneous value. In addition, the number of normal prize balls is temporarily updated by input (game ball detection) at the gate switch 34a, the specific area switch 72, and the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, which overlaps with the switch of the winning hole and allows game balls to pass. If it is done, it will be updated redundantly overlapping with the switch of the winning opening, and the base value will be calculated as an incorrect value.

Next, the game control device 100 executes performance display device display processing (A9604). In the performance display device display processing, the performance display device 15
Set the segment output data (display data and lighting pattern data related to the base value) corresponding to the base value to be displayed in 2. For example, as the display period, the real-time value display period B
L, 1st previous display period B1, 2nd previous display period B2, and 3rd previous display period B3 are provided, and in each display period, the real-time value during measurement of the base value, the aggregation interval of the previous time, twice Segment output data corresponding to the base value measured in the previous aggregation interval or the aggregation interval three times before may be set.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the timer for switching the display period, and determines whether or not it is time to switch the display period (A9605). If it is time to switch the display period (the result of A9605 is "Y"), the display period switching setting is executed (A9606), and the performance display device control processing ends. When it is not time to switch the display period (the result of A9605 is "N"), the game control device 100 ends the performance display device control process without executing the display period switching setting.

In the switching setting of the display period, the switching setting of the information of the display period is performed like BL->B1->B2->B3->BL->. Also, the initial value of the timer for period switching (for example, the initial value corresponding to a predetermined period of 5 seconds) is set.

[Processing for checking difference balls]
Next, the details of the differential ball confirmation process (A9505) in the out-of-area integration process (FIG. 57) will be described. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the extra ball confirmation process. The difference check process is an out-of-area process and is executed as part of the above-described out-of-area program. In the extra ball confirmation process, the safety device counter value (the extra ball number + 100,000) that suggests the extra ball number is updated, and the safety device operation information that suggests the state of the safety device is updated.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the safety device is in operation based on the safety device in operation flag in the safety device in operation flag area included in the intra-region work area (A970
1). When the safety device is in operation (result of A9701 is "Y"), the difference ball confirmation process is terminated immediately, and the safety device counter value and the safety device activation information are not updated. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the out-of-area integrated processing program (program related to the safety device) included in the out-of-area program has a configuration that is not executed while the game is stopped, and if the safety device is activated and the game is stopped , the out-of-area integration process including the extra ball confirmation process is not executed (A13
20 is "Y"), the processing of step A9701 may be omitted. Note that step A9
If the processing of 701 is not performed, the safety device in-operation flag area is read and written by the program within the area, and becomes an area that is not read by the program outside the area (area that is not accessed).

Game control device 100, when the safety device is not in operation (result of A9701 is "N")
, the number of old operation information in the old operation information area contained in the outside work area is 2 or more (old operation information area≧
2) is determined (A9702). When the old operation information is 2 or more (A97
02 result is "Y"), the extra ball confirmation process is terminated, and the safety device counter value and the safety device operation information are not updated.

Game control device 100, when the old operation information is less than 2 (the result of A9702 is "N"
), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the out ball detection switch 74 based on the switch rising edge information of the switch control area (work area within the area) related to the fourth input port 126 (A9703). When there is an input to the out ball detection switch 74 (the result of A9703 is "
Y"), and it is determined whether the safety device counter value is 0 (A9704). If the safety device counter value is not 0 (the result of A9704 is "N"), the safety device counter value, which is the value of the safety device counter field, is updated by -1 (decremented by 1) (A9705). Therefore, in response to the input to the out ball detection switch 74 increasing the number of discharged balls by 1, the number of difference balls (=
The number of safe balls - the number of discharged balls) and the safety device counter value (=the number of difference balls + 100,000) is decremented by 1 and updated. Next, the acquired game ball number is loaded from the acquired game ball number area included in the intra-area work area (A9706).

The game control device 100, when there is no input to the out ball detection switch 74 (the result of A9703 is "N"), or when the safety device counter value is 0 (the result of A9704 is "Y
'), the safety device counter value is maintained without being updated by -1, and the number of acquired game balls is loaded (A9706).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the safety device counter value of the safety device counter area included in the outside work area (A9707), and adds the acquired game ball number to the safety apparatus counter value (A9708). The number of acquired game balls is the number of prize balls (total) acquired within one interruption, that is,
Since it is an increase in the number of safe balls within one interruption, in step A9708, the number of difference balls (=
The number of safe balls-the number of discharge balls) and the safety device counter value (=the number of difference balls+100,000) is increased by the number of winning game balls and updated.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the safety device counter value to the counter reference value (195000
) (A9
709). (A
The result of 9709 is "Y"), the upper limit value (195000) is set to the safety device counter value so that the safety device counter value returns to the upper limit value (counter reference value of 195000) (A971
0), and the upper limit value is saved in the safety device counter area as the value after addition (A9711). In addition, the safety device counter value exceeds the upper limit value at step A9708 and reaches 195000+α.
It can also be Here, α is less than the maximum value of the number of acquired game balls (acquired within one interruption), for example, smaller than the total value of prize balls when all the winning hole switches are simultaneously input.

On the other hand, when the safety device counter value is less than the counter reference value (195000) (A9
709 result is "N"), and since there is no need to limit to the upper limit value, the value after addition by the addition processing in step A9708 is saved in the safety device counter area as it is (A9711). In this way, the safety device counter value in the safety device counter area is updated to the value after addition (including the value limited to the upper limit value).

In addition, by limiting the safety device counter value to the upper limit value 19500, the range of the safety device counter area (number of bytes or number of bits) is clarified, which is convenient for the development of the game control program.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the operation information number (here, 0 to 2) corresponding to the safety device counter value (A9712). Safety device counter value from 0 to 189999, 1900
Corresponding to the safety device counter value of 00 to 194999 and the safety device counter value of 195000, the operation information number is "0" indicating the non-operating state (normal state) of the safety device, and "1" indicating the advance notice state of the safety device. ', and set to '2' to indicate an active warning condition. It should be noted that the operation information number is not set to "3", which indicates the operating state in which the safety device is in operation. Here, as described above, if the number of difference balls related to condition (1) is set to the number of difference balls based on the lowest value (the number of difference balls in a predetermined period from the point of time of the lowest value to the present), step A9709 In step , determine whether the value obtained by subtracting the lowest safety device counter value up to now from the current safety device counter value is 95000 or more, and if the difference is 95000 or more, step A9
At 710, the difference number may be set to 95,000. Then, in step A9712, based on the lowest value, the number of difference balls of 0 to 89999, the number of difference balls of 90000 to 94999, 9500
Corresponding to each of the number of difference balls of 0, the operation information number is the non-operating state (normal state) of the safety device
may be set to "0" indicating an operation warning state, "1" indicating an operation warning state, and "2" indicating an operation warning state. In addition, the minimum safety device counter value described above is stored in the minimum value area of the outside work area, and each time the current safety device counter value becomes smaller than the stored minimum safety device counter value, the minimum safety The device counter value may be updated to the current safety device counter value. It should be noted that when the operation information number becomes "2", as will be described later, the game is stopped immediately or after the end of the big win or the small win. In this way, when the number of difference balls regarding the condition (1) is set to the number of difference balls based on the minimum value, if the number of difference balls at the present time is 95000 or more, the game stop state can occur. Therefore, the number of difference balls related to condition (1) is equivalent to the maximum increase in the number of difference balls (so-called MY) in one day's sales.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads the current safety device operation information from the safety device operation information area included in the outside work area and saves it in the old operation information area (A9713).
Then, the old operation information is 2 and the operation information number is 1 (old operation information = 2 and operation information number = 1
) (A9714). If the old operation information = 2 and the operation information number = 1 (the result of A9714 is "Y"), the safety device operation information "2" (loaded value) without saving the operation information number in the safety device operation information area is maintained, and the extra ball confirmation process is terminated. This prevents the safety device actuation information from changing from "2" to "1" (2→
1 change prevention). Then, in the difference ball confirmation process after the next timer interrupt, the old operation information is 2
(the result of A9702 is "Y"), the process ends immediately, the safety device counter value and the safety device activation information are not updated, and the safety device activation information "2" is maintained.

On the other hand, if the old operation information is not 2 or the operation information number is not 1 (the result of A9714 is "N": old operation information ≠ 2 or operation information number ≠ 1), the operation information Save the number in the safety device activation information area and update the safety device activation information area (A9
715). After that, the extra ball confirmation process is terminated. Even if "2" indicating the operation warning state is saved in the safety device operation information area, if it is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the operation state of the safety device is immediately indicated in the subsequent safety device operation monitoring process. 3" is saved in the safety device activation information area and no activation warning condition is generated.

In this way, in the extra ball confirmation process, the safety device counter value of 0 to 189999, 1
Corresponding to each of the safety device counter values of 90000 to 194999 and the safety device counter value of 195000, the safety device activation information indicates the unactivated state (normal state) of the safety device.
"0" (safety device non-actuation information), "1" (safety device activation notice information) indicating an activation notice state, and "2" (safety device activation warning information) indicating an activation warning state.

New information (A971
5) change pattern (including maintenance pattern) is 0→0, 0→1, 1→0, 1→1, 1→
2 or 2→2, and as mentioned above, the change from 2→1 is prevented (A971
4).

In addition, the game control device 100 produces a differential ball command indicating the updated safety device counter value (A9711) or a differential ball command indicating the updated differential ball number (=safety device counter value - 100,000). It is transmitted to the control device 300 (sub board), and the effect control device 300 displays the display device 4
1 etc. may display a safety device counter value or the number of difference balls. In that case, in the difference ball confirmation process, even if the old operation information in the old operation information area is 2 (safety device operation warning information) (A9702)
, the safety device counter value is updated, and steps A9709 and A971
By omitting the zero processing, the safety device counter value is not limited to the upper limit value of 19,500.
However, corresponding to the safety device counter value of 195000 or more, the safety device activation information is set to "2" (safety device activation warning information) indicating the activation warning state.

In the above, the differential ball confirmation process has been explained. Step A9706 of the differential ball confirmation process is the number of paid out game media or the number of game media determined to be or the amount of gaming value determined to be granted) can be counted
Configure counting means. Steps A9703-A9705 of the extra ball confirmation process constitute a second counting means capable of counting the number of used game media (for example, the number of shot balls or the number of discharged balls). Step A9708 of the differential ball confirmation process constitutes a calculation means capable of calculating a calculated value (for example, a safety device counter value or the differential ball number) based on the number of payouts and the number of uses.

[Safety device activation monitoring process]
Next, the details of the safety device activation monitoring process (A9506) in the out-of-area integration process (FIG. 57) will be described. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the safety device activation monitoring process. The safety device operation monitoring process is an out-of-area process and is executed as part of the above-described out-of-area program.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the safety device operation information is 2 or more (safety device operation information≧2) (A9801). When the safety device activation information is 2 or more (A98
01 result is "Y"), that is, safety device activation warning information (value 2) or safety device activation information (
When the value 3) is set, it is determined whether it is during a big hit or a small hit (A98
02). Here, whether or not it is during the big hit or the small hit can be determined based on, for example, the game processing number (special game processing number, accessory game processing number). The game process number is stored in the game process number area (special game process number area, character object game process number area) of the intra-area work area.

For example, if the game processing number of the jackpot ending game processing number is the jackpot fanfare game processing number, it can be determined that the jackpot is in progress. In this embodiment, if the accessory game process number is 1 to 5, it can be determined that the jackpot is in progress. Also, for example, from the game processing number of the start of the small win (or fanfare of the small win (only if it exists)) to the game processing number of the small win remaining ball processing (or the ending of the small win (only if it exists)), the small win can be judged as medium. In this embodiment, if the special figure game process number is 3 to 5, it can be determined that the small hit is in progress. It should be noted that it may be determined that the small winning is in progress from the time when the small winning symbol is derived, or it may be determined that the big winning is in progress from the time when the big winning symbol is derived. When a big win is caused by a V win during a small win, it may be determined that the big win is in progress from the time when the V win is made.

If the game control device 100 is neither a small hit nor a big hit (the result of A9802 is "
N"), the current safety device activation information is loaded from the safety device activation information area included in the outside work area and saved in the old activation information area (A9803). Then, the safety device operation information (value 3) is saved in the safety device operation information area, and the safety device operation information area is updated (A
9804).

On the other hand, if the safety device operation information is less than 2 "0" or "1" (the result of A9801 is "N"), or in the case of a big hit or a small hit (the result of A9802 is "Y" )
, immediately terminate the safety device activation monitoring process, and substantially do nothing in the safety device activation monitoring process.

As described above, the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set, and in the activation warning state (condition (1) is satisfied and condition (2) is not satisfied) to warn the activation of the safety device, the jackpot or When the small hit is finished and neither the small hit nor the big hit is achieved (when the condition (2) is satisfied), the safety device operation information is set to the safety device operation information (value 3) (safety device operation information 2 → 3 change) (A9804). As a result, the safety device operating flag is set to "1" (safety device related processing A9410), the operating state (stop state) in which the safety device is operated,
That is, it is possible to generate a game stop state (game disabled state, game prohibited state) in which a special figure variation display game, a normal figure variation display game, a round game, etc. cannot be executed as games. Thus, the safety device operating flag can be set based on the safety device operation information in the safety device operation information area (part of the outside work area). The safety device operating flag of "1" indicates that the safety device has been operated (is in operation) based on the establishment of the operating condition (predetermined condition).
or the occurrence of a game-impossible state. It should be noted that the result of steps A1309, A1603, A1612, A2201, etc. becomes "Y" based on the safety device operating flag of "1", and the game stop state occurs.

Since the safety device is activated and the game cannot be played, it is possible to appropriately take countermeasures against cheating when the number of difference balls or the number of safe balls is large. It may be possible to suppress the addiction to the game of the person.

In addition, even if the safety device counter value of 195000 is reached and the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set (A9712, A9715 of the difference ball confirmation process), if it is neither a big hit nor a small hit (result of A9802 is "N"), the safety device activation information will instantly switch from safety device activation warning information (value 2) to safety device activation information (value 3) (A9804)
. That is, in this case, before the operation warning command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, the safety device operation warning information (value 2) in the safety device operation information area is overwritten with the safety device operation information (value 3). It will be erased. Therefore, when the safety device counter value reaches 195000 when neither the big win nor the small win is made, the operation warning state for warning the operation of the safety device does not occur.
Immediately after that, the safety device operates and a game stop state (game disabled state, game prohibited state) occurs.
Note that this corresponds to an instantaneous change in the safety device activation information from 1 to 2 to 3 as described above (2 is an instantaneous value and the activation warning state does not occur), but it gives advance notice of the activation of the safety device. In response to the transition from the operation notice state to the operation state in which the safety device is in operation, the operating command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as a safety device operation related command (A9405, A9
407).

In addition, if the safety device activation warning information (value 3) is set and the safety device has already been activated and the game is stopped, the out-of-area integration process is not executed (the result of A1320 is "Y ”), the safety device operating information is maintained at the safety device operating information (value 3), and the game stop state is continued.

In this embodiment, either before or after the V winning during the small winning, if the safety device counter value reaches 195000 and the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set, after the big winning due to the V winning ends , In step A9804, safety device operating information (value 3) is set and the game is stopped (a big hit occurs). However, as another example, if the safety device operation warning information (value 2) is set before the V winning during the small win, the safety device operating information (value 3) is set immediately after the small win is completed, and the game is stopped. State (no big hits), V during small hits
When the safety device operation warning information (value 2) is set after the prize is won, the safety device operation information (value 3) may be set after the big win due to the V prize is completed to stop the game (the big win occurs).
In addition, as a further example, even if the safety device operation warning information (value 2) is set before or after the V prize during the small hit, the safety device operating information (value 3) is set immediately after the small win ends. It may be set to stop the game (no big hits).

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (process) which the production|presentation control apparatus 300 performs by the program for production|presentation control is demonstrated.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. Figure 61
2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main processing (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. FIG. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the processing executed by the effect control device 300, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "B****".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first prohibits an interrupt (
B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B
0003), and allow interrupts (B0004). When the interruption is permitted, the game control device 1
00, it becomes possible to execute the command reception interrupt process for receiving the command sent from 00.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0
008). The WDT is activated by the CPU initial setting (B0002) described above, and the CPU 311
to see if it's working properly. If the WDT is not cleared after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the effect control device 300 executes RTC read processing for reading time information from the RTC (real time clock) 338 (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, time information may be read from the RTC 338 at predetermined intervals (for example, every two hours), and it is not necessary to read time information each time the process proceeds to step B0009. When power is turned on to the effect control device 300 (that is, power is turned on to the gaming machine 10), the RTC reading process may be executed only once (by changing the position of the RTC reading process, for example, steps B0003 and B0004 may be executed between). Effect control device 300 sets a time timer (clock means) for measuring time in the timer area in the RAM,
RT only once when time information is read from RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or when the power is turned on
When the time information is read from the C338, the time timer (clocking means) may be adjusted so as to match the time of the RTC338. And the production|presentation control apparatus 300 may perform various processes using the timer for time. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. A production button input process is executed (B0010). continue,
Execute hall/player setting mode processing for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of LEDs and liquid crystals (display device 41, etc.) by the person in charge of the game hall (game parlor), the player, etc. (B0011)
). As operations, the cross key switch 450, volume adjustment button switches 451a, 45
1b, there are operations of operation units such as the effect button 25 and the volume control switch 335 on the back of the game machine. In the hole/player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect point control processing for adding and clearing effect points (B0012). In the production point control process, the production points are added by executing the production or operation to which the production points are to be added, and the production points are carried over to the next game when the game is finished or the game is stopped. At times (at the time of stopping), for example, information including information on performance points is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark), which is a two-dimensional code. For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in hall/player setting mode processing and safety device system processing (at the time of receiving a command during operation).

Next, the effect control device 300 executes random number update processing for updating the random number such as the effect random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check processing. (B0014). Details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 executes customer waiting demonstration editing processing for editing and controlling the content of the customer waiting demonstration displayed on the display device 41 (B0015), and changes the power saving state of the gaming machine 10 waiting for customers. The power saving control process to be controlled is executed (B0016).

Next, the production control device 300 updates various data in accordance with the content to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. effect display edit processing is executed (B0017). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem if the drawing data can be completed by the VDP 312 within 1/30 second (approximately 33.3 msec) of the frame period. Then, the drawing preparation for the display frame buffer is completed, and drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0018).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B
0019). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0019 is "N"), the processing of B0019 is repeated until the frame switching timing comes. Instruct screen drawing (B0
020). Since the frame period of this embodiment is 1/30 second, for example, when periodic V blanking (image update) is performed twice every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period), the frame is switched. . Note that the image may not be updated every 1/60th of a second, and the interval may be increased.

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes sound control processing for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0021).

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes decoration control processing for controlling decoration devices (the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18) made up of LEDs and the like (B0022). In the decoration control process, for example, brightness control (light emission control) of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 executes movable body control processing for controlling effect devices (board effect device 44, frame effect device, etc.) such as movable accessories (electric accessories) driven by motors and solenoids (B0023 ). In the movable body control process, for example, a performance for driving a motor is set.

And the production|presentation control apparatus 300 returns to the process of B0008, after finishing the process of above-mentioned B0023. Thereafter, the processing from B0008 to B0023 is repeated.

[Receive command check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, details of the received command check process (B0014) in the main process (FIG. 61) described above will be described. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of received commands is 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to be analyzed, so the received command check process is terminated.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, if the command reception number is not 0, that is, if the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the command reception counter of the command reception counter area After subtracting the value for the number of commands received (B1103
), and copy the contents of the receive command buffer in the RAM to the command area for analysis (B11
04). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of received commands is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command reading index by +1 (adds only 1) within the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The received command buffer holds 32 received commands.
It is configured to store up to Received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31. Here, the received commands are read in order of index and copied to the command area for analysis. At the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N ”), and the processing from steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is received by the performance control device 300, the contents of the received command are stored in the received command buffer and at the same time the command reception counter value of the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in a command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, it is possible to prepare for receiving a large amount of commands by constantly securing an empty area in the received command buffer without performing direct analysis.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed, the effect control device 300 (the result of B1106 is "Y
”), loads the contents of the received command in the command area for analysis (B1107), and executes received command analysis processing for analyzing the contents (B1108). Details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands loaded in the processing of step B1101 has been completed (B1110). The processing from B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y"), the received command check process is terminated.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis processing (B1108) in the received command check processing (FIG. 62) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 shows the production control device 30
10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of received command analysis processing executed by .0.

The effect control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE section and the lower byte as an ACTION section (ACT section) (B1201). Commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, MODE section (MODE command) and A
It consists of a CTION section (ACTION command), and is normally transmitted continuously from a MODE section indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower order of the received command are M
It consists of an ODE section and an ACTION section in this order.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is within the normal range (B12
02). That is, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion indicating the type of command is a value that can be taken (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). Then, if the MODE part is within the normal range (the result of B1202 is "Y"), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (specific effect instruction, etc.). Then, when the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203
(B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE portion is within the range of the variation command (B1205). In addition, the variation system command is a command for commanding a variation pattern of a decorative special design, and there is, for example, a variation command. If the MODE part indicates a variable command (result of B1205 is "Y"), variable command processing is executed (B1206
), and terminates the received command analysis process.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent a variable command (B12
(B
1207). The hit-related commands are commands for commanding operations (such as displaying a fanfare screen or a round screen) related to effects during a big win or a small win. These include a round command for commanding, an interval command for commanding an interval screen, an ending command for commanding an ending screen, and the like. If the MODE part indicates a winning command (the result in B1207 is "Y"), the winning command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent a hit system command (B12
(B
1209). In addition, the symbol-based commands include, for example, a decoration special figure 1 command and a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. If the MODE part indicates a symbolic command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), symbolic command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the pattern system command (B12
09 result is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of single-shot commands (B
1211). If the MODE part indicates a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), single-shot command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent a single-shot command, the effect control device 300 (B12
11 result is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (B1213). The look-ahead symbol system command includes, for example, a look-ahead stop symbol command. Then, if the MODE part indicates a look-ahead pattern command (the result of B1213 is "Y
”), executes the look-ahead pattern-based command processing (B1214), and terminates the received command analysis processing.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the look-ahead symbol system command (
The result of B1213 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the prefetch variation command (B1215). Prefetch variation commands include, for example, prefetch variation pattern commands. If the MODE part indicates a prefetch variation command (result of B1215 is "Y"), prefetch variation command processing is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

On the other hand, the production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a prefetch variation command (the result of B1215 is "N"), may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated. Also, if the MODE part is out of the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), if the ACTION part is out of the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or the AC for the MODE part
Even if the TION part is not a correct combination (the result of B1204 is "N"), the received command analysis process is terminated.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 63) described above will be described. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing the procedure of single command processing executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). Then, if the MODE part indicates a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), a model setting process for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B
1302), the one-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the model designation command, the effect control device 300 (B1
The result of 301 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a command for RAM initialization (B1303). And if the MODE part represents a command for RAM initialization (
If the result of B1303 is "Y"), RAM initialization setting processing for notifying RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and the one-shot command processing ends.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents a power failure recovery command ( B1305). For example, power failure recovery commands include a power failure recovery command and a recovery screen command. Then, when the MODE part indicates a power failure recovery system command (B13
05 result is "Y"), the power failure restoration setting process is executed (B1306), and the one-shot system command process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent a power failure recovery command, the effect control device 300 (B
If the result of 1305 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a customer waiting demo command (B1307). Then, when the MODE part indicates a customer waiting demo command (B13
07 is "Y"), the customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1308), and the one-off command process is terminated.

If the MODE part does not indicate the customer waiting demo command, the effect control device 300 (B
The result of 1307 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reserved number command (B1309). Then, if the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), execute the special figure 1 reservation information setting process (B1310),
Ends single-shot command processing.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (B1311). Then, when the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B131
2) End the one-shot command processing.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents the probability information command (B1313). Then, when the MODE part represents a probability information command (B1
The result of 313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the single command process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the probability information command, the effect control device 300 (B1
The result of 313 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (B1315). In addition, as error/fraud commands, for example, fraud occurrence command, fraud release command, state off command, state on command, magnet fraud notification command (magnetism error command), board radio wave fraud notification command (board radio wave error command) be.
As fraud occurrence commands, there are commands indicating the occurrence of fraudulent winning based on the signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 43. The fraud cancellation command is a command indicating the cancellation of fraud. In the winning slot switch/state monitoring process (A1308), occurrence of fraudulent prize winning and fraud cancellation are monitored, and a fraud occurrence command and a fraud cancellation command can be transmitted. State-on commands include the generation of a switch signal for shot ball failure (shot ball failure error), the generation of an overflow switch signal (overflow error), the generation of an abnormal dispensing status signal (abnormal dispensing error), and the glass frame open detection switch 63. There is a command that indicates the generation of a signal from (glass frame open error) and the generation of a signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) (body frame open error, front frame open error). A state off command also indicates that no error has occurred. When there is detection (magnet fraud) from the magnetic sensor switch 61, magnet fraud monitoring processing (A1
315), a magnet fraud notification command is transmitted. When there is detection (radio fraud) from the radio wave sensor 62, a board radio fraud notification command is transmitted in radio fraud monitoring processing (A1316).

Then, if the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (result of B1315 is "Y"), error/illegal setting processing for reporting or canceling the notification of error or illegality is executed (
B1316), the one-shot command processing is terminated. In the error/injustice setting process, for example, an error or injustice notification sound is generated, LEDs for performance provided in the gaming machine 10 such as the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46 are caused to emit light in a predetermined manner, The display device 41 or the like is set to display an error.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent an error / illegal command (the result of B1315 is "N"), then the MODE part is a command for effect mode switching (processing during special figure display etc.) is determined (B1317). Then, when the MODE part represents a command for switching the production mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the production mode switching setting process is executed (B1318), and the one-shot system command process is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent a command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is "N"), then whether the MODE part represents the number of out balls command indicating the number of out balls It is determined whether or not (B1319). Then, if the MODE part indicates the number of out-balls command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the processing when the number of out-balls is received is executed (B1
320), ending the one-shot command processing.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the out ball number command (B
If the result of 1319 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a count command (large winning opening count command) (B1321). Then, when the MODE part indicates a command for counting the big winning opening switch (the result of B1321 is "Y"), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the one-shot system command process ends.

If the MODE section does not indicate a count command, the effect control device 300 (B
If the result of 1321 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) (B1323). The setting value information command is executed in step A of FIG. 5B.
It is included in the command for recovery from power failure in 1049 and the command for RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1047. Then, when the MODE part represents a setting value information command (
The result of B1323 is "Y"), the set value reception processing is executed (B1324), and the one-shot command processing ends. In the setting value reception processing, the setting value (probability setting value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM, and necessary processing is executed.

If the MODE section does not represent the set value information command, the effect control device 300 (B
If the result of 1323 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a setting change command (B1325). As a setting change command, for example, a probability setting change command (A
1033). Then, when the MODE part indicates a setting change command (B13
25 is "Y"), the setting change information setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot command process ends. In the setting change system information setting process, the contents of the setting change system command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command indicating that the probability setting is being changed is received, in the setting change information setting process, a setting change indication is displayed on the display device 41 to inform the player that the setting is being changed.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting change command, the effect control device 300 (
If the result of B1325 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a setting confirmation type command (B1327). As a setting confirmation command, for example, a command during probability setting confirmation (
A1036). When the MODE part indicates a setting confirmation command (B1
The result of 327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the one-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the probability setting confirming command is received, in the setting confirmation system information setting process, a setting confirming display is displayed on the display device 41 to notify the player that the setting is being confirmed.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting confirmation command, the effect control device 300 (
If the result of B1327 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a safety device-related command (B1329). Safety device-related commands include, for example, a safety device activation-related command (A9407). When the difference ball command including the difference ball information such as the safety device counter value and the number of difference balls is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300, the command of the safety device related system includes this difference ball command. good. If the MODE part indicates a safety device-related command (result of B1329 is "Y"), the safety device-related processing is executed (B1330), and the one-shot command processing ends. In safety device system processing,
Stores the contents of commands related to safety devices, and executes processing corresponding to the commands.

In the safety device system processing, information included in the safety device related command can be displayed on the display device 41 as processing corresponding to the command. For example, when a safety device activation-related command is received as a safety device-related command, safety device activation information (safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning) included in the ACTION part of the safety device activation-related command Safety device-related display (activation notice display 511) corresponding to information (value 2), safety device operating information (value 3)
, an operation warning display 512, and an operation display 513) are displayed on the display device 41. Also, for example,
When a ball difference command is received as a safety device-related command, the number of ball difference is displayed on the display device 41
to display.

The display of the difference number (=safety device counter value - 100,000) corresponds to the received difference command, and the value of the entire range (for example, 0 to 100,000 or -100,000 to +100,000) is displayed on the display device 41. Alternatively, only values within a predetermined range (for example, 90,000 to 100,000 after the operation warning state) may be displayed. If the number of difference balls is displayed only in this predetermined range, it can be displayed only when the number of difference balls is important and can attract the player's attention, and when the number of difference balls is not important, the number of difference balls can be displayed. By hiding, the display device 41 can be easily seen. As the predetermined range, the range corresponding to the operation notice state (90,000 or more and less than 95,000), the range corresponding to the operation warning state and the operation state (95,000 or more), the operation notice state, the operation warning state, and the operation The range corresponding to all states (9
10,000 or more), or the value immediately before or immediately after entering the operation notice state (for example, 89,000 or more, 91,000 or more), and the like. In addition, the number of difference balls itself may be displayed, or the number of difference balls may be indirectly displayed in the form of the number of game balls (number of game media) remaining until the safety device is activated (stopped). good too. Furthermore, instead of the difference number of balls, the safety device counter value may be displayed, and when the safety device counter value is within a predetermined range (for example, 190,000 or more after the operation notice state), it is displayed on the display device 41. may be made.

Note that the difference ball command may be notified (transmitted and received) corresponding to the number of difference balls that changes in units of one. For example, the number of difference balls indicated by the difference number of balls command can be changed by one between 0 and 100,000 or between -100,000 and +100,000, like the actual number of difference balls. A balance command may be sent each time the safety device counter value and thus the balance number is updated (A9711).

Further, the difference ball command may be notified (transmitted and received) corresponding to the number of difference balls that changes in a predetermined unit. For example, the difference ball number indicated by the difference ball command can be changed in units of 1000, and 0 (=
Actual ball difference 0-999), 1000 (= Actual ball difference 1000-1999), 2000
(=Actual ball difference 2000 to 2999), . In this case, in order to reduce the chances of sending the extra ball command, the extra ball command may be transmitted each time the safety device counter value and thus the extra ball number are updated in units of 1000 (A9711). Also, the number of difference balls indicated by the difference ball command may have a value on the negative side.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent a safety device-related command (the result of B1329 is "N"), determines whether the MODE part represents a symbol stop command (B1331). . In addition, the symbol stop command, for example, special figure 1 symbol stop command (decorative special figure 1 stop command) and special figure 2 symbol stop command (decorative special figure 2 stop command)
There is Then, if the MODE part represents a command to stop the pattern (the result of B1331 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the command of the MODE part is a normal command ( B1332).

If the command in the MODE part is a normal command (the result of B1332 is "Y")
, The effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1333), sets the game state flag to the normal state after all symbols have stopped (B1334), and ends the single-shot command processing. In the process of B1334, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state, but depending on the timing at which this process is executed, the game state flag may be changed to a "fluctuation", "big hit", or "small hit" flag. is set.

On the other hand, if the MODE section does not indicate a symbol stop command (the result of B1331 is "N
”), or if the command in the MODE section is not normal (result of B1332 is “N”)
, the effect control device 300 ends the single-shot command processing.

In addition, the effect control device 300 may execute processing for commands not described in FIG. 64 in single-shot command processing. For example, the effect control device 300 receives a time reduction variation number command, effect rotation speed command, hitting instruction notification command (left hitting instruction notification command, right hitting instruction notification command) etc. from the game control device 100, and the command may be processed. The production control device 300 can acquire the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state from the time reduction fluctuation number command (time reduction fluctuation number) or the like, and can acquire the production remaining number of rotations in each production mode from the production rotation number command or the like, and the time reduction state. Effect can be set based on the remaining number of fluctuations in , the number of rotations remaining in each effect mode, and the like. The effect control device 300 displays a hitting instruction display (left hitting instruction display or right hitting instruction display) that instructs (suggests) how to hit in response to a hitting instruction notification command (left hitting instruction information command or right hitting instruction information command). )
can be displayed (notified) on the display device 41 or the like.

[Prefetching pattern command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, details of the prefetch pattern system command process (B1214) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 63) described above will be described. FIG. 65 shows the production control device 30
0 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a look-ahead symbol system command process executed by 0. FIG.

Production control device 300, first, whether or not the latest pending information is the information of special figure 1 suspension (special figure 1 start memory), for example, the decoration special figure reservation number command received at the latest is the number of decoration special figure 1 reservation It is determined whether or not it is a command (B1601). If the latest pending information is the information of the special figure 1 pending (the result of B1601 is "Y"), the look-ahead pattern system command (look-ahead stop design command) to the special figure 1 look-ahead pattern command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations Save (B1602).

Production control device 300, if the latest pending information is not the information of the special figure 1 pending (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, the decoration special figure pending number command received at the latest is the decorative special figure 2 pending number command In the case, save the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) in the special figure 2 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (B1603).

After steps B1602 and B1603, the effect control device 300 sets a prefetch variation command reception wait flag indicating that the prefetch variation command reception wait flag is set (B160
4). This is because the look-ahead symbol system command and the look-ahead variation system command are set, and therefore the game control device 100 transmits the look-ahead variation system command following the look-ahead design system command. After that, the look-ahead symbol system command processing is terminated.

[Prefetching variation command processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 66, the details of the prefetch variation-related command processing (B1216) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 63) described above will be described. FIG. 66 shows the production control device 30
10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of prefetch variation command processing executed by .0.

Production control device 300, first, look-ahead variation system command (look-ahead variation pattern command)
(B1701). If the above-mentioned prefetch variation-related command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that reception of a prefetch variation-related command is waiting. If the prefetch variation command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "N"), the prefetch variation command processing is terminated. If the prefetch variation command is waiting for reception (the result in B1701 is "Y"), the prefetch variation command reception wait flag is cleared (B1702).

Next, the effect control device 300 (sub board) is the design of the latest pending information (special figure 1 or special figure 2)
(B1703), and acquire the sub-internal prefetch variation command MODE part corresponding to the prefetch variation command MODE part (B1703).
B1704). Next, a look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and sub-internal look-ahead variation command ACT corresponding to the ACTION part (ACT part) of the look-ahead variation command
part is obtained (B1706).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not both the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, sub-inside look-ahead variation command MODE section and ACT section) are other than 0 (B1707).
. If the command is normal (effective), it is converted to a value other than 0. MODE part after conversion, A
If the CT part is both other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the MODE part after conversion and the A
The command after conversion composed of the CT part is saved in the latest pending information and the prefetching variation command area (special figure 1 prefetching variation command area or special figure 2 prefetching variation command area) corresponding to the number of reservations (B1708). Then, the read-ahead command consistency check process is executed (B170
9) Determine whether the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (B1710
).

It should be noted that the time of the first half variation corresponding to the MODE part changes depending on the number of suspensions when the variation display game is started. When the pending change display game is started, if there is no other pending, the first half variation is longer, and if there is a new pending and the number of pending is large, the first half is shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half variation changes, the MODE part of the received prefetch variation system command is converted into the sub internal prefetch variation command MODE part so that the internal command of the performance control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Also, since the type of reach is not related to the number of reservations, the second half variation corresponding to the intra-sub prefetch variation command ACT section does not depend on the number of reservations. However, since there are different types of leeches of the same system,
If the ACT part (the value of the second half variation) of the look-ahead variation command is not converted, the effect control device 30
If 0 is used as it is, the number increases and the check becomes difficult. For example, even in normal reach,
There are types such as normal reach-1 stop failure and normal reach +1 stop failure.
Therefore, by converting the ACT portion indicating reach of the same system into the same intra-sub prefetch variation command ACT portion, the number is reduced and the load of check processing such as prefetch command matching check processing is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300, if at least one of the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, the sub-inside look-ahead variation command MODE section and ACT section) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or , if the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (B171
If the result of 0 is "N"), it is determined that there is an abnormality in the converted command, and the read-ahead variation command processing is terminated.

If the combination of the MODE section and the ACT section after conversion is normal, the effect control device 300 (B
The result of 1710 is "Y"), the pending information to be prefetched (latest pending information) is loaded from the prefetching variation command area (B1711), and the prefetching lottery process for the latest pending prefetching effect is executed (B1712). As the look-ahead effect (pre-read preview effect), for example, there are a continuous notice effect (including a chance look-ahead effect), a look-ahead zone effect, a pending change notice, and the like. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest hold look-ahead effect (hold change notice, etc.) will occur (B1713
). When the latest pending look-ahead effect occurs (the result of B1713 is "Y"), point information corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the generated look-ahead effect (suspension change notice, etc.) is an effect that starts immediately (B1715). If the look-ahead effect to be generated is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y"), the display corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1716). If the look-ahead effect that occurs is not the effect that starts immediately (B1715
result is "N"), the display corresponding to the look-ahead effect during the hold shift (when the hold display is moved, when the number of holds is reduced) is set and saved (B1717). Then, the read-ahead variation command processing ends. In addition, the look-ahead effect is an effect that informs the expectation of a big hit (expectation for a special result) by notifying information that suggests the result (game result) of the variable display game before the variable display game stops. may notify information suggesting the set probability setting value (1 to 6). That is, the effect control device 300 can perform the prefetch effect so as to change the pending display (icon) of the prefetch target based on the degree of expectation for big hits and the probability set value.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the latest pending prefetch effect does not occur (the result of B1713 is "N"), ends the prefetch variation system command processing as it is.

[Processing of pattern-based commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, details of the pattern-based command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 63) described above will be described. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing the procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300. FIG.

The effect control device 300 receives the pattern system command (decoration special figure 1 command or decoration special figure 2
command) to set the special figure type corresponding to the MODE part (B1801). The special figure classification is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT
part), and save it in a predetermined area such as RAM (B180
2). Here, in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the design changes, the table is used for each MODE, and the design type is set. In addition, in this embodiment, the design type is a lost design, a special figure 1 jackpot pattern A, a special figure 2 jackpot pattern BF, a jackpot pattern G in the remaining reservation (special figure 2 reservation), a time saving pattern ( It corresponds to support per pattern) etc.

[Processing of variable commands]
Next, details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 63) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variable command processing executed by the effect control device 300. FIG.

Effect control device 300, special figure type (special figure 1
Or special figure 2) determines whether it is undetermined (B1901). If the special figure type is undetermined (the result of B1901 is "Y"), end the variation system command processing. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), check the combination of the received variation system command and symbol system command (B1902), whether the variation system command and symbol type are inconsistent is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency means a contradiction in effecting, for example, when a winning variation command is received but a jackpot symbol symbol command is received. When the fluctuation system command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y")
, to terminate the variable command processing.

Effect control device 300, when the variation system command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), determines the variation pattern type from the variation system command (variation command) (B1
904), a variable effect setting process for setting a variable effect that is a variable effect is executed (B19
05). It should be noted that there are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) is set to be during special figure fluctuation (B1906), and if the number of read-ahead effects such as continuous effects is 0, it is updated by -1 (B1907).

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, details of the variable effect setting process (B1905) in the variable command process (FIG. 68) described above will be described. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is reachless variation (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). If the variation pattern type is no reach variation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), the number of production points, model code,
Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to special figure type, production mode, setting information (setting value) (B2002), corresponding to the MODE part of the variation command (variation command) and the number of reservations of special figure type Acquire the address of the first half advance notice distribution group table (B2003
). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the higher the number of reservations, the shorter the fluctuation time, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of reservations is obtained.

Effect control device 300, if the variation pattern type is not a change without reach (the result of B2001 is "N"), that is, if it is a change with reach, the number of points of the effect point, the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, A first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and setting information (setting value) is set (B2004), and the variable command (variable command) M
The address of the first half advance notice allocation group table corresponding to the ODE part and the variation pattern type is acquired (B2005).

Effect control device 300, after steps B2003 and B2005, performs a lottery for notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before reach) (B2006). Subsequently, the number of production points, the model code, the special type, the production mode, the pattern type, and the setting information (setting value) are set (B2007), and the ACT of the variation system command is set. The address of the second half advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the part is acquired (B2008), and a lottery for the advance notice that appears during the second half fluctuation (during reach) is performed (B2009). After that, the content of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the variation command (variation command) is determined (B2010).
In addition, you can see the change time and main reach content from the change command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the notice (B2011). After that, the stop pattern of the decorative special figure variable display game is determined according to the content of the variable performance such as the reach performance and the notice performance (B2012). Here, the decoration stop pattern is specifically determined, such as determining a loose pattern in the case of a missing pattern.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of variable effect (B2013), and performs display setting of notice effect (B2014). Subsequently, the display setting of the pending reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed, for example, the display (display of the pending shift) that the pending display corresponding to the decorative special figure that changes this time is set is set (B2015). Next, set a sound number that determines the mode of presentation (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker, and a decoration number that determines the mode of presentation by the light emission of the decoration device (B2016).
). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) includes a plurality of decoration light emitting units (decoration LED
etc.), and emits light in a light emission mode (color of each LED, light emission timing, etc.) determined by the decoration number.

Note that it is also possible to set the voice number and decoration number based on setting information (setting values) as well as the effect contents. In this way, the player can enjoy guessing the setting information (set value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emission mode of the decoration device, that is, the light emission mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED).

Next, the production control device 300 performs the display setting of the decoration special figure fluctuation corresponding to the special figure type (B
2017), in addition to the above-described first to third special symbols that fluctuate on the display device 41, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation relating to the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) is performed (B2018). In addition,
The fourth pattern variation is the lamp display unit 1 of the above-described lamp display device 80 provided other than the display device 41.
, 2 (LED), or may be executed on the display screen of the display device 41 .

[Processing of winning commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the details of the winning command processing (B1208) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 63) described above will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the procedure of winning command processing executed by the effect control device 300. FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE part of the received hit system command indicates fanfare (B2101). When the MODE part of the win-related command indicates fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, when the win-related command is a big-win fanfare command or a small-win fanfare command, fanfare effect setting processing for setting a fanfare effect. (B2102). In addition, corresponding to the big win fanfare command or the small win fanfare command, the display device 41 or the like may display (announce) the display of the hitting instruction (left hitting instruction or right hitting instruction). The fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds for this big hit. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 is set to fanfare in progress (B2103), and the win system command processing is terminated. In addition, the upper limit of the number of rounds is
It can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol system command (decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part of the received hit-related command does not represent fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N"), determines whether the MODE part of the hit-related command represents a round ( B2104). If the MODE part represents a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, if the hit system command is a round command or a small hit open command, the effect control device 300 executes the round effect setting process, and the current (B2105, B21
06), the winning system command processing is terminated.

If the MODE part of the received hit-related command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the hit-related command represents an interval ( B2107). When the MODE part represents an interval (B2107
result is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is the interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process, and the game indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 The status flag is set to "interval" (B2108, B2109), and the winning system command processing is terminated.

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not indicate an interval (B2107
result is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit system command indicates the ending (B2110). When the MODE part indicates the ending (B21
10 is "Y"), that is, when the winning command is the ending command, the effect control device 300 executes the ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect, and the current game state of the gaming machine 10. Ending is set in the game state flag indicating (P machine state) (B2111, B2112), and the win system command processing is terminated.

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not indicate the ending (B2
If the result of 110 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the winning command process without executing any process.

[Example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 71A is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating game state transitions in the first embodiment. The game state transitions (transitions) by the game control of the game control device 100 . The game states are particularly shown to be transitioned by the occurrence of a big win, or by the passage of a predetermined number of games (the number of rotations, the number of fluctuations) as a trigger. In FIG. 71A, for each game state, the state of the jackpot probability (special pattern probability), the state of the normal pattern probability (normal pattern probability) that is the probability of the winning result of the normal pattern variation display game, the production mode, the main Features such as a different variation display game (main variation display game, main variation), right-handed or left-handed shooting mode, etc. are shown.

The performance mode (performance stage) can be set by the game control device 100 through the jackpot end processing (FIG. 40), the performance mode information check processing (FIG. 35), etc., as described above. However, not limited to this, the production control device 300, the number of times of time reduction, the number of remaining pending prescribed,
It can also be set based on the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game after the end of the big hit.

In addition, in FIG. 71A, specific game states B and C (time saving mode # 3, # 4) in the case of sudden time saving due to ceiling time saving and time saving design due to reaching the ceiling number of times are omitted (similar to FIG. 71B), but will be described later. will be described in detail in the second embodiment (FIG. 77) and the third embodiment (FIG. 82).

In the first embodiment, the game state includes a normal game state, a specific game state, and a transition state. In this embodiment, the specific game state is a time-saving state, but it is also possible to configure the specific game state to be a variable state in which the probability of a big hit is a high probability state.

In addition, since the jackpot probability and normal pattern probability in the transition state do not change from the normal game state,
Probabilistically, the transition state may be included in the normal game state. That is, the transition state may be regarded as a normal game state in which the main variation display game becomes the special figure 2 variation display game. However, in the transition state, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed by the digestion of the remaining reservation, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes the main fluctuation display game, and the V passing (to the V winning opening) in the small hit and the small hit A big hit by the passage of a game ball, V prize) occurs with a small hit probability (1/8). Therefore, the transition state is an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than normal, and from this point of view, it may be regarded as a game state that can be distinguished from the normal game state. Further, the transition state and the specific game state (time saving state) may be put together as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, or the specific game state (time saving state) may be the first advantageous state and the transition state may be the second advantageous state. state.

First, each game state will be described. In the normal game state, the game control device 100
The probability of hitting the jackpot is low (low probability of special pattern), and the probability of hitting the normal pattern is also low (low probability of normal pattern).
In the present embodiment, the normal low probability state is assumed to be a state without general electric support (no support state), and the normal low probability state is assumed to be a general electric support state (supported state). Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (universal electric) is opened due to the general pattern in the state with support, if the probability is low when the general pattern is opened, there is no support state. becomes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration is also possible in which the support state is regarded as being present while the normal variable prize winning device 37 is open.

Also, in the normal game state, the production mode is the normal mode. In the normal game state, left-handed hitting that facilitates entry of the game ball into the first start winning hole 36 is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting, and is recommended as a game ball shooting mode. The main starting area where the game ball is likely to win in the recommended shooting mode is the first start winning opening 36, and the main fluctuation display game (main fluctuation special figure) becomes the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The sub-starting area where the game ball is difficult to win in the recommended shooting mode becomes the normal variable winning device 37, and the sub-variable display game becomes the special figure 2 variable display game.

In the specific game state (time saving state), the game control device 100 controls the jackpot probability to be a low probability state, but the normal pattern hit probability to be a high probability (normal pattern high probability). In the specific game state, as the shooting mode of the game ball, the normal variable winning device 37 is easily opened, and the right hitting aiming at the normal variable winning device 37 is recommended. Therefore, in the specific game state, the main starting region is the normal variable winning device 37 and the secondary starting region is the first starting winning port 36, so the main variable display game is the special figure 2 variable display game, and the secondary variable display game is It becomes a special figure 1 variable display game.

Also, in the specific game state, if the number of times of time saving is less than the reference number of times (here 5 times) (
There are cases where the number of times of time saving is ≤ 5) and 99 times larger than the reference number of times (number of times of time saving = 99). The performance mode in the case of the number of times of time saving ≤ 5 is set to the time saving mode #1, the performance mode in the case of the number of times of working time = 99 is set to the time saving mode #2, and the performance modes of the time saving mode #1 and the time saving mode #2 are made different to play the game. may improve the interest of In addition, the reference number of times may be, for example, a reciprocal value (8 times) of the probability of a small hit of 1/8, and may be 7 times or the like. The smaller the reference number of times, the less likely it is that a small hit will occur in the time-saving mode #1 (the one that becomes a big hit state by passing the V in the small hit), while the production mode #2.
The difference is bigger and the sharpness comes out.

The transition state is a state that can occur after the end of the specific game state (time saving state). In the transition state, the remaining hold caused by winning the normal variable winning device 37 (general electric) opened by the normal game win in the specific game state is digested, and the special figure 2 variable display game is executed as the main variable display game. be. The production mode of the transition state is the remaining pending consumption mode. In addition, the remaining hold digestion mode is divided into a mode before the end of the opening of the general electricity due to the normal game during the specific game state, and a mode after the opening of the general electricity after the opening of the general electricity is finished. You can divide. In the pre-opening mode, it is recommended to shoot to the right to target the general electricity, and in the post-opening mode, it is recommended to shoot to the left because the general electricity is closed.

If the remaining hold digestion mode, which is the production mode of the transition state, is divided into a mode before the end of the opening of the general electricity and a mode after the end of the opening of the general electricity, the player can determine whether the general electricity is open (should he hit the right side) or is closed. It becomes easy to understand whether it is (should hit left). If not divided, it becomes easier to recognize that the remaining hold is being consumed through the transition state.

Also, as described above, the transition state and the specific game state (shortening of working hours) may be combined into an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and in the advantageous state, the same production mode may be used without dividing the production mode.
In this case, the advantageous state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation display game can be used as a common effect mode. As will be described later, when a special figure hit occurs due to the digestion of the remaining hold (a big hit by passing V in a small hit), the player is more likely to win than when a special figure hit occurs during the specific game state. If the game value to be given is increased, a large game value can be obtained in spite of the fact that it is unclear from a common presentation mode whether the game is in a time-saving state or in the process of consuming the remaining hold, thereby making the player happy. . It should be noted that here, the game value (privilege) is, for example, the number of time reductions after the end of the big win, the number of finally obtained big wins, and the like.

Next, the transition (transition) from each game state will be described. First, in the normal game state, when a big hit (not due to V winning) occurs in a special figure variation display game, the game transitions to a specific game state after the big win state ends.

In the specific game state, when a small win (a big win state is achieved by passing V) by a special figure variation display game, the game returns to the specific game state again after the big win state ends. In this case, it returns to time saving mode #1, and the number of times of saving time as game value (privilege) is below the reference number of times (number of times of saving time ≤ 5).

When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, transition from the specific game state to the transition state. For example, this predetermined transition condition is (i) that the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game in the specific gaming state exceeds the number of time reductions (first predetermined number, initial value of time reduction variation number 2), and ( ii) The second predetermined number of times (time reduction Either the initial value of the number of fluctuations 1 (for example, twice the number of times of shortening of working hours) is exceeded, or (iii) the opening of a predetermined number of times of opening (for example, two times) is completed. In addition, the second predetermined number of times may be obtained by adding the maximum value (for example, 4) of the special figure 1 reservation number to the time saving number of times (first predetermined number of times). The condition (iii) is provided as a countermeasure against stopping shots.

In the specific game state, the original specification (performance) of the gaming machine 10 is that the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the main variation display game, can be executed a number of times in a short time. If only the number of times exceeding the time-saving number of times is the transition condition from the specific game state, the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a secondary variable display game, deviates from the original specification of the gaming machine 10. - 特許庁However, by providing the two conditions (i) and (ii), the execution of the sub-variation display game can be treated as a bonus (privilege), and the player can play the game according to the original specifications without causing any loss. If the player plays the game normally, it is unlikely that the condition (i) is established and the transition state is entered while the condition (ii) is established.

In addition, in the time-saving mode # 2 of the specific game state, it can be continued until the special figure 2 variable display game of 99 times of time-saving is executed, so a small hit (becomes a big hit state by passing V) is almost certainly generated. Then, after the jackpot state ends, the specific game state (time saving mode #1) is entered again. Therefore, the time saving mode # 2 is the next continuation confirmation mode (
confirmation mode).

In the transition state, when the special figure 2 variation ends, the main variation display game transitions to the normal game state as the special figure 1 variation display game. On the other hand, in the transition state, when a small hit (becomes a big hit state by passing V in the small hit) occurs, the time saving mode # of the specific game state after the end of the big hit state
2 and 99 times of time saving are given. That is, when a small hit (big hit after passing V) occurs in the transition state (remaining pending digestion mode) in which the remaining hold is digested, the number of time reductions (≤ Compared to 5), the number of times of time saving increases, and the game value given to the player increases. Furthermore, when a small hit (big hit after passing V) occurs in the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode), a small hit (big hit after passing V) will almost certainly occur in the next time-saving mode #2, so a total of 2 times A jackpot is secured as a game value.

[Another example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 71B is another example of a game state transition diagram showing transitions of game states. It should be noted that the game state transition of FIG. 71B can also be applied to the second embodiment.

In FIG. 71B, the remaining hold which is all the special figure 2 holds digested after the end of the time saving is divided into predetermined remaining hold (first remaining hold) and excessive hold (second remaining hold), and production corresponding to the transition state The residual hold digestion mode as a mode is divided into a time-saving residual hold digest mode in which a predetermined residual hold is digested and an excess hold digest mode in which excess hold is digested. Here, the predetermined remaining hold is the first predetermined number of the special figure 2 hold that occurs during the time saving and is digested after the time saving ends (all or part of the special figure 2 hold), and the excess hold Is a special figure 2 hold (remaining hold) that is digested after a predetermined remaining hold. Excessive pending consumption mode may include, for example, a mode of displaying a result screen showing a game result on the display device 41 and other special modes. In addition, since the time saving mode and the time saving mode (time saving mode # 1 or time saving mode # 2) are common in terms of digesting the special figure 2 hold that occurred during the time saving, the production mode as the same production mode It can be made common.

[Time saving number of times corresponding to the pattern and the number of prescribed remaining reservations]
FIG. 72 is a table showing the number of times of time saving corresponding to the symbol which is the type of winning of the special figure variation display game and the prescribed remaining pending number (prescribed remaining pending number). The pattern is a pattern in the case of a big hit, and here, it is determined by a big hit pattern random number, and time-saving patterns are excluded. The pattern is
It is a winning stop symbol and may correspond to either a stop symbol number or a stop symbol pattern. (A
) relates to the winning pattern of the special figure 1 variable display game. (B) The upper figure relates to the special figure 2 fluctuation display in the normal pattern high probability state (during the time saving state), and the lower figure is the special figure 2 fluctuation display in the normal pattern low probability state. It relates to the winning pattern of the game (the winning pattern in the remaining reservation).

The symbol A is a stop symbol determined by a big hit symbol random number, and is a big hit stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game. The pattern BF is also a stop pattern determined by the big hit pattern random number, but in the normal pattern high probability state (during the time saving state), the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit V passing (V winning) is a stop pattern. The symbol G is also a stop symbol determined by the random number of the big hit symbol, but it is related to the V passage (V prize) in the small hit of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the low probability state of the normal pattern (small hit in the remaining hold) It is a jackpot stop pattern. If there is a small winning symbol random number in addition to the big winning symbol random number, the symbols BF and G may be the small winning stop symbols determined by the small winning symbol random number.

The pattern A has a distribution (selection rate) of 100%, and only the pattern A exists as a jackpot stop pattern in the special figure 1 variable display game. The symbols BF are distributed to the jackpot symbol random numbers at 40%, 25%, 15%, 10% and 10%, respectively. Pattern G is 100% sorted
is.

In the pattern A, which is the type of jackpot in the special figure 1 variable display game, the number of times of time saving after the jackpot is one. Further, in the symbol A, the prescribed (scheduled) number of remaining reservations to be digested after the end of the time saving state is four. Therefore, the total number of reserved special figures 2 that can be digested by executing the special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the big hit state is 5 (=1+4) by regulation. In symbol A, the continuation rate is {1-(1-1/8) ⁵ }×100%=48.7% for a small hit probability of 1/8, and the confirmed mode transition rate is (1 −1/8)×{1−(1−1/8) ⁴ }×100%=36.2%.

In the pattern BF, which is the type of jackpot of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game started during the normal high probability state, the number of times of time reduction after the jackpot is 5 times, 4 times, 3 times, 2 times, and 1 time. be. In addition, the pattern B-
For F, the prescribed remaining pending numbers are 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9, respectively. Therefore, the total number of special figures 2 reserved that can be digested by executing the special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the big hit state is 10 by regulation in any of the symbols BF. In the patterns BF, the continuation rate is the same for each of the small hit probability of 1/8, {1-(1-1/8) ¹⁰ } × 100% = 73.7%. The mode transition rates are respectively 25.0%, 32.3%, 40.7%, 50.3%,
61.2%.

In the pattern G, which is the type of jackpot (remaining pending jackpot) of the special figure 2 variable display game started during the normal low probability state, the number of times of time reduction after the jackpot is 99 times. In addition, in the pattern G, the prescribed number of remaining reservations is four. Therefore, the total number of special figures 2 pending that can be digested by executing the special figure 2 fluctuation display game after the end of the big hit state is 103. In the pattern G, for a small hit probability of 1/8,
Each has a continuation rate of approximately 100% and a fixed mode transition rate of approximately 0%. Therefore, in the symbol G, after the jackpot ends in the remaining hold, the game shifts to the time saving mode #2, and the big win is surely made again, and then the specific game state (time saving state) continues. On the other hand, in the pattern G, the fixed mode transition rate is almost 0
%, and most of the flow transitions from the time saving mode # 2 in the specific game state to the time saving mode # 1 after a big hit.

In addition, the continuation rate is the probability that the specific game state will continue by the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (within 5 times for pattern A, within 10 times for pattern BF, and within 103 times for pattern G) after the end of the jackpot state. There is a probability of re-entering the specific game state without going through the normal game state (normal mode). The confirmation mode transition rate is a probability of shifting from the remaining reservation digestion mode to the time saving mode #2 (confirmation mode, next continuation confirmation mode) by the special figure 2 variable display game based on the remaining reservation after the end of the jackpot state.

The continuation rate depends on the total number of special figures 2 suspended after the end of the big hit state (that is, the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game after the end of the big hit state), and the total number is 10. The continuation rate in the case of is greater than the continuation rate in the case of the symbol A with the total number of five. Further, in the order of symbols BF, as the number of times of time saving decreases and the number of specified remaining reservations increases, the fixed mode transition rate increases.

As described above, in the symbols BF, the number of time reductions is set according to the symbol that is the type of the big hit (type of special result), so the specific game state after the end of the big hit is set by lottery (distribution) It has a variable time-saving number of times (1 to 5) that changes randomly to improve the amusement of the game. In addition, the number of remaining pending (5 to 9), which is the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the specific game state, is changed according to the number of times of time saving. Therefore, the number of remaining pending positions is also random and variable, which is set by lottery, and the interest in the game is improved. In particular, when a difference in game value is provided between the jackpot in the specific game state and the jackpot in the remaining hold, the player is happy and sad with the remaining hold number set by lottery, and the interest in the game is improved. .

In addition, regarding the winning pattern BF of the main variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) in the specific game state, even if the number of times of saving time and the number of remaining reservations are variable, the total of the number of times of saving time and the number of remaining reservations is constant. Since it is set to (10), it is possible to make the fixed mode transition rate variable while keeping the continuation rate of the specific game state the same. As described above, while the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of the total number of time saving times and remaining pending numbers is executed, that is, the same effect in the specific game state (time saving mode) and transition state (remaining pending digestion mode) When the mode is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish whether the time is being shortened or the remaining hold is being consumed. improves.

[Characteristics of normal map fluctuation display game and normal electric movement]
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the characteristics of the general pattern fluctuation display game and the general electric movement.

As shown in FIG. 73(A), there is only one type of winning pattern (hitting stop pattern, normal pattern winning pattern) in the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and the same general pattern is always open, and the winning state of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. , the normal variable winning device 37 (general electric) is always opened at the same timing.

The probability per normal pattern is 0/251 (0%) in a low probability state, and 251/251 (1
00%). The normal pattern variation display game always wins in a high probability state and always misses in a low probability state, so randomness is eliminated. In addition, not limited to this, the probability per normal pattern is a value greater than 0% in a low probability state (normal game state, etc.) (for example, 2/251 (0.8%))
It's okay.

The start memory number (ordinary pattern pending number) of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is substantially 0, and the normal pattern start gate 34 is played during the winning state (normal electric operation) and during fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. Even if the ball passes, the normal pattern start memory of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is not memorized. The normal pattern fluctuation display game can be started only during the stop display of the stop pattern, and when the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34 during the stop display, the normal pattern start memory is generated, but it is immediately digested and the normal pattern fluctuation display game is performed. starts. In this way, since the starting memory of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is not substantially accumulated, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed at a good tempo. Therefore, in the specific game state, the regular figure variation display game or the regular electric action and the special figure variation display game are easily interlocked without any deviation, and it also leads to the prevention of capture.

The normal pattern fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, is 200 msec. In addition, it may be 200 msec in the normal pattern high probability state, and may be longer than 200 msec in the normal pattern low probability state. The normal map stop time (normal map display time) is 48 msec. In the specific game state (time saving state, normal high probability state), in order to link the normal pattern fluctuation display game (and general electric operation) and the special pattern fluctuation display game without any gap, the normal pattern fluctuation time and the normal pattern stop It is preferable that the time be as short as possible. Assuming that the shooting speed of the game ball is 100 per minute, since the game ball can pass through the normal pattern start gate 34 every 600 msec, the time required for one normal pattern fluctuation display game, that is, the normal The sum of the figure fluctuation time and the normal figure stop time is preferably less than 600 msec.

Also, the maximum count number (upper limit of count number) for general electricity is 10.

FIG. 73(B) is a diagram showing the normal figure starting gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric), and the surrounding configuration. The gaming machine 10 has the following configuration for almost all game balls hit to the right in accordance with the opening of the general electric (universal electric open) pass through the general electric start gate 34 and win the general electric.

First, in order to make the winning rate to the normal variable winning device 37 (percentage of one game ball winning) constant when hitting to the right in accordance with the opening of the general electric power, the normal Obstacle nails 32a and structures are removed as much as possible from the game area 32 around the figure starting gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37.例文帳に追加For example, in the game area 32, the obstacle nail 32a and the structure are not arranged between the normal figure starting gate 34 and the normal variable prize winning device 37 or on the left and right. Obstacle nails 32a arranged almost directly above the normal figure starting gate 34 form a path for game balls in two rows, and prevent game balls from leaking out from there. The passage formed by the two rows of obstructing nails 32a smoothly connects to the upper passage 32c formed by the structure.

In addition, the normal pattern starting gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37 are arranged in a positional relationship such that the game ball passing through the normal pattern starting gate 34 enters the normal variable winning device 37 as it is. That is, the normal variable prize winning device 37 is arranged directly under the normal pattern starting gate 34 . For example, by the time the game ball that has passed through the normal figure start gate 34 reaches the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the normal fluctuation winning device 37
is opened, the distance L (the distance between the centers in the vertical direction) between the normal pattern start gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37 is the average falling speed of the game ball and one normal pattern It may be larger than the product of the time required for the variable display game. However, the distance L is set to a short distance so that even if the falling direction of the game ball passing through the normal pattern start gate 34 deviates from the vertical direction, it will enter the normal variable winning device 37 as it is.

Furthermore, as described above, the normal variable prize winning device 37 is preferably of a so-called tongue type that can rotate so that the movable member 37b falls forward so that the number of prizes awarded to the normal variable prize winning device 37 is unlikely to be uneven. .

FIG. 73(C) shows an opening pattern (universal electric opening pattern) of the ordinary variable winning device 37 (universal electric) of the present embodiment. A general electric open pattern shows the operation|movement aspect of the general electric by one general pattern hit. After the end of the jackpot state, the general electric release pattern is the same regardless of the jackpot symbols AG (that is, the jackpot type). In addition, the numbers enclosed in the square frame are the middle control pointers (Fig. 51)
etc.).

In this embodiment, the general electric is opened twice in the general electric open pattern by one general pattern. In addition, the general electricity may be opened two or more times. The power supply opening is divided into the first half opening and the second half opening across a long interval in which the power supply is closed. A general electric interval time (wait time), which is an interval time, is 60000 msec, and the general electric open time of the first half opening and the second half opening is both 3000 msec.

For example, if the shooting speed of the game ball is 100 per minute, the game ball reaches the normal electric every 600 msec, so it is possible to win the normal electric 5 times during the first half opening of 3000 msec, and 60000 msec. After the interval of 5 during the second half opening of 3000msec
It is possible to win a prize in the commuter train. The special figure 2 hold accumulated during the first half opening can be digested during the interval of 60000 msec, which is the closed state of the electricity, and the number of special figure 2 reservations can be set to 0, and the maximum during the subsequent second half opening Limited (here 4) special figure 2 reservations are accumulated.

During the interval of the general electricity (during the closed state), when the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game after the end of the jackpot state reaches the time reduction number, the specific game state (time reduction state, normal state high probability state, support state) It ends and becomes a normal pattern low probability state (transition state). Then, the special figure 2 hold that was saved during the first half opening but is digested after the time saving state ends will be the remaining reservation, and in addition, the special figure 2 reservation that will be accumulated by winning the general electricity during the second half opening of 3000 msec will also be the remaining reservation. becomes. In this way, even if it becomes a normal low probability state, it is possible to accumulate a lot of remaining reservations by opening the second half.

As described above, by deriving the normal pattern per hit (specific result) of the normal pattern variation display game, it is possible to convert the normal variation prize winning device 37 to the open state multiple times, and the normal pattern variation display game In both the high-probability state in which the probability of winning a normal pattern is high and the low-probability state in which the probability is low, the normal variable winning device 37 can be converted to the open state. Therefore, even if the probability of winning a normal pattern is low, the normal variation winning device 37 can be converted to the open state and the special pattern 2 reservation can be accumulated, so that the player can be pleased and the interest of the game is improved. do.

Furthermore, in the first half of the general electricity, it is possible to save the special figure 2 reservation and digest it at the interval, and in the latter half of the general electricity, it is possible to save the special figure 2 reservation again and digest it after the general electricity operation ends.
For this reason, it is possible to make the number of remaining reservations larger than 4, which is the upper limit of the number of special figures 2 reservations, and to make the number of remaining reservations variable by making the number of times of time saving variable.

〔Timing chart〕
Figure 74-Figure 76, after the big hit, game state, normal pattern probability (per normal pattern probability), normal pattern state, general electric state, special figure 2 pending number, special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation), etc. is a timing chart showing It should be noted that time elapses toward the right side of the timing chart. FIG. 74 relates to after the jackpot of symbol A, FIG. 75 relates to after the jackpot of symbol B, and FIG.
This is related to after the big hit of the symbol F.

Regarding the state after the big hit of the pattern BF, the timing of changing from the normal pattern high probability state (specific game state) to the normal pattern low probability state is different due to the difference between the number of times of saving time and the number of specified remaining reservations. , pattern B and pattern F are illustrated. 2 of the game state and normal figure probability
The appearances other than one are common to all of the symbols BF.

In addition, Figure 74-Figure 76 shows the passage of the game ball of the normal pattern start gate 34 (normal pattern gate) (detection of the gate switch 34a), and the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric) (starting Mouth 2
detection of the switch 37a) are also indicated by pulses. In FIGS. 74-76, the passage of the game ball in the general pattern gate, the general pattern state, the general pattern state, and the pattern and change of the general pattern winning (winning the general pattern) are the same, and the explanation will be omitted as appropriate. .

In FIGS. 74-76, during a jackpot round (during jackpot) and a jackpot ending are shown as part of the jackpot state. In the jackpot ending in which the ending effect is executed, the player hits to the right as prompted by a right-handed instruction display, etc., and the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34 (normal pattern gate) (the first in FIG. 74). ), the general pattern (normal pattern) fluctuates on the general pattern display device 53, and the general pattern fluctuation display game is executed, and then stopped. Here, since it is in a low probability state at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, it will stop off.

Here, the jackpot ending ends when the normal pattern comes off and stops, and it becomes a high probability state of the normal pattern probability, corresponding to the specific game state (time saving mode # 1) in FIG. become. At the beginning of the right-handed state with support (normal pattern high probability state), the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, and the normal pattern fluctuation starts. And since it is a high probability state with a normal pattern probability of 100%, it becomes a normal pattern hit and the general electric operation starts, and the general electric is opened as the first half open. In the open state in which the normal electric is opened, the game ball that has passed through the normal electric start gate 34 wins the normal electric as it is (indicated by a pulse). As soon as one special figure 2 reservation occurs, the special figure 2 reservation is digested, the special figure 2 variable display game is started, and the number of special figure 2 reservations becomes 0.

As described above, the game control device 100, the variation time (execution time) of the special figure 2 variation display game
And the stop display time is controlled based on the number of special figure 2 fluctuations (the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) from the end of the jackpot state (variation start information setting processing in FIG. 32 and special figure fluctuation in FIG. 33 medium processing). In addition, the game control device 100 varies the variation time and the stop display time of the special figure 2 variation display game in three types after the big hit of the symbol A, after the big hit of the symbol BF, and after the big hit of the symbol G. set as

After the big hit of symbol A in FIG. 74, the fluctuation time is set sufficiently long so that the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game continues at least until the end of the general electric operation, that is, the end of the second half opening. The variable time of the first special figure 2 variable display game is the normal electric operation time (660
00 msec, 66 seconds), but a margin (several seconds to ten and several seconds) may be added to the normal electric operation time. In this way, corresponding to the normal electric operation including the two open states (together)
, The first special figure 2 variation display game is being executed, and four special figure 2 reserves, which are the upper limit value, are accumulated during the execution of this special figure 2 variation display game.

Since the number of time reductions after the big hit of symbol A is 1, when the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game ends, the specific game state (time reduction mode) ends and it becomes a low probability state, and the transition state ( remaining pending digestion mode). In the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode), the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the special figure 2 hold that has accumulated 4 as the remaining hold is executed four times with a considerably shorter fluctuation time than the first time (2nd to 5th Special figure 2 variable display game). The 2nd to 5th special figure 2 variation display games may all have the same fixed variation time.

After the big hit of symbol B in FIG. 75, the first special figure 2 variation display game is started at least before the end of the first half opening of the general electricity and continues until after the end. In addition, the fluctuation time of the first special figure 2 variable display game is substantially the same as the general electric open time (3000 msec, 3 seconds) in FIG. 75, but may be longer than the general electric open time. In response to the opening of the first half of the general electricity (together), the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed, and during the execution of this special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 2 hold is the upper limit value 4 be saved. The special figure 2 hold that has been saved is all digested during the interval when the general electricity is closed, and during the interval, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed four times with a considerably shorter fluctuation time than the first time (2 ~ 5th special figure 2 variable display game). The 2nd to 5th special figure 2 variation display games may all have the same fixed variation time.

Since the number of time reductions after the big hit of symbol B is 5 times, when the 5th special figure 2 fluctuation display game ends, the specific game state (time reduction mode) ends and it becomes a normal low probability state, and the transition state ( remaining pending digestion mode). In the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode), the general electricity is opened as the latter half opening. As soon as one special 2 hold is generated as a remaining hold due to the winning of the open electric power, the special 2 hold is digested, the 6th special 2 variable display game is started, and the number of special 2 holds is becomes 0.

Corresponding to the opening of the latter half of the general electricity (together), the 6th special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed, and during the execution of this special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 2 hold is the upper limit value of 4 be saved. 6
The second special figure 2 variable display game is started at least before the end of the latter half of the general electricity and continues until after the end. The variable time of the sixth special figure 2 variable display game is the electric power open time (30
00 msec, 3 seconds), but it may be longer than the normal voltage release time.

After the 6th special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display game based on the 4 special figure 2 reservations saved as the remaining reservation is executed 4 times with a considerably shorter variation time than the 1st and 6th times ( 7 to 1
0th special figure 2 variable display game). In this way, it is possible to realize five specified remaining pending numbers corresponding to the 6th to 10th special figure 2 fluctuation display games.

The 7th to 10th special figure 2 variation display games may all have the same fixed short variation time, and the variation time of the 2nd to 5th special figure 2 variation display games (especially the variation time during the time saving state) A fixed variable time equal to or shorter than . As a result, the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at a good tempo and the same rhythm, and the remaining hold can be consumed quickly. In addition, since the 7th to 10th special figure 2 fluctuation display games have nothing to do with saving just by digesting the special figure 2 reservation, the variable fluctuation time is selected by sorting the fluctuation pattern (lottery). Then, the game is no longer monotonous. In addition, the variation time of the 7th to 10th special figure 2 variation display game is longer than the variation time of the 2nd to 5th special figure 2 variation display game (especially the variation time during the time saving state), and it responds slowly You can also perform a production to do.

Also, when the opening of the second half of the general electric power is completed, the state of hitting the general pattern ends, and the general pattern starting gate 34 (
A normal pattern fluctuation display game can be executed by passing a game ball in the normal pattern gate), but since the normal pattern hit probability is 0% and the normal pattern low probability state, the normal pattern fluctuation display game does not produce a hit result. In addition, the stop after the end of the normal pattern per state corresponds to the normal electric remaining ball processing time and the normal pattern ending time.

After the big hit of the pattern F in FIG. 76, the passage of the game ball in the general pattern gate, the general pattern state, the general pattern state, the general pattern prize, the number of special patterns 2 pending, the special pattern fluctuation display game (special pattern fluctuation) The appearance and changes are the same as after the big hit of symbol B in FIG. However, the timing of changing from the specific game state (normal pattern high probability state) to the transition state (normal pattern low probability state, remaining reservation digestion mode) is different due to the fact that the number of times of time reduction and the specified remaining number of reservations are different between the pattern B and the pattern F. .

After the big hit of the pattern F, when the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game is completed, the specific game state (time saving mode) ends and the general pattern low probability state is entered, and the transition state (remaining reservation digestion mode) is entered. . After that, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed 9 times in the same way as after the big hit of the symbol B, and 9 prescribed remaining pending numbers can be realized.

As shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game for a long time corresponding to the open state of the general electricity, and the special figure 2 corresponding to the closed state (interval) of the general electricity. A two-variation display game can be executed in a short time. Therefore, it is possible to save the special figure 2 reservation by opening the first half of the general electricity and digest it at the interval, and save the special figure 2 reservation again by opening the second half of the general electricity and digest it after the end of the general electricity operation. For this reason, the number of remaining reservations can be made larger than 4, which is the upper limit of the number of special figures 2 reservations, and the number of remaining reservations can be made variable by making the number of times of time saving variable.

Although not shown after the big hit of the symbol G, for example, while repeating the general electric operation, the special figure 2 variable display game is a short fixed such as the 2nd to 5th and 7th to 10th times in FIGS. Only the number of times of shortening of working hours (99 times) and the remaining reserved minutes (4 times) may be executed in variable time. In addition, the pattern G
If the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game after the big hit is fixed, the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at a good tempo, and if the variation time is not fixed but variable, the game will not be monotonous.

As described above, the specific game state may be not only the time saving state but also the variable probability state (excluding the variable latent probability state). In addition to 1 type 2 type mixing machine (1 + 2 type machine),
Simply, the first embodiment may be applied to a type of gaming machine (so-called digipachi) having a specific game state (time saving state or probability variable state). In one type of gaming machine with a variable state, especially for models with a high probability of hitting even with a low probability of special patterns after the end of the variable state (so-called sweet digital, a little patch), a big hit can be expected in the number of remaining reservations. Applying the embodiment is highly effective.

[Actions and effects of the first embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes game control means (for example, the game control device 100) capable of executing a game (special figure variation display game). The gaming machine 10 includes a variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, general electric) that can be converted between an open state and a closed state in a specific game state (for example, a time saving state or a probability variable state). Game control means (for example, game control device 100) can execute a game (for example, special figure 2 variable display game) based on start memory (for example, special figure 2 hold) generated by winning a variable winning device. The game value given to the player when the game results in a special result (for example, a small win or a big win, including a big win due to a V prize during a small win) in a specific game state It differs from the game value given to the player when the game results in a special result after the state ends.

In such a gaming machine 10, since there is a difference in the game value given as a special result of the game between during the specific game state and after the specific game state ends, a game value given during the specific game state and after the specific game state ends The player will be happy and sad about the number of starting memories in which the game is executed, and the interest in the game will be improved.

The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes game control means (for example, a game control device 100) capable of executing a game (normal pattern variation display game). The gaming machine 10 is a variable prize winning device (normal variable prize winning device 37, general electric) that can be converted to an open state and a closed state when the result of the game (normal pattern fluctuation display game) is a specific result (normal pattern hit). Prepare. The game control means can convert the variable prize winning device to the open state a plurality of times by deriving one specific result (per normal pattern), and the probability that the game will result in a specific result (per normal pattern) is high. The variable winning device can be converted to the open state in both the high probability state and the low probability state.

In such a gaming machine 10, even if the probability that the game will result in a specific result (normal hit) is low, the variable winning device (ordinary variable winning device 37, general electric) can be converted to the open state, and the variable winning Since the start memory (for example, special figure 2 reservation) generated by the winning of the device can be accumulated, the player can be pleased and the interest of the game is improved.

The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes game control means (for example, the game control device 100) capable of executing a game, and effect control means (for example, the effect control device 300) capable of executing effects related to the game. Prepare. The gaming machine 10 includes a variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, general electric) that can be converted between an open state and a closed state in a specific game state (for example, a time saving state or a probability variable state). The game control means can generate a predetermined state in which the variable winning device is converted to an open state (for example, a right-handed state with a low probability of normal pattern) even after the specific game state ends, and the effect control means
A performance mode in a prescribed state is made different from a performance mode in other than the prescribed state.

In such a gaming machine 10, after the end of the specific game state, the predetermined state in which the variable prize winning device is changed to the open state can be visually distinguished from the specific game state in terms of presentation. In addition, by setting the effect mode peculiar to the predetermined state, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the game control means can execute a game (special figure variable display game) corresponding to the open state of the variable winning device. Therefore, in the open state of the variable winning device, without digesting the starting memory (for example, special figure 2 reservation) that is the execution right of the game (special figure variation display game),
The starting memory can be accumulated by winning a variable winning device.

In the first embodiment, the game control means executes the game (special figure variable display game) for a long time corresponding to the open state of the variable winning device, and executes the game for a short time corresponding to the closed state of the variable winning device. can be run with Therefore, the open state of the variable winning device during the specific game state (for example, the first half open)
Accumulate a lot of starting memory (e.g. special figure 2 hold), then digest a lot of starting memory (e.g. special figure 2 hold) in the subsequent closed state (e.g. interval), open again after the specific game state (e.g. second half open ) can accumulate a lot of starting memory (eg special figure 2 hold). For this reason, the number of starting memories consumed after the end of the specific game state (remaining pending number) is set to the upper limit of the number of starting memories (for example, 4)
can be more than Furthermore, the number of remaining reservations can be made variable.

In the first embodiment, the game control means executes the game (special figure variation display game) corresponding to the open state of the variable winning device for a time longer than the open state time of the variable winning device. Therefore,
Even if the open state of the variable prize winning device and the execution period (variable time, variable period) of the game (special figure variable display game) are different, the deviation can be absorbed, and the actual remaining number of reservations is not more or less than the specified remaining number of reservations. match.

In the first embodiment, the game control means can execute the game (special figure variation display game) a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) or more during the period when the variable prize winning device is in the closed state. Therefore, even if there is a gap between the open state of the variable winning device and the execution period (variable time, variable period) of the game (special figure variable display game), the deviation can be absorbed, and the actual remaining number of reservations exceeds the specified remaining number of reservations. Matches perfectly.

In the first embodiment, the game control means is such that the game (special figure variation display game) is played a predetermined number of times (
For example, it controls so that the specific game state ends when the time saving number of times or probability variable number of times) is executed. After the end of the specific game state, the number of times the game is executed based on the starting memory generated by winning the variable winning device (prescribed remaining pending number 5 to 9) is set to a predetermined number of times (for example, time saving number of times or probability variable number of times ). Therefore, if the predetermined number of times is selected by lottery, the remaining number of reservations is also random and variable set by lottery, and the remaining number of reservations makes the player happy and sad, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, the game control means determines that the game (special figure variation display game) is a special result (
It is possible to set a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times of time reduction or the number of probability variations) as the game value to be given to the player in the case of a small win or a big win, and the predetermined number of times is set according to the type (symbol) of the special result. Therefore, the predetermined number of times of the specific game state after the end of the special game state based on the special result is set by lottery (distribution) and becomes variable (for example, 1 to 5) and changes at random, improving the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, the game control means, the number of times the game (special figure variation display game) is executed after the end of the specific game state (specified remaining pending number), a predetermined number of times is constant (eg 10). Therefore, it is possible to make the number of remaining reservations variable while keeping the continuation rate of the specific game state the same. During the specific game state and after the end of the specific game state, if the same production mode is executed while the fixed number of special figure 2 variable display games are executed, the player is in the specific game state or after the end of the specific game state. It becomes difficult to distinguish whether it is or not, and it is surprising that a large game value can be obtained with a big hit of the remaining reservation after the end of the specific game state, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the first embodiment, the game includes a first game (special figure 1 variation display game) and a second game (special figure 2 variation display game). The game control means can execute the first game based on the starting memory generated by the winning of a game ball into a predetermined winning area (for example, the starting winning opening 36), and the winning of a game ball into the variable winning device A second game can be executed based on the generated starting memory. The second game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is changed to the first game (special figure 1
In addition, when the first game is executed in the specific game state, it is executed in a shorter time than the second game.

Therefore, the number of times the first game (special figure 1 variation display game) is executed in the specific game state decreases, and the first game (special figure 1 variation display game) is performed in the specific game state
is executed, the start of the second game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is not greatly delayed.

In the first embodiment, the game includes a first game (normal pattern fluctuation display game) and a second game (
Special figure fluctuation display game). The game control means can execute the first game based on the passage of the game ball in a predetermined area (normal figure start gate 34), and by winning a variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, general electric) A second game (special figure variation display game) can be executed based on the generated starting memory. In the specific game state, during the execution of the first game and during the winning state caused by the specific result of the first game, even if the game ball passes through the predetermined area (normal figure start gate 34), the first It does not generate the starting memory (general map memory), which is the right to execute the game.

Therefore, the first game (normal pattern fluctuation display game) can be started only during the stop display, and the normal pattern fluctuation display game starts as soon as the game ball passes through a predetermined area (normal pattern start gate 34) during the stop display. do. In this way, the starting memory (normal pattern memory) of the first game (normal pattern fluctuation display game)
is not accumulated substantially, the first game (normal pattern variation display game) is executed at a good tempo. For this reason, in the specific game state, the operation of the variable winning device according to the hit of the first game (normal figure variation display game) and the second game (special figure variation display game) can be easily interlocked without deviation.

In the first embodiment, the game control means terminates the specific game state when the open state of the variable prize winning device (normal variable prize winning device 37, general electric) ends a specified number of times (for example, twice) in the specific game state. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the specific game state is extended by making the number of winnings to the variable winning device less than a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times of shortening the time or the number of times of probability variation) due to the stop shot. Further, it is possible to prevent the number of open states of the variable prize winning device from being excessively increased due to the winning of the first game (normal pattern variable display game) in the extended specific game state.

In the first embodiment, the game control means controls the execution time (variation time) of the game based on the number of times the game (special figure variation display game) is executed from the end of the special game state. Therefore,
A game (special figure fluctuation display game) can be executed in response to the open state of the variable prize winning device, and a starting memory (for example, special figure 2 pending) can be accumulated.

The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes game control means (game control device 100) that controls the progress of a game (variation display game). The game control means controls the number of game media (game balls) paid out in a predetermined period (for example, the period from power-on to the present) or the number of game media determined to be paid out in a predetermined period. For example, a first counting means (for example, difference ball confirmation processing) capable of counting the total number of winning balls and the number of safe balls in a predetermined period is provided. The game control means comprises second counting means (for example, difference ball confirmation processing) capable of counting the number of game media used in a predetermined period (for example, the number of shot balls or the number of discharged balls). The game control means is provided with a game stopping means (for example, a safety device) capable of generating a non-playable state in which the game cannot be executed based on the difference between the number of payouts and the number of used balls (for example, the number of difference balls). The game control means, when the number of times the game is executed under a predetermined condition (for example, a state with a special low probability) is a predetermined number of times (for example, the ceiling number), a specific game state (for example, a specific game state B, b time saving) can be generated. When the power is turned on, the game control means provides information (for example, safety device counter value) about the difference between the number of payouts and the number of uses (for example, the number of difference balls)
and do not initialize information about the number of times the game has been played (eg ceiling counter value).

In such a gaming machine 10, the remaining number of games (up to a predetermined number of times) until the occurrence of the specific game state does not change when the power is turned on. The margin (tolerance, limit) can be increased (maximized) by power-on initialization. Therefore, the player is not disadvantaged by turning on the power.

In the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 capable of executing a game includes a first area (intra-area work area) that can be a work area for game control, and a second area (outside work area) different from the first area. ) and an unused area between the first area and the second area (for example, RAM 11
1c). The gaming machine 10 includes game stopping means (for example, a safety device) capable of generating a game-disabled state (game-stopped state, game-prohibited state) in which a game cannot be played when a predetermined condition (operating condition) is met. The first area can store a flag (for example, a safety device operating flag) indicating the occurrence of a non-playable state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The flag can be set based on information in a predetermined area (for example, safety device activation information area) within the second area, and is not initialized when power is turned on. The game stop means generates a game disabled state based on this flag.

In such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to take anti-fraud countermeasures by disabling the game when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and to prevent the player from becoming absorbed in the game. In addition, since the flag for generating the unplayable state (for example, the safety device operating flag) is not initialized when the power is turned on, the unplayable state will occur except in special situations (for example, when there is a RAM clear with a setting change). is not released. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately take countermeasures against fraud, and appropriately suppress the player's addiction to the game.

Further, in such a gaming machine 10, the storage means (for example, the RAM 111c) includes a first area (inside area work area) and a second area (outside area work area) divided by unused areas. A flag (for example, a safety device operating flag) is stored in the first area (inside area work area), and the information of a predetermined area (for example, safety device operation information area) in the second area (outside area work area) can be set based on Therefore, it becomes easy to distinguish the initialization of the flag from the initialization of the information for setting the flag (the information of the predetermined area). Furthermore, it becomes easy to separate the program for setting the flag (outside program) and the game control program (inside program), and the development efficiency of the program can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the game machine 10 provided with the effect control means (the effect control device 300) capable of controlling the effect related to the game is a game medium paid out during a predetermined period (for example, the period from power-on to the present) A first counting means (for example, Difference ball confirmation processing of the game control device 100). The gaming machine 10 can count the number of used game media (for example, the number of shot balls or the number of discharged balls), which is the number of game media used in a predetermined period of time.
A counting means (for example, difference ball confirmation processing of the game control device 100 and out ball detection switch 74) is provided. Based on the number of payouts and the number of uses, the gaming machine 10 is in a non-playable state (
A game stop means (for example, a safety device) capable of generating a game stop state, a game prohibition state, etc. is provided.
Effect control means (effect control device 300), the value corresponding to the difference between the number of payouts and the number of uses (for example, the number of difference balls and the safety device counter value) is within a predetermined range (for example, the operation notice state, the operation warning state, and the operation state range corresponding to all), the value is displayed on the display means (for example, the display device 41)
can be displayed in

Therefore, the value corresponding to the difference between the number of payouts and the number of uses is displayed only within a predetermined range, and is displayed only when this value is important to attract the player's attention, and this value is not important. In some cases, the value can be hidden so that the display means can be easily seen. In addition, based on the number of payouts (safe balls, etc.) and the number of used balls, it is possible to generate a non-playable state in which the game cannot be played. or safety device counter value) is large, it is possible to effectively take countermeasures against fraud, and to effectively suppress the player's addiction to the game.

[Second embodiment]
A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment. In addition, in the following embodiment, the same reference numerals are used for the configuration having the same function as in the first embodiment, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate. second
The embodiment relates to a special figure fluctuation display game after the end of a specific game state with general electric support.

[Example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 77 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating game state transitions in the second embodiment. FIG. 77 is the same as FIG. 71A, but a specific game state (omitted in FIGS. 71A and 71B) in the case of sudden time reduction due to ceiling time reduction and time reduction pattern (sapo hit) due to reaching the ceiling number of times is added. It differs from FIG. 71A in that the

The specific game state includes a specific game state A, which is a time saving state that occurs as a time saving (a time saving) immediately after a big hit due to a big hit, and a time saving state that occurs as a ceiling time saving (b time saving) without being caused by a big hit. A specific game state B and a specific game state C, which is a time saving state that suddenly occurs as a time saving (c time saving) without being caused by a big hit, are included. In addition, in this embodiment, the specific game state is a time saving state, but it is also possible to configure the specific game state to be a variable state (with general electric support / special figure high probability) in which the probability of a big hit is a high probability state.

In the specific game states AC, the jackpot probability is in a low probability state, but there is general electric support. In the specific game state AC, since the normal variable winning device 37 (universal electric) is likely to be released, it is recommended to hit the right hand aiming at the normal variable winning device 37 as the shooting mode of the game ball. Therefore,
In the specific game state, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37 and the secondary starting area is the first starting winning port 36, so the main variable display game is the special figure 2 variable display game, and the secondary variable display game is the special figure. 1 change display game.

As the production mode of the specific game state A, there are time saving modes #1 and #2 as in FIG. 71A.
In the present embodiment, the number of times of time saving related to time saving mode #1 is a fixed value (here, three times) for simplicity, but may be a variable value as in the first embodiment (FIG. 72). The production mode of the specific game state B is the time saving mode #3, and the production mode of the specific game state C is the time saving mode #4. It can be distinguished from the time saving state by (c time saving) by production. Incidentally, it is also possible to reduce the development cost by making the performance mode the same in the specific game state B and the specific game state C so as to share the performance.

In addition, time saving mode # 3, # 4 is a production mode different from time saving mode # 1, # 2,
The performance modes are different, and the time-saving state (specific game state A) caused by the big hit and the time-saving state (specific game state B, C) not caused by the big win can be distinguished by the production. In addition, specific game state A
By making the performance mode the same in the specific game states B and C, it is possible to standardize the performance and reduce the development cost.

Also, in the specific game state A, if it is possible to generate a time saving state due to ceiling time saving or sudden time saving, time saving mode # without changing time saving mode # 1, # 2 to time saving mode # 3, # 4 1 and #2 may be continued, and in this case, it is possible to give the player the impression that the specific game state A has been extended (the impression that the number of time reductions has increased). Of course, in the specific game state A, if it is possible to generate a time saving state due to a ceiling time saving or a sudden time saving, time saving mode # 1
, #2 may be changed to time-saving modes #3 and #4 to inform the player that the ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving has occurred.

The contents of the normal game state and the transition state (normal game state that consumes the remaining hold) are the first embodiment (
The same as in FIG. 71A). The production mode of the transition state is described as one remaining holding digestion mode without dividing the mode before the end of the general electric opening and the mode after the end of the general electric opening, but it may be divided.

Next, transitions (transitions) from each game state, especially transitions to specific game states B and C and transitions from specific game states B and C will be described.

In the normal game state, the transition state, and the specific game state A, when the number of special figure fluctuation display games executed after the end of the jackpot state (excluding the number of times in the probability variable state) reaches the ceiling number of times, the ceiling time reduction (b time reduction ) and transition to the specific game state B (time saving mode #3). In addition, in the normal game state, the transition state, and the specific game state A, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a support hit result (time saving result, time saving pattern), suddenly time saving (c time saving) and specific game state C (time saving mode#
4).

In addition, if the ceiling number of times is reached during the specific game state A or if the support hit result occurs,
The time saving state may be continuously (overlapping) generated by ceiling time saving or sudden time saving, or may not be continuously generated. Basically, regardless of the number of remaining time reductions in the specific game state A, when the conditions for transitioning to the specific game states B and C (reaching the ceiling number of times and generating support hit results) are established, transition to the specific game states B and C However, it may be changed whether or not to transition according to the number of remaining time saving. For example, if the number of times of time saving in the specific game state B (b number of times of saving time m3) is greater than the number of times of saving time remaining in the specific game state A (number of times of time saving not yet consumed), from the specific game state A to the specific game state B transition to When the number of times of time saving in specific game state C (c number of times of time saving m4) is larger than the number of times of time saving remaining in specific game state A, transition from specific game state A to specific game state C is performed. If the number of time reductions (m3, m4) in the specific game states B and C is equal to or less than the number of time reductions remaining in the specific game state A, even if the time reduction pattern is displayed, the specific game states B and C do not occur and are specified. Game state A
It does not transition to the specific game state B, C from. In addition, the time saving pattern does not have to be displayed in the case of the ceiling time saving.

Basically, when the number of times of time saving in the specific game states B and C ends, it shifts to the remaining reservation digestion mode, but if the number of times of time saving in the specific game state A remains, it is made to return to the specific game state A. good too. That is, if the number of times of time saving in the specific game state A remains even after the number of times of time saving in the specific game state B and C ends, the specific game state A continues from the specific game state B, C to the specific game state A It may return and not transition to the transition state (remaining pending consumption mode).

Also, if the ceiling number of times is reached during the specific game state A or if the support hit result occurs,
Regardless of the relationship between the number of times of time saving in the specific game states B and C and the number of times of time saving remaining in the specific game state A, it is possible to have a configuration in which the time saving state due to the ceiling time saving or sudden time saving does not occur at all. Even in this configuration, the specific game state A does not transition to the specific game states B and C even if the time saving pattern is displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is preferable not to generate (not overlap) a time saving state due to sudden time saving (c time saving) due to a support hit result (time saving pattern) during the specific game state A.
That is, even in the specific game state A, there is a case where the support hit result is won against the special figure 2 variable display game, but even if the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed, it is possible not to suddenly generate a time saving state due to time saving (c time saving). preferred. In this case, the display device 41 or the lamp display device 80 may display a lost pattern as a decorative special pattern for presentation. Also, in the same way as described in FIG. 23 of the first embodiment, in this embodiment, without providing a support hit result for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, even in the normal mode (normal game state), suddenly time saving (c It is preferable not to generate a time saving state due to time saving. Therefore, in the present embodiment, preferably, transition to the specific game state C (time saving mode #4) only from the transition state for digesting the remaining hold (remaining hold digestion mode). In this way, the value of the remaining pending consumption mode increases, and the player comes to expect the remaining pending consumption mode intensively, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Also, although not shown in FIG. 77, when the ceiling number of times is reached during the specific game state B, C or when the support hit result occurs, the time saving state is continued by the ceiling time saving or sudden time saving (overlapping ) may be generated or may not be generated continuously. That is, the specific game state B, C
It is also possible to transition from to specific game states B and C.

When the transition condition is established from the specific game states B and C, the state transitions to a transition state (which may be included in the normal game state) that digests the remaining hold. The transition conditions for transitioning from the specific game states B and C to the transition state may be the same as the transition conditions for transitioning from the specific game state A to the transition state. The transition conditions are (i) that the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game in the specific gaming state exceeds the number of times of shortening time m3, m4 (first predetermined number of times, the initial value of the number of times of shortening time variation 2), and (ii) The second predetermined number of times (time Shortened fluctuation count 1
(initial value of ). In the present embodiment, the condition (iii) of the first embodiment (completion of opening the electric power for a predetermined number of times) is not provided because it is not necessary. In addition, the second predetermined number of times may be obtained by adding the maximum value (for example, 4) of the special figure 1 reservation number to the number of times of working hours reduction.

It should be noted that the number m1-m4 of time-saving modes #1-#4 and the number of ceiling times m5 can be appropriately adjusted to change the game characteristics.

For example, m1 (
a Time saving number 1) < m4 (c time saving number) < m2 (a time saving number 2) < m5 (ceiling number) < m3
You may adjust so that the relationship of (b number of times of time saving) may be satisfied.

Also, for example, m1 (a time saving number of times 1) < m2 (a time saving number of times 2) < m4 Adjustment may be made so as to satisfy the relationship of (c times of time reduction) < m5 (ceiling times) < m3 (b times of time reduction).

Also, for example, m1 (a time saving number of times 1) < m4 (c time saving number of times) < m3 (b time saving number of times) < m2 (a time saving number of times 2) < m5 (ceiling number of times) can be adjusted to satisfy

[Time saving number of times corresponding to the pattern and the number of prescribed remaining reservations]
FIG. 78 is a table showing, in this embodiment, the number of times of time reduction corresponding to the symbol that is the type of winning of the special figure variation display game, the specified number of remaining reservations (the number of specified remaining reservations), and the like. The pattern is a pattern for a big hit (including a V prize during a small win), and is determined by a big hit pattern random number here, and time-saving patterns are excluded.

This embodiment is the same as the first embodiment, except that the number of time reductions is different for the big hit symbol A of the special figure 1 variable display game. The symbol G of the jackpot (jackpot with remaining pending) in the special figure 2 variable display game in the state without the general electric support is the same as in the first embodiment. Regarding the jackpot (including the V prize in the small hit) of the special figure 2 variable display game with the general electric support, the number of times of time saving is fixed to 3 times, so there is only one type of pattern S .

In the normal game state (normal mode), the big hit (symbol A
) occurs, after the jackpot state ends, the game moves to a specific game state A (time saving mode #1).
In the specific game state A, when a big win (symbol S) is generated by the special figure 2 variable display game, the game returns to the specific game state A (time saving mode #1) after the big win state ends. Specific gaming state B
, C, when a big hit (symbol S) is generated by the special figure 2 variable display game, the game shifts to a specific game state A (time saving mode #1) after the big hit state ends. In this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, in the time saving mode # 1 of the specific game state A, the number of time saving times is 3 times, and the specified remaining number of reservations is 4
fixed individually.

[Characteristics of normal map fluctuation display game and normal electric movement]
FIG. 79 is a diagram showing the characteristics of the general pattern variation display game and the general pattern movement in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 79(A), there is only one winning pattern (hitting stop pattern, normal pattern winning pattern) in the normal pattern fluctuation display game. In this embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of general electric support, the probability per general pattern is always a constant value of 250/251, and unlike the first embodiment, low probability (low probability general pattern) and high probability (high probability general pattern) probability) is not controlled to vary between Note that, as in the first embodiment,
A low probability lower than 250/251 may be set in the normal game state.

The start memory number (normal pattern pending number) of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is 4. The maximum number of counts of electric power (
count number upper limit) is 10.

The normal pattern fluctuation time FZ1, which is the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, is a constant value of 500 msec. It should be noted that the normal pattern fluctuation time FZ1 may be set to a value longer than 500 msec in the normal game state. The normal map stop time FZ2 (normal map display time) is 600 msec. Although not shown in FIG. 79, the total FZ3 of the normal electric remaining ball processing time and the normal ending time may be, for example, 700 msec that is equal to or longer than the normal electric fluctuation time FZ1 or the normal electric stop time FZ2.

As shown in FIG. 79(B), the normal variable prize winning device 37 (universal electric) is opened only once for one hit of the normal pattern variable display game to enter the winning easy state. However, the normal power release time is short (for example, 48 msec) in a state without power support such as a normal game state, and a long time (eg, 3400 msec) in a state with power support such as a short working time state. The normal/universal power release pattern (normal/universal power release mode) differs depending on the game state. As described above, the probability of winning a general pattern is always a constant value regardless of the game state, so in the present embodiment, the easy winning state of the general electricity support has a longer general electricity open time than the case without the general electricity support. It is realized by

In addition, the general electric open time may be shorter than the general electric power fluctuation time FZ1, the general electric power stop time FZ2, the general electric power remaining ball processing time and the general electric power ending time total FZ3 in the state without the electric power support. , the time FZ1-F
It may be longer than Z3.

〔Timing chart〕
Figure 80 shows transition state from time saving state as specific game state (may be included in normal game state)
It is a timing chart showing a game state, a special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation), a general figure state, a general electric condition, a special figure 2 reservation number, etc. In addition, in FIG. 80, for the sake of simplification, the timing of the end of the time saving and the start timing of the mains disconnection are aligned, but they may be shifted.

FIG. 80(A) shows time saving mode # 1 of specific game state A (first specific game state) following the big hit
, #2 are completed and transition to the transition state (remaining pending consumption mode). In the case of FIG. 80 (A), the stop display time STP1 (first period ) is set longer than the long-term general electric open time OPN (third period, for example, 3400 msec) for general electric support. That is, the relationship STP1>OPN is set.

In addition, the game control device 100 can set the stop display time corresponding to the number of special figure 2 fluctuations (the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) after the end of the big hit (A4804), but in this embodiment,
Furthermore, the stop display time of the time saving final variation is set corresponding to the type of time saving mode (specific game state). Corresponding to the time saving mode #1, #2 (specific game state A), the stop display time STP1 of the time saving final fluctuation is set longer than the long electric power open time OPN when the electric power becomes easy to win. .

In addition, in FIG. 80, the time saving final variation will be described as a variation in which the number of times of special figure 2 variation after the end of the big hit will be the number of times of time saving (three times). However, the time saving final variation may be a special figure 1 variation (special figure 1 variation display game), and the total number of executions of the special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game and special figure 2 variation display game) It may be the above-mentioned second predetermined number of times.

Assuming that the number of special 2 reservations is the maximum value of 4 before the start of the time saving final fluctuation, the number of special 2 reservations decreases by 1 to 3 at the time of the time saving final fluctuation of special figure 2, but the normal fluctuation winning device When the game ball wins in the normal variable winning device 37 due to the opening of the general electric power of 37, the number of special figure 2 reservations becomes 4 again. When the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 34 just before the end of the time saving final fluctuation, depending on the hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game (normal figure fluctuation) started at this time, even in the remaining hold digestion mode after the time saving end becomes open.

Hypothetically, if the variation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 remaining hold fluctuation) starts during the long-time electric power open in the remaining hold digestion mode after the time saving ends, the special figure 2 hold number will decrease by 1. It becomes 3, and here, when the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37, the number of special figure 2 reservations becomes 4 again, which is the number of special figure 2 reservations (remaining reservations) that are digested after the time saving state ends. Remaining pending number is 5 (1 + 4)
become. In addition, the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is 2 while the general electricity is open in the remaining hold digestion mode
If so, it is possible that the remaining pending count will be 6 (greater than 5).

Specific game state A (time saving mode # 1, # 2) passes through the jackpot state, so
The player's benefits and game value are large in terms of the number of acquired balls). Therefore, in this embodiment, the number of remaining reservations does not exceed the specified number of remaining reservations of four and does not become five or more so as not to excessively give benefits or game values to the player. For this reason, as described above, the stop display time STP1 of the time saving final variation in the specific gaming state A is set to be longer than the long general electricity open time OPN that becomes the general electricity support, and the remaining during the general electricity open time OPN The pending digestion (execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is prevented from being started (STP1>OPN). As a result, the number of remaining holds is 4
can be held individually.

In addition, the normal open time (for example, 48 msec) caused by the hit result of the normal map fluctuation in the remaining hold digestion mode is the normal open time OPN ( For example, compared to 3400 msec), it is a considerably short time. For this reason, in the short-time normal power release in the remaining hold digestion mode (the normal power release after the normal power release due to the normal power release time OPN), the special figure 2 hold (remaining hold) does not accumulate and the number of remaining holds increases. not because
The number of remaining reservations is 4, which is the prescribed number of remaining reservations.

In addition, considering the normal pattern fluctuation time FZ1 and the normal pattern stop time FZ2, the stricter condition STP1
> (OPN + FZ2) relationship, or STP1 > (FZ1 + FZ2 + OPN) relationship can also be set, but the general pattern fluctuation time FZ1 and the general pattern stop time FZ2 are the general pattern open time OPN
Therefore, by setting the relationship STP1>OPN, the effect of keeping the number of remaining reservations at 4, which is the prescribed number of remaining reservations, is sufficiently obtained.

On the other hand, FIG. 80 (B) shows specific game states B and C (time saving state,
2nd specific game state) time saving mode #3, #4 shows the situation where it changes to transition state (remaining reservation digestion mode) ends. In the case of FIG. 80 (B), the stop display time STP2 (second period ) is changed to a long-term power open time OPN (3rd period,
for example, 3400 msec). That is, the relationship STP2<OPN is set.
Corresponding to time saving modes #3 and #4 (specific game states B and C), the stop display time STP2 of the time saving final fluctuation is set shorter than the long electric power open time OPN when the electric power becomes easy to win. (A4804).

For this reason, when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 remaining hold fluctuation) starts while the electric power is open in the remaining hold digestion mode after the time saving mode # 3 and # 4 are finished, the number of special figure 2 holds is reduced by 1 to 3. When the game ball wins in the normal variable winning device 37 during this general electric open, special figure 2
The number of reservations becomes 4 again, and the number of remaining reservations, which is the number of special figure 2 reservations (remaining reservations) digested after the time saving state ends, becomes 5 (1 piece + 4 pieces). In addition, if the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed twice while the general electricity is open in the remaining reservation digestion mode, the remaining number of reservations will be 6 (larger than 5).

Specific game states B and C (time saving modes #3 and #4) occur without going through the jackpot state,
The player's benefits and gaming value in terms of the number of balls released (the number of balls obtained) are small. Therefore, in this embodiment,
To increase the possibility that the number of remaining reservations exceeds four of a prescribed remaining number of reservations and becomes five or more so as to give a player greater benefits and game value. For this reason, as described above, the stop display time STP2 of the short time final variation of the specific game states B and C is set shorter than the long general electricity open time OPN that becomes the general electricity support, and during the general electricity open time OPN Digestion of remaining pending (execution of special figure 2 fluctuation display game)
is easily started (STP2<OPN).

Of course, if the game ball does not pass through the normal figure start gate 34 just before the end of the time saving final fluctuation, the long electricity opening with the electricity opening time OPN does not occur in the remaining hold digestion mode after the time saving end,
This long electric power opening will be brought forward and some will be opened before the end of the short working hours. In this case
Even if the relationship of STP2<OPN is set, the number of remaining holds remains at 4, which is the prescribed number of remaining holds, and 5
It may not be more than one.

In addition, considering the normal pattern fluctuation time FZ1 and the normal pattern stop time FZ2, a looser condition STP2 <
It is possible to set the relationship of (OPN + FZ2) or the relationship of STP2 < (FZ1 + FZ2 + OPN), but the range of STP2 values is narrower. It definitely increases the chances of more.

Note that in the present embodiment, STP2 (second period)<OPN (third period)<STP1 (
1st period) is established, and the relationship of STP2<STP1 is established regardless of the length of the general power supply open time OPN. In this way, the stop display time STP1 (first period) of the time saving final variation in the specific game state A (time saving mode # 1, # 2) is changed to the specific game state B, C (time saving mode # 3,
#4) to be longer than the stop display time STP2 of the time saving final variation. Here, the stop display time of the time saving final variation is the same as the time from the end of the final special figure variation display game in the specific game state to the start of the next special figure variation display game when there is a remaining hold.

Even if the relationship STP2<STP1 is established regardless of the open-circuit time OPN,
Since the start of the remaining hold fluctuation after the time saving of the specific game states B and C ends earlier than in the case of the specific game state A, the number of remaining holds can be larger than the specific game state A for the specific game states B and C You can enhance your sexuality. For this reason, the difference (difference in privilege and game value) between the specific game state A in which a large number of balls are paid out through the big win state and the specific game states B and C in which small balls are paid out without going through the big win state is alleviated. can be done. Therefore, even in specific game states B and C (time saving mode #3, #4) due to ceiling time saving or sudden time saving, such as specific game state A (time saving mode #1, #2) following a big hit, Benefits and game values are compensated, and interest in games increases.

In addition, when the conditions for generating the specific game state B and C are established during the specific game state A, that is, when the ceiling number of times is reached during the specific game state A or when the support hit result occurs, the time saving final fluctuation is not STP1 (first period), but STP2 which is smaller than STP1
(Second period) may be set. In this case, from the specific game state A after the big hit, the time reduction state (specific game state B, C) due to the ceiling time reduction or sudden time reduction (specific game state B, C) can be continuously (overlapped) generated.
Set the stop display time of the time saving final fluctuation to a short time STP2, and a series of time saving state after the big hit (
After the specific game state A and the specific game states B and C), after the time-saving final variation, a small STP2 (second period) benefit and game value can be further given to improve the interest in the game.

It should be noted that, basically, when the number of times of time saving in the specific game states B and C that continue to the specific game state A ends, the system shifts to the remaining reserved consumption mode, and the time saving final fluctuations are the fluctuations in the specific game states B and C. When specific game states B and C occur from specific game state A, the time reduction fluctuation count 1 and 2 areas are overwritten to the time reduction count (initial value of time reduction fluctuation count 1 and 2) of specific game state B and C This is because the number of remaining time reductions in the specific game state A disappears. However, even if the number of time reductions in the specific game states B and C continuing to the specific game state A is completed, the remaining number of time reductions in the specific game state A is copied to another predetermined area and remains without disappearing. In the case of , it is not necessary to return to the specific game state A from the specific game states B and C continuing to the specific game state A, and not to shift to the transition state (residual hold digestion mode). In this case, the time saving final variation is the variation in the specific game state A. The remaining number of time reductions is smaller than the initial value of the time reduction variation number 2 for the specific game state A and greater than zero.

In addition, even if the time saving pattern (sapo hit result) that can cause the specific game state B and C is stopped and displayed during the specific game state A, the stop display time of the time saving final variation is set to STP1, which is larger than STP2, instead of STP2. can be set. Even if the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed, in the case of a configuration (preferred configuration) that does not continuously generate the time saving state by the time saving pattern from the specific game state A, the long first period (STP1) By holding the number of remaining reservations to be consumed after the specific game state A at the specified remaining number of reservations, it is possible to prevent the specific game state A following a big win from becoming too advantageous. In addition, even in the case of such a configuration as to continuously generate the time-saving state by the time-saving pattern from the specific game state A, since the specific game state B, C passes through the specific game state A following the big hit, the specific game It is possible to prevent states B and C from becoming too advantageous.

[Actions and effects of the second embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment includes game control means (for example, the game control device 100) capable of executing a game (for example, a special figure variation display game), and when the result of the game is a special result, the player An advantageous special game state (for example, a jackpot state) can be generated. The game control means can generate a first specific game state (for example, a specific game state A) that is advantageous to the player following the special game state following the generation of the special game state, and generates the special game state. It is possible to generate a second specific game state (for example, specific game states B and C) that is advantageous to the player.
The game control means provides a first
The period (for example, the stop display time STP1 of the time saving final variation) is the second period from the end of the final game in the second specific gaming state to the start of the next game (for example, the stop display time S of the time saving final variation
Make it larger than TP2).

In such a gaming machine 10, since the second period is shorter than the first period, after the end of the second specific game state, the starting memory (residual hold) accumulated to the maximum in the second specific game state is consumed quickly, and this It is possible to store extra starting memory (residual hold) by the amount. For this reason, the first specific game state (for example, specific game state A) in which the profit of the special game state (for example, ball output) can be obtained via the special game state, and the profit of the special game state without passing through the special game state ( For example, the difference in profit between the second specific game state (for example, specific game states B and C) in which no balls are obtained can be alleviated. Therefore, even in the second specific game state that does not involve the occurrence of the special game state, the profit is compensated and the interest in the game increases.

The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment is convertible between an easy-win state and an easy-non-win state, and the first specific game state and the second specific game state are easier to convert to the easy-win state than the normal game state. A variable winning device (for example, a normal variable winning device 37) is provided. A third period (for example, open-circuit time OPN) during which the variable winning device is in the easy winning state is shorter than the first period (STP1) and longer than the second period (STP2). Therefore, it is possible to hold the number of remaining reservations digested after the end of the first specific game state (for example specific game state A) to the specified number of remaining reservations, and second specific game state (for example specific game states B, C) It is possible to increase the possibility that the number of remaining reservations that will be consumed after the end of will exceed the prescribed number of remaining reservations. As a result, even in the second specific game state that does not involve the occurrence of the special game state, profits are ensured and the interest in the game increases.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, game control means (for example, game control device 100)
is the first period (
STP1) can be set, and the period from the end of the final game in the second specific game state to the start of the next game can be set as the second period (STP2). The game control means, when the condition for generating the second specific game state is established during the first specific game state (for example, when the ceiling number of times is reached or when the support hit result occurs), the first specific game state Alternatively, the period from the end of the final game in the specific game state as the second specific game state to the start of the next game can be set not to the first period but to a second period shorter than the first period.

In such a gaming machine 10, after a series of game states including the special game state, the first specific game state, and the second specific game state, a small second period (STP2) of special benefits and game values are further given, It can improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, game control means (for example, game control device 100)
can set the period from the end of the final game in the first specific gaming state to the start of the next game as the first period, and the period from the end of the final game in the second specific gaming state to the start of the next game can be set as the second period. The game control means, during the first specific game state, even if the result of the game that can cause the second specific game state (for example, time-saving pattern, support hit result) is displayed, the first
The period from the end of the final game of the specific game state as the specific game state or the second specific game state to the start of the next game is not the second period, but the first period (STP1) longer than the second period (STP2) ).

In such a gaming machine 10, even if the result of the game that can generate the second specific game state is displayed, the second specific game state is not continuously (overlapped) generated from the first specific game state. In the case of , the long first period (STP1) can prevent the first specific game state following the special game state from becoming too advantageous. Also, even in the case of a configuration in which the second specific game state is continuously (overlapped) generated from the first specific game state, the second specific game state passes through the first specific game state following the special game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second specific game state from becoming too advantageous.

[Third Embodiment]
A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 98. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. Also, in the following embodiments,
The same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, and redundant descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The third embodiment relates to a variation pattern table (variation pattern selection table, variation pattern group) and the like for selecting a variation pattern for a variation display game.

[Game board]
The game board 30 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 shown in FIG. 81 is different from the game board 30 shown in FIG. 2 in that a normal figure start gate 34 is added in the vicinity of the general winning opening 35 in the game area 32 on the lower left of the center case 40. . Two normal figure start gates 34 are present in the game areas 32 on the right side and the lower left side of the center case 40 . The function and configuration of the normal map starting gate 34 itself are the same as in the first embodiment. That is, inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34 and is detected by the gate switch 34a, the normal pattern variation display game is executed.

Since there is a normal figure start gate 34 in the lower left game area 32, even if it is a left hit (normal hit) that makes the game ball flow down on the left side of the game area 32, the game ball at the normal figure start gate 34 By passing, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed. When the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a winning result, the movable member 37b is converted to the open state (easy winning state), and the normal variation winning device 3
Winning of game balls to 7 (general electric) is allowed. However, in order to win the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 of the game area 32 on the right side, the player must, immediately after the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 34 on the lower left, the shooting mode of the game ball (hitting ) is required to quickly switch from left-handed to right-handed. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the lower left normal figure start gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37 in the right game area 32 is converted to the open state, the normal variable winning device 37
A game ball does not necessarily win a prize well.

[Example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 82 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating game state transitions in the third embodiment. FIG. 82 is similar to FIG. 77, but in the specific game state B (time reduction mode # 3) generated by reaching the ceiling number of times, the general electric support becomes high support, and the specific game state C (time reduction mode # 3) generated by the time reduction pattern 4) differs from FIG. 77 in that the general electric support becomes a medium support. In addition, in the present embodiment, the specific game state is a time-saving state, but a part or all of the specific game state is a high-probability state with a high-probability jackpot probability (general electric support / special pattern high probability). is also possible.

In the middle support, the variable winning device 37 is easier to convert to the open state than the normal game state without the normal power support (power support), but more difficult to convert to the open state than the high support. For this reason, there is no electric support (
(no general electric support) <medium support <high support, the player's profit increases in this order. and,
The normal variable prize winning device 37 is easier to convert to the open state than the normal game state in the specific game state C, but more difficult to convert to the open state than the specific game state B.

In addition, in the specific game state A (time saving mode #1, #2) that occurs following the big hit, the general electric support may be the same type of high support as the specific game state B, or another type of high support. It can be support. In other types of high supports, the normal variable winning device 37 is easier to convert to the open state than the specific game state C, and is harder or easier to convert to the open state than the specific game state B. If the high supports in the specific game state A and the specific game state B are of the same type, the control becomes simple, while if they are of different types, variations in the game are produced.

In the specific game states A and B, since the normal variable winning device 37 is easily opened, hitting to the right aiming at the normal variable winning device 37 is recommended as the shooting mode of the game ball. Therefore, in the specific game states A and B, the main starting region is the normal variable winning device 37 and the secondary starting region is the first starting winning port 36, so the main variable display game becomes the special figure 2 variable display game, and the secondary variable The display game is a special figure 1 variable display game.

In addition, as described above, the occurrence of the winning to the first start winning port 36 or the first start memory (special figure 1 start memory, special figure 1 pending) is the first to enable execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game It is a starting condition. In addition, the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 or the generation of the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory, special figure 2 reservation) is the second start condition that makes it possible to execute the special figure 2 variation display game there is

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the specific game state C, the normal variable winning device 3
7 is slightly easier to open than in the normal game state, but the disadvantage of not winning the starting prize-winning opening 36 is greater if the right-hand shot is always continued during the specific game state C. For example, if the number of prizes won into the starting prize-winning port 36 per unit number of shot balls in the case of left-handed hitting is greater than the number of prizes won in the normal variable prize-winning device 37 per unit number of fired balls in the case of right-handed hitting, The disadvantage in hitting is greater than the disadvantage in hitting left-handed.

For this reason, in the present embodiment, in the specific game state C, left-handed hitting aiming at the starting prize-winning opening 36 is basically recommended as the shooting mode (how to hit) of the game ball. Therefore, in the specific game state C, the main starting area is the first start winning port 36 and the secondary starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, so the main variable display game is the special figure 1 variable display game and the secondary variable display game is It becomes a special figure 2 variable display game.

As the production mode of the specific game state A, time saving modes # 1 and # 2 as in FIGS. 71A and 77
There is In this embodiment, the number of times m1 and m2 for time saving modes #1 and #2 are each 4
It is a fixed value of times and 30 times, but it may be a variable value in order to increase the variation of the game. For example, the number of times m2 of time saving may be selected by lottery to be 20 times, 30 times, or 50 times. In this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is 1
/15.79, and the number m2 of time saving is small. Therefore, in the time-saving mode #2, since a small hit (big hit state of V passage) does not occur with certainty, the next continuation fixed mode (fixed mode) does not occur.

The production mode of the specific game state B is the time saving mode #3, and the production mode of the specific game state C is the time saving mode #4. It can be distinguished from the time saving state by (c time saving) by production. Incidentally, it is also possible to reduce the development cost by making the performance mode the same in the specific game state B and the specific game state C so as to share the performance. In this embodiment, the number of times m3, m4 for time saving modes #3, #4
are fixed values of 251 times and 30 times, respectively, but may be variable in order to increase game variations. For example, there are multiple time-saving patterns such as 50 time-saving patterns, 30 time-saving patterns, and 20 time-saving patterns. A lottery may be made to set the average number of times of the number of times of shortening of working hours m4 to 30 times.

In addition, time saving mode # 3, # 4 is a production mode different from time saving mode # 1, # 2,
A time-saving state (specific game state A) caused by a big win and a time-saving state (specific game states B, C) not caused by a big win can be distinguished by performance. In addition, specific game state A and specific game state B, C
It is also possible to reduce the development cost by making the production mode the same in , to standardize the production.

Next, the transition (transition) from each game state will be described.

In this embodiment, the number of ceiling times m5 is 580 times, during the specific game state A and in the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode), after the end of the jackpot state under predetermined conditions (special low probability state, non-variable state state) The number of times of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed never reaches the ceiling number of times. Therefore, there is no transition to the specific game state B from the specific game state A and the remaining pending digestion mode.

Then, in this embodiment, in the normal game state or the specific game state C, when the number of special figure fluctuation display games executed under predetermined conditions after the end of the jackpot state reaches the ceiling number of times, the ceiling time reduction (b time reduction) Then, it transitions to the specific game state B (time saving mode # 3).

In addition, in this embodiment, there is no support hit (time saving result, time saving pattern) in the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, and there is a support hit only in the result of the special figure 1 variation display game. In order to do this, in the jackpot flag 1 setting process (FIG. 23), the support hit determination process (A3607-A
3609) is executed, and on the contrary, in the big hit flag 2 setting process (FIG. 24), the support hit determination process and the like (A3707-A3709) are not executed. Therefore, basically, during the specific game state A in which the main variable display game is the special figure 2 variable display game, the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode), and the specific game state B, the transition to the specific game state C is not performed.

Then, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state where the main variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game, when the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is the result of the support hit (time saving pattern), suddenly time saving (c time saving ) as a specific game state C (time saving mode # 4). In this way
In a normal game state in which the player's profit is small and the performance tends to be monotonous, the amusement of the game can be improved by providing a benefit that results in a winning result (time saving pattern).

Furthermore, when the transition condition is satisfied without occurrence of a small hit or a big hit in the specific game states B and C, the transition state (remaining reservation digestion mode) for digesting the remaining reservation is made. Specific game state B, C
The transition condition for transitioning from to the transition state may be the same as in FIG. 77 of the second embodiment. That is, the transition condition is (i) the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game in the specific gaming state is m3, m
4 (first predetermined number of times), and (ii) the total number of executions of the special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game and special figure 2 variation display game) in the specific gaming state is the time reduction number m3
, exceeds a second predetermined number of times greater than m4 (first predetermined number of times). In addition, the second predetermined number of times may be obtained by adding the maximum value (for example, 4) of the special figure 1 reservation number or the special figure 2 reservation number to the number of times of time saving. Also, regarding the condition (i) when transitioning from the specific game state C to the transition state, even if the number of executions of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (main fluctuation display game) in the specific game state C exceeds the time reduction number m4 good.

[Time saving number of times corresponding to the pattern and the number of prescribed remaining reservations]
FIG. 83 is a table showing the number of times of reduction in working hours and the prescribed number of remaining reservations corresponding to the symbols, which are the types of hits in the special figure variation display game, in the third embodiment. The pattern is a pattern in the case of a big hit (including a big hit by V winning), and the time saving pattern is excluded here.

As shown in (A), in this embodiment, in the state without general electric support, the jackpot pattern of the special figure 1 variable display game includes only the pattern A1 (mainly the jackpot in the normal game state).
. Regarding the pattern A1, it is the same as the pattern A of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, except that the number of times of time saving (here, four times) is different. In addition, in the state with general electric support, there is only the pattern P1 in the jackpot pattern of the special figure 1 variable display game (mainly the jackpot in the specific game state C). Regarding the pattern P1, the number of times of time saving is 30 times (m2), and the prescribed number of remaining reservations is 4. The big-hit symbols A1 and P1 are not the big-hit by V winning, and are stop symbols determined by the big-hit symbol random numbers. It should be noted that it is possible to configure the symbol A1 and the symbol P1 to be the stop symbols of the big hit related to the V prize in the small win of the special figure 1 variable display game. , the symbol A1 and the symbol P1 may be a small-hit stop symbol determined by a small-hit symbol random number.

When the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit in the state without the general electric support, the symbol is only the symbol A1, and the distribution is 100%. Therefore, when the special figure 1 variation display game of the main variation display game becomes a big hit in the normal game state, the game transitions to the time saving mode #1 of the specific game state A (4 times of time saving) after the big win state. In addition, the pattern P1 may be provided in addition to the pattern A1, and the transition to the time saving mode #2 of the specific game state A may be made after the big hit state of the special figure 1 variable display game (dotted line in FIG. 82 etc.). Alternatively, the pattern P1 is provided instead of the pattern A1, and the special figure 1
When the variable display game becomes a big win, the normal game state goes through a big win state to a specific game state A.
You may make it change to time saving mode #2 of this.

In the state with general electric support, when the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the symbol is only the symbol P1, and the distribution is 100%. Therefore, when the special figure 1 variation display game of the main variation display game becomes a big hit in the specific game state C, the game transitions to the time saving mode #2 (30 times of time saving) of the specific game state A after the big win state. In addition, a pattern A1 is provided in addition to the pattern P1,
After the jackpot state of the special figure 1 variable display game, the transition to the time saving mode #1 of the specific game state A may be made. Alternatively, if the pattern A1 is provided instead of the pattern P1, and the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit, the special game state C goes through the big hit state and the time saving mode # of the specific game state A.
It may be changed to 1.

As in (B), regarding the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable display game in the state with general electric support, there is only one type of pattern S1 in which the number of times of reduction in time m2 given after the jackpot is 30 times. The allocation is 100%. In addition, in the present embodiment, the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game is due to the V prize in the small hit, but it is not limited to this. In the specific game state AC with general electric support, when the special figure 2 variable display game of the main variable display game becomes a big hit, the transition to the time saving mode # 2 of the specific game state A is made. In addition to the pattern S1, two patterns are provided for the number of times of time reduction m2 of 20 times and 50 times, and one of 20 times, 30 times, and 50 times is selected as the number of times of time reduction m2 by lottery of patterns by distribution. good.

In this embodiment, the small hit probability differs between the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, and the small hit upper limit judgment value (A3900) is the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display. It differs from game to game. The small hit probability of the special figure 2 variation display game is 1/15.79, while the small hit probability of the special figure 1 variation display game is 1/199.80. Therefore, in the specific game state A, the specific game state B, and the transition state (remaining pending digestion mode) in which the main variation display game is the special figure 2 variation display game, the main variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game. Compared to the normal game state and the specific game state C, it is easier to generate a small win and a big win due to the V prize in the small win.

The pattern G1 of the special figure 2 variable display game jackpot (jackpot by V winning in the small hit in the remaining reserve) in the state without the general electric support is the same as the pattern G of the first embodiment. There is only one type of pattern, that is, a pattern G1 in which the number m2 of time saving given after the big hit is 30 times, and the distribution is 100%. Therefore, when the special figure 2 variation display game of the main variation display game becomes a big hit in the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode), the transition to the time saving mode #2 of the specific game state A is made. In addition, since the pattern G1 and the pattern S1 shift to the same time saving mode after the jackpot ends,
The pattern G1 and the pattern S1 may be a common pattern. In addition to the pattern G1, two patterns of the number of times of time reduction m2 are provided, 20 times and 50 times, and the number of times of time reduction m is determined by lottery of patterns by distribution.
2 may be selected from 20 times, 30 times, and 50 times. In addition, a pattern A1 may be provided in addition to the pattern G1, and the transition to the time saving mode #1 of the specific game state A may be made (Fig. 82
dotted line).

As described above, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the normal game state, the transition state, the specific game state A, the specific game state B, and the specific game state C occur based on individual occurrence conditions (transition conditions). (
transition conditions) may differ from each other.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game becomes a big hit in the specific game state C, the time saving mode is performed after the big hit is finished, as in the case where the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes a big hit (in the case of symbols S1 and G1). Transition to # 2 and get 30 times of time saving with high support. Therefore, even if the specific game state C is medium support rather than high support, it is very advantageous to the player and the interest in the game is improved. In addition, since the specific game state C of the middle support does not change to the state with the general electric support, it is treated as a consecutive chance in which the big hit state and the specific game state continue without going through the normal mode (or normal game state).

In addition, as illustrated in the pie chart of the ratio of the upper limit of the number of rounds in (C), when there are multiple upper limits of the number of rounds (number of jackpot rounds), there is a jackpot pattern corresponding to each upper limit of the number of rounds. good. For example, as shown in (C), when there are three types of round number upper limits, 9R, 6R, and 3R, for the jackpot of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the pattern S1-9R (distribution 15
%), pattern S1-6R (distribution 10%), pattern S1-3R (distribution 75%), pattern G1-9R (distribution 15%), pattern G1-6R (distribution 10%), pattern G1-3R (
There may be a pattern corresponding to the upper limit of the number of rounds, such as distribution 75%. Incidentally, in the case of a big win due to a V prize in a small win, the small win may be regarded as one round and may be included in the round number upper limit value, or the small win may not be included in the round number upper limit value.

[Time-saving operation status]
FIG. 84 is a table summarizing the operating conditions of time saving when a new time saving action opportunity occurs from each game state. The time-saving trigger is a time-saving via a big hit (a time-saving)
If it is a big hit, if it is a short time ceiling (b time short), the ceiling number of times has been reached, suddenly short time (c
If it is time saving), it is the setting and derivation (display) of the time saving pattern.

As described above, in the normal game state (including the remaining pending digestion mode) and the specific game state AC, when a big hit occurs as a trigger for the occurrence of a time saving, a time saving is activated immediately after the big hit ends via the big hit state. Then transition to the specific game state A.

In the normal game state (including the remaining hold digestion mode), the specific game state A, and the specific game state C, when the ceiling number of times is reached as a trigger for b time saving, b time saving is activated and it is possible to transition to specific game state B is. However, in the specific game state B, even if the ceiling number of times is reached as a trigger for b time saving, the new ceiling time saving activation flag (A5115) is not generated, and the new b time saving is inoperable. In this way, it is prohibited to repeatedly generate b time saving in the specific game state B, to prevent the situation in which the specific game state B is substantially extended, and to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous. can. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the number of times ceiling cannot be reached in the specific game state A and the remaining hold digestion mode, the transition from the specific game state A and the remaining hold digestion mode in the normal game state to the specific game state B never do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous.

In addition, as described above, when the ceiling number of times is reached, the middle support specific game state C (c time reduction) transitions to the high support specific game state B (b time reduction), the production mode is from time saving mode # 4 to time saving mode # 3 , and the performance changes. Also, in this case, the method of hitting the game ball is switched from the left-hand hitting state in which left-hand hitting is recommended to the right-hand hitting state in which right-hand hitting is recommended, and the main variation display game changes from the special figure 1 variation display game to the special figure 2 variation. Switch to display game.

In addition, in the normal game state (excluding the remaining hold digestion mode), when the time saving pattern is derived at the support hit as a trigger for c time saving, c time saving is activated and transitions to specific game state C. However, in the specific game state A, the specific game state B, and the remaining hold digestion mode of the normal game state, the main variation display game is the special figure 2 variation display game, and as described above, the special figure 2 variation display Since the game does not have a support hit (time saving pattern), c time saving does not work and specific game state C
does not transition to Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the specific game state C, even if the time saving pattern is derived as a trigger for c time saving by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, for example, the initial value of the number of times of time reduction fluctuation setting (A5126) and support operation By not executing the setting process (A5127), the operation of the c time saving is prohibited and the new c time saving is made inoperable. In this way, it is possible to prohibit the repeated occurrence of c time reduction in the specific game state C, eliminate the situation in which the specific game state C is substantially extended, and prevent the player from being excessively advantageous. In addition, specific game state C
When the time saving pattern is derived in , it is also possible to reset the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations, execute the support operation setting process, and operate a new c time saving. However, even in this configuration, if the remaining number of times of time saving is larger than the initial value of the number of times of time reduction fluctuation (the number of times of time saving of new c time saving), the remaining number of times of saving time will suddenly decrease, so a new c You may disable the time saver and cancel it.

In addition, in the specific game states A and B, if the start winning port 36 is won and there is no special figure 2 start memory, the special figure 1 variable display game may be executed, but the c time saving operation is forcibly prohibited It is also possible not to transition to the specific game state C by pressing. In order to do this, the specific game state A, B
, Even if the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a support hit (time saving pattern), the initial value setting (A5126) of the time reduction variation number and the support operation setting process (A5127) are not executed.

[Display of collective display device]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the display of the collective display device 50 regarding the third embodiment. The display of the collective display device 50 other than the display shown in FIG. 85 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.

In this embodiment, since there is no probability variable state of special figure high probability, unlike the first embodiment, the LED lamp D9 (third game state display unit 59) LED lamp D7 (first game state display unit 57)
Similarly, the lighting or extinguishing informs that it is right-handed or left-handed (normal hitting).

In the state without general power support (no power support), that is, in the normal game state or transition state,
The LED lamps D7 and D9 of the collective display device 50 are extinguished to indicate the left-handed state (normal striking state), and the LED lamp D17 of the collective display device 50 is also extinguished to indicate that the variable time reduction function is not activated (that is, Indicates that it is a non-time saving state).

In the specific game state C, which is c time saving, the LED lamps D7 and D9 are extinguished to indicate that it is in a left-handed state (normal hitting state), while the LED lamp D17 is lit to indicate that the variable time reduction function is operating (i.e. It indicates that it is a time saving state). However, exceptionally, if a normal pattern variation display game hit (normal pattern hit) occurs during c time saving (specific game state C), the normal pattern is stopped at the timing of the winning pattern, right hand hitting state in which the general electricity is released LED lamps D7 and D9 as right-handed LEDs light up to indicate that. Therefore, the lower left game area 32 in the left-handed state
When the normal pattern fluctuation display game executed by the game ball passing through the normal pattern start gate 34 wins and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is converted to the open state by the middle support, to the player An instruction (suggestion) to hit to the right is reported.

In the specific game state C, the display device 41 shows left-handed instruction display and right-handed, corresponding to the left-handed state and right-handed state indicated by the LED lamps D7 and D9 of the collective display device 50. You may display the right-handed instruction|indication display which instruct|indicates. By doing so, even an inexperienced player can easily grasp right-handed hitting, and can easily receive the benefit of opening the general electric power supply by the middle support. It should be noted that the right-handed instruction display on the display device 41 is displayed not at the timing when the LED lamps D7 and D9 are turned on, but at the timing when the normal variable prize winning device 37 (general electricity) is actually opened so as to benefit the player. may be Also, in the specific game state C, when the opening of the normal variable winning device 37 is a short time (for example, 50 msec or less) per normal pattern (in the case of a normal electric opening pattern H1 described later), so as not to disappoint the player. , the display device 41 for right-handed instruction display
may not appear in

In addition, in the specific game state C, the right-handed state where right-handed is recommended occurs exceptionally. At 41, a left-handed instruction display may be displayed. In this way, since a skilled player hits to the right in response to the opening of the general electric power supply, it becomes easier to receive benefits from the medium support, and there is a possibility that the operation of the gaming machine 10 will improve as the player tries to increase his skill level. be.

Further, in the specific game state C, since the left-handed state is normal, the left-handed instruction display may not be displayed on the display device 41 so as not to make the player uncomfortable. The left-handed instruction display may be displayed on the display device 41 only for a predetermined period when the transition is made.

Furthermore, in the specific game state A that is a time saving and the specific game state B that is b time saving, the LED
The lamps D7 and D9 are illuminated to indicate that the right-handed hitting state, and the LED lamp D17
lights up to indicate that the variable time reduction function is in operation.

During the big win state and the small win game state, the LED lamps D7 and D9 are lit to indicate a right-handed state, and the LED lamp D17 is extinguished to indicate a state in which the variable time reduction function is not activated (that is, a non-time-saving state). indicates that It should be noted that, exceptionally, in the specific game state, during a short-time small hit game state without V winning due to the small hit result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (while the small hit is open in FIG. 98), the variable time shortening function is set. In order to keep it operating without turning it off (without saving the time saving flag), the LED lamps D7 and D9 light up to indicate that it is hitting right, and the LED lamp D17 lights up to activate the variable time reduction function. Indicates that it is in a state (that is, a time saving state). In addition, during a long-time small-hit game state due to the small-hit result of the special figure 2 variable display game (during the small-hit opening in Fig. 98), the V prize is surely generated and the big hit is achieved, so the variable time reduction function is turned off. do(
Saving the time saving no flag), the LED lamp D17 is turned off to indicate that the variable time reduction function is not in operation (that is, the non-working time saving state).

[Characteristics of normal map fluctuation display game and normal electric movement]
FIG. 86 and FIG. 87 are diagrams showing the characteristics of the general pattern variation display game and the general pattern movement in the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 86, there are 3 winning patterns (hitting stop pattern, normal drawing winning pattern) in the normal pattern fluctuation display game.
Kind. In this embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of general electric support, the probability per normal pattern is always a constant value 250/251, and changes between low probability (low probability normal pattern) and high probability (high probability normal pattern) not controlled as such. In addition, it is good also as a low probability lower than 250/251 in the specific game state C of normal game state or middle support.

The start memory number (normal pattern pending number) of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is 4. The maximum number of counts of electric power (
count number upper limit) is 5. The normal pattern stop time (normal pattern display time) is 600 msec regardless of the game state.

The normal pattern fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, is 5000 msec in the normal game state and transition state without general electric support (electric support), and 4900 msec in the c short specific game state C.
It is msec, and it is 200 msec in the specific game state A of a time saving and the specific game state B of b time saving. Normal figure fluctuation time is shortened in the order of no electric support (normal game state, transition state)> medium support (specific game state C)> high support (specific game state A, B). In this way, in the specific game state C of the medium support, compared to the normal game state and the transition state without the general power support (low support), it is a little easier to enter the general power winning easy state (open state). , In the specific game states A and B of high support, it is extremely easy to enter the easy win state of the general electric power. In addition, normal pattern fluctuation time is set based on the support state (that is, no power support, medium support, high support) corresponding to each game state in normal pattern normal processing (A7920 in FIG. 46).

As shown in FIG. 87(A), by a lottery based on the distribution of 65521 normal pattern winning pattern random numbers (A7710), the winning stop pattern number 1 corresponding to the winning 1 pattern is set with a probability of 65321/65521. A winning stop pattern number 2 corresponding to a winning 2 symbol is set with a probability of /65521, and a winning stopping pattern number 3 corresponding to a winning 3 symbol is set with a probability of 100/65521 (A7912).

LED lamps D8, D10, D18 of the variation display unit 53 for the normal figure variation display game /
Depending on the combination of lights off, the pattern for hit 1 is (lights off, light, light off), and the pattern for hit 2 is (lights off,
Lights off, lights on), and symbols for winning 3 are displayed like (lights off, lights on, lights on). In addition, the lost pattern of the stop pattern number (A7909) which is the stop pattern number 0 is (light off, light off, light off)
is displayed as

The general electric open pattern is an open mode of the ordinary fluctuation prize winning device 37 (universal electric) per one general pattern. Normal time, that is, in the normal game state and the transition state, the electric open pattern is 1 to
3, the pattern H1 is one-time open for a short period of time, and the pattern H1 is selected with a probability of 100%. In addition, the specific game state A (
In a short time) and specific game state B (b short time), the general electric open pattern is a pattern H3 of long electric open once for all patterns of 1 to 3 per hit, pattern H3 with a probability of 100%
is selected, so it becomes a high support.

On the other hand, in the specific game state C (c short time), the general electricity opening pattern is the pattern H1 for the winning 1 symbol, and the general electricity 2 times opening pattern H2 for the winning 2 and 3 symbols,
Pattern H1 and pattern H2 are mixed. The pattern H1 for short-term power supply once open is 653
Selected with a probability of 21/65521 × 100%, the pattern H2 of opening the electricity twice is 200
/65521×100%. In this way, in the specific game state C, the selection probability of the pattern H1 in which the mains are open for a shorter time than the pattern H2 is much higher than the selection probability of the pattern H2. In the medium support (specific game state C), by making it slightly more advantageous than without the electric support (normal game state), the profit on the player side and the game center side are improved so that the profit on the player side does not become too large. adjusting profits.

In addition, as described above, since the patterns corresponding to 2 and 3 hits are the same in each game state,
Hits 2 and 3 may be combined as one hit.

As shown in FIG. 87(B), in the short time opening pattern H1, the normal variable winning device 37 is opened only once for a short time. In pattern H1, the normal electric open time (A8407) is 36 msec, the normal electric residual ball processing time (A8708) is 600 msec, and the normal electric ending time (A8903
) is 100 msec, and the recovery time after the normal pattern ending until the next normal pattern variation display game becomes possible is 4 msec (interrupt cycle of timer interrupt processing).

In the pattern H2 of opening the electric power twice, the ordinary variable winning device 37 is opened twice, and the opening time of the electric power is 36 msec for the first opening and 1624 msec for the second opening. The normal/commercial open time (A8407) for the first opening is the same as the normal/commercial open time of 36 msec in pattern H1. In the first opening, the pattern H2 is indistinguishable from the pattern H1, but in the second opening, the player is surprised and the amusement of the game is improved. Power supply open time for the second open (A87
04) is considerably longer than the electrical open time of the first open. In pattern H2, the second opening time (1624 msec) or the total opening time of the first and second times (36
msec+1624 msec) is longer than the normal/current open time of 36 msec of pattern H1. In addition, the normal electric remaining ball processing time, the normal drawing ending time, and the return time of pattern H2 are the same as those of pattern H1, and the control of the normal electric is simplified.

Furthermore, in pattern H2, the wait time (A
8702) is longer than the first and second electrical disconnection times, eg, 3000 msec. The player who confirmed the passage of the game ball to the lower left normal starting gate 34 and the opening of the first normal electric current has a margin to switch from left hitting to right hitting due to this long wait time, and the second time It is possible to hit right in time for the opening of the discharge. Total time (36 msec + 3000 msec + 1624 mse
c+704 msec) is longer than the total time of pattern H1 (36 msec+704 msec) and the total time of pattern H3 (2800 msec+704 msec).

In the long-time open pattern H3, the normal variable winning device 37 is opened only once for a long time.
The electrical open time (A8407) of pattern H3 is 2800 msec, which is longer than the electrical open time of pattern H1 (36 msec). ). Therefore, the pattern H3 makes it easier to win a prize to the normal variable prize winning device 37 than the patterns H1 and H2. The normal electric remaining ball processing time, the normal drawing ending time, and the return time of pattern H3 are the same as those of patterns H1 and H2, and the control of the normal electric is simplified.

As described above, the total open time of the general electric power increases in the order of pattern H1 < pattern H2 < pattern H3, and the selection probability of pattern H1 having the shortest total open time is no electric support (normal game state, transition state) > medium support (specific game state C) > high support (specific game state A, B). And without the electric sapo, the selection probability of pattern H1 is 100
%, and at high support, the selection probability of pattern H3 is 100%. In addition, as described above, the normal figure fluctuation time decreases in the order of no electric sapo > middle sapo > high sapo. Therefore, the profit obtained by the player increases in the order of no electrical support<intermediate support<high support.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the general electric open time, the hit start pointer value, and the hit end pointer value are the general pattern stop pattern information (hit 1-3 symbols), and the support state ( No electric sapo, medium sapo, high sapo) is set (A8405-A840 in FIG. 49
7, A8704 in FIG. 51). Therefore, regarding the pattern H1 when the normal voltage is open, the first and second times when the pattern H2 is when the normal voltage is disconnected, and the pattern H3 when the normal voltage is disconnected, the normal voltage disconnection time is the pattern H1-H.
It will be set every 3. Then, regarding the pattern H1 and the pattern H3, the win start pointer value and the win end pointer value are set to the same value (here, 0), and the general electricity is opened only once. Furthermore, regarding the pattern H3, the winning start pointer value and the winning end pointer value are set to different values (here, 0 and 2), and the general electricity is opened twice.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the pattern H2 is the only pattern that has the second normal open. ,
And, only for the support state (middle support) corresponding to the specific game state C, that is, only for the pattern H2, it is set by the general electric operation transition setting process (A8702 and A8704 in FIG. 51).

Normal electric remaining ball processing time and normal drawing ending time are related to normal drawing stop pattern information (1-3 hits) and support state according to each game state (no electric support, medium support, high support) 51, that is, the same value is set regardless of which of the patterns H1 to H3 is (A
8708, A8903 in FIG. 52). However, these may be set corresponding to the general pattern stop symbol information and the support state.

[Special figure information setting process]
FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure information setting process according to the third embodiment.
The special figure information setting process is executed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A
3404, A3504). Note that in the processing of FIG. 88, unlike FIG. 28 of the first embodiment, the first half variation and the second half variation are not distinguished for simplicity, but they may be distinguished.

The game control device 100 first sets the variable group selection pointer table (A14
201), using this variable group selection pointer table, acquires the variable group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A14202). As shown in FIG. 82, normal mode,
Remaining reservation digestion mode, production modes such as time saving mode #1-#4, respectively, correspond to each game state (normal game state, transition state, specific game state AC). Therefore, step A1420
2, a variation pattern table is set according to each game state as described later.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the variable group selection offset table (A
14203), using this variation group selection offset table, the offset data corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag and the stop symbol pattern are acquired (A14204).

The fluctuation pattern discrimination flag indicates the pattern of the fluctuation to be started (special figure 1 or special figure 2), and whether the special figure fluctuation display game to be started is a special figure 1 fluctuation display game or a special figure 2 fluctuation display game. discriminate. Therefore, by the processing of step A14204, the variation pattern table can be made different between the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game as described later. Also,
The stop pattern pattern is the result of the special figure fluctuation display game (big hit, small hit, support hit, loss)
corresponds to Therefore, by the processing of step A14204, it is possible to vary the variation pattern table corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game.

Next, the game control device 100 adds the variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A14205), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variation distribution information area as the variation distribution information (A14206).

[Variation pattern setting process]
FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variation pattern setting process according to the third embodiment. Variation pattern setting processing is executed in special figure 1 variation start processing and special figure 2 variation start processing (A3406, A3506). Note that in the processing of FIG. 89, unlike FIG. 29 of the first embodiment, the first half variation and the second half variation are not distinguished for simplicity, but they may be distinguished. For simplicity, only one variation pattern random number (for example, variation pattern random number 2) out of variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is used.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable selection address table (variation group table) (A14301). Then, the address of the fluctuation pattern table (variation pattern selection table, fluctuation selection table) corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information (A14206) is acquired and prepared (A14302). Here, the variation pattern table is a variation pattern group consisting of a group of one or more variation patterns (variation numbers), and is set by obtaining its address (for example, top address). As described above, in the special figure information setting process (FIG. 88), the fluctuation distribution information is set based on the effect mode corresponding to the game state, the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag, and the stop symbol pattern. For this reason, each game state (normal game state, transition state, specific game state AC), special figure type (type of special symbol: special figure 1 or special figure 2), result of special figure fluctuation display game (jackpot, Variation pattern table (
fluctuation pattern group) can be set.

After that, the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target (special figure 1 or special figure 2) variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepared (A14303). Then, the distribution process (A
14304), acquires the variation number obtained as a result of the allocation, and saves it in the variation number area (A14305). The variation number is associated with a predetermined variation pattern, and indicates a predetermined variation pattern (for example, normal reach loss A, SP3 reach big hit B, etc.). In this way, in the variation pattern setting process, the variation number as the variation pattern is set by the allocation process as a lottery based on the variation pattern table.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the change start information setting process according to the third embodiment. The fluctuation start information setting process is executed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3407, A3507). In FIG. 90, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 32 of the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted. Unlike FIG. 32 of the first embodiment, the process of FIG. 90 does not distinguish between the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation for the sake of simplicity, but they may be distinguished.

When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is neither a small hit nor a big hit (the result of A4600b is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether it is the time saving mode #1 or the remaining pending digestion mode. (A4600c). In the case of time saving mode # 1 or remaining pending digestion mode (A
The result of 4600c is "Y"), the variation time value corresponding to the number of special figure 2 fluctuations after the end of the big hit (the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A4615
). As a result, in the time-saving mode # 1 or the remaining pending digestion mode, in the case of loss (no support hit), the fluctuation time value of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set for each special figure 2 fluctuation number after the end of the big hit Rotational speed control is performed. There is a possibility that the interest in the game can be improved by controlling the number of rotations in the time saving mode #1 or the remaining hold digestion mode.

In addition, in step A4600c, instead, the specific game state A (time saving mode # 1,
# 2) Or it is determined whether it is the remaining pending digestion mode, and in the specific game state A or the remaining pending digestion mode, if it is lost, the rotation speed control of the variable time value of the special figure 2 variable display game may be done. Alternatively, in step A4600c, it is determined only whether or not it is the remaining pending digestion mode, and only in the remaining pending digestion mode, if it is out, the rotation speed control of the variable time value of the special figure 2 variable display game is performed. good too. In step A4600c, it is determined only whether or not it is the time saving mode #1, and if it is not in the time saving mode #1,
Rotation speed control of the variable time value of the special figure 2 variable display game may be performed.

The game control device 100 determines that the variation display game to be started is not the special figure 2 variation display game but the special figure 1
If it is a variable display game (result of A4600a is "N"), if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit or a big hit (result of A4600b is "Y"), or time saving mode # 1 If it is not in the remaining pending digestion mode (the result of A4600c is "N"), the processing of steps A14601-A14605 is executed.

The game control device 100 clears the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random number 2 (A1
4601). Then, the variable time value table is set (A14602), and the variable time value corresponding to the variation number indicating the variation pattern is acquired using the variable time value table (A1460).
3). Thereby, a variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern is obtained. Subsequently, the variable time value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A14604). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation number (that is, variation pattern) is prepared as an effect command (A14605). Thereby, the variation command (MODE, ACTION) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the next effect command setting process (A4610).

In FIG. 90, steps A4600a, A4600b, A4600c, A46
15, the processing of A4616 may be eliminated, and the variation time value corresponding to the variation number (variation pattern) may be acquired in all cases (A14603).

[Setting status of fluctuation pattern table]
FIG. 91 shows the setting status of the variation pattern table (variation pattern selection table, variation selection table, variation pattern group) (A14302) set based on the processing of FIGS. It is a table shown for (special figure 1 or special figure 2). As described above, in order to select the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game (first variation display game) by lottery, the special figure 1 variation pattern table is set, and the special figure 2 variation display game (second variation display game ) to select the variation pattern by lottery, the special figure 2 variation pattern table is set.

The special figure 1 variation pattern table related to the special figure 1 variation display game is a normal game state (normal mode) without electric support, a specific game state C (time saving mode # 4) with medium support, and a specific game with high support In state B (time saving mode #3), the same common variation pattern table A is set (A14302). Then, with reference to this variation pattern table A, the variation pattern (variation number) of the special figure 1 variation display game is selected by lottery in the distribution process (A14304).

The special figure 2 variation pattern table related to the special figure 2 variation display game is, in the normal game state,
Like the special figure 1 variation pattern table, variation pattern table A is set. On the other hand, unlike the normal game state, in the specific game state C and the specific game state B, the common same variation pattern table C is set for the special figure 2 variation pattern table.

As shown in FIG. 82, when transitioning from the specific game state C to the specific game state B due to reaching the ceiling number of times, since there is no change in the time saving state (time saving mode), the same special figure type fluctuation display game ( Regarding the special figure 1 variation display game or the special figure 2 variation display game), if the variation pattern table is kept the same without changing, there is little discomfort, and the game rules are not violated.
If the variation pattern table is made the same, the variation pattern or the variation time value of the variation display game is made common, and the sense of discomfort is reduced.

For this reason, in the specific game state C and the specific game state B, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern table (
The same common variation pattern table A is set as the first variation pattern group), and the same common variation pattern table C is set as the special figure 2 variation pattern table (second variation pattern group). Also, when transitioning from the normal game state to the specific game state C, there is no change in the fact that the main variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game in the left-handed state, so that there is little discomfort. With the specific game state C, the common same variation pattern table A will be set as the special figure 1 variation pattern table.

In addition, when transitioning from the specific game state C to the specific game state B, the type (state) of the general electric support transitions from medium support to high support, and the content of the game changes greatly. It is preferable to clearly switch the type of variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game in the game state C and the special figure 2 variation display game in the specific game state B) according to the change in the general electric support. Therefore, in both the specific game state C and the specific game state B, the special figure 1 variation pattern table (first variation pattern group) and the special figure 2 variation pattern table (second variation pattern group) are the variation pattern table A and the variation Like pattern table C, different ones are set.

Also, although not shown in FIG. 91, specific game state A (a time saving, time saving mode #1, #2)
, the special figure 1 variation pattern table may be the variation pattern table A as in the specific game states B and C in order to ensure the commonality of the performance by the common variation pattern and reduce the development cost, or the variation pattern table A may be used to increase the variation of the performance. Other than the pattern table A may be used. Similarly, in the specific game state A, the special figure 2 variation pattern table may be the same variation pattern table C as in the specific game states B and C to ensure commonality of effects and reduce costs, or to increase the variation of effects. Other than the pattern table C may be used.

Alternatively, the special figure 1 variation pattern table is the same variation pattern table as the specific game states B and C in order to ensure the commonality of the production by the common variation pattern and reduce the development cost in the time saving mode # 2 of the specific game state A. A may be used, and in the time saving mode #1, the number of time saving times is extremely small compared to the time saving mode #2 and the specific game states B and C, so a variation pattern table other than A may be used to distinguish the performance. Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern table may be the same variation pattern table C as the specific game states B and C in order to ensure commonality of production and reduce development costs in time saving mode # 2, and in time saving mode # 1 , a table other than the variation pattern table C may be used to distinguish the effect.

Also, the setting of the variation pattern table in FIG. 91 may be the same regardless of the result of the variation display game. Alternatively, the setting of the variation pattern table in FIG. 91 may be changed according to the result of the variation display game (big hit, small win, support hit, loss). For example, when the result of the variation display game is lost, it is as shown in FIG. 91, but in the case of a small hit or a big hit, a common variation pattern table D is used regardless of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the game state. Therefore, regardless of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 or the game state, the variation pattern or the variation time value may be made common.

[Example of production screen]
FIG. 92 is a diagram showing an effect screen as a display screen of the display device 41 according to the third embodiment. (A) shows the production screen of the normal mode, which is the production mode of the normal game state without general electric support, and (B) shows the production screen of the time saving mode # 4, which is the production mode of the specific game state C of the medium support. indicates

In FIG. 92A, "high school mode", "high school stage", etc. are displayed as a mode display 679 corresponding to the normal mode, and a background image simulating a school is displayed.
Although the mode display 679 and the background image are still images here, they may be moving images. The variation number display 677 is "95G", indicating that the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the end of the big hit is 95 (excluding the number of times in the probability variation state). In addition, the variable count display 677 may indicate the remaining number of games up to the ceiling count (peak count−execution count). In the special figure 1 reservation number display part 650 and the special figure 2 reservation number display part 660 on the upper right of the display screen, the numbers "4" and special figure 2 indicating the special figure 1 reservation number (special figure 1 start memory number) respectively The number "0" indicating the number of reservations (special figure 2 start memory number) is displayed.

On the display screen, a left pattern 611a and a right pattern 611b are displayed as special decorative patterns (large patterns).
, and the middle pattern 611c can be variably displayed. Left design 611a, right design 611b
, and the variable display of the middle pattern 611c are respectively the left variable display area 610A and the right variable display area 6
10B, displayed in the center variable display area 610C. Furthermore, the variable display of the decorative reduced pattern (small pattern) is executed in the variable display area 615 on the right side of the display screen.

The left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b are variably displayed by vertical scrolling. For example, in vertical scrolling, a series of seven patterns (decoration identification patterns) corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7 appear in order on the display screen and are scrolled across the display screen in the vertical direction (vertical direction). After moving, it disappears from the display screen. In order to save the display area, the middle pattern 611c is divided into the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611a.
The direction of the variable display is different from that of the vertical scroll of 11b, and the variable display is performed by rotation variation visually recognized by the player as if it rotates about an axis. In addition, instead of rotation fluctuation, front and back fluctuation (back and forth scroll) that shows a series of overlapping patterns moving in the front and back direction by perspective method etc.
may be performed. In addition, the middle pattern 611c may be vertically scrolled like the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b.

The left pattern 611a is a character image 612a (character component,
character part) and a character image 613a (character component, character part) showing a number (character). In order to shorten the width of the entire left pattern 611a, the character image 612a
, and the character image 613a are arranged so that their centers are aligned substantially in the scroll direction (vertical direction), and the character image 613a is positioned on the central axis of the character image 612a. Similarly, the right pattern 611b
is composed of a character image 612b representing a character and a character image 613b representing a number. In order to shorten the width of the entire right pattern 611b, the character image 612b and the character image 613b are arranged so that their centers are aligned substantially in the scroll direction (vertical direction).
13b is positioned on the central axis of the character image 612b. Also, in order to save the display area, the middle pattern 611c is composed only of a character image 613c representing numbers.

In addition, in the normal mode, a plurality of numbers from 1 to 7 as identification information is, for example,
1 (green), 2 (blue), 3 (orange), 4 (blue), 5 (green), 6 (blue), 7 (orange) are not the same color, and at least one number is different from the others becomes. Even numbers may be of the same color (cold color). The odd numbers are a different color than the even numbers and may include multiple colors such as green (neutral colors) and orange (warm colors). Also, in the present embodiment, when the decorative special pattern includes a character and a number, the character corresponds to the number one-to-one and differs for each number. However, the same character is used for different numbers. may

Four pending displays 682a (first pending display) are displayed in the first pending display portion 630a (standby area) that displays the first starting memory (special figure 1 starting memory) before execution of the variable display game as the first pending display. be done. The pending display 682a has a display mode imitating playing cards. In addition, in the pending digestion area 640, the variable pending display 682b showing the variable pending related to the special figure 1 variable display game being executed (the starting memory that was the execution right of this special figure variable display game) was turned over. It is displayed in a display mode imitating playing cards. Note that the pedestal may indicate the reserved digestion region 640 . In addition, the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory) before the execution of the variable display game is the second hold display (
Nothing is displayed in the second suspension display portion 630b displayed as the second start memory display.

In FIG. 92B, the background image (background movie) of the moving image (movie) is displayed on the full screen of the display device 41 . Also, as a mode display 679 corresponding to the time saving mode # 4 of the middle support,
"Transcendence mode" and "transcendence area" are displayed in two opposing places, the upper left corner and the lower right corner.
Since the plurality of mode displays 679 are displayed on the layer behind the pending display 682a, the mode display 679 in the lower right corner is hidden behind the pending display 682a on the front layer. However, the player can fully recognize the current rendering mode by the mode display 679 in the upper left corner that is not hidden by the hold display 682a. The mode display 679 is displayed in an oblique direction different from the horizontal direction in FIG. 92(A), and may be moved obliquely in a belt-like area independently of or part of the moving image of the background image. In this way, since the aspect of the mode display 679 is clearly different between the time saving mode #4 and the normal mode, the time saving mode #4 can be easily distinguished from the normal mode and visually recognized.

The number-of-variations display 677 is "124G", indicating that the number of executions of the special-figure variation display game after the end of the big hit is 124. The remaining number of times display 696 in the upper right corner of the display screen displays the remaining number of time-savings, that is, the number of variable display games that can be executed in the time-saving mode #4. In the special figure 1 reservation number display part 650 and the special figure 2 reservation number display part 660 on the upper right of the display screen, the number "4" indicating the special figure 1 reservation number and the number "0" indicating the special figure 2 reservation number respectively is displayed. In addition, since it is a medium support, there are many cases where the number of the special figure 2 reserved number display unit 660 becomes other than "0" due to the winning of the normal variable winning device 37.

In time-saving mode #4 of the middle support in FIG. 92(B), similarly to the normal mode in FIG. is displayed fluctuating with . However, in FIG. 92(B), a variation mode different from that in FIG. 92(A) may be used so that it can be seen that it is the middle support. 611b may be variably displayed with rotational variation.

In the time-saving mode #4 of the middle support in FIG. 92(B), the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b are composed of a character image showing a character and a character image showing a number as in the normal mode of FIG. 92(A). be. The medium pattern 611c is composed only of a character image 613c representing a number. However, in FIG. 92(B), in order to make it clear that it is a middle support, a configuration mode of a decorative special pattern different from that in FIG. 92(A) may be used. Well, the left design 611a and the right design 611b may be composed only of character images. In addition, when using the same character for the same number in the time saving mode #4 and the normal mode, the display mode may be changed within the range in which the same character can be recognized by the common feature.

Also, in the medium support time saving mode # 4, the multiple numbers from 1 to 7 as identification information are, for example, 1 (red), 2 (red), 3 (red), 4 (red), 5 (red) ), 6 (red), 7 (red)
is the same warm color (here, red). The color of the character is also the same color (red) as the number. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to understand that it is the time-saving mode #4 with the middle support, which is different from the normal mode without the general power support. In addition, LEDs of the board decoration device 46 such as the upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d are
Alternatively, the LEDs of the frame decoration devices 18 such as the decoration devices 18a and 18b may emit light in the same color (red) as the numbers. In addition, since time saving mode # 4 and normal mode are in common left-handed state and special figure 1 fluctuation display game is the main fluctuation display game, make it easy to visually distinguish time saving mode # 4 from normal mode is important.

In addition, in the time saving mode # 4, in the first suspension display portion 630a (standby area) that displays the first start memory (special figure 1 start memory) before the execution of the variable display game as the first hold display, the hold display 682a (first 1 pending display) are displayed four times. However, unlike the normal mode of FIG. 92(A), the pending display 682a has a star-shaped display mode. Also by this, time saving mode #4 can be easily distinguished from normal mode. Further, in the pending digestion area 640, a variable pending display 682b indicating variable pending related to the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is displayed in a star-shaped display mode.

In addition, when there is a prize to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 by the middle support, the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory) before the execution of the variable display game is set as the second hold display (second start memory display). 2 may be displayed in the pending display portion 630b. Further, the distinction between the second pending display portion 630b and the first pending display portion 630a is eliminated, and the second pending display is combined with the first pending display into a common pending display portion (
standby area).

Also, in the medium support time saving mode # 4, unlike the normal mode without power supply support,
The upper effect unit 40c, as a movable accessory (movable member), moves in front of the player side of the display screen of the display device 41 so as to slowly repeatedly move up and down along the display screen to vibrate. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game with respect to the time saving mode #4 which is an intermediate support and can shift to the time saving mode #2 of 30 times of time saving. In addition, by providing an effect that can appear in the time saving mode #4 but does not appear in the normal mode (operation effect of the upper effect unit 40c), the time saving mode #4 can be easily distinguished from the normal mode. In addition, the upper effect unit 40c may operate from the start of the variation of the decorative special symbol in the special symbol variation display game, and may stop the operation when the variation ends or when the predetermined effect occurs.

In addition, in the middle support time saving mode # 4, a production that can appear in normal mode (notice production)
Some of the performances do not appear. Effects that can appear in normal mode but do not appear in time-saving mode #4 include changes to a specific mode of pending display in the pending change notice, pre-reading effects due to the movement of movable characters, certain types of dialogue notices, There are certain types of step-up productions and the like.

Above, I explained the difference in production between the medium support time reduction mode # 4 and the normal mode. Time saving mode #4 may be easily distinguished from time saving modes #2 and #3. For example, between time saving mode # 4 and time saving mode # 2, # 3, the display mode of mode display 679, the background image, the configuration mode and variation mode of the decorative special pattern, the number color and character color of the decorative special pattern , and possible effects may be changed.

[External information editing process]
FIG. 93A is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half of the external information editing process according to the third embodiment. External information editing processing is executed in timer interrupt processing (A1319)
. In addition, in FIG. 93A, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 54B of the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.

The game control device 100 updates -1 if the time saving signal control timer is not 0 (A9527)
, After that, it is determined whether or not it is the time saving mode # 3 (during b time saving, specific game state B) (A9
528a). In addition, the timer initial value of the time saving signal control timer is set in the time saving signal control timer area in step A5302 of the support operation setting process (FIG. 37) described above (
fixed time of 128 msec, for example). If the game control device 100 is not in the time saving mode #3 (the result of A9528a is "N"), the process proceeds to step A9528c.

When the game control device 100 is in the time saving mode #3 (the result of A9528a is "Y")
, It is determined whether or not the time saving signal control timer is 0 (A9528b). If the time-saving signal control timer is 0 (result of A9528b is "Y"), the external information editing process is terminated as it is, and if the time-saving signal control timer is not 0 (result of A9528b is "N"), big hit 3 The ON data of the signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9529), and the external information editing process is terminated.

As a result, at the start of the ceiling time saving (b time saving) due to reaching the ceiling number of times, the ON data of the jackpot 3 signal is output to an external device such as a game hall internal management device (hall computer) via the external information terminal 71. . After that, the output of the ON data of the big hit 3 signal continues only during the timer initial value (for example, fixed time of 128 msec) set in the time saving signal control timer area.

If the game control device 100 is not in the time saving mode #3 (the result of A9528a is "N")
, It is determined whether it is other than time saving mode # 4 (c time saving, specific game state C) (A952
8c). In the case of a game state other than time saving mode # 4 (specific game state C) (A9528c
If the result is "Y"), the external information editing process is terminated as it is, and if it is in the time saving mode # 4 (specific game state C) (the result of A9528c is "N"), the on data of the jackpot 4 signal is external information The data is saved in the output data area (A9530), and the external information editing process ends.

As a result, at the start of a sudden time saving (c time saving) due to a time saving pattern (sapo hit), the ON data of the jackpot 4 signal is sent to an external device such as a game hall internal management device (hall computer) via the external information terminal 71. output. After that, the output of the ON data of the jackpot 4 signal continues during the time saving mode #4 (specific game state C).

In addition, the game control device 100 may also add a determination as to whether or not the time saving signal control timer is 0 in step A9528c. That is, in step A9528c, it may be determined whether the time saving mode is other than #4 or the time saving signal control timer is zero. In this way, the timer initial value (for example, 128 m
The on-data of the jackpot 4 signals is output only during the fixed time of sec.

[Output of jackpot signal (external information)]
FIG. 93B is a time chart showing the ON/OFF states of jackpot 1-4 signals as external information. (I) shows the state before and after entering b time saving (that is, before and after reaching the ceiling number of times). (II) shows the state before and after entering the c time saving (that is, before and after the time saving pattern derivation).

The jackpot 1 signal, jackpot 2 signal, jackpot 3 signal, and jackpot 4 signal may be signals defined by the machine type. In this embodiment, the big win 1 signal is turned on at the start of the big win or the small win, and turned off at the end of the big win or the small win. The big win 2 signal is turned on at the start of the big win or the small win and turned off at the end of the big win or the small win. Furthermore, the big win 2 signal is turned on at the start of time saving of high support (excluding time saving of medium support) and turned off at the end of the remaining hold digestion mode (when the variable display game relating to the last remaining hold is stopped).

The big win 3 signal is turned on at the start of the big win or the small win, and turned off at the end of the big win or the small win. In addition, the jackpot 3 signal is turned on at the start of b time saving (ceiling time saving) for a short fixed time (
For example, it turns off after 128 msec. The jackpot 4 signal is turned on at the start of the short working hours of the medium support (excluding the short working hours of the high support) and turned off at the end of the short working hours of the medium support.

In FIG. 93B (I), when entering b time saving by reaching the ceiling number of times, the game state changes from the normal game state to the specific game state B. When entering b time saving of high sapo, ON data of 2 jackpot signals (2 jackpot signals in ON state) are output as a signal related to the start of time saving. The output of the ON data of the jackpot 2 signal continues for a long time until the end of the remaining pending digestion mode, that is, until the last variable display game related to the remaining pending is stopped.

Moreover, if it rushes into b time saving, the ON data of 3 jackpot signals will be output to an external device for a short fixed time (for example, 128 msec) by the process of FIG. 93A. As a result, the external device can recognize the occurrence of b time saving or the number of times of reaching the ceiling, distinguishing from the occurrence of time saving (a time saving) or c time saving due to a big hit. In addition, the external device can distinguish between the case where the big win 3 signal is generated by the big win or the small win (when it continues for a long time) and the case where the big win 3 signal is generated by b time reduction (when it continues for a short time). can.

In addition, in FIG. 93B (I), since the big hit, the small hit, and the short time c do not occur, the big hit 1
The signal and jackpot 4 signal remain off.

In FIG. 93B (II), when entering into c time saving (sudden time saving) by the time saving pattern, FIG.
By the processing of 3A, the ON data of the jackpot 4 signals are output to the external device. This will
The external device can recognize the occurrence of c time saving (specific game state C) or the derivation of time saving symbols, distinguishing it from the occurrence of time saving (a time saving) or b time saving due to a big hit. The output of the ON data of the jackpot 4 signals continues for a long time until the end of the short time c (specific game state C).

In addition, in FIG. 93B (II), since the big win, the small win, and the short time b do not occur, the big win 1 signal, the big win 2 signal, and the big win 3 signal remain off. In addition, even if you enter the c time reduction of the middle support, the on data of the 2 jackpot signals that occur in the short time of the high support (2 jackpot signals in the ON state)
is not output.

[Output of test signal]
FIG. 94A shows a normal pattern 1 high probability state signal (
1 bit), normal electric accessories 1 open extended state signal (1 bit), normal pattern 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal (1 bit), winning easy state signals 1 to 4 (4 bits), winning easy state determination signal (1
bit) is a time chart showing the state of on/off output. FIG. 94B exemplifies winning easy state signals 1 to 4 corresponding to medium support and high support.

Normal electric accessories 1 open extended state signal, normal pattern 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, normal pattern 1 high probability state signal, etc. Normal electric normal state signal indicating the state of normal electric power and the state of normal electric power fluctuation is easy to win Status signals 1-4 can be turned on at the same time or with a delay.
The time difference between the ON timings of , may be 0 msec or more. The easy winning state determination signal can be turned on at the same time as or with a delay from the easy winning state signals 1 to 4, and the time difference between the ON timings of the easy winning state determination signal and the easy winning state signals 1 to 4 may be 0 msec or more.

FIG. 94A particularly illustrates a case where the game state transitions in the order of normal game state → specific game state C (middle support, c short time) → specific game state B (high support, b short time) → jackpot state or transition state. do.

In the normal game state, when the time-saving pattern is derived by hitting the support of the special figure 1 variable display game, the specific game state C occurs, and the type of the general electric support becomes the medium support (winning easy state 2). At this time, first, the 4-bit win easy state signals 1 to 4 indicating the type of the general electric support are changed from the indefinite state to 01H corresponding to the medium support, and output to the test firing test device. Subsequently, an easy winning state determination signal indicating that the general power support state (easy winning state) has been determined is turned on for a predetermined period (2 msec or more, for example 32 msec) and output to the test firing test device.
Next, a normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal indicating that the general electric opening time is longer, and a normal pattern 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal indicating that the general pattern fluctuation time is shorter than the normal game state, It is output to the test firing test device as a state signal indicating the state of the general electric power and the state of the general electric power map fluctuation. In FIG. 94A, the winning easy state signals 1 to 4 → the winning easy state determination signal → the electric/general map state signal are changed in this order.

After that, when the number of times of the special figure variation display game executed under a predetermined condition (special figure low probability state) after the end of the jackpot state in the specific game state C reaches the ceiling number, the specific game state B occurs, and the general electric support becomes a high support (easy winning state 1). At this time, the 4-bit prize easy state signals 1 to 4 indicating the type of general electric support are changed from 01H corresponding to medium support to 00H corresponding to high support and output to the test firing tester. Subsequently, an easy winning state determination signal indicating that the general electric support state (easy winning state) has been determined is turned on for a predetermined period (2 msec or more, for example 32 msec) and output to the test firing test device. Then, the normal electric accessory 1 open extended state signal and the normal symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal are continuously maintained on from the specific game state C and output to the test-firing test device.

After that, when transitioning from the specific game state B to the jackpot state or the transition state, the winning easy state signals 1 to 4 become indeterminate, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal and the normal pattern 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal are turned off. becomes.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
251, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal indicating that the probability per normal pattern is higher than normal is not turned on. However, when the normal pattern hit probability becomes high only at the time of high support, the normal pattern 1 high probability state signal is changed to ON as shown by the dotted line and is output to the test firing test device. When the normal pattern per probability is high in both the middle support and the high support, during the same period as the ON period of the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal and normal pattern 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, normal pattern 1 The high-probability state signal is turned on and output to the sighting test equipment.

95 and 96 are a table and a time chart showing how firing position designation signal 1 and firing position designation signal 2 are output as test signals to be output to the test-firing test apparatus. Launch position designation signal 1
, and the shooting position specifying signal 2 are both signals indicating right-handed hitting to shoot the game ball to the right game area 32 .

As shown in FIG. 95 (A), in the medium support (specific game state C), when the general electricity is opened in the pattern H1 by the general pattern hit, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on and output, but the firing position Designation signal 2 is turned off. On the other hand, in the middle sapo, when the general electric is opened in the pattern H2 by hitting the general map, both the firing position designation signal 1 and the firing position designation signal 2 are turned on and output. In this way, the output states of the firing position designation signal 1 and the firing position designation signal 2 are different in the pattern H1 open and the pattern H2 open, so the test firing test equipment detects these two types of open. can be distinguished and recognized. In addition, in order to distinguish between open and cold power, only one of the firing position designation signal 1 and the firing position designation signal 2 is turned on when the power is open in pattern H1, and the power is open in pattern H2. A configuration in which only the other is turned on is also possible. In addition, both the firing position specifying signal 1 and the firing position specifying signal 2 are turned off during the period during which the normal game hit does not occur even during the medium support and during the period during the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 95(B), during the electric sapo other than the middle sapo (high sapo, specific game state A and specific game state B), during the small hit, during the big hit, since it is a right-handed state, the firing position designation signal 1 and firing position designation signal 2 are both turned on and output.

For example, as shown in FIG. 96, when there is a small hit during the normal electric opening of the pattern H1, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on at the start of the normal electric opening of the pattern H1, and the firing position designation signal at the start of the small hit. 2 is turned on, and the firing position designation signal 1 and the firing position designation signal 2 are turned off at the end of the small win.
When there is a pattern H1 open circuit during the small hit, the launch position designation signal 1 at the start of the small hit
Then, the firing position specifying signal 2 is turned on, and the firing position specifying signal 1 and the firing position specifying signal 2 are turned off at the end of the small win. When there is a pattern H1 open just before the end of the small win, the firing position specifying signal 1 and the firing position specifying signal 2 are turned on at the start of the small win, the firing position specifying signal 2 is turned off at the end of the small win, and the pattern At the end of H1, the discharge position designation signal 1 is turned off.

When there is a small hit during the normal electric opening of the pattern H2, the firing position designating signal 1 and the firing position designating signal 2 are turned on at the start of the normal electric opening of the pattern H2, and the firing position designating signal 1 and the firing position designating signal 1 are turned on at the end of the small winning. The firing position designation signal 2 is turned off. When there is a normal electric opening of the pattern H2 during the small winning, the firing position specifying signal 1 and the firing position specifying signal 2 are turned on at the start of the small winning, and the firing position specifying signal 1 and the firing position specifying signal 2 at the end of the small winning. turns off. When there is a pattern H2 electrical opening just before the end of the small win, the firing position specifying signal 1 and the firing position specifying signal 2 are turned on at the start of the small winning, and the firing position specifying signal 1 at the end of the electrical opening of the pattern H2. , the firing position designation signal 2 is turned off.

[Operations such as the big prize mouth and lever solenoid]
FIG. 97 shows, in the case of the small hit result of the special figure 1 variable display game, the opening operation of the upper big winning opening of the second special variable winning device 39, the ON/OFF operation of the lever solenoid 86b that opens the specific area 86, and the like. is a time chart illustrating (A) shows a situation where there is no remaining ball error, and (B) shows a situation where there is a remaining ball error. The operation related to the opening and closing (closing) of the upper big winning opening of the second special variable winning device 39 is controlled by the small hit opening process (A2612). The on/off operation of the lever solenoid 86b, that is, the opening/closing operation of the specific area 86 is controlled by the lever solenoid control process (A2618).

In FIG. 97(A), in the case of the small hit result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, unlike the case of the small hit result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the upper big prize opening of the second special fluctuation prize winning device 39 is is opened once for a short period of time. This short time is, for example, a small hit opening time (eg 1000msec)
and the time until the specified number of prizes are won in the upper grand prize opening, whichever is shorter.

During this short time opening of the small winning opening, the lever solenoid 86b is further operated for a short time (
For example, it is turned on for 100 msec), and the specific area 86 is opened. However, specific area 8
Since the opening of 6 (V winning opening) is very short, it is almost impossible for the game ball to enter the specific area 86 . Therefore, during the opening of the small hit by the result of the special figure 1 variable display game, the big hit by the V prize hardly occurs.

A V winning as a ball entering the specific area 86 is detected by the specific area switch 72 of the specific area 86 . The specific area switch 72 is activated when the lever solenoid 86b is turned on, and deactivated when processing of remaining balls is completed. Also, while the specific area switch 72 is valid,
As a test signal, a special electric accessory operating signal is turned on and output to the test firing test device.

The upper special winning opening switch 39a (count switch) is turned on in a pulse form when a game ball entering the upper special winning opening is detected. Immediately after that, the remaining ball outlet switch 73 or the specific area switch 72 detects the game ball, so there is no remaining ball error. Note that the specific area switch 7
When 2 detects a game ball, irregular winning information indicating a big win due to an unexpected abnormal V winning is transmitted to a performance control device 300 together with an ending command at the end of the processing of the remaining balls. And the production control device 300 executes processing corresponding to the irregular winning information, such as notifying that it is an abnormal V winning.

In addition, the processing of the remaining balls is started from the time when the small hit is opened (when the upper grand prize opening is closed), and the time when the remaining ball counter becomes 0 or the time when the remaining ball processing time elapses, whichever is later. to end. The remaining ball counter is updated by +1 after the game ball passes through the upper large winning opening switch 39a, and when the game ball (remaining ball) is detected by the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 or the specific area switch 72, -
1 is updated. In FIG. 97A, before the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1900 msec) elapses, the remaining ball outlet switch 73 or the specific area switch 72 detects the game ball and the remaining ball counter is already zero. Therefore, the small hit remaining ball processing (A2613) is completed when the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1900 msec) elapses, and at this time the specific area switch 72
is disabled.

In this embodiment, the ending of the small hit is performed after the processing of the remaining balls. Small hit ending time set in (A2613) (eg 2000msec)
During, the ending of the small hit continues. The game processing number "0" relating to the special figure normal processing is set in the small winning end processing and saved in the special figure game processing number area. When a big hit is generated by winning a V prize, a fanfare effect (B2102) corresponding to the fanfare command (A5806) is executed during the fanfare time.

In FIG. 97(B), similarly to FIG. 97(A), the upper big prize opening is opened only for a short period of time, and during this short time opening of the upper big prize opening, the lever solenoid 86b is operated for a short time (for example, 100m
sec) and the specific area 86 is opened. The specific area switch 72 becomes effective when the lever solenoid 86b is turned on. However, there is a residual ball error, and the residual ball processing time (
For example, even if 1900 msec) has passed, the small hit remaining ball processing does not end. For this reason, according to the on-off pattern of the lever solenoid 86b (that is, the opening pattern of the specific area 86), after turning on and off in a short time, after an interval (for example, 2900 msec), the lever solenoid 86b is turned on again for a long time. It turns off according to the cancellation of the error (end of processing of remaining balls). Here, the interval time is the small hit opening time (for example, 10
00 msec) and the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1900 msec), but not limited to this. Incidentally, the ON/OFF pattern of the lever solenoid 86b is set in common for the small hit by the special figure 1 variation display game and the small hit by the special figure 2 variation display game (FIG. 98).

After that, until the residual ball error is canceled, the small hit residual ball processing continues, the lever solenoid 86b is maintained on, and the specific area switch 72 is maintained in an effective state.
Then, while the specific area switch 72 is valid, a special electric accessory operating signal is turned on as a test signal and output to the test firing test apparatus. When the residual ball error is canceled and the small hit residual ball processing is completed, the ending is a small hit as in FIG. 97(A).

It should be noted that the remaining ball error monitoring time (for example, 3000 msec) after the game ball that has entered the upper special winning opening is detected and the upper special winning opening switch 39a (count switch) is turned on and off in pulses.
After a lapse of time, a remaining ball error flag indicating that a remaining ball error is occurring is set to ON. After that, when the remaining ball counter reaches 0, the remaining ball error occurrence flag is turned off and the remaining ball error is canceled. For example, the measurement of the timer related to the remaining ball error monitoring time and the ON/OFF of the remaining ball error occurrence flag are performed by the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (A1308
) is executed by providing a remaining ball monitoring process.

FIG. 98 shows, in the case of the small hit result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the opening operation of the upper big winning opening of the second special variable winning device 39, the ON/OFF operation of the lever solenoid 86b that opens the specific area 86, and the like. is a time chart illustrating (A) shows a situation where there is no remaining ball error, and (B) shows a situation where there is a remaining ball error.

In FIG. 98(A), in the case of the small hit result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, unlike the case of the small hit result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (FIG. 97), the second special fluctuation winning device 39 After the big prize opening is opened once for a short period of time (eg 48 msec), the
0 msec) and is released multiple times during a long period of time. For example, opening multiple times is 48m
sec × 19 times of opening and 424 msec × 18 times of closing, this long time is a total of 854
It will be 4msec or the time until the specified number of prizes are won in the upper grand prize opening. In order to make such an opening pattern of the upper big winning opening, for example, in the small hit open process, like the general electric open pattern,
Opening and closing of the second special variable winning device 39 may be controlled by the control pointer.

In addition, in FIG. 98(A), according to the aforementioned on/off pattern of the lever solenoid 86b, the lever solenoid 86b is turned on and off in a short period of time (for example, 100 msec),
After an interval (for example, 2900 msec), the lever solenoid 86b is turned on again for a long time and then turned off. The long time here is the shorter of 21000 msec and the time until the processing of the remaining balls is completed. In addition, in the case of a small hit by the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the on-off pattern of the lever solenoid 86b (that is, the opening pattern of the specific area 86)
And the opening pattern of the upper grand prize-winning opening is the same until the opening of the upper grand prize-winning opening multiple times starts,
They are interlocked substantially synchronously (the lever solenoid 86b and the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b are also interlocked substantially synchronously).

The upper special winning opening switch 39a (count switch) is turned on in a pulse form when a game ball entering the upper special winning opening is detected. Immediately after that, or before processing the remaining balls, the remaining ball outlet switch 73 or the specific area switch 72 detects the game ball, so there is no remaining ball error. In addition, when the specific area switch 72 detects a game ball, the irregular winning information is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 because it is a big hit due to a normal V winning prize. Only the ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the end of the processing of the remaining balls.

In addition, the processing of the remaining balls starts at the end of the opening of the small hit (when the upper grand prize opening is closed), and when the remaining ball processing time elapses and the remaining ball counter becomes 0 (when the error is canceled). end at the later of In FIG. 98(A), before the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1900 msec) elapses, the remaining ball outlet switch 73 or the specific area switch 72 detects the game ball and the remaining ball counter has already become 0. The small hit remaining ball processing (A2613) ends when the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1900 msec) elapses, and the specific area switch 72 becomes invalid at this point.

In this embodiment, after the processing of the remaining ball, it becomes the ending of the small hit, but the ending of the small hit continues during the small hitting ending time (for example, 4200 msec) set in the small hitting remaining ball processing (A2613). Incidentally, the small winning ending time in the case of the small winning by the special figure 2 variation display game is longer than that in the case of the small winning by the special figure 1 variation display game.

In FIG. 98(B), the upper big winning opening is opened in the same opening pattern as in FIG. 98(A). The opening pattern of the upper grand prize opening does not depend on the presence or absence of a remaining ball error. Also, in FIG. 98(B),
The lever solenoid 86b operates in the same on-off pattern as in FIG. 98(A) until the end of the small hit release. It remains on for a time of 21000 msec.

After that, until the residual ball error is canceled, the small hit residual ball processing continues, and the specific area switch 72 is maintained in an effective state. Then, while the specific area switch 72 is valid, a special electric accessory operating signal is turned on as a test signal and output to the test firing test apparatus. When the residual ball error is canceled and the small hit residual ball processing is completed, the ending becomes a small hit as in FIG. 98(A). The occurrence and cancellation of the remaining ball error are as described with reference to FIG. 98(B).

[Action and effect of the third embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes game control means (for example, the game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information. The game control means provides a first specific game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, specific game state B or specific game state A is also possible) and a second specific game state that is generated under different conditions from the first specific game state. (For example, specific game state C) can be generated. The game control means is capable of executing a first variable display game (for example, a special figure 1 variable display game) as a variable display game based on the establishment of the first start condition, and based on the establishment of the second start condition. A second variable display game (for example, special figure 2 variable display game) can be executed. In the first specific game state and the second specific game state, a first variation pattern group (for example, special figure 1 variation pattern table, variation pattern table A) for selecting the variation pattern of the first variation display game, The second variation pattern group (for example, special figure 2 variation pattern table, variation pattern table C) for selecting the variation pattern of the 2 variation display game is made different.

For example, the main variation display game becomes the second variation display game in the first specific game state and the first variation display game in the second specific game state, and so on. The main variation display game may be different depending on the state. However, in such a gaming machine 10, by making the first variation pattern group and the second variation pattern group different in both the first specific game state and the second specific game state, it is selected in the special figure variation display game. It is possible to clearly switch the type of variation pattern to match the type of specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect suitable for the type of the specific game state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, in the third embodiment, in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the first
The variation pattern group (for example, special figure 1 variation pattern table) is made the same as the normal game state. Therefore, the type of variation pattern selected in the first variation display game is common to the normal game state, the first specific game state, and the second specific game state, and the sense of incongruity in the performance is reduced. Interest can be improved. Furthermore, game control is also simplified. Also, the game rules and the like are not violated.

Also, in the third embodiment, in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the second
The variation pattern group (for example, special figure 2 variation pattern table) is made the same. Therefore, the type of variation pattern selected in the second variation display game is common to the first specific game state and the second specific game state, and the performance is incongruous, and the interest in the game can be improved. . Furthermore, game control is also simplified. Also, the game rules and the like are not violated.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes game control means (for example, the game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, It is possible to generate a special game state (for example, a jackpot state) that is advantageous to the player. The gaming machine 10 is capable of converting between an easy winning state (e.g., open state) in which game balls are easy to win and a non-easy winning state (e.g., closed state) in which it is difficult to win, and the specific game state is easier to win than the normal game state. A variable winning device (for example, a normal variable winning device 37) that facilitates conversion to a state is provided. The game control means, when the number of executions of the variable display game under a predetermined condition (for example, a special figure low probability) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, the ceiling number of times), a first specific game state without generating a special game state. (For example, specific game state B, b time saving) can be generated, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a specific result (for example, time saving pattern) different from the special result, the second without the occurrence of the special game state Specific game state (for example, specific game state C, c short time) can be generated. The game control means is capable of executing a first variable display game (for example, a special figure 1 variable display game) as a variable display game based on the establishment of the first start condition, and based on the establishment of the second start condition. A second variable display game (for example, special figure 2 variable display game) can be executed. In the first specific game state and the second specific game state, a first
Variation pattern group (for example, special figure 1 variation pattern table, variation pattern table A), second variation pattern group for selecting the variation pattern of the second variation display game (for example, special figure 2 variation pattern table, variation pattern table C ) to be different. Variable winning device (for example, normal variable winning device 37), in the second specific game state (for example, specific game state C, c time reduction), it is easier to convert to the easy winning state than the normal game state, but the first specific It becomes more difficult to convert to the winning easy state than the game state (for example, specific game state B, b time saving).

Main fluctuation display game (for example, special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the second specific game state, special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the first specific game state) and type of general electric support (for example, high in the first specific game state Support, medium support in the second specific game state) may differ between the first specific game state and the second specific game state. However, in such a gaming machine 10, by making the first variation pattern group and the second variation pattern group different in both the first specific game state and the second specific game state, it is selected in the special figure variation display game. It is possible to clearly switch the type of variation pattern that is displayed according to the type of specific game state, and by extension, the type of general electric support. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect suitable for the type of the specific game state, and by extension, the type of the general electric support, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the game control means, with the occurrence of a special game state (for example, jackpot state), following the special game state, the third specific game state (for example, specific game state A , a time saving) can be generated. The variable winning device (for example, normal variable winning device 37) is the first specific game state (for example, specific game state B, b time saving) and the third specific game state (for example, specific game state A, a time saving), the second Specific game state (for example, specific game state C, c time saving)
It becomes easier to convert to the easy-to-win state.

Therefore, the general electric support of the second specific game state is set to the middle support, and the first specific game state and the third
The general electric support of the specific game state can be set as a high support. And, the second specific game state is a plurality of other specific game states (the first specific game state and the third specific game state), which is the profit that the player can obtain and the shooting mode of the game ball. Both players can be in a specific game state with different characteristics, and the game can be sharpened and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the game ball can be converted into an easy winning state in which it is easy to win and a non-easy winning state in which it is difficult to win. A variable winning device (for example, a normal variable winning device 37) is provided which facilitates conversion from the normal game state to the winning easy state in the electric support state). The game control means can generate a first specific game state (for example, specific game state A or specific game state B) after the end of the special game state (for example, jackpot state), and the result of the variable display game is different from the special result. When a specific result (for example, time saving pattern) is obtained, it is possible to generate a second specific game state (for example, specific game state C) without generating a special game state. The game control means makes it easier to convert the variable winning device to the winning easy state in the first specific game state than in the second specific game state. The game control means can execute a first variable display game as a variable display game based on establishment of a first starting condition, and can execute a second variable display game based on establishment of a second starting condition. be. In the first specific game state and the second specific game state, a first variation pattern group (for example, special figure 1 variation pattern table, variation pattern table A) for selecting the variation pattern of the first variation display game, 2 Second variation pattern group for selecting variation patterns for the variation display game (
For example, the special figure 2 variation pattern table and variation pattern table C) are made different.

For example, the main variation display game becomes the second variation display game in the first specific game state and the first variation display game in the second specific game state, and so on. The main variation display game may be different depending on the state. However, in both the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the first variation pattern group and the second variation pattern group are made different from each other, and the type of variation pattern selected in the special figure variation display game is The type of specific game state, and by extension,
The variable winning device can be switched according to the frequency of the easy winning state (for example, the type of electric power support). Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect according to the type of the specific game state and, by extension, the frequency (degree) in which the variable winning device enters the easy winning state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the game control means is the first specific game state
In (for example, specific game state A or specific game state B), the variable winning device (for example, normal variable winning device 37) is easier to convert to the easy winning state than in the second specific game state (eg, specific game state C), As the variable display game, a first variable display game can be executed based on the establishment of the first starting condition, a second variable display game can be executed based on the establishment of the second starting condition, and a second variable display game can be executed based on the establishment of the second starting condition. In the specific game state, the first variation pattern group for selecting the variation pattern of the first variation display game is made the same as in the normal game state.

A second specific game state (for example, a specific game state C) that is more difficult to convert to an easy-to-win state than a first specific game state (for example, a specific game state A or a specific game state B) is converted into an easy-to-win state of the variable winning device. The frequency (degree) of conversion may be closer to the normal game state than the second specific game state. Therefore, in the second specific game state, if the first variation pattern group is the same as in the normal game state, the type of variation pattern selected in the first variation display game in the second specific game state is the normal game state. While reducing a sense of incongruity in performance in common with , two specific game states having different frequencies of conversion to an easy-to-win state can improve the amusement of the game. Also, the game control is simplified. In particular, in the second specific game state and the normal game state, the hitting method (
(right-handed or left-handed) are the same, and the main variation display game is common to the first variation display game, the first variation pattern group is the same in the second specific game state and the normal game state, and the first variation pattern group is the same. The advantage of standardizing the types of variation patterns in the variable display game is great (if not standardized, the sense of incongruity increases).

[Fourth Embodiment]
A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 107. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to third embodiments. In addition, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to third embodiments, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

The fourth embodiment relates to the mode (display mode, light emission mode, operation mode) of the production system device according to the state of the safety device or the safety device counter value (the number of difference balls + the initial value). The production-related device is a device capable of executing production, and includes, for example, the display device 41, a decoration device (such as a board decoration device 46 or a frame decoration device 18) consisting of a display device 41, a production LED, etc., and an operable movable accessory ( movable body, board effect device 44, frame effect device). In addition, the control executed by the game control device 100 is
It is the same as other embodiments from 1st Embodiment to 3rd Embodiment.

[Aspect of production system device according to state of safety device, etc.]
FIG. 99 is a table showing the modes of performance-related devices according to the state of the safety device. As shown in FIG. 99, depending on the state of the safety device or the value of the safety device counter (and thus the number of difference balls), the mode of the production system device changes.

As described in the first embodiment, the safety device counter value from 0 to 189999 (-1000
00 to 89999 ball difference), the state of the safety device becomes a non-operating state (normal state that is not an operation notice state, an operation warning state, or an operation state). Corresponding to the safety device counter value of 190000 to 194999 (90000 to 94999 difference ball number), the state of the safety device becomes an operation notice state to foretell the operation of the safety device. Safety device counter value of 195000 (95000
), the operation warning state for warning the operation of the safety device or the operation state (operating state) in which the safety device is in operation.

It should be noted that with a safety device counter value of 195,000, the safety device will be in an active warning state during a big or small win, and will be in an active state if it is neither a big win nor a small win. Therefore, if the safety device is activated before the big win or minor win occurs, the game stop state (game disabled state, game prohibited state) occurs immediately after, and the activation warning state does not occur.

On the other hand, an active warning condition can occur when the safety counter value reaches 195,000 during a jackpot or a minor win. For this reason, when the big win or the small win ends and the big win or the small win disappears, the safety device shifts from the operation warning state to the operating state (operating state).

In the non-activated state or activation notice state of the safety device counter value of 0 to 194999 (the number of difference balls of -100000 to 94999), the state of the gaming machine (game state) is during play or waiting for customers (waiting for customers state). Also, the safety device counter value of 195000 (9500
0), the state of the gaming machine is a small win or a big win in the safety device activation warning state, but the game is stopped in the safety device activation state (game disabled state, game prohibited state ). It should be noted that even when the strong error 2 occurs, the same game stop state can occur.

In the game stop state, special figure fluctuation display game, normal figure fluctuation display game, and
A round game (a game during a big win or a small win) etc. cannot be executed. To do this,
As in the first embodiment, when the game is stopped, the detection of the game ball by the winning opening switch is disabled and the winning opening (winning) is disabled ("Y" in A2201).
, the solenoid is stopped so that the variable winning device 37 and the like are closed (A1602 and A160
"Y" at 3), the shooting of the game ball from the ball shooting device is stopped (prohibited) and the shooting is stopped (A1
611 and A1612 are "Y"), the batch display device 50 is turned off (A1610 and A1612
result is "Y"). In the game stop state, not only the special figure variation display game and the normal figure variation display game cannot be continued, but also a new special figure variation display game and a new normal figure variation display game cannot be started. It should be noted that it is possible to have a configuration in which shooting is not stopped in the game stop state in which the safety device is activated (even in the game stop state caused by the strong error 2, shooting may not be stopped). In addition, in the game stop state, the payout command transmission process (A1307) is not stopped as in the first embodiment, and the payout of prize balls due to the winning that occurred before the game stop state is continued.

In the game stop state, a security signal is generated to be output as an external information signal to an external device such as a hall computer (A9322), and a test signal is generated to be output to the test firing test device as ON data of the gaming machine error state signal ( A9323). It should be noted that it is possible to have a configuration in which no test signal (gaming machine error state signal) is generated in a game stop state in which the safety device is activated (a test signal is not generated even in a game stop state caused by strong error 2). may be omitted).

While the safety device is not activated, the display device 41 basically does not display the safety device-related display related to the safety device. " characters), etc., to indicate that the model is equipped with a safety device. A player who sees the specific model display 541 can recognize that the gaming machine 10 has a safety device (complete function).

In the safety device actuation notice state, the display device 41 displays an actuation notice display 511 (for example, the characters "I will stop soon") as a safety device related display (or safety device actuation information display). In order to effectively display the actuation notice display 511, the display mode of the actuation notice display 511 may change according to the game state such as waiting for a customer or changing display (during execution of a special figure change display game). . In addition, at the start of the actuation notice state, since the effect control device 300 receives the actuation notice command corresponding to the actuation notice state as the safety device actuation-related command, the actuation notice display 511 is enabled on the display device 41. (Safety device system processing of B1330).

An operation notice display 511 notifies the player of the possibility of being unable to play in advance, urges the player to finish the game, and prevents the player from unintentionally receiving a disadvantage. In addition, the act warning display 511 can surprise the person who is committing fraud and prompt him to stop the fraud. The display mode of the operation notice display 511 is changed to the game state (for example, waiting for customers,
(during variable display), the advance notice display can be performed appropriately.

In the operation warning state of the safety device during a small hit or a big hit, the display device 41 displays an operation warning display 512 as a safety device-related display (for example, the characters "It will stop after the end of the hit").
display. At the start of the operation warning state, the effect control device 300 receives the operation warning command corresponding to the operation warning state as the safety device operation related command, so that the display device 41 can display the operation warning display 512. (Safety device system processing of B1330).

In the operation state of the safety device (not during the small hit or the big hit), that is, in the game stop state, the display device 41 displays an operating display 513 (for example, "stopping" characters) as a safety device related display.
display. In addition, at the start of the operating state, the effect control device 300 receives an operating command corresponding to the operating state as a safety device operation-related command, so the display device 41
In operation display 513 becomes possible (safety device system processing in B1330).

In addition, the effect control device 300 displays the operation notice display 511 for notifying the operation of the safety device, the operation warning display 512 for warning the operation of the safety device, and the operating display 513 for indicating that the safety device is operating. etc. (display means).

It should be noted that the display device 41 can display an error display even in a game stop state in which the safety device is activated. For example, since the payout is continued even in the game stop state, a payout error regarding the payout of the game ball (game medium) may occur.
A payout error can be notified by an error display. It should be noted that the game is stopped even when the strong error 2 occurs and the game is stopped (game disabled state, game prohibited state). In order to make the player recognize the occurrence of the error, the payout error may be notified by an error display, or the payout error may not be notified so as not to be confused with the strong error 2.

In the game stop state, unlike the non-operating state, the operation notice state, and the operation warning state, all the light emitting units (LEDs) of the collective display device 50 and the performance display device 152 are turned off (all off). In addition,
In the game stop state, all the light emitting units (LEDs) of the collective display device 50 and the performance display device 152 may be lit (all lighting). In the game stop state, the ball lending button 27 remains active, and when the player operates the game ball to borrow the game ball, the game ball may be paid out to the upper tray 21 from the payout device.

In the game stop state, the production control device 300 that has received the operating command either turns off all the production LEDs provided in the game machine 10 such as the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 (all lights out) or All lights up (all lights up). However, while an error is occurring, some or all of the production LEDs may be lit in red. In addition, in the game stop state, the effect control device 300 may stop the sound output from the speaker 19 to make it silent.

In addition, in the game stop state, the production control device 300 does not execute the hall/player setting mode process (B0011), and even if there is an operation to the operation unit, the production LED and liquid crystal (display device 41 etc.) The brightness and the volume of the speaker 19 may be made non-adjustable and set to the default brightness and volume. Note that, for example, the default brightness may be zero or a predetermined value (all off or all on), and the default volume may be zero (no sound). In addition, in the hall/player setting mode processing (adjustment processing), the operation unit (the cross key switch 450, the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b, the volume adjustment switch 335 on the back of the game machine, etc.) for the person in charge of the game hall and the player. ), various adjustments such as volume adjustment and brightness adjustment of the game machine 10 can be executed. In this way, even if there is an operation by the player or the like in the game stop state, since various adjustments such as volume adjustment and brightness adjustment are not executed, the player and the like can easily recognize that the game is in the stop state. Also,
If the default brightness and the default sound volume are low, power can be saved when the game is stopped.

In another configuration, in the game stop state, the effect control device 300 does not accept (ignores) the operation signal corresponding to the operation of the operation unit even if the hall/player setting mode process (B0011) is executed. or disabled), and even if there is an operation on the operation unit by the person in charge of the game arcade or the player, the default brightness and volume may be set. In the case of this configuration, the player can operate the first operation unit (cross key switch 450, volume adjustment button switches 451a, 451b).
) is not accepted (ignored or invalidated), while the second operation unit (volume control switch 335
) may be received. Then, when there is an operation on the first operation section by the player, the predetermined brightness and volume are set, and when there is an operation on the second operation section by a hall official, the second operation section is performed. The volume adjustment and brightness adjustment of the gaming machine 10 may be executed according to the operation of .
The second operation unit (volume control switch 335) is provided on the performance control device 300 on the back of the gaming machine, and can be operated by hall personnel but not by players.

The effect control device 300, when the game stop state starts during the operation of the movable accessory (movable member, electric accessory, movable body, board effect device 44, frame effect device) (when the safety device is activated), If the movable accessory is located at an operating position other than the initial position, the movable accessory may be moved from the operating position back to the initial position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the movable member from being maintained at the operating position in the game disabled state in which the game cannot be executed, thereby preventing unnecessary misunderstanding such as that the movable member is out of order. While the movable accessory (movable member) is returning from the operating position to the initial position, the performance LED of the movable accessory is in the lighted state (operating state) and is in the off state (initial state). may In addition, as described above, in the game stop state, the effect LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10 are all extinguished (all extinguished) or all lit (all lit).
After the movable accessory returns to the initial position, the performance LED of the movable accessory is turned off or turned on in accordance with the other LEDs.

Conversely, the production control device 300 can control the movable accessories (movable member, electric accessory, movable body, board production device 4
4. When the game stop state starts during the operation of the frame effect device) (when the safety device is activated), if the movable accessory is in an operating position other than the initial position, move the movable accessory to the operating position. may be maintained at the operating position without returning to the initial position. In this case, the motion position where the movable accessory is stopped and maintained is the motion position at the start of the game stop state, another motion position where the movable accessory has slightly moved from the start of the game stop state due to a time lag, etc., or , another appropriate operating position different from the operating position at the start of the game stop state. As described above, when the game is stopped, all the performance LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10 are turned off (all turned off) or turned on (all turned on), so that the movable accessory is positioned at the operating position. While it is still stopped, the performance LED of the movable accessory may be turned off or turned on in accordance with the other LEDs.

In this way, after the start of the game stop state (after the safety device is activated), if the movable accessory does not return to the initial position and stops at the predetermined operating position, the game machine 10 is in a normal state (game It is possible to emphasize to the player that the player is not in a state where they can play the game. For example, if the board production device 44 (upper production unit 40c, etc.) as a movable accessory is in an unnatural position such as the front side (front) of the display screen of the display device 41, and the game is stopped, the player feels uncomfortable. Remember, game machine 1
It becomes easy to recognize that 0 is not a normal state.

A board effect device 44 in which a movable accessory is provided on a game board 30 (including a center case 40)
, the initial position of the movable accessory is, for example, the front side (front) of the display device 41
and the operating position of the movable accessory is, for example, a position where the movable accessory overlaps the display device 41 on the front side of the display device 41 (the upper effect unit 40c in FIG. 103 (H3). position reference). In addition, the initial position in this case is a position (center case 4
A position where a part of the movable accessory is covered with 0). Also, the movable accessory is the glass frame 1
5 (or opening/closing frame), the initial position of the movable accessory is, for example, the storage space inside the glass frame 15 (or opening/closing frame). is a position where the movable accessory is difficult to see from the front side (a position where the movable accessory is retracted into the glass frame 15 and part of the movable accessory is covered by the glass frame 15). It is a position where the role object protrudes forward, upward, or obliquely from the initial position.

It should be noted that even if a strong error 2 occurs, the game stop state occurs in the same way as when the safety device is activated. If the object is located at an operating position other than the initial position, the effect control device 300 may move the movable accessory from the operating position to the initial position, or may maintain the movable accessory at the operating position without returning it to the initial position. may By returning the movable accessory to the initial position, it is possible to prevent unnecessary misunderstandings such as malfunction of the movable member. If the movable accessory is not returned to the initial position, it is unnatural, and the player can easily recognize that an error has occurred in the gaming machine 10. - 特許庁

As another example, in the game stop state, various game processing timers such as a special game processing timer, a character game processing timer, and a general game processing timer are stopped, but the collective display device 50 is not turned off. The display when the game is stopped may be continued. Further, if the collective display device 50 is performing variable display at the start of the game stop state, the collective display device 50 may be turned off after the variable display is completed. As a result, it is possible to prevent sudden termination of the variable display on the batch display device 50 . Also, in the game stop state, the performance display device 152 may continue the display.

It should be noted that when the gaming machine 10 is turned off (turned off) and then turned on (turned on) again, the safety device information initialization process initializes the safety device counter area, the safety device operation information area, and the like (
A1104-A1106), safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), safety device activation information (value 3), etc. are erased, so the display device 41 Safety device-related displays (activation notice display 511, activation warning display 512, during operation display 513, etc.) may be erased and not displayed. When the game machine 10 is powered off (turned off) while the safety device is in operation and then turned on (turned on) again with the RAM initialization switch 112 turned on, the safety device in-operation flag area is cleared to 0 (A1045). The game machine 10 returns from the game stop state to the state where the game can be played.

[Example 1 of screen transition]
FIGS. 100A and 100B are examples (example 1) of screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order regarding the fourth embodiment.

In (a), after the power is turned on, the gaming machine 10 is in a customer waiting state (customer waiting state), and the display device 41
becomes the customer waiting screen. Since the game has not started, the safety device counter value is the initial value (10
million). After that, a player seated on a chair in front of the game machine 10 rotates the operation handle 24, the ball shooting device shoots the game ball, and the game ball enters the starting prize opening 36, and so on. A variable display game is executed.

After that, (a) shows a situation in which the special figure variation display game has been executed twice after the power is turned on. The safety device counter value has decreased from the initial value (100,000) to 99,920. Since the total number of prize balls does not increase significantly until a big hit occurs, the number of difference balls (= number of safe balls - number of discharged balls) tends to decrease by the number of discharged balls, and the safety device counter value (difference number of balls + initial value) also tends to decrease. When the difference ball command indicating the safety device counter value or the difference ball number is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, the safety device counter value or the difference ball number (safety device counter value-initial value) is displayed. It may be displayed on the display screen of the device 41 .

Since the game is in the normal game state after the power is turned on, the mode display 679 displays "A mode" corresponding to the normal mode as the effect mode. The variation count display 677 indicates the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the power is turned on or after the end of the big hit. shown in In addition, in the case of a model that can generate a probability variation state, the variation number display 677 is to make it easier to understand that the number of times is approaching the ceiling, except for the number of times in the probability variation state. It may indicate the number of executions of the display game. In addition, the variable count display 677 may indicate the remaining number of games up to the ceiling (number of times of ceiling - number of times of execution).

The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed (during variation), and the second predetermined image 676 is that the special figure 2 variation display game is being stopped. The symbol "x" indicates that A fourth symbol variation may be performed as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) by blinking the symbol "○".

On the display screen, a left pattern 611a and a right pattern 611b are displayed as special decorative patterns (large patterns).
, and the middle pattern 611c can be variably displayed. Left design 611a, right design 611b
, and the middle pattern 611c are displayed in the left variable display area 610A, the right variable display area 610B, and the center variable display area 610C in the variable display area 610, respectively. In this embodiment, the left pattern 611a, the right pattern 611b, and the middle pattern 611c are variably displayed by vertical scrolling. Furthermore, the variable display of the decorative reduced pattern (small pattern) is executed in the variable display area 615 on the right side of the display screen.

Four pending displays 682a (first pending display) are displayed in the first pending display portion 630a (standby area) that displays the first starting memory (special figure 1 starting memory) before execution of the variable display game as the first pending display. be done. The pending display 682a has a display mode imitating playing cards. In addition, in the pending digestion area 640, the variable pending display 682b showing the variable pending related to the special figure 1 variable display game being executed (the starting memory that was the execution right of this special figure variable display game) was turned over. It is displayed in a display mode imitating playing cards. Note that the pedestal may indicate the reserved digestion region 640 . In addition, the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory) before the execution of the variable display game is the second hold display (
Nothing is displayed in the second suspension display portion 630b displayed as the second start memory display.

In the special figure 1 reservation number display part 650 and the special figure 2 reservation number display part 660 on the upper right of the display screen, the numbers "4" and special figure 2 indicating the special figure 1 reservation number (special figure 1 start memory number) respectively The number "0" indicating the number of reservations (special figure 2 start memory number) is displayed.

After (b), many big hits occur, and in (c), the safety device counter value is 189993.
(Difference ball number = 89993), and the notice start value 1900 at which the operation notice state of the safety device starts
It is less than 00 (number of difference balls = 90000), but is approaching the advance notice start value of 190000.

In (c), after hitting the jackpot or reaching the ceiling, the game is in a specific game state (time-saving state), and the mode display 679 displays "flower mode" corresponding to the time-saving mode as the production mode. The variation number display 677 indicates that the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the end of the big hit is 73, as in "73G". In addition, a right hitting instruction display 502 for instructing the player to hit right is displayed corresponding to the time saving mode.

In the special figure 1 reserved number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display unit 660, the number "0" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number and the number "1" indicating the special figure 2 reserved number are displayed respectively. . First predetermined image 67
5 is a symbol "x" indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is stopped, and the second predetermined image 676 is a symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed. It's becoming

One pending display 683a (second pending display) is displayed in the second pending display portion 630b that displays the second starting memory as the second pending display. Suspension display 683a has a display mode imitating a flower. In addition, in the pending digestion area 640, the variable pending display 683b indicating the variable pending related to the special figure 2 variable display game being executed (starting memory that was the right to execute this special figure variable display game) It is displayed in a simulated display mode. It should be noted that the pedestal has a reserved digestion area 640
can be shown. Here, nothing is displayed in the first suspension display portion 630a that displays the first starting memory before execution of the variable display game as the first suspension display.

Next, in (d), by winning the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning opening) by hitting to the right, the special figure 1 reserved number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display unit 660, respectively, special figure 1
A number "0" indicating the number of reservations and a number "4" indicating the number of special figures 2 reservations are displayed. Four pending displays 683a (second pending displays) are displayed in the second pending display portion 630b.

In (d), some prize balls are obtained by winning the normal variable prize winning device 37, and the safety device counter value becomes larger than the notice start value 190000 at which the operation notice state starts, and reaches 1900.
09 (safety device counter value≧190000). Then, as a safety-device-related display, an activation notice display 511 ("Stopping soon") is displayed to foretell the activation of the safety device. Since the operation notice display 511 can be expressed in a small (short) display area,
Instead of displaying all of them at once, scrolling display across the screen may be used. In this activation notice state, the activation of the safety device may be notified not only by the activation notice display 511, but also by the sound from the speaker or the lighting of the performance LED in a predetermined mode. .

An operation notice display 511 gives an advance notice of the operation of the safety device, informs the player in advance that there is a possibility of the game being stopped, urges the player to end the game, and prevents the player from unintentionally You can prevent being disadvantaged. In addition, the activation of the safety device can be announced to surprise the person who is committing fraud and encourage him/her to stop the fraud.

The activation notice display 511 is displayed in a small size so as not to overlap other displays or image objects. This makes it easier to see other displays and image objects. Here, other displays and image objects are decorated with special patterns (large patterns in the variable display area 610, variable display area 615).
), first predetermined image 675, second predetermined image 676, pending displays 682a, 682b,
683a, 683b, reservation number display (Special figure 1 reservation number display unit 650 and special figure 2 reservation number display unit 66
0), a mode display 679, a variation number display 677, a right-handed instruction display 502, characters (not shown), and the like.

It should be noted that even if the operation notice display 511 is displayed small so as not to interfere with other displays, it may be displayed by shaking or moved by scrolling across the display screen so as to attract attention to some extent. Further, the actuation notice display 511 may be displayed in the vicinity of (eg, to the left of) the right-handed instruction display 502 facing (adjacent to) the right-handed instruction display 502 so as to attract attention to some extent. When the activation notice display 511 is displayed in a large size, it may be overlapped with other displays or other image objects. to display.

After that, in (e), the player stops operating the operating handle 24 to take a rest, etc., and the shooting of the game ball is finished. Then, the digestion of the second starting memory progresses, the reservation display 683a of the second reservation display unit 630b disappears, and the special figure 2 reservation number of the special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660 becomes "0". Only the change pending display 683b is displayed.

The safety device counter value is 19 greater than the warning start value 190000 at which the activation warning state starts.
0055, and the display of the operation notice display 511 ("Stopping soon") continues as the safety device-related display. The variation count display 677 displays "77G" as the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the end of the big hit.

Subsequently, in (F), the special figure 2 variable display game of (E) is finished, and the decoration stop pattern is displayed as "3, 7, 8" in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615. The pending change display 683b disappears, and the second predetermined image 676 becomes "x". Operation notice display 511
does not overlap with the decoration special pattern (here, the decoration stop pattern). Safety device counter value is 190
055 remains.

Subsequently, in (g), the gaming machine 10 is in a customer waiting state (customer waiting state), and the display device 41 becomes a customer waiting screen. While waiting for the customer, the safety counter value is maintained at 190055. As described above, the display mode of the operation advance notice display 511 ("I'm going to stop soon") may change according to the game state, and the display mode of the operation notice display 511 can be changed during waiting for a customer, during the variable display (
During the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game) may be larger than. As a result, the operation notice display 511
can be displayed appropriately and effectively. In an activation notice state in which it is expected that the safety device will be activated immediately and the game will be stopped, the operation notice display 511 is displayed in a large and conspicuous manner as shown in (g) while the customer is waiting, thereby attracting new players. (Customers) can be prevented from using the gaming machine 10.例文帳に追加In order to make the operation notice display 511 more conspicuous, it may be operated by shaking or moving while waiting for customers. Also, the activation notice display 511 may be displayed by scrolling across the screen so as to stand out.

Details of the customer waiting screen will be described later with reference to FIG. By displaying the operation notice display 511, the large operation notice display 511 is prevented from being hidden by other displays or other image objects on the customer waiting screen and becoming difficult to see.

After that, in (h), the player has just finished the rest and restarted the game. By winning a prize to the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37, two second start memories (special figure 2 start memories) are generated, and a change pending display 683b and a pending display 683a are displayed. The special figure 2 reservation number of the special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660 becomes "1". Then, the special figure 2 variable display game starts in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the second predetermined image 676 is "O". The change number display 677 is displayed as "78G". The safety device counter value starts changing to 190
It is now 057. After the end of the customer waiting state, the operation notice display 511 ("It will be closed soon") returns to the same display mode as during the variable display before the start of the customer waiting state, and is displayed in a smaller size.

After (h), many big hits occur without going through the normal mode due to continuous chan etc.
In (vii), the safety device counter value is 194500 (the number of difference balls = 94500), which is less than the counter reference value 195000 at which the safety device can start operating, but the counter reference value 19
Approaching 5000.

In addition, when the difference ball command indicating the safety device counter value or the difference ball number is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, the effect control device 300 determines that the safety device counter value is greater than the notice start value 190000. It can be recognized that a predetermined value of 194,500, which is slightly smaller than the counter reference value of 195,000, is reached. If the safety device counter value is this predetermined value of 194
In the case of 500, the effect control device 300 may notify by blinking the actuation notice display 511 that the actuation start of the safety device is near.

In (K), the variable pending display 683b and four pending display 683a are displayed, and the special figure 2 pending number of the special figure 2 pending number display unit 660 becomes "4". The change number display 677 is displayed as "115G". Here, in order to notify that the second starting memory is wasted due to the game stop due to the operation of the safety device, the effect control device 300 blinks part or all of the variable suspension display 683b and the four suspension display 683a. you can

In addition, after (vi), the safety device counter value (predetermined value 9450
0 or more), the effect control device 300 changes the display mode (color or shape) of the pending displays 682a, 683a, etc. so as not to make the player expect uselessly in a situation where the game is about to stop due to the activation of the safety device. It is possible to prohibit and not execute the pending change notice to be changed according to the degree of expectation of the big win. On the other hand, even after (vi), it is not necessary to prohibit the change in the display mode of the pending display during fluctuation 682b, 683b because the fluctuation display game currently being executed suggests the degree of expectation that the result of the small hit or the big hit will be the result. . In addition, with a safety device counter value of a predetermined value of 194500 or more, the effect control device 300 may prohibit pre-reading effects other than the pending change notice (pre-reading notice effects such as continuous notice effects and pre-reading zone effects), or Only part of the look-ahead effect (for example, pending change notice) may be prohibited. If only the pending change notice is prohibited as part of the look-ahead effect, the effect can be ensured while the player does not directly expect the pending displays 682a and 683a themselves. It should be noted that, in the operation notice state after (d), a configuration is also possible in which the pending change notice and the look-ahead effect are prohibited and not executed.

Also, after the safety device counter value once reaches a predetermined value of 194500 (the number of difference balls is a predetermined value of 9
After reaching 4500), all or part of the look-ahead effect may be prohibited and not executed unless the power is turned on again after the power has been turned off. Alternatively, once the safety device counter value reaches the predetermined value of 194500, the predetermined value of 194500 (or another smaller value of 1940
00), all or part of the look-ahead effect may be re-executed without prohibition.

In addition, the game control device 100, regardless of the safety device counter value (number of difference balls), before the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory is executed, the result of the special figure variation display game can be determined in advance. Drawing reservation information determination processing (preliminary determination processing) is executed, and the determination result can be transmitted to the effect control device 300 including in the prefetching stop symbol command and the prefetching variation pattern command. And, production control device 3 that receives the look-ahead stop symbol command and the look-ahead variation pattern command
Unlike the above, 00 may execute a look-ahead effect (a look-ahead notice effect) regardless of the safety device counter value (number of difference balls). As a result, even if the safety device counter value (number of difference balls) reaches a predetermined value of 194500 (predetermined value of difference number of 94500) close to the occurrence of a game impossible state,
A look-ahead effect can be executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the activation notice display 511 displayed from (d) to (ke) indicates that when the gaming machine 10 is powered off (turned off) and turned on (turned on) again before the safety device is activated, the safety device information is displayed. The safety device activation information area is initialized by the initialization processing, and the safety device activation notice information (value 1
) is deleted, so it is no longer displayed.

After that, in (ko), the safety device counter value is the counter reference value 195000 (the number of difference balls = the difference ball reference value 95000), but since it is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the safety device is in the operating state (operating state ), and the game machine 10 immediately enters a game stop state. In addition, even during the special figure fluctuation display game (including during stop display) that results in a big hit or a small hit,
When the counter reference value reaches 195000 (difference ball reference value 95000), the safety device is activated and the gaming machine 10 is in a game stop state (conversely, unlike the present embodiment, the result of the big hit or the result of the small hit is It is also possible to configure the safety device not to be activated during the special figure fluctuation display game)
. Since the game has stopped (game disabled state, game prohibited state), an operating display 513 (“pause”) is displayed as a safety device-related display. The operating display 513 is the operating notice display 5
11, it is larger and more conspicuous, and strongly suggests that the safety device is in operation (game is stopped) so that the player does not use the gaming machine 10. The active indication 513 (“Stopping”) may be flashed, wiggled, or moved to make it stand out, such as by an animated display.

The active display 513 notifies that a game (particularly a new game) is in a stopped state, thereby preventing a player (customer) from using the gaming machine 10 and preventing a person who is cheating. You can stop cheating if you do. It should be noted that when displaying the display 513 during operation (character image of "stopped"), predetermined images different from the display during operation 513 (first predetermined image 675, second predetermined image 676, pending displays 682a, 682b, 683a) , 683b, pending number display, mode display 679, variation number display 677, right-handed instruction display 502, decorative special symbols, effect images such as characters) are erased and hidden. As a result, the operating display 51
3 can be easily recognized by players, hall personnel, and the like. In contrast, the operation notice display 511
(“I will stop soon”) is a predetermined image (first predetermined image 675, second predetermined image 676).
, pending display 682a, 682b, 683a, 683b, pending number display, mode display 679,
Variation count display 677, right-handed instruction display 502, decorative special symbols, effect images such as characters) may be displayed as they are, and operation warning display 512 ("Stops after hitting ends" in Fig. 101 described later). may be displayed while displaying images such as the number of rounds and the round effect (video).

In addition, when the game is stopped, if the special figure variation display game is being executed (during variation display) in the variation display area 610 and the variation display area 615, whether the special figure variation display game is forcibly stopped. Alternatively, the special figure variation display game being executed in the layer on the back side (behind the background, the backmost side) may be continued in a form that cannot be visually recognized.

Next, in (S), immediately after (J), the display device 41 displays a payout error display for reporting a payout error regarding the payout of game balls. In addition, it is assumed that the payout of prize balls due to the winning that occurred before the game stopped state continues during or after the game stopped state, and a payout error related to this payout occurs. As payout errors, there are a shot ball running out error corresponding to the shortage of game balls before payout and an overflow error corresponding to the lower tray 23 becoming full. As mentioned above, these payout errors are included in weak errors.

In (S), as a payout error display, a ball out error display 520 (for example, the characters "ball out error") that informs a shot ball out error, and an overflow error display 522 that informs an overflow error (for example, "pull out the ball Please” is displayed. As each payout error is cleared, each corresponding payout error indication may be cleared. In this way, even when the safety device is activated and the game is stopped, a payout error can be notified, so that the player, hall personnel, etc. are not disadvantaged or inconvenienced. Note that the game control device 100,
The production control device 300, the display device 41, etc. cooperate to constitute a reporting means capable of reporting an error.

In addition, even if an error or fraud other than a payout error (frame opening error, magnet fraud, etc.) occurs when the game is stopped or afterward, it will cause disadvantages or inconveniences to players and hall personnel. An error display may be provided to inform the user of this error or illegality.
Also, even if an error (especially a payout error) or fraud occurs, if the safety device counter value is the counter reference value of 195000, the safety device can be activated and the game stop state can occur.

In this embodiment, the payout error indications such as the out-of-ball error indication 520 and the overflow error indication 522 are displayed on the display device 41 together with the operating indication 513 (“stopped”) so as not to overlap. The in-operation display 513 may be conspicuously displayed in a layer (frontmost layer) on the front side of the payout error display so as to be superimposed on the payout error display, or conversely, the payout error display may be conspicuously displayed in the in-operation display 513. It may be displayed on a layer on the front side (foremost layer) and overlapped with the display 513 during operation. Also, until the payout error is resolved, only the payout error display may be displayed and the operating display 513 may not be displayed.

It should be noted that the error display such as dispensing error, even in the operation notice state, the operation notice display 5
11 ("Stopping soon") can be displayed on the display device 41 along with the operating warning state (
Also in Figure 101), the operation warning display 512 ("It will be stopped after winning")
) can be displayed on the display device 41 . The error display is conspicuously
1 and the activation warning display 512 may be displayed in a layer on the front side and superimposed thereon.

In the game stop state, each error (especially each payout error), in addition to the error display,
The notification may be made by outputting a sound from the speaker 19, or by causing the LEDs for presentation of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46 to emit light in a specific light emission mode. For example, in this specific light emission mode, some or all of the performance LEDs emit red light, and the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 (L of the frame)
ED) may emit light, only the LED of the board decoration device 46 (the LED of the game board 30) may emit light, or both the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 may emit light.

For example, in response to a shot ball running out error and an overflow error, the error display (ball running out error display 520 and overflow error display 522) is output from the speaker 19 along with a sound indicating the content of the error ("Ball out", "Ball out", "Ball out"). please”).

Each error (especially each payout error) is the same error in both the game stop state and the state other than the game stop state (playing or waiting for customers, non-operating state, operation notice state, operation warning state) It may be notified in the same notification mode (notification method) so that it can be recognized, or so that the game stop state and the state other than the game stop state can be distinguished and recognized, or it is suitable for each state. You may alert|report by a different alerting|reporting aspect (reporting method). In addition, unlike the above, an error such as a payout error is not displayed on the display device 41.
A configuration is also possible in which the notification is made only by the sound from the speaker 19 and/or the light emission of the performance LED.

In the case of notifying in different notification modes, for example, when the game is stopped, the shot ball running out error is notified by the ball running out error display 520 of the display device 41 and the voice output of the speaker 19, and in a state other than the game stopping state, The error may be notified by the out-of-ball error display 520 and the light emission of the performance LED. In addition, for example, in consideration of the need to urgently deal with an overflow error, the overflow error display 52 is displayed in common between the game stop state and the state other than the game stop state.
2 and voice output, the volume of the voice output and the pitch of the sound may differ between these two states. Further, when the notification is given in a different notification mode, the LED of the frame decoration device 18 may emit light in the game stopped state, and the LED of the board decoration device 46 may emit light in the state other than the game stopped state.

The screen transition has been described above, but the safety device counter value of 190000 (90000
After reaching the safety device activation notice state and the safety device counter value is decreasing (when the difference ball number is decreasing), the activation notice display 511 ("Soon You can delete the display of "I'm quitting") and hide it. For example, if the safety device counter value is 1900
After reaching 00, when it decreases to 189000, the operation notice display 511 may be hidden.

For example, in this case, if the difference ball command indicating the safety device counter value or the number of difference balls is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, the effect control device 300 is 18900
A safety device counter value of 0 is determined and the activation warning display 511 is hidden. Alternatively, in this case, a new safety device activation-related command corresponding to the non-actuated state is provided, 189000
The safety device counter value is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 may hide the operation notice display 511. The safety device activation commands sent in the above-mentioned safety device related processing include an activation notice command corresponding to the activation notice state, an activation warning command corresponding to the activation warning state, and an operating command corresponding to the activation state. However, the safety device operation related command (non-operating command) corresponding to the non-operating state is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in the safety device related processing.

[Example 2 of screen transition]
FIG. 101 is another example (example 2) of the screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order regarding the fourth embodiment. In FIGS. 100A and 100B, after (h), the safety device counter value reaches the counter reference value 195000 at (co) without a small win or a big win, and the safety device is immediately activated and the game is stopped. became. However, in Example 2, after (h), a small win or a big win occurs, the safety device counter value reaches the counter reference value 195000 during the small win or the big win, and an operation warning state is entered, ending the small win state or the big win state. Later (after the end of the operation warning state), the game is stopped.

In (Ke 1), after (K), the special figure fluctuation display game (here special figure 1 fluctuation display game)
is the small winning result or the big winning result, and the small winning symbol or the big winning symbol is displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615 as the decoration stop symbol. Here, an example in which the big hit symbol "3, 3, 3" is displayed is shown. The safety device counter value is 194278, which is greater than the advance notice start value 190000 at which the operation advance notice state starts, and an operation advance notice display 511 ("Stopping soon") is displayed as a safety device-related display. The activation notice display 511 is displayed in a small size so as not to overlap with other displays or other image objects, as in (d) and (f) of FIG. 100A.

The pending change display 682b disappears, and the first predetermined image 675 and the second predetermined image 676 are "x". Mode display 679 corresponds to normal mode as production mode "A mode"
is displayed. The change number display 677 is displayed as "170G". "3" and "0" are displayed in the special figure 1 reservation number display part 650 and the special figure 2 reservation number display part 660, respectively. Three pending displays 682a are displayed in the first pending display portion 630a, and nothing is displayed in the second pending display portion 630b.

Next, in (K2), a small win or big win round game (a game during a big win or a small win) is executed in the first round. In the case of a small winning round game, a V winning occurs here, and a big winning state due to the V winning starts from the next second round. On the display screen, a round effect is being executed as a moving image or the like. Also, a right-handed hitting instruction display 502 is displayed to instruct right-handed hitting in response to the opening of the big winning hole. Since the big prize opening is open, a large number of prize balls (the number of winning balls and the number of safe balls) can be obtained by winning the prize in the big prize opening. Then, the safety device counter value increases from (1) to 194318, and the display of the activation notice display 511 ("Stopping soon") continues as the safety device-related display.
The activation notice display 511 may or may not overlap the round effect so as not to be an obstacle.

In addition, in (K2), the display mode of the operation notice display 511 is the progress or production of the game from the normal game (normal game state, normal mode) of (K1) to the round game (special game state, round effect) may vary with the progress of (1). For example, the activation notice display 511 may be displayed smaller than (1), displayed in an inconspicuous color, or hidden (not displayed in the display mode of the activation notice display 511) so as not to interfere with the round effect. may include). As a result, the operation notice display 51 can be displayed appropriately in correspondence with the progress of the game or the progress of the effect.
1 can be displayed. In particular, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 can be changed according to the progress of the game or the progress of the performance so as not to interfere with the performance on the display device 41, thereby improving the interest of the game.

After that, in (K3), the round effect is executed in the third round. here,
The safety device counter value has reached the counter reference value of 195000, but since the jackpot is in progress, the safety device has not yet been activated, and the activation warning display 512 ("Stops after winning") is displayed on the display device. 41. The activation warning display 512 is larger in size than the activation notice display 511 and more conspicuous, and suggests the possibility of activation of the safety device (occurrence of the game stop state) more strongly than the activation notice state. The actuation warning indicator 512 may or may not overlap the round presentation so as to be unobtrusive.

After that, in (K4), the safety device counter value remains at the counter reference value of 195000, but the big hit ending effect is executed, and the operation warning display 512 is displayed in the same manner as in (K3). The actuation warning display 512 may or may not overlap the ending effect so as not to get in the way. In addition, the ending effect in the activation warning state is different from the ending effect in states other than the activation warning state (unactivated state, activation notice state), because it is just before the activation of the safety device, the activation of the safety device (stop) It may be a dedicated ending production that suggests. In addition, regarding (K4), the same applies to the case where the small winning ending effect is executed in the operation warning state.

In addition, in (K4), the display mode of the operation warning display 512 changes according to the progress of the game or the progress of the production from the round game (round effect) to the ending (ending effect) in (K3), (Q3) may be different. For example, the activation warning display 512 may be displayed in a smaller size than (3), displayed in an inconspicuous color, or hidden (not displayed in the display mode of the activation warning display 512) so as not to interfere with the ending effect. may include). As a result, the operation warning display 512 can be appropriately displayed in correspondence with the progress of the game or the progress of the performance. In particular, the display mode of the operation warning display 512 can be changed according to the progress of the game or the progress of the performance so as not to interfere with the performance on the display device 41, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In this way, the operation warning display 512 informs the player in advance that the game will be stopped after the end of the small win or the big win, and warns the player of the disadvantage such as the stopping of consecutive wins. can be done. In addition, the operation warning display 512 can surprise a person who is committing fraud and encourage him/her to stop the fraud.

Subsequently, in (1), the ending time has passed and the ending of the jackpot ends,
That is, the big win state ends, the safety device is activated, and the game is stopped (the same applies to the ending of the small win). In the game stop state, the effect control device 300 displays an operating indication 513 (“pausing”) on the display screen in response to receiving the operating command. The operating display 513 is larger in size than the operating notice display 511 and the operating warning display 512 and stands out, and indicates that the safety device is operating (game is stopped) so that the player does not use the gaming machine 10. strongly suggest.

In (C1), a two-dimensional code 524 such as a QR code (registered trademark) is displayed on the display screen. Furthermore, a reading recommendation display 525 (reading promotion display) that recommends (promotes) the player to read the two-dimensional code 524 with a camera-equipped information terminal such as a smartphone or a mobile phone is a character display (for example, "Continue is a smartphone "Enjoy with" and "Read with camera") are also displayed on the display screen. By reading and inputting the two-dimensional code 524 with the camera of an information terminal equipped with a camera, this information terminal can access a server outside the game hall and store the game results in the server. Linked services (linked services) such as so-called smartphone linked services (mobile linked services) can be used.

In addition, when the game is stopped due to the operation (stop) of the safety device, the effect control device 300 responds to the reception of the operating command or the special ending effect (K4), The performance points may be increased (added) more than the amount of increase obtained in normal performance (B0012). As a result, the player can relieve the discomfort caused by the game stoppage. Since the information of the large effect point is encoded and embedded in the two-dimensional code 524, it is stored in an external server. Note that the information of the effect point indirectly becomes stop information indicating the stop, but the stop information itself may be encoded and incorporated into the two-dimensional code 524 . A player can always access an external server using an information terminal or the like and display information on performance points and stop information on the information terminal. As a result, the player can show the information of the large performance points and the stop information to others, and can boast about it, thereby obtaining a sense of satisfaction.

A one-dimensional code such as a bar code may be used instead of the two-dimensional code 524 .
Also, the two-dimensional code 524 may be displayed in the same way in (ko) of FIG. 100B.

Next, in (sa), similarly to (sa) in FIG. 100B, as error displays, the out-of-ball error display 520 and the overflow error display 522 are performed. Note that the two-dimensional code 524 may be erased from the display screen after being displayed for a predetermined time (for example, two minutes).

The order of (1) and (3) may be reversed so that the two-dimensional code 524 may be displayed on the display screen after displaying the error. Alternatively, in (1), an error display and a two-dimensional code 524
may be displayed on the display screen. In this case, the error display may be conspicuously displayed on the front side layer (foremost layer) than the operating display 513 and the two-dimensional code 524 so as to overlap the operating display 513 and the two-dimensional code 524 . When the error display is superimposed on the two-dimensional code 524 in a layer (foremost layer) on the front side of the two-dimensional code 524, dealing with the error is more important than reading the two-dimensional code 524. This can be notified by making the two-dimensional code 524 unreadable. In addition, the effect control device 300 may stop or interrupt the update (update of the timer value) of the display timer that measures the predetermined time (for example, 2 minutes) for displaying the two-dimensional code 524 during the error display. If the update of the display timer is interrupted, when the error is eliminated, the display timer restarts the measurement of the predetermined time by restarting the update from the timer value at the time of interruption, or The predetermined time may be measured again by starting updating the timer value from the initial value.

As described above, with regard to FIG. 101, the activation notice display 511 (“I will stop soon”), the activation warning display 512 (“I will stop after winning”), and the operating display 513 (“Stopping”) are displayed in this order. In addition, since the sentence itself to be displayed in characters is also different, the display mode is different. It should be noted that the display mode may include the sentence itself to be displayed in characters. However, as safety device-related displays (specific images, specific text images), an operation warning display 511 (first display mode of a specific image), an operation warning display 512 (third display mode of a specific image), and an operating display 513 (specific The second display mode of the image) may have a commonality even if the display modes are totally different. for example,
The operation notice display 511, the operation warning display 512, and the operation display 513 have a common character string "stop", are displayed in the same font (typeface), and have at least a partial display mode in common (partial display As a form, the same color and character size may be used). As a result, the various safety device-related displays have commonalities and are aligned to some extent, making it easier to give the impression that they are commonly related to safety devices (complete function, stopping function), It is possible to prevent misidentification with other types of displays other than device-related displays. Operation notice display 5
11, an operation warning display 512, and an operation display 513 are error displays (out-of-ball error display 520).
or overflow error display 522). you can

[Example of operation notice display that differs depending on game status]
FIG. 102 shows an operation notice display 511a- that differs according to the game state in relation to the fourth embodiment.
511d is an example. In FIGS. 100A and 100B, (g) as a game state
The display mode of the operation notice display 511 ("Stopping soon") is different between when waiting for a customer and during the variable display of (o), (h), and the like. However, in FIG. 102, between (A) normal game state, (B) time saving state, (C) variable probability state, and (D) special game state, operation notice display 511a- The display mode is different as shown in 511d. In FIGS. 102A to 102D, the safety device counter value is a value (for example, 190055) that is larger than the notice start value 190000 at which the actuation notice state starts and smaller than the counter reference value 195000. FIG.

FIG. 102(A) shows the display screen of the display device 41 in the normal game state (normal mode).
100A except for the display content "170G" in FIG. 100A. In the normal game state, the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls and the number of safe balls) is not so large, so the possibility of the game being stopped due to the activation of the safety device is low. For this reason, the operation notice display 511 in the normal game state
A is displayed small, for example, at the left end of the display screen so as not to interfere with other displays such as variable display. When the left-handed instruction display 503 instructing the player to hit left-handed is displayed, the activation notice display 511a is displayed to increase the opportunity for the player to pay attention to the left-handed instruction display 503.
may be displayed facing (adjacent to) the left-handed hitting instruction display 503 in the vicinity of (such as below).

FIG. 102(B) shows the display screen of the display device 41 in the time-saving state (time-saving mode), which is the same as (h) of FIG. 100B. In the time-saving state, it is easier to obtain prize balls than in the normal game state due to the general electric support, and there is a high possibility that the number of safe balls will increase significantly as a big hit than in the normal game state, and the safety device can be activated. highly sexual. Therefore, the operation notice display 511b in the time saving state is displayed so as to be larger and conspicuous than the operation notice display 511a in the normal game state, and strongly informs the possibility of the safety device being operated.

FIG. 102 (C) shows the display screen of the display device 41 in the variable probability state (variable probability mode) when the variable probability state (variable probability mode) exists, but the operation notice display 511c, the mode display 679, and the number of fluctuations Except for display 677, it is the same as (h) of FIG. 100B. In the probability variable state, there is a higher possibility that the number of safe balls will increase significantly as a result of a big hit than in the time-saving state, and that the safety device will be activated. For this reason, the variable probability state actuation notice display 511c is displayed more prominently than the time saving state actuation notice display 511b, and strongly informs the possibility that the safety device will operate.

FIG. 102(D) shows the display screen of the display device 41 in the special game state (during the big win or during the small win), and the round effect is being executed on the display screen in the same manner as in FIG. 101(K2). . In the special game state, the number of safe balls is greatly increased by the opening of the big winning hole, so the possibility of the safety device being activated is higher than in the variable probability state. For this reason, the operation notice display 5 of the special game state
11d is displayed so as to be larger and more conspicuous than the activation notice display 511c of the variable probability state, and strongly informs the possibility of activation of the safety device. The operation notice display 511d is placed in the vicinity of the right-handed instruction display 502 (e.g., to the left) in order to increase the opportunity for the player to pay attention to the right-handed instruction display 511d (
adjacent).

As described above, in FIG. 102, the sizes of the operation notice displays 511a to 511d are increased in order of the normal game state, the time saving state, the variable probability state, and the special game state, making them more conspicuous. In addition,
As another example, to stand out in the order of normal game state, time saving state, variable probability state, special game state,
The colors and fonts of the activation notice displays 511a-511d may differ according to these game states. In this manner, the activation notice displays 511a to 511d can effectively announce the activation of the safety device.

[Example of operation notice display before and after reach]
FIG. 103 shows the operation notice display 511 before and after the reach during the variable display in relation to the fourth embodiment.
It is a figure which illustrates.

(H1) is the same as (H) in FIG. 100B, but shows before the decorative special symbol reaches the reach state, and the operation notice display 511 is displayed from the lower center to the lower left end of the display screen.

Next, in (H2), the reach state starts, and the left symbol 611 is displayed in the left fluctuation display area 610A.
A temporarily stops (for example, shaking fluctuation), and the right pattern 611b temporarily stops (for example, shaking fluctuation) in the right fluctuation display area 610B. As the ready-to-win effect, the characters “reach” may be displayed on the display screen, or the voice “reach” may be generated from the speaker 19 . The operation notice display 511 is set so as not to interfere with the temporarily stopped left pattern 611a and right pattern 611b, or so as not to interfere with the ready-to-win effect that will be displayed large in the center of the display screen in the future. h 1)
For example, it moves to the left end of the display screen and is displayed in vertical writing smaller than before reach. It should be noted that, at this stage, a movie (moving image) is not displayed and the upper effect unit 40c is not in the SP reach state where the upper effect unit 40c moves downward.
1 may be in the same display mode as (h).

Next, in (h3), the state of N reach of (h2) develops into SP reach. here,
The left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b are reduced and moved to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively. As an SP reach effect, a large movie (moving image) is displayed in the center of the display screen. Also, as the SP reach effect, the upper effect unit 40c as a movable accessory moves downward from the initial position and is arranged at the operation position in front of the display screen. Here, the operation notice display 511 is
In order not to interfere with the movie in the center of the display screen and the upper effect unit 40c at the operating position, it is already displayed at the stage of (H2) in a different manner from before the reach of (H1), for example, at the left end of the display screen. Moved and displayed in vertical writing smaller than before reach. In (H2), the operation advance notice display 511 may be hidden (non-display may be included in the display mode of the operation advance notice display 511).

It should be noted that the activation notice display 511 may be displayed in a manner different from that before the reach for the first time at the stage of the SP reach of (h3). In addition, the operation notice display 511 matches the SP reach production,
The display mode may change before the SP reach of (H2). For example, the activation notice display 511 may be displayed in a smaller size than in (H2) or displayed in an inconspicuous color so as not to interfere with the SP reach effect. In addition, when the SP reach effect appears in (K3), the operation notice display 5
11 may be hidden because it interferes with the SP ready-to-win effect (non-display may be included in the display mode of the operation notice display 511).

As described above, as shown in FIG. 103, the display mode of the activation notice display 511 may change and differ according to the progress of the game (here, the variable display game) or the progress of the effect. As a result, the operation notice display 511 can be appropriately displayed in correspondence with the progress of the game or the progress of the performance. In particular, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 can be changed according to the progress of the game so as not to interfere with the performance on the display device 41, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Example of operation notice display while waiting for customers]
FIG. 104 is a screen transition diagram illustrating an operation notice display 511 during customer waiting in relation to the fourth embodiment. The production control device 300 displays the customer waiting screen of the display device 41 during customer waiting by the customer waiting demonstration editing process (B0015), the hall/player setting mode process (B0011), etc.
(G1) Stop screen→(G2) Player setting screen→(G3) Customer waiting demo movie screen→(G4) Model name display screen→(G5) Attention display screen→(G1) Stop The screen may be cyclically switched in the order of time screen→(g2) player setting screen→(g3) customer waiting demo movie screen. As the customer waiting screen, there may be a game explanation screen for explaining the contents of the game and effects, and a maker display screen for displaying the logo of the maker of the gaming machine 10 .

(G 1) screen at the time of stop is the stage after the stop display time (set in the special game processing timer) in which the decoration stop pattern (F) is displayed as "3, 7, 8". Here, a customer waiting demonstration flag is set (A3212), a customer waiting demonstration command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A3213, B1307), and the display device 41 becomes a customer waiting screen, but here (
From F), the screen at the time of stop appears to be unchanged. The appearance may be changed by deleting the mode display 679 and the change count display 677 from (f). On the screen at the time of stop, the decorative stop pattern is displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the operation notice display 511 is displayed in a small size so as not to interfere with the decorative stop pattern.

Next, the player setting screen (G2) is displayed after the stop screen is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 20 seconds). On the player setting screen, a volume adjustment image 527 that is a meter image for volume adjustment and a brightness adjustment image 528 (light amount adjustment image) that is a meter image for brightness adjustment (light amount adjustment) are displayed. By the hall/player setting mode processing (B0011), the volume of the speaker 19 is adjusted according to the operation of the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b, the meter in the volume adjustment image 527 rises or falls, and the cross key switch 450 The brightness of the performance LED is adjusted according to the operation of , and the meter in the brightness adjustment image 528 rises or falls.

In the player setting screen of (G 2), the volume adjustment image 527 and the brightness adjustment image 528 are in the front side layer (foremost layer) than the decoration stop symbol and the operation notice display 511, and the variable display area 6
10 and/or the decoration stop pattern of the variable display area 615 or the operation notice display 511 may be superimposed and displayed.

Next, on the customer waiting demo movie screen of (g3), a customer waiting demo movie 535 is displayed in which shooting stars are flowing. Here, other displays other than the customer waiting demo movie 535 (decorative stop pattern, special figure 1 reserved number display part 650, special figure 2 reserved number display part 660, first predetermined image 675
, second predetermined image 676, mode display 679, change count display 677, etc.) are erased and not displayed. As a result, the operation notice display 511 does not interfere with displays other than the customer waiting demo movie 535, so that it is displayed so as to be enlarged more than the stop screen of (G1) and the player setting screen of (G2). Aspects are changed.

Next, on the model name display screen of (g4), the model name of the gaming machine 10 (for example, the model (official name) “P Tiger Tiger Tiger”) is displayed as the model name display 519 . Furthermore, on the model name display screen, the fact that the gaming machine 10 is a model with a safety device (a model equipped with a complete function) may be displayed, for example, by a specific model display 541 consisting of characters indicating "equipped with a complete function". . A player who sees the specific model display 541 as the complete function installation display can recognize that the gaming machine 10 has a safety device (complete function). Operation notice display 51
1 may be superimposed on the model name display 519 and the specific model display 541 in a layer on the front side (foremost layer). The specific model display 541 may also be displayed on the customer waiting demo movie screen (G3).

Next, on the (g5) attention calling display screen, an attention calling display 543 for warning the player that he or she is absorbed in the game is displayed together with the operation notice display 511 and the specific model display 541 . (Key 5
), the alert display 543 and the operation preview display 511 do not overlap, but if they overlap, either of the alert display 543 and the operation preview display 511 may be displayed in the front layer (foremost layer).

After that, the customer waiting screen is switched (shifted) again to (G1) the stop time screen, (G2) the player setting screen, and (G3) the customer waiting demo movie screen in order.

As described above, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 during customer waiting is the display state of images other than the operation notice display 511, that is, the types of customer waiting screens that can be cyclically switched (stop screen, player setting screen , customer waiting demo movie screen, model name display screen, alert display screen),
can be different. Furthermore, while waiting for customers, a specific model display 54 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 to indicate that the gaming machine 10 is a model with a safety device (a model equipped with a complete function).
may be represented by 1.

[Example of screen during setting confirmation]
FIG. 105 illustrates the display screen of the display device 41 in the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) regarding the fourth embodiment.

(A) is a display screen displayed first in the setting confirmation state, and the effect control device 30
0 is a setting confirmation display 545 for notifying that the setting is being confirmed, and a character display "setting confirmation".
is displayed on the display screen (B1328). In addition, the effect control device 300 displays on the display screen a character display “setting history list” and an operation prompting image 546 imitating the operation unit (here, the effect button 25). The operation-promoting image 546 prompts the player to operate the operation unit, and may be modeled after the cross key switch 450 .

(B) is a display screen that is displayed after switching from (A) when the operation unit (in this case, the effect button 25) is operated, and a setting history list 548 is displayed. Setting history list 5
In 48, presence/absence of setting change or setting confirmation is displayed in order from the past to the present, and the probability setting value at the time of setting change or setting confirmation and the duration of the changed probability setting value are displayed.
An operation prompting image 546 is displayed to prompt the user to return to the screen of (A) by performing a predetermined operation (pressing operation) on the operation unit (production button 25). In addition, an operation prompting image 547 is also displayed to prompt the user to scroll the setting history list 548 and see the past history by performing another predetermined operation (swipe operation) on the operation unit (production button 25). Note that the operation prompting image 546 and the operation prompting image 547 here may simulate the cross key switch 450 .

Furthermore, in the setting history list 548, a predetermined mark (* in this case) is displayed on the same line in association with the probability setting value so that the probability setting value when the safety device is activated and the operation is stopped can be recognized. It is As a result, hall officials can set a high probability setting value (for example, 5, 6) that increases the probability of winning such as a big hit probability or a small hit probability, and a large number of balls (large number of safe balls) will be released as intended. It can be confirmed whether or not the safety device has been activated (stopped). Then, the result of confirmation can be utilized for changing the probability set value in the future.

[Example 1 of specific model display]
FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example (example 1) of the specific model display 541 (complete function installed display) displayed in a form other than video in relation to the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 106, a specific model display 541 is displayed by printing, printing, painting, or the like. Note that in FIG. 104, the specific model display 541 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 as an image.

FIG. 106 shows the collective display device 50 provided on the game board 30 and its surroundings. Specifications of the game machine 10 are displayed around the LED lamps D1 to D18 of the collective display device 50. FIG. As a specification display, the display 85a of the jackpot probability at the time of low probability in setting 1 (lowest setting) and setting 6 (highest setting) "1/300 and 1/200",
Display 85b of the number of prize balls "3 & 2 & 10 &14", display 85c of the upper limit of the number of rounds "3, 6,
9", model (official name) display 85d "Pxxxx", in the case of a model with a probability variation state, display 85e of the presence or absence of a limit related to the probability variation jackpot (here, "no limit")
is displayed.

In the display 85b of the number of winning balls, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the general winning opening 35,
And the number of prize balls of the special variable prize winning device 39 is displayed so as to be recognizable in order, for example, 3, 2, 10, 14. The limit on the probability variable jackpot means that the number of consecutively occurring probability variable jackpots is limited to a predetermined limit number of times (a predetermined limit number of times per jackpot (
number of times) can occur).

In FIG. 106, a specific model display 541 indicates that the gaming machine 10 is a model with a safety device (a model equipped with a complete function), for example, by printed, printed or painted characters such as "Complete function installed". Fixed and always displayed. The specific model display 541 is
It is always displayed even when the power of the gaming machine 10 is cut off, and is always displayed without being displayed as an image on a specific screen as shown in FIG. 104 . For this reason, specific model display 5
41 is always easier for the player to recognize, so it is more convenient for the player than the specific model display 541 displayed as a video. The specific model display 541 is displayed in series with the display 85d of the model (official name) of the gaming machine 10, or displayed in the vicinity of the gaming machine 10 in order to give the impression that the gaming machine 10 is a model with a safety device. etc. may be displayed in association with the display 85d.

Note that the specific model display 541 by printing, printing, painting, or the like in FIG.
is the same character string "Complete function installed" (same display content) as the specific model display 541 by the image of , but it is not limited to this, and a different character string (different display content) may be used. If the character string of the specific model display 541 in FIG. 106 is partially omitted and shortened to, for example, "Complete function", the periphery of the batch display device 50 with little free space can be effectively used.

[Example 2 of specific model display]
FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example (example 2) of the specific model display 541 (complete function equipped display) displayed in a form other than video in the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 107 as well, the specific model display 541 is displayed by printing, printing, painting, or the like.

In FIG. 107, the specific model display 541 is displayed on the substantially flat front portion 456 of the decoration device 18a (top unit). The decoration device 18a protrudes obliquely upward and forward from the upper portion of the glass frame 15 (or opening/closing frame). On the front surface portion 456, a model name display 456a indicating the model name (here, "Tiger Tiger Tiger") is provided by printing, printing, painting, or the like. The model name display 456a may differ from the model name display 519 displayed as an image on the display screen in terms of display mode and display content. you can Also, on the front part 456, a character 456b that is related to the model name and that can also appear on the display screen of the display device 41 is provided by printing, painting, or the like.

The specific model display 541 is provided by printing, printing, painting, or the like near the end of the front face portion 456, for example, at a position adjacent to or facing the character 456b.

The front part 456 may be permanently fixed to the decoration device 18a, or may be detachable from the decoration device 18a for convenience and replaceable according to the model. In addition, the front part 456 includes a model name display 456a, a character 456b, and a specific model display 5.
A sheet or film on which 41 is fixedly displayed by printing or the like can be inserted, and the sheet or film can be visually recognized from the front through a transparent member (transparent plastic or the like). The sheet and film can be replaced according to the model, which is convenient.

[Other configuration examples]
In order to simplify the control of the effect control device 300, unlike FIG. 102, the operation notice display 511a-511d ("I will stop soon") is the same between the normal game state, the time saving state, the variable probability state, and the special game state. Display mode may be used (same size and same font). Also, Figure 1
03, the operation notice display 511 may be displayed in the same manner during the variable display, and FIG.
4, the operation notice display 511 may be displayed in the same manner during customer waiting.

The notice start value (190000 in the above description) at which the safety device activation notice state starts, that is, the timing for starting the display of the actuation notice display 511 may be changed. For example, in a game state in which a big hit is likely to occur, the operation notice display 511 may be started to be displayed at a smaller notice start value than in the normal game state in the general electric support state (probability variable state, time saving state) so that the notice can be given at an early timing. .

A switch for turning on and off the safety device (complete function) by the operation of a person involved in the hall is provided on the back of the game machine 10, and only when this switch connected to the game control device 100 is turned on,
The game control device 100 may operate a safety device.

[Functions and effects of the fourth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is capable of executing a game, and is capable of generating a game disabled state (game stop state, game prohibited state) in which a game cannot be executed by establishment of a predetermined condition (operating condition). Stopping means (for example, a safety device) and notification means (for example, the game control device 100, the effect control device 30
0, display device 41, etc.).

In such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to prevent the game from being played when a predetermined condition such as the number of difference balls or the number of safe balls is large, so that appropriate countermeasures against fraud can be taken. By suppressing it, it may be possible to suppress the player's addiction to the game. If the immersion is suppressed, the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, an error can be reported even in a game disabled state in which a game cannot be executed, and appropriate fraud countermeasures can be taken while preventing disadvantages or inconveniences from occurring to players, hall personnel, and the like.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, and when a predetermined condition (operating condition) is met, the gaming machine 10 changes to a game-disabled state (game-stopped state, game-prohibited state) where the game cannot be executed. Possible game stopping means (for example, a safety device), and a display control means (for example, an effect and a control device 300). The display control means changes the display mode of the notice display according to the game state (for example, during customer waiting, during variable display).

In such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to prevent the game from being played when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when the number of difference balls or the number of safe balls is large. It is possible. A notice display (for example, an operation notice display 511) notifies the player of the possibility of being unable to play in advance, urges the player to finish the game, and prevents the player from unintentionally receiving a disadvantage. can. In addition, it is possible to give a surprise to a person who is committing fraud by the notice display, and encourage him or her to stop the fraud. Further, the display mode of the notice display can be changed according to the game state (for example, waiting for a customer, during variable display), so that the notice display can be performed effectively.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment includes a payout control means (for example, payout control device 200) capable of paying out game media, and game media paid out during a predetermined period (for example, a period from power-on to the present). A first counting means (for example, Difference ball confirmation processing of the game control device 100). In addition, the gaming machine 10 includes a second counting means (for example, the difference ball confirmation process of the game control device 100) capable of counting the number of game media used in a predetermined period (for example, the number of shot balls or the number of discharged balls). and out ball detection switch 7
4). Furthermore, the game machine 10 has a calculation means (for example, the difference ball confirmation process of the game control device 100) capable of calculating a calculation value (for example, a safety device counter value or a difference ball number) based on the number of payouts and the number of uses. Prepare. When the calculated value reaches a reference value (for example, a counter reference value, a difference ball reference value), the game stopping means (for example, a safety device) can generate a non-playable state assuming that a predetermined condition (operating condition) is established. The display control means (for example, the performance control device 300) can display a predetermined display (for example, an operating display 513) indicating that the game is in a non-playable state on the display means.

In such a gaming machine 10, a non-playable state can be generated based on a calculated value based on the number of game media paid out and the number of used game media (for example, the number of shot balls or the number of discharged balls). Since it is possible to display a predetermined display (for example, the active display 513) indicating the state, fraud countermeasures can be effectively implemented, and the player's immersion in the game can be effectively suppressed.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, when the calculated value (for example, the safety device counter value or the number of difference balls) becomes a predetermined value (announcement start value) smaller than the reference value, the display control means An indication (for example, activation notice indication 511) can be displayed on the display means. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify in advance that the game will be in a non-playable state.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, when the calculated value (for example, the safety device counter value or the difference ball number) reaches the reference value but the predetermined condition (operating condition) is not satisfied, the display control means (for example Effect control device 300) can display on the display means a display (for example, operation warning display 512) different from the predetermined display (for example, during operation display 513) and the advance notice display (for example, operation notice display 511). Therefore, it is possible to warn the player of the disadvantage by informing the player in advance that the game will be stopped after a predetermined condition is established (for example, after the end of a small win or a big win).

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, display control means (for example, the effect control device 300
) may change the display mode of the notice display (for example, the operation notice display 511) for notifying that the game will be disabled in accordance with the progress of the game. As a result, the notice display can be appropriately displayed on the display means (for example, the display device 41) in accordance with the progress of the game. Also, the display mode of the advance notice display can be changed in accordance with the progress of the game so as not to interfere with the presentation on the display means, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, adjustment (
For example, it has an adjustment means (for example, production control device 300) that can perform brightness adjustment and volume adjustment). The adjusting means does not perform the adjustment even when there is an operation by the player in the game disabled state. Therefore, even if there is an operation by the player or the like in the game stop state, since various adjustments such as volume adjustment and brightness adjustment are not executed, the player and the like can easily recognize that the game is in the stop state. Since the player cannot freely adjust the game machine 10, there is a possibility that power can be saved in the game stop state.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment includes game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the progress of the game, and effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of controlling effects related to the game. . The game control means controls the number of game media (game balls) paid out in a predetermined period (for example, the period from power-on to the present) or the number of game media determined to be paid out in a predetermined period. a first counting means capable of counting the number of game media used in a predetermined period (for example, the number of safe balls); A game stopping means (for example, a safety device) capable of generating a game impossible state in which the game cannot be executed based on the difference between the number and the number of used balls (for example, the number of difference balls). The game control means includes a start memory means capable of storing a start memory as a game execution right, and a preliminary determination means capable of determining the result of the game in advance before the game based on the start memory is executed. On-hold information determination processing). Production control means (production control device 300), when receiving the determination result of the prior determination means from the game control means (for example, the information included in the look-ahead stop symbol command and look-ahead variation pattern command), notice based on the determination result Effect (for example, look-ahead effect, look-ahead notice effect) can be executed, and if the difference between the number of payouts and the number of uses is a predetermined value (for example, 94500) or more, the notice effect is not executed even if the judgment result is received. . As a result, when the difference between the number of payouts and the number of uses reaches a predetermined value close to the occurrence of the game-disabled state, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting unnecessarily. Discomfort can be reduced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100)
Regardless of the difference between the number of payouts and the number of used balls (for example, the number of difference balls), the result of the game is determined in advance before the game based on the starting memory is executed, and the result of the determination (for example, a look-ahead stop symbol command or information included in the look-ahead variation pattern command) to the effect control means (effect control device 30
0). Effect control means, when receiving the determination result from the game control means,
Based on the determination result, it is possible to execute a notice effect (for example, a pre-reading effect, a pre-reading notice effect). As a result, regardless of the difference between the number of payouts and the number of use (for example, the number of difference balls), the notice effect (for example, the prefetch effect, the prefetch notice effect) can be executed, so the difference between the number of payouts and the number of uses is the game disabled state Even when reaching a predetermined value (for example, 94500) that will occur soon, the advance notice effect can be executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is provided with effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of controlling effects related to games. The game machine 10 includes a movable member (movable accessory) that can operate as a performance, and a game stopping means that can generate a game disabled state (game stopped state, game prohibited state) in which a game cannot be executed by establishment of a predetermined condition. (e.g. a safety device);
The performance control means returns the movable member from the operating position to the initial position if the movable member is located at an operating position other than the initial position after the game is disabled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the movable member from being maintained at the operating position in the game disabled state in which the game cannot be executed, thereby preventing unnecessary misunderstanding such as that the movable member is out of order.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the effect control means moves the movable member to the operating position when the movable member is positioned at an operating position other than the initial position after the game is disabled. to the initial position. In this case, the movable member remains in an unnatural position, and the game cannot be played (game stopped state, game prohibited state), so the gaming machine 10 is in a normal state (the game cannot be played). It can be emphasized to the player that it is not possible to play.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the first condition (for example, condition (1): the difference ball number reaches the difference ball reference value of 95000) and the second condition (for example, condition (2): It is provided with a game stop means capable of generating a game disabled state in which the game cannot be executed by establishment of a win or not. The effect control means can display on the display means a first display (for example, an operation notice display 511) for notifying that the game will be disabled before the first condition is satisfied. When the first condition is satisfied but the second condition is not satisfied, the effect control means displays the second display (for example, the operation warning display 512) at least partially in common with the first display. It can be displayed on the device 41). This gives the impression that both the first display (for example, the operation notice display 511) and the second display (for example, the operation warning display 512) are displays related to the operation of the game stopping means and the occurrence of the game impossible state. In addition, it is possible to prevent misidentification with other types of indications other than safety device-related indications.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Equipped with effect control means capable of displaying a specific image (safety device-related display) on the display means, and when the result of the game is a special result, a special game state (big win or small win) advantageous to the player can be generated. be. The game control means (game control device 100) is provided with a game stop means (stop means) capable of generating a game impossible state in which the game cannot be executed by establishment of a predetermined condition. The display mode of the specific image (safety device-related display) related to the operation of the game stopping means includes a first display mode (activation notice display 511) and a second display mode (during operation display 513). The production control means is
In a game with a special result, when displaying the second display mode (in-operation display 513) of the specific image, predetermined images different from the specific image (first predetermined image 675, second predetermined image 676, pending display 682a, 682b, 683a, 683b, pending number display, mode display 679, variation number display 677, right-handed instruction display 502, decorative special symbols, effect images such as characters) are hidden.

In such a gaming machine 10, when displaying the second display mode (during operation display 513) of the specific image, the second display mode (during operation display 513) of the specific image is hidden in order to hide a predetermined image different from the specific image. The middle display 513) is easily recognized by the players, the people involved in the hall, and the like. Furthermore, even in a game with a special result (hit), before the occurrence of the special game state (before the derivation of the special result), for example, when a predetermined condition for operating the game stopping means is established, the second game of the specific image is displayed. It is preferable to display the display mode (during operation display 513).

[Fifth embodiment]
A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 140. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fourth embodiments. In addition, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to fourth embodiments, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The fifth embodiment relates to instructions (codes) and programs.

[Configuration of CPU]
FIG. 108A is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the CPU 111a of the gaming microcomputer 111 according to the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, the CPU 111a is the CPU core 10
2. The CPU core 102 is configured as a Z80 series CPU.

The CPU core 102 (CPU 111a) shown in FIG. 108A includes a W register 1201A, an A register 1202A, a B register 1204A, a C register 1205A, a D register 1207A, an E register 1208A, an H register 1210A, each having a width of 8 bits.
It has an L register 1211A.

These general purpose registers combine the W register 1201A and the A register 1202A into a WA register 1203A (pair register, register pair) with a width of 16 bits.
It can also be used as Similarly, B register 1204A and C register 1205
BC register 1206A (pair register, register pair) combined with A, DE register 1209A (pair register, register pair) combined with D register 1207A and E register 1208A, HL combined with H register 1210A and L register 1211A It is also possible to use registers 1212A (pair register, register pair).

Further, each of the CPU cores 102 (CPU 111a) has a width of 16 bits,
It has an IX register 1231a and an IY register 1232a. IX register 1231
The IY register 1232a is used as an index when the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 accesses data. Also, the IY register 1232a can be used as a start address specifying register for setting the start address of the RAM 111c (update information storage means) in the address space (or memory space).

Note that a register having a width (capacity) of 8 bits (1 byte) is sometimes called a first register. A pair register having a width (capacity) of 16 bits (2 bytes), IX register 1231a and IY register 1232a, is sometimes called a second register.

These general-purpose registers form one general-purpose register group (register group of register bank 0) 1220A. On the other hand, the CPU core 102 has another general-purpose register group (register bank 1 register group) 1220B having the same (or similar) configuration as the general-purpose register group included in the register group 1220A of register bank 0 .

W register 1 of register bank 0 is stored in register group 1220B of register bank 1.
It has W registers 1201B to L registers 1211B having the same functions as the 201A to L registers 1211A. These registers can also be used as WA registers 1203B to HL registers 1212B as 16-bit registers in the same manner as register bank 0. The register group 1220B of the register bank 1 includes an IX register 1231b, an IX register 1231b, and a
It has an IY register 1232b.

Further, the CPU core 102 has a flag register 1200 with a width of 8 bits.

A flag register 1200 stores the result of computation using the register. A register bank selector (RBS), which is a bit of the flag register 1200, selects which of the two general-purpose register groups 1220A and 1220B is to be used as an arithmetic target.

Each register belonging to the register group selected by the register bank selector (RBS) is used by the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 for calculation. On the other hand, each register belonging to the non-selected register group retains its value until the value of the register bank selector (RBS) is changed and becomes a selection target.

The CPU core 102 also has a DP register 1230 . DP register 123
0 can be used, for example, to store the top address of the game control data area of the ROM 111b in the address space (or memory space).

Further, the CPU core 102 has an SP register 1233 functioning as a stack pointer and a PC register 1234 functioning as a program counter, each having a width of 16 bits.

The stack pointer 1233 indicates the position of the area when data is stored in (or retrieved from) the stack area. The program counter 1234 is an instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242
indicates the address where the instruction being executed is stored.

The command interpreting and executing circuit 1242 executes programs (programs within the area or programs outside the area)
to perform arithmetic processing using each register inside the CPU core 102 . in particular,
In the ROM 111b, the data stored at the address indicated by the program counter 1234 is read, and the read data is regarded as a code, and the instruction corresponding to the code is executed. The instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 interprets and executes instructions included in a predetermined instruction set.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the CPU core 102 (CPU 111a) itself is exemplified as the arithmetic processing means, but inside the CPU core 102, the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 plays the main role of the arithmetic processing means. there is The RAM 111c serves as update information storage means for storing information updated by the arithmetic processing means (CPU 111a, CPU core 102), and can retain the stored information even if a power failure occurs due to the backup power supply. holding storage means.

Note that the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 performs the access circuit 12 in response to program instructions.
43, an address bus 721, and a data bus 722, the R external to the CPU core 102
Data may be exchanged between the OM 111b, RAM 111c, and other circuits. The address bus 721 is composed of 16-bit signal lines, and the CPU core 102
It outputs the specified address to the address bus 721 and inputs/outputs the data stored in the specified address (the address of the ROM 111b, the RAM 111c, etc.) via the data bus 722. FIG.

Also, every time the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 executes the instructions in the ROM 111b one by one,
The address where the next instruction is stored is stored in the program counter 1234 . By repeating the execution of instructions and the updating of the program counter 1234 in this manner, the programs are sequentially executed. When an interrupt signal from the interrupt control circuit 724 provided in the game microcomputer 111 is received, the value of the program counter 1234 is switched to the value of the preset interrupt processing address.

Data is exchanged between the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 and each register provided in the CPU core 102 via an internal bus 1235 .

The initial value setting circuit 1241 is a circuit that sets an initial value to each register provided in the CPU core 102 by means of hardware.

When the internal reset circuit 1240 receives a reset signal from the security circuit 725 provided in the game microcomputer 111, it activates the initial value setting circuit 1241, and the CPU
After setting an initial value to each register provided in the core 102, the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242
start up.

Also, when the initial value setting circuit 1241 starts operating when the power is turned on or when a reset signal is received, the initial value ("29FFh" in this embodiment) is set in the stack pointer 1233, and the IY registers 1232a and 1232b are set to Initial value (starting address of RAM 111c,
In this embodiment, "2800h") is set, and the initial value (ROM 11
1b, which is the start address of the data area ("5000h" in this embodiment) is set, and HL
A reset address ("4000h" in this embodiment) is set in the register 1212A, a value of the reset address (starting address of the ROM 111b, "4000h" in this embodiment) is set in the program counter 1234, and other registers are set. sets a value of "00h" (a value of "0000h" in a 16-bit register). The reset address is "000
0h".

[Flag register]
FIG. 108B is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the flag register 1200 according to the fifth embodiment. The value of each bit of flag register 1200, which has a width of 8 bits, is set by instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 in FIG. 108A. The 8-bit data (value) stored in the flag register 1200 is called a program status word PSW.

An interrupt master permission flag (IMF) 1300 is a flag for setting permission or prohibition of interrupt processing by an interrupt signal. When set (value is "1"), it is permitted, and when cleared (value is "0"), it is prohibited.

A register bank selector (RBS) 1301 is a flag that selects which of the two general-purpose register groups 1220A and 1220B to use when the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 in FIG. is "1"), the register group 1220B of register bank 1 is cleared (value is "0"), register group 1220B of register bank 0
A is selected.

The overflow flag (VF) 1302 is set (value "1") when overflow occurs in a general-purpose register to be operated on by a predetermined operation, and is cleared (value "0") otherwise. .

The sign flag (SF) 1303 is set (value is "1") when the most significant bit of the general-purpose register to be operated on becomes "1" by a predetermined operation, and is cleared (value is "0") otherwise.
be done.

A half carry flag (HF) 1304 is set (value "1") when a carry or borrow occurs in the 4th bit of a general-purpose register to be operated as a result of an 8-bit operation. , otherwise cleared (value "0").

A carry flag (CF) 1305 is set (value "1") when a carry or borrow occurs due to a predetermined operation, and is cleared (value "0") otherwise.
be done.

A zero flag (ZF) 1306 is set (value is "1") in a predetermined case such as when the result of a predetermined operation is "0" or when the data (value) to be transferred is "0". , otherwise cleared (value "0").

The jump status flag (JF) 1307 is set (the value is "1" when at least one of the carry flag (CF) 1305 or the zero flag (ZF) 1306 is set).
”) is done. Therefore, the jump status flag (JF) 1307 can have the same value as the carry flag (CF) 1305 or zero flag (ZF) 1306 by a predetermined operation. Alternatively, it is set (value is "1") when the value of the general-purpose register becomes "00h" even when no arithmetic processing is performed. If none of these conditions are met, it is cleared (value is "0"). A jump status flag (JF) 1307 is
It can be used, for example, to determine the operating conditions of branch and call instructions.

Note that all bits of the flag register are set to 0 when the CPU core 102 is reset.

[Memory map]
FIG. 109 is a diagram showing a memory map (memory configuration) relating to the memory used by the CPU 111a (CPU core 102) in the fifth embodiment. As in the first embodiment,
The memory used by the CPU 111a includes a RAM 111c and a ROM 111b. In the address space of the memory, addresses are assigned with serial numbers for each byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the top address of the RAM 111c is "2800h",
The start address of the ROM 111b is "4000h" and the start address of the data area of the ROM 111b is "5000h", but these addresses are examples and may be other addresses.

As in the first embodiment, from the start address "2800h" of the RAM 111c, the work area inside the area, the unused area, the stack area inside the area, the unused area, the work area outside the area, the unused area, the stack area outside the area, the unused area Regions are arranged sequentially in the address space. There may be no unused area between the inner work area and the inner stack area, and no unused area between the outer work area and the outer stack area. A work area, an unused area, and a stack area within an area which are contiguous in the address space form the first RAM area. An out-of-area work area, an unused area, and an out-of-area stack area that are contiguous in the address space form the second RAM area.

Program area (first R
OM area, first program storage area), unused area, outside program area (second R
OM area, second program storage area), unused area, and program management area are arranged in order in the address space. The area of the program within the area is the start address "5000h"
Includes a data area (game control data area) and a game control program area other than the data area. An unused area may be interposed between the game control program area and the data area. A region of extra-regional programs may also contain a data area. A program management area located at the end of the address space of the ROM 111b stores hardware (HW) parameters, vector tables, and the like. This vector table is a table used in a CALLT instruction (third call instruction), which will be described later.

In this embodiment, the program in the ROM area (first program) consists of a game control program, game control data, etc., and the main program corresponding to the main process (FIGS. 5A-5C) and the timer interrupt process Includes a corresponding timer interrupt handling program. Subroutines (including subroutines of subroutines, etc.) in the main program or timer interrupt processing program are basically programs within the area (programs within the area unless otherwise specified), but are exceptionally programs outside the area. Sometimes. In this embodiment, the non-game control area outside program (second program) that is not directly related to the game control is a safety device information initialization program corresponding to the safety device information initialization process, and the performance display editing process. It includes a corresponding performance display edit processing program and an out-of-area integration processing program corresponding to out-of-area integration processing. In addition, the out-of-area program (second program) includes, as subroutines called from the out-of-area integration processing program, a test signal output processing program corresponding to test signal output processing, and a performance display device control processing corresponding to performance display device control processing. A program, a differential ball confirmation processing program corresponding to the differential ball confirmation processing, and a safety device operation monitoring processing program corresponding to the safety device operation monitoring processing. Note that the above-described processing programs that perform various types of collective processing are also called program modules.

[Instructions of the CPU of the game control device]
110 to 119 show the CPU 111a (CPU core 102) of the game control device 100.
, a typical instruction (
4 is an instruction table illustrating code). In the CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242),
Dedicated logic may be provided to execute each instruction in the instruction table.

In the instruction table, instructions are indicated by instructions (source code) in assembly language corresponding to Z80, which is an 8-bit microprocessor, and correspond one-to-one to machine language instructions (machine code) stored in ROM 111b. An instruction is divided into an "opcode" (or "mnemonic") indicating the operation content (calculation content) and an "operand" for the instruction target. There may be a plurality of "operands" such as a first operand, a second operand, and so on.

Also, in the instruction table, changes in flags that occur according to the execution results of instructions and the results of calculations by instructions, how many cycles of the operation clock of the CPU the instruction is executed (that is, the operation required to execute the instruction). number of clock cycles), word length of instructions in machine language instructions (instruction size,
instruction length, number of bytes) are shown. The number of cycles corresponds to the instruction execution time, and the smaller the cycle number, the shorter the instruction execution time and the faster the program execution speed. If the instruction word length is short (small), the capacity (size) of the program can be reduced.

Note that there are special cases where the number of cycles and/or word length of the instruction table is exceptionally smaller than usual, as shown in parentheses, depending on the type of registers used in the instruction, the combination of registers, and the like. The more types of registers that can be used for instructions, the easier it is to develop a program. / Or the capacity of the program can be reduced.

In the instruction table, flag changes due to execution of instructions are shown. Zero flag (ZF) value Z, carry flag (CF) value C, half carry flag (HF) value H
, the value S of the sign flag (SF), and the value V of the overflow flag (VF) indicate that they can be changed. Also, "-" indicates that the flag has not changed, and "U" indicates that the value is undefined.

The commands in the command table are shown in general form. In the instruction, n is 8 bits (=1
byte). By instruction, n exceptionally indicates a 4-bit immediate value.
In the instruction, mn indicates a 16-bit (=2 bytes) immediate value. Note that the direct value n and direct value mn are labels corresponding to numeric values and hexadecimal numbers (...
h, etc.) or a decimal number. d and k indicate a 5-bit or 8-bit offset value (displacement value, direct value) that can be used when specifying a memory address. vw
indicates a 16-bit (=2-byte) direct address value (immediate value) that can be used when directly specifying a memory address. ( ) indicates the contents stored or stored in the area of the address specified in the ( ) in the memory, or the area of the address (memory area). If the area is 2 bytes, the number in parentheses indicates the start address of the area. $
indicates the start address of the instruction (that is, the value of the PC register 1234).

In instructions, r, g, p, q, f, k, s, and t indicate 8-bit (1-byte) registers. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110 and the like, r and g are W registers,
Indicates one of the A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, and L register. p indicates either the W register or the A register. q indicates one of the B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, and L register.
f indicates one of the W register, A register, B register, C register, D register, and E register. k indicates either an H register or an L register. s indicates the A register. t indicates one of the W register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, and L register.

In instructions, rr, gg, jj, uu, zz, ss, ff, and kk indicate 16-bit (2-byte) registers or pair registers (register pairs). For details, see Fig. 11
0 etc., rr and gg each indicate one of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register. jj indicates one of the DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register. uu and zz each indicate one of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, IY register, SP register and DP register. ss indicates one of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, IY register, and SP register. ff indicates one of the WA register, BC register, DE register, and HL register. kk indicates one of the IX register, IY register, SP register, and DP register.

[Transfer command (example 1)]
A transfer instruction (load instruction) is an instruction to transfer data. In this embodiment, the transfer instruction is a data (value, content) corresponding to the second operand to that corresponding to the first operand.
transfer (copy, load)

The transfer instruction uses six flags (R
flags other than BS and IMF), jump status flag (JF) and zero flag (
ZF) can be changed, but the carry flag (CF), half carry flag (HF), sign flag (SF), and overflow flag (VF) remain unchanged. When the value transferred by the transfer instruction is "0", the value Z of the zero flag (ZF) becomes "1", and when the value transferred is not "0", the value Z of the zero flag (ZF) becomes "0". "become. The jump status flag (JF) is set to the same value Z (1 or 0) as the zero flag (ZF).

[Example 1-1]
Example 1-1 in FIG. 110 is an instruction table illustrating an LD instruction that transfers 1-byte data among transfer instructions. Here, the LD instruction is written in assembly language as "LD first operand, second
The data (value, content) corresponding to the second operand is transferred (copied, loaded) to the one corresponding to the first operand. LD is an operation code, the first operand is before the comma in the operand, and the second operand is after the comma.

"LD r,g" is an instruction to transfer the value of the g register to the r register. The number of operating clock cycles required to execute an instruction is basically two cycles, and the word length (instruction size) of an instruction is basically two bytes long. However, exceptionally, the (r, g) register combination is (W, A), (A, W), (A, B), (A, C), (A, E), (B, A), (
In the case of a special combination of C, A) and (E, A), the number of instruction cycles is one, the instruction execution time is shortened, and the instruction word length is shortened by one byte.

"LD f,n" is a 2-cycle, 2-byte long instruction that stores the immediate value n (
1 byte). "LD k,n" is a 3-cycle, 3-byte long instruction,
Transfer the immediate value n to the k register. "LD f, n" and "LD k, n" differ in the number of cycles and word lengths depending on the difference in the transfer destination register. Using both instructions increases the number of destination registers, but if you use more "LD f, n" than "LD k, n" in your program, you can reduce the size of the program and speed up the execution of the program. .

"LD s, (vw)" is a 5-cycle, 3-byte long instruction that stores
Transfers the value stored in the direct address area (memory area) specified by the direct value vw (2 bytes). "LD t, (vw)" is a 5-cycle, 4-byte instruction stored in the t register in the direct address area specified by the immediate value vw (address area corresponding to the immediate value vw). transfer the value Using both instructions increases the number of destination registers, but
LD s, (vw) and LD t, (vw) differ depending on the transfer destination register.
Word length is different. By using more "LD s, (vw)" than "LD t, (vw)" in the program, the capacity of the program can be reduced.

"LD r, (jj)" is an instruction to transfer the value stored in the address area (memory area) specified by the jj register to the r register. The number of cycles of an instruction is basically 3 cycles, and the word length of an instruction is basically 2 bytes long. However, as an exception, jj
If the register is the DE register and the r register is the W or A register, or if the jj register is the HL register and the r register is the W, A, B, C or E register. , the number of instruction cycles is 3,
The instruction word length is 1 byte.

"LD r, (jj+)" is an instruction that transfers the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register to the r register, and increases the address stored in the jj register by 1 after the transfer. is. Since 1-byte data is transferred to the 1-byte (8-bit) r register, the address is incremented by 1. Note that "JJ+" means updating the address stored in the jj register to the next address after the transfer. This instruction is basically 4 cycles and 2 bytes long. However, exceptionally, if the jj register is the DE register and the r register is the W register or the A register, or if the jj register is the HL register and the r register is the W register, the A register, the B register, the C register, Or if it is an E register, it will be 3 cycles and 1 byte long.

"LD r, (jj+d)" stores the jj register and the offset value (immediate value) in the r register.
This instruction transfers the value stored in the address area (memory area) specified by . "
jj+d" means an added address obtained by adding an offset value d (relative address) to the value of the address (reference address) stored in the jj register. This instruction is basically 4 cycles and 3 bytes long. But exceptionally, the jj register is the DE or HL register, the r register is the W or A register, and the value of d is 1 to 7
, it is 4 cycles and 2 bytes long. Also, exceptionally, if the jj register is IY
4 cycles and 2 bytes long if it is a W, A, B, C, or E register.

"LD r, (jj+p)" is an instruction to transfer the value stored in the address area specified by the jj and p registers to the r register. "jj+p" means an added address obtained by adding the value of the address (offset address) stored in the p register to the value of the address stored in the jj register. This instruction is 4 cycles and 2 bytes long.

"LD (vw), n" is an 8-cycle, 5-byte instruction that stores an immediate value n (1 byte) in the direct address area (in RAM) specified by the immediate value vw (2 bytes). Forward.

"LD (jj),n" is an instruction to transfer the immediate value n to the area (within the RAM) of the address designated by the jj register. This instruction is basically 6 cycles and 3 bytes long. However, exceptionally, if the jj register is a DE or HL register, 4
Cycle and 2 bytes long.

"LD (jj+),n" is the area of the address specified by the jj register (in RAM)
, and increments the address stored in the jj register by 1 after the transfer. Since 1-byte direct value n data is transferred, the address is incremented by 1 and updated to the next address. This instruction is 4 cycles and 2 bytes long.

"LD (jj+d), n" is an instruction to transfer the immediate value n to the area (within the RAM) of the address designated by the jj register and the offset value (immediate value). "jj+d" means an added address obtained by adding the offset value d to the value of the address stored in the jj register. This instruction is basically 7 cycles and 4 bytes long. But exceptionally, when the jj register is the IY register, it is 5 cycles and 3 bytes long.

"LD (jj+p),n" is an instruction to transfer the immediate value n to the area (within the RAM) of the address specified by the jj and p registers. "jj+p" means an added address obtained by adding the value of the address (offset address) stored in the p register to the value of the address stored in the jj register. This instruction is 7 cycles and 3 bytes long.

"LD (vw), s" is a 5-cycle, 3-byte instruction that transfers the value of the s register to the direct address area (in RAM) designated by the immediate value vw. "LD (vw
), t" is a 7-cycle, 4-byte instruction that transfers the value of the t register to the direct address area specified by the immediate value vw. The use of both instructions increases the number of transfer source registers, but "LD (vw),s" and "LD (vw),t" differ in the number of cycles and word lengths due to the difference in the transfer source registers. "LD (vw), s" to "LD (vw), t"
If you use more in your program, you can reduce the size of your program and make your program run faster.

"LD (jj), r" is an instruction to transfer the value of the r register to the area (within the RAM) of the address specified by the jj register. This instruction is basically 5 cycles and 2 bytes long. Exceptionally, however, when the jj register is a DE or HL register and the r register is a W or A register, it is four cycles and one byte long.

"LD (jj+), r" is the area of the address specified by the jj register (in RAM)
, the value stored in the r register is transferred, and after the transfer, the address stored in the jj register is incremented by one. Since 1-byte data is transferred from the 1-byte (8-bit) r register, the address is incremented by 1. This instruction is basically 6 cycles and 2 bytes long. Exceptionally, however, when the jj register is a DE or HL register and the r register is a W or A register, it is four cycles and one byte long.

"LD (jj+d),r" is an instruction to transfer the value stored in the r register to the area of the addition address "jj+d". This instruction is basically 6 cycles and 3 bytes long. Exceptionally, however, if the jj register is a DE or HL register,
If the r register is the W register or the A register and the value of d is from 1 to 7,
5 cycles and 2 bytes long. It is also exceptionally five cycles and two bytes long when the jj register is the IY register and the r register is the W or A register.

"LD (jj+p),r" is an instruction to transfer the value stored in the r register to the area of the addition address "jj+p". This instruction is 6 cycles and 2 bytes long.

[Example 1-2]
Example 1-2 in FIG. 111 is an instruction table exemplifying an LD instruction for transferring 2-byte (16-bit) data (value) among transfer instructions. Here, since the transfer instruction handles 2-byte data, the address specified in parentheses indicates the start address of the 2-byte area of the transfer destination or transfer source.

"LD uu,zz" is a 2-cycle, 2-byte long instruction that stores z in the uu register.
Transfer the value of the z register.

"LD ff, mn" is a 3-cycle, 3-byte long instruction that transfers the immediate value mn (2 bytes) to the ff register. "LD kk, mn" is a 4-cycle, 4-byte long instruction that transfers the immediate value mn to the kk register. "LD ff, mn" and "LD kk
, mn” have different cycle numbers and word lengths depending on the transfer destination registers. Although the number of destination registers increases by using both instructions, "LD ff, mn" is changed to "LD kk, mn".
If you use more in your program, you can reduce the size of your program and make your program run faster.

"LD ss, (vw)" is a 6-cycle, 4-byte long instruction that transfers the value stored in the direct address area specified by the immediate value vw to the ss register. Here, the immediate value vw is the top address of a 2-byte area in which a 2-byte transferred value is stored.

"LD ss, (jj)" transfers the value stored in the address area (memory area) specified by the jj register to the ss register. This instruction is basically 4 cycles and 2 bytes long. However, the exception is when the jj register is the HL register and the ss register is the WA register, which is 4 cycles and 1 byte long.

"LD ss, (jj+)" is a 5-cycle, 2-byte instruction that transfers the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register to the ss register.
Increase the address stored in the register by two. The address is incremented by 2 because 2-byte data is transferred to the 2-byte ss register.

"LD ss, (jj+d)" is an instruction to transfer the value stored in the area of addition address "jj+d" to the ss register. This instruction is basically 5 cycles and 3
Byte length. However, exceptionally, if the jj register is the IY register and the ss register is the WA, BC, DE, or HL register, it is five cycles and two bytes long.

"LD ss, (jj+p)" is a 5-cycle, 2-byte long instruction that transfers the value stored in the area of addition address "jj+p" to the ss register.

"LD (vw), ss" is an 8-cycle, 4-byte instruction that transfers the value of the ss register to the direct address area (in RAM) designated by the immediate value vw.

"LD (jj), ss" is a 6-cycle, 2-byte instruction that transfers the value of the ss register to the area (within the RAM) of the address specified by the jj register.

"LD (jj+), ss" transfers the value stored in the ss register to the area (within the RAM) of the address specified by the jj register, and increments the address stored in the jj register by 2 after the transfer. is an order. Since 2 bytes of data are transferred from the 2 bytes of ss register, the address is incremented by 2. This instruction is 7 cycles and 2 bytes long.

"LD (jj+d), ss" is stored in the area (within RAM) of addition address "jj+d",
This is an instruction to transfer the value stored in the ss register. This instruction is basically 7 cycles and 3 bytes long. However, exceptionally, if the jj register is the IY register and the ss register is the WA, DE, or HL register, it is 6 cycles and 2 bytes long.

"LD (jj+p), ss" is stored in the area (within RAM) of addition address "jj+p",
This is an instruction to transfer the value stored in the ss register. This instruction is 7 cycles and 2 bytes long.

"LD A, PSW" is an instruction to transfer the 8-bit data PSW stored in the flag register 1200 to the A register. "LD RBS,0" is flag register 12
It is an instruction to transfer the value "0" to the register bank selector (RBS), which is the 00 bit. "LD RBS,1" is an instruction to transfer the value "1" to the register bank selector (RBS). These instructions are two cycles and two bytes long.

[Example 1-3]
Example 1-3 in FIG. 112 is an LD that transfers a 2-byte (16-bit) immediate value in a transfer instruction.
4 is an instruction table illustrating W instructions; Here, since the transfer instruction handles 2-byte data,
The address specified in parentheses indicates the top address of the 2-byte area of the transfer destination or transfer source. The LDW instruction is "LDW 1st operand, 2nd operand" in assembly language.
and transfers (copy, load) the data (value, content) corresponding to the second operand to the one corresponding to the first operand. LDW is an operation code, the first operand is before the comma in the operand, and the second operand is after the comma.

"LDW (vw), mn" is a 10-cycle, 6-byte long instruction, and the immediate value vw
Direct value mn (2 bytes) is transferred to the direct address area (in RAM) specified by .

"LDW (jj), mn" is an 8-cycle, 4-byte instruction that transfers the immediate value mn to the address area (in RAM) specified by the jj register.

"LDW (jj+), mn" is a 9-cycle, 4-byte instruction that transfers the immediate value mn to the area (within the RAM) of the address specified by the jj register, and after the transfer, it is stored in the jj register. Increment the address by 2. Since 2-byte direct value mn data is transferred, the address is incremented by 2 and updated to the next address.

"LDW (jj+d), mn" is an instruction to transfer the immediate value mn to the area (within the RAM) of the addition address "jj+d". This instruction is basically 9 cycles and 5 bytes long. However, the exception is when the jj register is the IY register, which is 6 cycles and 4 bytes long.

"LDW (jj+p), mn" is a 9-cycle, 4-byte instruction that transfers the immediate value mn to the area (in the RAM) of the addition address "jj+p".

[Example 1-4]
Examples 1-4 of FIG. 112 are instruction tables illustrating other transfer instructions (LDD instruction, LDY instruction).

"LDD HL, mn" is a 2-cycle, 2-byte instruction that transfers the sum of the value stored in the DP register and the immediate value mn to the HL register.

"LDY jj,n" is the 8th to 15th bits of the jj register (jj[15:
8]), the 8th to 15th bits (IY[15:8]) of the IY register are transferred to
The 8-bit direct value n is transferred from the 0th bit to the 7th bit (jj[7:0]) of the jj register. This instruction is basically 3 cycles and 3 bytes long. However, as an exception, jj
It is two cycles and two bytes long if the register is a DE or HL register.

[Comparison instruction (example 2)]
A comparison instruction is an instruction to compare a plurality of data (values) by subtraction or the like. In this embodiment, the compare instruction subtracts the data (value) corresponding to the second operand from the data (value) corresponding to the first operand, and changes the flag according to the subtraction result. Conversely, the compare instruction converts the data (value) corresponding to the second operand to the data (value) corresponding to the first operand.
value) and change the flag according to the result of the subtraction.

The comparison instruction is set to six flags (R
BS and IMF flags), i.e. jump status flag (JF), zero flag (ZF), carry flag (CF), half carry flag (HF), sign flag (SF), overflow flag (VF). can let Note that the half carry flag (HF) may become an undefined value (U) in a 2-byte data comparison instruction.

When the data (value) corresponding to the first operand and the data (value) corresponding to the second operand match, that is, when the above subtraction result is zero, the value Z of the zero flag (ZF) is "1".
If they do not match (if the subtraction result is not zero), the value Z of the zero flag (ZF) becomes "0". Carry flag (CF) if the above subtraction result is less than zero (-, negative)
becomes "1", and if it is greater than or equal to zero (0 or + (positive)), the carry flag (CF)
becomes "0". The jump status flag (JF) is basically set to the same value C (1 or 0) as the carry flag (CF). is set to the same value Z (1 or 0) as the zero flag (ZF).

[Example 2-1]
Example 2-1 in FIG. 113 is an instruction table illustrating a CP instruction that compares 1-byte data among comparison instructions. The CP instruction is described as "CP 1st operand, 2nd operand" in assembly language. Compare (value). CP is the opcode,
Before the comma in the operand is the first operand, and after the comma is the second operand.

By executing the CP instruction, the jump status flag (JF) changes to the carry flag (
CF) is set to the same value C. If the subtraction result of the CP instruction is less than zero (negative), the value C of the carry flag (CF) becomes "1", and if it is greater than or equal to zero (0 or positive), the value C of the carry flag (CF) becomes "0". Therefore, the CP instruction is often used to determine the magnitude of a value immediately before executing a branch instruction.

Note that the CP instruction and the LD instruction may have the same number of cycles and/or the same word length if the first and second operands are the same. This may make the program easier to design.

"CP r,g" is a two-cycle, two-byte long instruction that compares the value of the r register with the value of the g register.

"CP p,n" is a 2-cycle, 2-byte long instruction that compares the value of the p register with the immediate value n (1 byte). "CP q,n" is a 3-cycle, 3-byte long instruction that compares the value of the q register with the immediate value n. "CP p,n" and "CP q,n" differ in the number of cycles and the word length depending on the difference in the comparison destination register. Using both instructions increases the number of registers to be compared, but if you use more "CP p, n" than "CP q, n" in your program, you can reduce the size of the program and speed up the execution of the program. .

"CP r, (vw)" is a 5-cycle, 4-byte long instruction that compares the value of the r register with the value stored in the direct address area specified by the immediate value vw.

"CP r, (jj)" is a 3-cycle, 2-byte instruction that compares the value of the r register with the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register.

"CP r, (jj+)" is an instruction that compares the value of the r register with the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register, and increments the address stored in the jj register by 1 after the comparison. be. The address is incremented by 1 because 1-byte values are compared. This instruction is 4 cycles and 2 bytes long.

"CP r, (jj+d)" is the value of the r register and the addition address "jj+d"
is an instruction to compare the values stored in the areas of . This instruction is basically 4 cycles and 3 bytes long. However, the exception is that the jj register is the IY register and the r register is the W
If it is a register or A register, it will be 4 cycles and 2 bytes long.

"CP r, (jj+p)" is the value of the r register and the addition address "jj+p"
is an instruction to compare the values stored in the areas of . This instruction is 4 cycles and 2 bytes long.

"CP (vw), n" is a 6-cycle, 5-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the direct address area specified by the immediate value vw with the immediate value n.

"CP (jj),n" is an instruction to compare the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register with the immediate value n. This instruction is basically 4 cycles and 3 bytes long. But exceptionally, if the jj register is an HL register, it will be 3 cycles and 2 bytes long.

"CP (jj+),n" is an instruction that compares the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register with the immediate value n, and increments the address stored in the jj register by 1 after the comparison. . Since 1-byte values are compared, the address is incremented by 1 and updated to the next address. This instruction is 5 cycles and 3 bytes long.

"CP (jj+d), n" is the value stored in the area of addition address "jj+d";
This is an instruction to compare immediate values n. This instruction is basically 5 cycles and 4 bytes long.
But exceptionally, when the jj register is the IY register, it is 4 cycles and 3 bytes long.

"CP (jj+p), n" is the value stored in the area of addition address "jj+p";
This is an instruction to compare immediate values n. This instruction is 5 cycles and 3 bytes long.

"CP (vw), r" is a 6-cycle, 5-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the direct address area specified by the immediate value vw with the value of the r register.

"CP (jj),r" is an instruction to compare the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register with the value of the r register. This instruction is basically 4 cycles and 3 bytes long. However, the exception is that the jj register is a DE register and the r register is a W
register, A register, B register, C register, H register, or L register, or jj register is HL register and r register is W register, A register,
4 cycles and 2 if it is a B, C, D, or E register
byte length.

"CP (jj+), r" compares the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register with the value stored in the r register, and increments the address stored in the jj register by 1 after the comparison. is an instruction to The address is incremented by 1 because 1-byte values are compared. This instruction is basically 5 cycles and 3 bytes long. However, as an exception, j
If j is the DE register and r is the W, A, B, C, H, or L register, or if jj is the HL register and r is the W and A registers , B register, C register, D register, or E register, it is 4 cycles and 2 bytes long.

"CP (jj+d),r" is a 5-cycle, 4-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the area of addition address "jj+d" with the value stored in the r register.

"CP (jj+p),r" is a 5-cycle, 3-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the addition address "jj+p" area with the value stored in the r register.

[Example 2-2]
Example 2-2 in FIG. 114 is an instruction table illustrating a CP instruction that compares 2-byte data (values) among comparison instructions. Here, since the comparison instruction handles 2-byte data, the address specified in parentheses indicates the top address of the 2-byte area. Note that the value of the half carry flag (HF) is changed to an undefined value "
U”.

"CP rr, gg" is a 2-cycle, 2-byte long instruction that compares the value stored in the rr register with the value in the gg register.

"CP rr, mn" is a 4-cycle, 4-byte long instruction that compares the value stored in the rr register with the immediate value mn (2 bytes).

"CP rr, (vw)" is a 6-cycle, 4-byte long instruction that compares the value stored in the rr register with the value stored in the direct address area specified by the immediate value vw. Here, the immediate value vw is the top address of a 2-byte area storing a 2-byte value to be compared.

"CP rr, (jj)" is a 4-cycle, 2-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the rr register with the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register.

"CP rr, (jj+)" is a 5-cycle, 2-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the rr register with the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register. Increase the address stored in the jj register by two. The address is incremented by 2 because 2-byte values are being compared.

"CP rr, (jj+d)" is the value stored in the rr register and the addition address "j
It is an instruction that compares the values stored in the areas of j+d. This instruction is basically 5 cycles and 3 bytes long.

"CP rr, (jj+p)" is a 5-cycle, 2-byte long instruction that compares the value stored in the rr register with the value stored in the addition address "jj+p" area.

"CP (jj), rr" is an instruction to compare the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register with the value of the rr register. This instruction is basically 5 cycles and 2
Byte length.

"CP (jj+), rr" compares the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register with the value stored in the rr register, and increments the address stored in the jj register by 2 after the comparison. is an instruction to The address is incremented by 2 because 2-byte values are being compared. This instruction is 5 cycles and 2 bytes long.

[Example 2-3]
Example 2-3 of FIG. 115 is an instruction table illustrating the CPJ instruction among the comparison instructions. The CPJ instruction is described as "CPJ first operand, second operand" in assembly language.
The data (value) corresponding to the second operand is subtracted from the data (value) corresponding to the operand, and the two data (values) are compared. Note that CPJ is an operation code, the first operand is before the comma in the operands, and the second operand is after the comma.

If the first operand and the second operand are the same, the CPJ instruction and the CP instruction have the same function of comparison and operation of the comparison itself, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. For example, "CPJ r,g" is an instruction to compare the value of the r register and the value of the g register, like "CP r,g". Also, "CPJ p, n" is the same as "CP p, n",
This instruction compares the value of the p register with the immediate value n. Also, "CPJ q, n" is equivalent to "CP
q, n" is an instruction that compares the value of the q register with the immediate value n. Also, "CPJ r
, (vw)” is an instruction that compares the value of the r register with the value stored in the direct address area specified by the immediate value vw, like “CP r, (vw)”.

Similarly, regarding the function of the comparison itself and the behavior of the comparison itself, "CPJ r, (jj)
” and “CP r, (jj)”, “CPJ r, (jj+)” and “CP r, (jj+)”
, "CPJ r, (jj+d)" and "CP r, (jj+d)", "CPJ r, (jj+
p)” and “CP r, (jj+p)”, “CPJ (vw), n” and “CP (vw),
n”, “CPJ (jj), n” and “CP (jj), n”, “CPJ (jj+), n
” and “CP (jj+), n”, “CPJ (jj+d), n” and “CP (jj+d)
, n”, “CPJ (jj+p),n” and “CP (jj+p),n”, “CPJ rr
, gg" and "CP rr, gg", and "CPJ rr, mn" and "CP rr, mn" are
are the same.

However, by executing the CP instruction, the jump status flag (JF) is set to the same value C as the carry flag (CF) and changes in the same manner, whereas by executing the CPJ instruction, the jump status flag ( JF) is set to the same value Z as the zero flag (ZF) and changes in the same manner. When the comparison results in the CPJ instruction match (when the subtraction result is zero), the value Z of the zero flag (ZF) is set to "1", and when they do not match (when the subtraction result is not zero) , the value Z of the zero flag (ZF) is not set and is "0"
become. Therefore, the CPJ instruction is often used to determine whether values match immediately before a branch instruction (jump instruction) is executed.

In this way, even if the comparison result (subtraction result) is the same between the two types of comparison instructions, the CPJ instruction and the CP instruction, the jump status flag (JF) changes differently. By providing two types of comparison instructions, the CPJ instruction that emphasizes the zero flag and the CP instruction that emphasizes the carry flag, and using them according to the type of branch instruction (jump instruction) following the comparison instruction, program development is facilitated. become easier.

Also, the CPJ and CP instructions basically have the same number of cycles and the same word length if the first and second operands are the same. For example, "CPJ(vw),n" and "C
P(vw),n” are both instructions that compare the value stored in the direct address area specified by the immediate value vw with the immediate value n, but both are 6 cycles and 5 bytes long. . Also,
For example, "CPJ r, (jj+p)" and "CP r, (jj+p)" are both instructions that compare the value of the r register with the value stored in the area of the addition address "jj+p".
Both are 4 cycles and 2 bytes long.

However, as an exception, "CPJ r, (jj+d)" differs from "CP r, (jj+d)" in that it has a length of 4 cycles and 3 bytes regardless of the type of jj register.

[Example 2-4]
Example 2-4 of FIG. 116 is an instruction table illustrating a CPW instruction that compares 2-byte data (values) among comparison instructions. The CPW instruction is written in assembly language as "CPW 1st operand,
The data (value) corresponding to the second operand is subtracted from the data (value) corresponding to the first operand, and the two-byte data (value) are compared. In addition,
CPW is an opcode, the first operand before the comma in the operands and the second operand after the comma. Here, the address specified in parentheses indicates the top address of the 2-byte area.

By executing the CPW instruction, the jump status flag (JF) is set to the same value C as the carry flag (CF). If the subtraction result of the CP instruction is less than zero (negative), the value C of the carry flag (CF) becomes "1", and if it is greater than or equal to zero (0 or positive), the value C of the carry flag (CF) becomes "0". Therefore, the CPW instruction is often used to determine the magnitude of a value immediately before executing a branch instruction (jump instruction).

Note that if the first and second operands of the CPW and LDW instructions are the same,
The word length is basically the same. This may make the program easier to design.

"CPW (vw), mn" is an 8-cycle, 6-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the direct address area specified by the immediate value vw with the immediate value mn (2 bytes).

"CPW (jj), mn" is a 6-cycle, 4-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register with the immediate value mn.

"CPW (jj+), mn" is a 7-cycle, 4-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register with the immediate value mn, and after the comparison, it is stored in the jj register. increment the address by 2.

"CPW (jj+d), mn" is an instruction for comparing the value stored in the area of addition address "jj+d" with the immediate value mn. This instruction is 7 cycles and 5 bytes long.

"CPW (jj+p), mn" is a 7-cycle, 4-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the area of addition address "jj+p" with the immediate value mn.

The comparison instructions have been described above. "CP rr, mn" may be referred to as a first comparison instruction. The first comparison instruction changes the jump status flag (JF) and carry flag (CF) to the same value.

Instructions "CPJ p, n" and "CPJ q, n" that compare the register value and the immediate value (1 byte) and change the jump status flag (JF) and the zero flag (ZF) to the same value are used as the second comparison instruction. sometimes called

``CP p, n'' and ``CP q, n'' that compare the value of the register and the immediate value (1 byte) and change the jump status flag (JF) and the carry flag (CF) to the same value as the third comparison instruction sometimes called

"CP
r, (vw)""CP r, (jj+d)""CP rr, (vw)""CP rr, (
jj+d)" is sometimes called a fourth comparison instruction.

[Branch instruction (example 3)]
A branch instruction (jump instruction) is an instruction to branch (jump, move) the address of an instruction (process) to be executed from the address (branch source) of the branch instruction to a predetermined address (in ROM) of the branch destination. In this embodiment, the branch instruction unconditionally jumps the address of the instruction to be executed next to the branch destination address (in ROM) corresponding to the operand, or the condition corresponding to the first operand is If it is established, it jumps to the branch destination address (in ROM) corresponding to the second operand. If the condition corresponding to the first operand is not satisfied, the instruction next to the branch instruction is proceeded to (not branched).

A branch instruction uses six flags (R
Of the flags other than BS and IMF), the jump status flag (JF) is set to "1", but the zero flag (ZF), carry flag (CF), and half carry flag (HF) are set to "1".
, the sign flag (SF) and the overflow flag (VF) are kept unchanged.

[Example 3-1]
Example 3-1 in FIG. 117 is an instruction table exemplifying a JRR instruction in which processing jumps from the address of the branch instruction at the branch source to an address close to the branch destination, among the branch instructions. In the JRR instruction,
Jumps to a closer address in the address space than the JR instruction, which will be described later.
Here, the JRR instruction is expressed as "JRR 1st operand, 2nd operand" in assembly language.
When the condition corresponding to the first operand is satisfied, the process (the instruction to be executed next) jumps (conditionally branches) to the address corresponding to the second operand. Also, if the condition corresponding to the first operand is not satisfied, the instruction next to the branch instruction is directly proceeded (not branched).
JRR is an operation code, the first operand is before the comma in the operand, and the second operand is after the comma. It should be noted that the conditions for branching of the JRR instruction include only conditions relating to the state (T or F) of the jump status flag (JF), other zero flags (ZF),
It does not include conditions on the states of the Carry Flag (CF), Half Carry Flag (HF), Sign Flag (SF), and Overflow Flag (VF).

"JRR T,$+1+k" is a 4-cycle, 1-byte length instruction, and when the jump status flag (JF) is "1" (JF=1 (true, T)), The process jumps to "PC+1+k". "PC+1+k" is obtained by adding 1+k to the current value $ of the PC register, which is the program counter. Here, the range of k of the JRR instruction is a narrow range of -12 to -2 or +1 to +15 (range of smaller absolute values), and the range of k of the JR instruction described later (-128 to +127) narrower than Therefore, the word length of this JRR instruction is shortened by 1 byte. Since the word length is 1 byte, 1 is added to k at the jump destination address "PC+1+k".

"JRR F, $+1+k" is the same instruction as "JRR T, $+1+k", but
When the jump status flag (JF) is "0" (JF=0 (false, F)), the process jumps to the jump destination address "PC+1+k". Similarly, k is from -12 to -
2 or a narrow range from +1 to +15.

As described above, the range of k is from -12 to -2 or from +1 to +15. Become. Jump to an address outside this range using a JR instruction, which will be described later.

[Example 3-2]
Example 3-2 of FIG. 117 is an instruction table illustrating, among branch instructions, a JR instruction whose processing can jump from the address of the branch instruction at the branch source to the address far from the branch destination. The JR instruction can jump to a farther address in the address space than the JRR instruction. Here, when the JR instruction is described as "JR operand" in assembly language, the process (the instruction to be executed next) unconditionally jumps (unconditionally branch) to the address corresponding to the operand, and "JR If the condition corresponding to the first operand is met, the process jumps (conditionally branches) to the address corresponding to the second operand. Also, if the condition corresponding to the first operand is not satisfied, the instruction next to the branch instruction is directly proceeded (not branched). JR is an operation code, the first operand is before the comma in the operand, and the second operand is after the comma. The branching conditions of the JR instruction do not include conditions on the state (T or F) of the jump status flag (JF).

"JR $+2+k" is a 3-cycle, 2-byte long instruction, and the process unconditionally jumps to the jump destination address "PC+2+k". "PC+2+k" is obtained by adding 2+k to the current value $ of the PC register, which is the program counter. where JR
The range of k for the instruction is a wide range of -128 to +127 (range of larger absolute values), which is wider than the range of k for the JRR instruction (-12 to -2 or +1 to +15). Therefore, this JR instruction can jump to an address farther than the JRR instruction, and the word length of this JR instruction is 2 bytes longer than that of the JRR instruction. Since it is 2 bytes long, 2 is added to k.

"JR Z, $+2+k""JR NZ, $+2+k""JR C, $+2+k""J
R NC, $+2+k" is a 3-cycle, 2-byte long instruction, and when certain conditions corresponding to the first operand (ZF=1, ZF=0, CF=1, CF=0, respectively) are satisfied, ,
As with "JR $+2+k", the process jumps to the jump destination address "PC+2+k".

"JR LE, $ + 3 + k""JR GT, $ + 3 + k""JR M, $ + 3 + k""
JR P, $+3+k""JR SLT, $+3+k""JR SGE, $+3+k""
JR SLE, $+3+k""JR SGT, $+3+k""JR VS, $+3+k"
"JR VC, $+3+k" is a 4-cycle, 3-byte long instruction with specific conditions corresponding to the first operand (CF=1 or ZF=1, CF=0 and ZF=0, respectively, SF
= 1, SF = 0, exclusive OR of SF and VF is 1, exclusive OR of SF and VF is 0, SF
and VF are 1 or ZF=1, SF and VF are exclusive OR 0 and ZF=0
, VF=1, VF=0), the process jumps to the jump destination address "PC+3+k". "PC+3+k" is the current value $ of the PC register, which is the program counter.
is obtained by adding 3+k to . Here, since k is a larger absolute value between -128 and +127, these JR instructions can jump to addresses farther than the JRR instructions, and the word length of these JR instructions is It is 3 bytes longer than the JRR instruction. In addition,
Since it is 3 bytes long, 3 is added to k.

A branch instruction has been described above, but a JR instruction of 2-byte length that can cause processing to jump to an address far from the address of the branch instruction is sometimes called a first branch instruction. A 1-byte JRR instruction that jumps processing to an address close to the address of the branch instruction is sometimes called a second branch instruction. The condition for branching is The first branch instruction (JR instruction) does not include a condition regarding the state of the jump status flag (T or F), but the second branch instruction (JRR instruction) includes a condition regarding the state of the jump status flag.

[Call instruction (example 4)]
A call instruction is an instruction for calling a subroutine at a predetermined address of a callee from a caller program. In this embodiment, the call instruction calls the subroutine at the address corresponding to the operand, or calls the subroutine at the address corresponding to the second operand when the condition corresponding to the first operand is satisfied. .

The call instruction uses six flags from the 2nd to 7th bits of the flag register 1200 (
flags other than RBS and IMF) remain unchanged.

[Example 4-1]
Example 4-1 in FIG. 118 is an instruction table illustrating a CALL instruction that can call a subroutine at an arbitrary address (an address in ROM) among the call instructions. Here, when the CALL instruction is described as "CALL operand" in assembly language, it unconditionally calls the subroutine of the address corresponding to the operand, and "CALL first operand,
second operand", when the condition corresponding to the first operand is satisfied, the subroutine of the address corresponding to the second operand is called. Note that CALL is an operation code, and the operand before the comma is the first operand, and the operand after the comma is the second operand.

"CALL mn""CALLrr""CALL" that can call subroutines unconditionally
(vw)” “CALL (jj)” “CALL (jj+)” “CALL (jj+d
)” and “CALL (jj+p)” respectively indicate that the value of the address of the subroutine to be called (start address, in ROM) is the direct value mn, the value stored in the rr register, and the direct address specified by the direct value vw. The value stored in the area, the value stored in the area of the address specified by the jj register, the value stored in the area of the address specified by the jj register, the value stored in the area of the addition address "jj+d", This is an instruction that becomes a value stored in the area of addition address "jj+p". These CALL instructions are 7 cycles and 4 bytes long, 6
9 cycles and 4 bytes long, 7 cycles and 2 bytes long, 8 cycles and 2 bytes long, 8 cycles and 3 bytes long, 8 cycles and 2 bytes long.

"CALL T, mn""CALL F, mn""CALL Z, mn""CALL
NZ, mn, CALL C, mn, and CALL NC, mn are JF=1 condition, JF=0 condition, ZF=1 condition, ZF=0 condition, CF=1 condition, This is an instruction to call the subroutine at the address of the immediate value mn when the condition CF=0 is satisfied. Each of these CALL instructions has a word length of 4 bytes. The number of cycles of these CALL instructions is 7 cycles when the conditions are met, and 5 cycles when the conditions are not met.

[Example 4-2]
Example 4-2 in FIG. 118 is an instruction table illustrating CALLT instruction and CALLR instruction which cannot call a subroutine at an arbitrary address among call instructions. Here, the CALLT and CALLR instructions are respectively "CALLT operand" and "CALL operand" in assembly language.
R Operand” and unconditionally calls a subroutine at an address derived based on the operand or corresponding to the operand. CALLT and CALLR are opcodes.

"CALLT n" is a 7-cycle, 1-byte long instruction that unconditionally calls the n-th registered (address registered) subroutine in the vector table. where the direct value n
indicates a value from 0 to 15 with 4 bits (n=0 to 15). The vector table is stored in ROM
111b in the program management area at the end of the address space (Fig. 109).
reference). In the vector table, subroutine addresses (head addresses) are registered (defined) and stored in order. Since the vector table is available, the operand is the direct value m
Instead of n, it becomes a direct value n (4 bits), and the word length of "CALLT n" is shortened to 1 byte. However, there is an upper limit (16) to the number of addresses (subroutine addresses) that can be registered in the vector table.

"CALLR mn" unconditionally calls the subroutine at the address of the immediate value mn. The address of the called subroutine that can be called by this instruction is limited to a predetermined range (for example, 4000h to 53FFh). "CALLR mn" is, for example, the direct value mn
is 6 cycles and 2 bytes long when the range of mn is from 4000h to 4BFFh. Thus, when the immediate value mn is large, the number of cycles and word length of this instruction are large. If the direct value mn is large, it may be possible to call a subroutine located in the second ROM area (outside program area) with a large address.

When the operand related to the address of the call destination is the immediate value mn or the immediate value n, the CALLT instruction, CALLR instruction, and CALL instruction are 1 byte long, 2 byte long (or 3 byte long), 4 byte long, in this order. become long. That is, when the operand related to the address of the call destination is a direct value, the smaller the number of addresses (addresses of subroutines) that can be called (the more the number is limited), the shorter the word length of the call instruction. (instruction size is smaller). The CALLT instruction uses a vector table, the CALLR instruction has a limited range of addresses that can be called, and the CALL instruction can call any address.
order of commands.

In the above, the call instruction has been explained, but a specific CALL instruction (4-byte length "CALL mn""CALL
T, mn""CALL F, mn""CALL Z, mn""CALL NZ, mn""
"CALL C, mn" and "CALL NC, mn") are sometimes referred to as first call instructions.
In the first call instruction, the address of the call destination is designated by the immediate value mn. Among these CALL instructions, only "CALL mn", which can call a subroutine unconditionally, is the first
It may be a call instruction. Although there are restrictions on the addresses of subroutines (call destinations) that can be called, a 2-byte or 3-byte CALLR instruction whose word length is shorter than that of the first call instruction may be called a second call instruction. Furthermore, a 1-byte CALLT instruction, which can call only subroutines registered (addresses are registered) in the vector table and has a shorter word length than the second call instruction, is sometimes called a third call instruction.

[Return instruction (example 5)]
A return instruction (return instruction) is an instruction to return from a subroutine, an interrupt process, or the like. In this embodiment, the return instruction returns unconditionally or returns when the condition corresponding to the operand is satisfied.

The return instruction consists of six flags (R
flags other than BS and IMF) are left unchanged or set to specified values.

[Example 5-1]
Example 5-1 of FIG. 119 is an instruction table illustrating a RET instruction that does not involve restoring the program status word PSW, which is the data of the flag register 1200, among return instructions. Here, the RET instruction unconditionally returns from a subroutine when described as "RET" in assembly language, and returns when the condition corresponding to the operand is satisfied when described as "RET operand". RET is an opcode. If the condition is not satisfied, the instruction next to the return instruction is proceeded as is (does not return).

"RET" is a 6-cycle, 1-byte long instruction that unconditionally returns from a subroutine.

"RET T""RETF""RETZ""RETNZ""RETC""RE
TNC" is the specific condition corresponding to the operands (JF=1, JF=0, ZF=1, respectively).
, ZF=0, CF=1, CF=0) is established, the process returns. The word lengths of these RET instructions are 2 bytes long, 2 bytes long, 1 byte long, 1 byte long, 1 byte long,
It is 1 byte long. The number of cycles of "RET T" and "RET F" is 7 cycles when the conditions are met, and 4 cycles when the conditions are not met. "RET Z""RET
The number of cycles of NZ, RET C, and RET NC is 6 cycles when the conditions are met, and 3 cycles when the conditions are not met.

[Example 5-2]
Example 5-2 of FIG. 119 is an instruction table illustrating RETI instruction and RETN instruction accompanied by restoration of program status word PSW among return instructions. Here, the RETI instruction and the RE
The TN instruction is written in assembly language as "RETI" and "RETN" without operands and returns unconditionally. Note that RETI and RETN are opcodes.

"RETI" and "RETN" are instructions of 7 cycles and 2 bytes long. "RETI"
is an instruction that restores the PSW from the stack and returns from interrupt processing or a subroutine of the CALLI instruction. Here, the CALLI instruction (not listed in the instruction table) is an instruction among the call instructions that calls a subroutine after saving the PSW to the stack and setting interrupt inhibition (IMF=0). "RETN" is an instruction to restore the PSW from the stack and return from the NMI interrupt processing. NMI interrupt processing (non-maskable interrupt processing) is interrupt processing that cannot be disabled and is forcibly executed.

[Output processing]
FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the procedure of output processing according to the fifth embodiment. The output processing according to the fifth embodiment is the output processing (FIG. 10) of the first embodiment to step A1619-
Only the test signal output processing of A1623 is deleted. In FIG. 120, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as the output process (FIG. 10) of the first embodiment, so the description is omitted. Note that the test signal output processing is executed in the out-of-region integration processing other than the output processing.

[Outside area integration processing]
FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the out-of-area integration process according to the fifth embodiment.
The out-of-area integration processing according to the fifth embodiment is obtained by adding test signal output processing (A10001) to the out-of-area integration processing (FIG. 57) of the first embodiment. In FIG. 121, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as the out-of-area integration process (FIG. 57) of the first embodiment, and description thereof is omitted. The out-of-area integration processing is the out-of-area processing as in the first embodiment, and is executed as an out-of-area integration processing program that is part of the out-of-area program.

After executing stack pointer switching (A9501 and A9502) and register saving (A9503), the game control device 100 executes a test signal output processing program corresponding to the test signal output processing (A10001) as part of the program outside the area. to run. If the test signal output process (A10001) is called as a subroutine from the out-of-area integration process in this way, the processing time required for switching stack pointers and saving/restoring registers can be saved.
If the output processing program, which is a program within the area, calls the test signal output processing, which is a program outside the area, as a subroutine, saving the flag register in the output process, switching the stack pointer in the test signal output process, and general-purpose It may be necessary to save and restore registers. In the first embodiment, since the test signal output processing is executed as part of the output processing program, which is a program within the area, it is necessary to save flag registers, switch stack pointers, and save and restore general registers do not have.

[Test signal output processing]
FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the procedure of test signal output processing according to the fifth embodiment. The test signal output processing is executed as a subroutine of the out-of-region integration processing (FIG. 121).

The game control device 100 first loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the data to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. The synthesized data is output (A10101). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A10
102).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, output the synthesized data to (A10103). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A101
04). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A10105).

The processing of steps A10101-A10105 is step A of the output processing of the first embodiment.
1619-A1623. However, in this embodiment, the test signal output processing is executed as a test signal output processing program that is part of the out-of-region program corresponding to the out-of-region processing. On the other hand, the output processing is executed as an output processing program that is part of the intra-region program corresponding to the intra-region processing. In the processing of steps A10101-A10105, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1-5 is read (loaded) from the work area within the RAM area.

[Program list]
123 to 139 show the CPU 111a (C
4 is a program listing illustrating the program structure of a program executed by the PU core 102); 123 to 139 show the program structure only as an example, and can be modified, such as deletion or addition of instructions (code), as appropriate. Each program list is an assembly language instruction (source code) that supports Z80, an 8-bit microprocessor.
, which corresponds one-to-one to the machine language instructions (machine code) stored in the ROM 111b, except for pseudo-instructions (instructions for the assembler). All instructions are included in the instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 as machine language instructions.

The description of one line in each program list is the "line number" added for convenience from the left side.
, “assembly language instruction (code)”, “word length of instruction (instruction size, instruction length)”, and “comment” added for convenience of explanation. The number on the right side of the semicolon ";" is the "word length", and the number on the right side is the "comment". "Assembly language instructions (code)"
As mentioned above, the "opcode" that indicates the operation content (calculation content), the "operand" that is the target of the instruction
divided into Labels and hexadecimal numbers (...h,
. . . h etc.) means direct value n or direct value mn. Note that the program list instructions are
Unless there is a call instruction to call a subroutine or a branch instruction (jump instruction), the program list is basically executed in the order of line numbers (from the smallest to the largest) from top to bottom of the program list.

123 to 135 are included in the programs in the first ROM area (first program storage area), and the programs in FIGS. 136 to 139 are included in the second ROM area (second program storage area).

[Main processing program]
FIG. 123 is a program list showing a program structure of part of the main processing program corresponding to the main processing (FIG. 5A) according to the fifth embodiment.

At line number 0510, interrupts are prohibited (code "DI") corresponding to A1001 of the main processing.

At line number 0520, the value "29FFh" is transferred to the SP register as a stack pointer (code "LD SP, 29FFH"), corresponding to A1002 of the main processing.

At line number 0530, a register bank selector (
RBS) with 0 (code "LD RBS, 0"). This sets register bank 0.

At line number 0540, in response to A1004 of the main process, RAM11
Transfer and set "2800h" as the top address of 1c (code "LD IY, 2
800H"). Note that in this embodiment, not only the upper address but also the entire top address (including the lower address) are set.

At line number 0550, although it may be included in the processing of A1004 of the main processing, the start address of the data area (for the user program) of the ROM 111b is set to "5000" in the DP register.
h” is transferred and set (code “LD DP, 5000H”).

Line numbers 0560 and 0570 correspond to A1005 of the main process. line number 05
60, the direct value n (value meaning stop firing) corresponding to the label C_SHOT_NG is set to A
Transfer to register (code "LD A,C_SHOT_NG").

At line number 0570, the value of register A is output to port C_OUT01 (that is, the port with the number corresponding to label C_OUT01) (code "OUT (C_OUT0
1), A').

At line number 0580, port C_INPUT1 (
That is, the numerical value is input to the A register from the port of the numerical value corresponding to the label C_INPUT1 (code "IN A, (C_INPUT1)"). The port here is the first input port 122 which takes in the signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 . Although omitted, in the next line number 0590, port C_INPUT2 which is the second input port 123 to take in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 (that is, port C_INPUT2) similarly corresponds to A1006 of the main processing. , the numerical number port corresponding to the label C_INPUT2)
A numerical value may be input to the B register or the like from .

At line number 0610, the program status word PSW, which is the data (value) of the flag register 1200, is saved in the internal stack area (P
USH) (code "PUSH PSW").

In line number 0620, corresponding to A1053 of the main process, a safety device information initialization processing subroutine for initializing safety device information related to safety devices is called and executed (code "CALL P_SAFINI"). The code described as "CALL label" corresponds to "CALL mn" in the instruction table. The subroutine of the safety device information initialization process is an out-of-area program, and has a ROM internal address (head address) corresponding to the immediate value mn of the label P_SAFINI in the second ROM area (out-of-area program area). In this way, when calling an outside program from an inside program (main processing program), a specific CALL instruction is used to distinguish it from calling an inside program.

At line number 0630, the program status word PSW is returned (POP) in response to A1054 of the main processing.

Line numbers 0640 and 0650 correspond to A1055 of the main process. line number 06
At 40, the data table (RNDSET
) (label D_RNDSET) to the relative address "D_RNDSET-500
0h” and transferred to the HL register (code “LDD HL, D_RNDSET
-5000H"). A relative address is an address in the ROM based on the start address "5000h" of the data area for the user program. The code "LDD HL,
"D_RNDSET-5000H" corresponds to "LDD HL, mn" in the instruction table.

The LDD instruction uses the absolute address (2 bytes) from the beginning of the address space as the second operand.
instead of using a relative address (effectively 1 byte), the word length of the instruction is reduced by 1 byte compared to the normal LD instruction ("LD ff, mn") decrease).

Line number 0650 calls and executes a subroutine that sets up the device (here the random number generator) (code "CALLR P_DEVSET"). Note that "CALLR
The code described as "label" corresponds to "CALLR mn" in the instruction table. This subroutine has an internal ROM address (head address) corresponding to the immediate value mn of the label P_DEVSET.

At line number 0670, interrupts are disabled (code "DI") corresponding to A1056 of the main processing.

Line numbers 0680 and 0690 correspond to A1057 of the main process. line number 06
At 80, a subroutine corresponding to game stop determination processing for determining whether or not the game is stopped is called and executed (code "CALLT P_MSSTA_CHK"). In addition,"
The code described as "CALLT label" corresponds to "CALLT n" in the instruction table.
The value of the label P_MSSTA_CHK becomes n, and the subroutine RO
The intra-M address is registered at the nth position in the vector table.

At line number 0690, the jump status flag (JF) is not set and is "0".
(JF=0: game is stopped), jump to the address in ROM corresponding to label MAIN80, and execute the instructions after line number 0740 (code "JRRF,
MAIN80"). The jump destination (label MAIN80) is the code "JRR F, MAI
N80” is a close address that is +9 bytes (+16 bytes or less) away from the address of “N80”. Note that the code described as "JRR F, label" is equivalent to "JRR F, $+1+k
” corresponds to If the jump status flag (JF) is set and is "1" (J
F=1: When the game is not stopped), the command moves to the next line number 0700.

At line number 0700, corresponding to A1058 of the main process, the program status word PSW, which is the data of the flag register 1200, is saved (PUSH
) (code “PUSH PSW”).

At line number 0710, corresponding to A1059 of the main processing, a subroutine of performance display editing processing for calculating performance information such as base values is called and executed (code "CALL P
_SHKSHM"). The subroutine of the performance display editing process is an out-of-area program, and has a ROM internal address (head address) corresponding to the direct value mn of the label P_SHKSHM in the second ROM area (out-of-area program area). In this way, when calling an outside program from an inside program (main processing program), a specific CALL instruction is used to distinguish it from calling an inside program.

At line number 0720, the program status word PSW is returned (POP) in response to A1060 of the main processing.

At line number 0740, an interrupt is permitted (code "EI") corresponding to A1061 of the main processing.

At line number 0750, by XORing the values of the W registers,
Clear the value of the W register and set it to 0 (code "XOR W, W").

Line numbers 0770 to 0830 correspond to A1062 of the main process, and it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred. At line number 0770, port C_
Enter the value from INPUT1 into the A register (code "IN A, (C_INPUT1
)”).

At line number 0780, the value of the A register and the value C_P indicating that the power failure monitoring signal is off
DWNSW (for example, 00000001B in negative logic) is ANDed (code "AND
A, C_PDWNSW"). The logical AND operation result of row number 0810 becomes zero if the power failure monitoring signal is on (for example, 00000000B in negative logic) in the power failure occurrence state. In addition,
When the operation result is zero, the zero flag (ZF) is set to "1", and when the operation result is not zero, the zero flag (ZF) is not set and becomes "0" (NZ).

At line number 0790, if the operation result at line number 0780 is not zero but NZ (that is, if a power failure does not occur), jump to the ROM address (branch destination) corresponding to label MAIN70, and line number 0670 onward. Execute the instruction (code "JR NZ, MAIN70
”). The code described as "JR NZ, label" is the same as "JR NZ, $
+2+k". The jump destination (label MAIN70) is the code "JR NZ,M
AIN70” is a distant address that is -17 bytes (-12 bytes or less) away from the address of "AIN70", and it is an address that cannot be jumped by the JRR instruction. However, in this JR order, JR
It can jump a greater distance in the address space than the R instruction (for example). line number 0780
is zero (that is, in a power failure state), the command of line number 0810 is entered. When not jumping, it moves to the instruction of the next line number 0810 .

From line number 0810 to line number 0830, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal has been kept on for the number of checks.

In line number 0810, when the power failure monitoring signal is in the ON state (power failure has occurred), the value of the W register indicating the number of times the ON state has been detected is updated by +1 (increased by 1) (code "INC W").
).

At line number 0820, the value of the W register and the number of checks "2" are compared (code "CP W, 2"). Note that this code corresponds to "CP p,n" in the instruction table. When the value of the W register is smaller than the check count "2", the carry flag (CF) and the jump status flag (JF) are set to "1" as a result of the comparison operation.

At line number 0830, when the jump status flag (JF) is set to "1" (when the ON state detection count has not reached the check count), jump to the ROM address corresponding to label MAIN90, Execute the instructions after line number 0770 (code "JRRT, MAIN90"). The code described as "JRR T, label" corresponds to "JRR T, $+2+k" in the instruction table. Jump status flag (JF
) is not set and is “0” (when the ON state detection count reaches the check count), the process moves to line number 0840 . When not jumping, it moves to the next line number 0840 instruction.

At line number 0840, interrupts are disabled (code "DI") corresponding to A1063 of the main process.

At line number 0850, corresponding to A1064 of the main processing, a subroutine for outputting OFF data to all output ports is called and executed (code "CALLR P_OUTCLR
”). This subroutine has an internal ROM address (head address) corresponding to the label P_OUTCLR.

[Timer interrupt processing program]
FIG. 124 is a program list showing the program structure of the timer interrupt processing program corresponding to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) according to the fifth embodiment.

At line number 1000, 1 is transferred to the register bank selector (RBS) (code "LD RBS, 1") in response to timer interrupt processing A1301. Thus, register bank 1 is set.

At line number 1010, a predetermined register (D
register) to the upper address (28h) of the top address of the RAM (code "LD
D, 28H").

At line number 1020, similarly to line number 0540, "2800h" is transferred and set in the IY register as the entire top address of RAM 111c.

At line number 1030, in response to timer interrupt processing A1303, a subroutine corresponding to input processing is called and executed (code "CALLR P_INPUT"). A subroutine corresponding to input processing has an internal ROM address (head address) corresponding to the label P_INPUT.

Line numbers 1040 and 1050 correspond to A1304 of timer interrupt processing. In line number 1040, the value indicating that the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (the value stored in the area of the addition address "IY+R_SETMODE") is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (IY+R_SETMODE)"). ). addition address "IY+R_SETMO
DE" is the sum of the IY register value "2800h" (the top address of the RAM 111c, the reference address) and the offset value (direct value, relative address) corresponding to the label R_SETMODE. The added address "IY+label" indicates an address in the RAM. This code corresponds to "LD r, (jj+d)" in the instruction table. If the probability setting is neither changed nor confirmed, "0" is transferred to the A register and the jump status flag (JF
) is "1" (JF = 1), and when the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed, A
A value other than "0" is transferred to the register, and the jump status flag (JF) is "0" (JF=0).

At line number 1050, when the jump status flag (JF) is set to "1" (JF=1: neither changing the probability setting nor confirming the probability setting), the label TINT
10, and executes the instructions from line number 1090 onwards (code "JRRT, TINT10"). The code described as "JRR T, label" corresponds to "JRR T, $+1+k" in the instruction table. Jump destination (label TIN
T10) is +5 bytes (+1
6 bytes or less). When the jump status flag (JF) is not set and is "0" (JF = 0: during probability setting change or probability setting confirmation),
Move to the next line number 1060 instruction.

Line numbers 1060 and 1070 correspond to A1305 of timer interrupt processing. At line number 1060, a subroutine corresponding to probability setting change/confirmation processing is called and executed (code "CALLR P_SET_DISP"). A subroutine corresponding to the probability setting change/confirmation process has an internal ROM address (top address) corresponding to the label P_SET_DISP.

At line number 1070, an unconditional jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label TINT30, and the instructions from line number 1310 onward are executed (code "JR TINT30").
The code described as "JR label" corresponds to "JR $+2+k" in the instruction table. The jump destination (label TINT30) is a distant address that is +40 bytes (+17 bytes or more) away from the address of the code "JR TINT30", and is an address that cannot be jumped with the JRR instruction.

From line number 1090 to line number 1110, output processing (
A1306), payout command transmission processing (A1307), winning opening switch/error monitoring processing (A1308) subroutines are called and executed by the CALLR instruction (
Code "CALLR P_OUTPUT""CALLRP_PAYCOM""CALL
RP_PRZERR").

Line numbers 1120 and 1130 correspond to A1309 of timer interrupt processing. At line number 1120, a subroutine corresponding to game stop determination processing for determining whether or not the game is stopped is called and executed (code "CALLT P_MSSTA_CHK"). This subroutine has an internal ROM address (first address) associated with the value n of the label P_MSSTA_CHK (nth registered) in the vector table.

At line number 1130, the jump status flag (JF) is not set and is "0".
(JF=0: game is stopped), jump to the ROM address corresponding to label TINT20, and execute the instructions after line number 1190 (code "JRRF,
TINT20"). The jump destination (label TINT20) is this code "JRR F,T
INT20” address +9 bytes (+16 bytes or less) away. If the jump status flag (JF) is set to "1" (JF=1: game is not stopped), the command of the next line number 1140 is entered.

From line number 1140 to line number 1170, respectively, special game processing (A1310), character game processing (A1311), general-purpose game processing (A1312) in timer interrupt processing,
A subroutine corresponding to the segment LED editing process (A1313) is called by the CALLR instruction and executed (code "CALLR P_TGAMEPRC""CALLR
P_YGAMEPRC""CALLRP_FGAMEPRC""CALLR P_SE
GEDIT").

From line number 1190 to line number 1240, safety device-related processing (A1314), magnet tampering monitoring processing (A1315), board radio tampering monitoring processing (A13) in timer interrupt processing, respectively.
16) Call and execute subroutines corresponding to vibration fraud monitoring processing (A1317), abnormal discharge monitoring processing (A1318), and external information editing processing (A1319) by the CALLR instruction (codes "CALLR P_SAFSET", "CALLR P_MAGERR", "
CALLR P_JAMERR, CALLR P_VIBERR, CALLR P_
PAYERR""CALLRP_INFEDIT").

Line numbers 1250 and 1260 correspond to timer interrupt processing A1320. At line number 1250, a subroutine corresponding to game stop determination processing for determining whether or not the game is stopped is called and executed (code "CALLT P_MSSTA_CHK").

At line number 1260, the jump status flag (JF) is not set and is "0".
(JF=0: the game is stopped), jump to the ROM address corresponding to the label TINT30, and execute the instructions after the line number 1310 (code "JRRF,
TINT30"). The jump destination (label TINT30) is this code "JRR F,T
INT30” address +9 bytes (+16 bytes or less) away. If the jump status flag (JF) is set to "1" (JF=1: game is not stopped), the command of the next line number 1270 is entered.

At line number 1270, the program status word PSW is saved (PUSH) in the internal stack area (code "PUSH PS
W").

At line number 1280, in response to timer interrupt processing A1322, a subroutine corresponding to outside area integration processing such as updating the safety device counter value (calculating the number of difference balls) and performing display control of the performance display device 152 is called. execute (code "CALL P_OUTAREA")
. A subroutine corresponding to the out-of-area integration process is an out-of-area program labeled P_OU.
The ROM internal address (head address) corresponding to the direct value mn of TAREA is provided in the second ROM area (outside area program area). In this way, when calling the outside program from the inside program (timer interrupt processing program), a specific CALL instruction is used to distinguish from calling the inside program. This can improve the efficiency of program development.

At line number 0630, the program status word PSW is returned (POP) in response to A1323 of timer interrupt processing.

At line number 1310, the timer interrupt processing program returns (code "RET
I").

In addition, as many subroutines called from the timer interrupt processing program of FIG. Figure game processing, accessory game processing, normal figure game processing, segment LED editing processing, safety device related processing, magnet fraud monitoring processing, board radio fraud monitoring processing, vibration fraud monitoring processing, abnormal discharge monitoring processing, external information editing processing The corresponding subroutine is an in-area program located in the first ROM area in the address space.
These subroutines contained in the in-region program are called from the timer interrupt processing program contained in the in-region program by a CALLT instruction or a CALLR instruction with a limited address but a short word length. This reduces the program capacity. In addition, without using a specific CALL instruction (first call instruction) of 7 cycles and 4 bytes in which the address of the callee is specified by the direct value mn, the CALLR whose cycle number or word length is smaller than that of the specific CALL instruction By using the instruction (second call instruction) or the CALLT instruction (third call instruction), the processing of calling these subroutines contained in the local program is made efficient and the processing is speeded up.

On the other hand, as a subroutine called from the timer interrupt processing program, the subroutine corresponding to the out-of-area integration process is an out-of-area program arranged in the second ROM area in the address space. A subroutine that is a program outside the area (a subroutine for integration processing outside the area) is distinguished from a subroutine that is a program inside the area by using a specific CALL instruction (the first
Call instruction) calls from the program in the area (here, the timer interrupt processing program). This can improve the efficiency of program development.

As will be described later, subroutines included in the out-of-area program (outside-area integration processing program) and further subroutines included in the out-of-area program (test signal output processing program, performance display device control processing program, difference ball confirmation processing program, CALLT and CALLR instructions are not used when calling the safety device operation monitoring program).
Only LL instructions are used to distinguish them from calls to subroutines contained within programs within regions. This also makes it possible to improve the efficiency of program development.

[Special game processing program]
The upper part of FIG. 125 is a program list showing the program structure of the special figure game processing program corresponding to the special figure game processing (FIG. 16) according to the fifth embodiment. The special game processing program has a top address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_TGAMEPRC, and in step A1310 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9), the CALLR instruction (line number 114
0).

From line number 1510 to line number 1530, the subroutines corresponding to the starting opening switch monitoring process (A2600), the specific area switch monitoring process (A2601), and the upper prize winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special game process are called CALLR. Called and executed by instructions (codes "CALLR P_SIDOSW""CALLRP_VSW""C
ALLR P_CNTUSW").

Line number 1540 and line number 1550 correspond to A2603 of special figure game processing. At line number 1540, "R_TGAME+1" (immediate value n) is transferred to the HL register with the lower address and the 8th to 15th bits of the IY register as the upper address (28h) (code "LDY HL, R_TGAME+1"). Note that the code "LDY HL, R_TG
AME+1" corresponds to "LDY jj,n" in the instruction table. where the label R_TGA
ME indicates the offset address (offset value based on "2800h") of the special game process number area that stores the special game process number (A2606), and the address "R_TGAME+1" obtained by adding 1 to the address is Indicates the top address of the special figure game processing timer area which is a 2-byte area (here, the offset value based on "2800h"). Therefore, the value of the HL register is the absolute address of the special game processing timer area.

At line number 1550, a 2-byte decrement processing subroutine is called and executed (code "CALLT P_DECWORD"). By the 2-byte decrement processing here, if the value of the address area (special game processing timer area) specified by the HL register is not 0, 1 is subtracted. In this way, if the special game processing timer is not timed out and is not 0, it will be updated by -1. Note that the ROM internal address of the subroutine called here is registered at the nth position in the vector table, where n is the value of the label P_DECWORD.

At line number 1560, when the jump status flag (JF) is not set and is "0" corresponding to A2604 of special game processing (JF = 0: special game processing timer has not timed up 0), the ROM corresponding to the label TGAMEPRC10
jump to the inner address and execute the instructions after line number 1620 (code "JRR F
, TGAME PRC10"). The jump destination (label TGAMEPRRC10) is a close address that is +6 bytes (+16 bytes or less) away from the address of this code "JRRF, TGAMEPRC10". The jump status flag (JF) is set and "
1" (JF = 1: when the special game processing timer is 0), the next line number 1570
move to the instruction of

At line number 1570, corresponding to A2605 of the special game process, the head address D_TGAMEPRC of the special game sequence branch table is transferred to the HL register (code "
LD HL, D_TGAME PRC"). This code is "LD ff, mn" in the instruction table
corresponds to The special figure game sequence branch table is an address table in which branch destination addresses are registered (enumerated).

The code from line number 1580 to line number 1600 is A2606 and A26 of special game processing
07.

In line number 1580, the value (special game processing number) stored in the special game processing number area (in RAM) of the addition address "IY + R_TGAME" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (IY + R_TGAME)" ). The label R_TGAME is an offset address of the special game process number area based on the value "2800h" of the IY register.

At line number 1590, a subroutine for 2-byte data acquisition processing is called and executed (
code "CALLT P_GETWORD"). Note that the ROM address of the subroutine called here is registered at the nth position in the vector table, where n is the value of the label P_GETWORD. By the 2-byte data acquisition process here, the branch destination address is acquired from the value of the HL register (top address of the special game sequence branch table) and the value of the A register (special game processing number) and stored in the HL register. . That is, the HL register stores the branch destination address obtained from the special game sequence branch table corresponding to the special game process number.

At line number 1600, as a subroutine call, the subroutine of the branch destination address stored in the HL register is called and executed (code "CALL HL"). Any of the processing from A2608 to A2613 of the special figure game processing is executed by the subroutine call.

In line number 1620, the address (label D_TZ1CTL) of the special figure 1 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 corresponding to A2614 of the special figure game process,
Convert to relative address "D_TZ1CTL-5000h" and transfer to HL register (
code "LDD HL, D_TZ1CTL-5000H").

At line number 1630, in response to A2615 of the special game process, a subroutine of symbol variation control processing for controlling the variation of symbols on the special symbol display is called and executed (code "CA
LLR P_ZGRCTL"). The subroutine of the pattern variation control process is labeled P_ZGR
It has an internal ROM address (head address) corresponding to the CTL.

In line number 1640, the address (label D_TZ2CTL) of the special figure 2 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 corresponding to A2616 of the special figure game process,
Convert to relative address "D_TZ2CTL-5000h" and transfer to HL register (
code "LDD HL, D_TZ2CTL-5000H").

At line number 1650, corresponding to A2617 of the special game process, the subroutine of symbol variation control process (ROM address corresponding to label P_ZGRCTL) is called and executed (code "CALLR P_ZGR_CTL").

At line number 1660, the lever solenoid 86
A subroutine for lever solenoid control processing for controlling the opening operation of b is called and executed (code "CALLR P_LEV_SOL"). The subroutine for the lever solenoid control process has an internal ROM address (top address) corresponding to the label P_LEV_SOL.

At line number 1660, the special game processing program returns to the timer interrupt processing program (code "RET").

[Special game sequence branch table]
The lower part of FIG. 125 is a program list explaining the special figure game sequence branch table according to the fifth embodiment. As described above, the special figure game sequence branch table has a head address corresponding to the label D_TGAMEPRC in the ROM, and is referred to for a subroutine call of special figure game processing. In addition, the branch table used in relation to the program in the area (here, the special game processing program), such as the special game sequence branch table, is treated as a program, and the area of the program in the area (first ROM area) ), it is placed in the area of the game control program other than the data area. A branch table used in the normal game process and the accessory game process is similarly arranged in the area of the game control program other than the data area.

There is a "DW" mnemonic in the code, but this mnemonic is a pseudo-instruction that specifies to the assembler that one stage of the table is 2-byte data.

The special game sequence branch table is shown as an instruction group of pseudo-instructions for setting the subroutine name (label) in association with the branch destination address value, but in fact, the special game sequence branch table is These instructions are sequentially set in the ROM 111b (
A list of branch destination address values (subroutine start addresses) to be stored). That is, labels (P_TUSUL, P_TSTOP, P_TDISPLY, P_TSFAN, P
_TSOPEN, P_TSZAN) is replaced with the value of the branch destination address in the ROM 11
It becomes a special figure game sequence branch table in 1b.

The pseudo-instruction of line number 2010 corresponds to the setting of the value of the branch destination address of the subroutine (ordinary special processing) of A2608 of the special game processing, and the pseudo-instruction of line number 2020 is A2609
Corresponds to the setting of the value of the branch destination address of the subroutine (processing during special figure fluctuation). In addition, the pseudo-instruction of the line number 2030 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine of A2610 (processing during special figure display), and the pseudo-instruction of the line number 2040 is the subroutine of A2611 (small hit opening pre-processing) Corresponds to setting the branch destination address value. In addition, the pseudo-instruction of line number 2050 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine of A2612 (processing during small hit opening),
The pseudo-instruction of line number 2060 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine of A2613 (small hit remaining ball processing).

[2-byte decrement processing program]
The first row in FIG. 126 is a program list showing the program structure of the 2-byte decrement processing program (subroutine) according to the fifth embodiment. The subroutine of the 2-byte decrement processing program is the n-th (n=label P_DECW
ORD value) and the code "CALLT P_DECW
ORD".

At line number 2110, the value stored in the address area (2-byte area) specified by the HL register is transferred to the WA register (code "LD WA, (HL)").

At line number 2120, the value transferred to the WA register is "0" and the zero flag (ZF)
is set and is "1" (ZF=1), return from the 2-byte decrement processing program to the calling processing program (code "RET Z").

At line number 2130, the value of the WA register is decremented by 1 and updated by -1 (code "DE
CWA"). This code will be executed if the value of the WA register is not "0".

At line number 2140, the value of the WA register is transferred to the address area (2-byte area) specified by the HL register (code "LD (HL), WA"). By this, H
The value stored in the address area specified by the L register is updated by 1 by subtracting 1 from before the execution of the 2-byte decrement process. The address specified by the HL register is the top address of the 2-byte area. If the value stored in this 2-byte area is "0", the zero flag (ZF) is set to "1".

At line number 2150, the 2-byte decrement processing program returns to the calling processing program (code "RET"). The zero flag returned to the calling processing program makes it possible to determine whether or not the value stored in the 2-byte area with the address specified by the HL register as the starting address is "0".

[2-byte data acquisition processing program]
The second row in FIG. 126 is a program list showing the program structure of the 2-byte data acquisition processing program (subroutine) according to the fifth embodiment. The subroutine of the 2-byte data acquisition processing program is the n-th (n=label P_GETWOR
D) and the code "CALLT P_GETWOR
called by D.

At line number 2210, the value of the A register is doubled and stored in the WA register (code "M
UL A, 2").

At line number 2220, the value in the WA register is added to the value in the HL register (code "AD
DHL, WA"). As a result, when the value of the HL register is the top address of the data table (for example, a special game sequence branch table) at the start of execution of the 2-byte data acquisition process, the value of the HL register added here is the data table. It functions as a pointer to the data (eg address value) in the

At line number 2230, the value stored in the area of the address specified by the HL register is
Transfer to register (code "LD HL, (HL)"). As a result, finally, one of the data (eg, branch destination address value) registered (defined) in the data table (eg, special game sequence branch table) is stored as 2-byte data in the HL register. Become.

At line number 2240, the 2-byte data acquisition processing program returns to the calling processing program (code "RET").

The reason for doubling the value of the A register at line number 2210 is that when the value of the HL register is the top address of an address table (for example, a special game sequence branch table), it is registered (defined) in the address table. This is because the address value (for example, the value of the branch destination address) is 2 bytes, so it is necessary to add an even value (for example, the special game processing number includes an odd value).

[1-byte data acquisition processing program]
The third row in FIG. 126 is a program list showing the program structure of the 1-byte data acquisition processing program (subroutine) according to the fifth embodiment. The subroutine of the 1-byte data acquisition processing program is n-th (n=label P_GETBYT
E), for example, the code "CAL
LT P_GETBYTE".

At line number 2310, the value in the A register is added to the value in the HL register (code "ADD
HL, A"). The value of the HL register after addition functions as a pointer indicating an address.

At line number 2320, the value stored in the address area specified by the HL register is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (HL)"). As a result, 1-byte data to be finally used is stored in the A register.

At line number 2330, the 1-byte data acquisition processing program returns to the calling processing program (code "RET").

[Special figure status check processing program]
The fourth stage of FIG. 126 is a program list showing the program structure of the special figure state check processing program (subroutine) according to the fifth embodiment. The subroutine of the special figure status check processing program is registered in the n-th (n = value of label P_TGMCHK) in the vector table, and for example, the code "CALLT
P_TGMCHK".

At line number 2410, the region of addresses (R_TGM
FLG area) bit 0 is copied to the carry flag (CF) (code "LD CF
, (R_TGMFLG). 0"). This code causes the inverted value of CF to be stored in the jump status flag (JF). For example, bit 0 of the R_TGMFLG field
is "1", then CF=1, and since the value to be transferred is "1", JF=0
become. For example, when bit 0 of the R_TGMFLG area is "0", CF=0,
Furthermore, JF=1 because the value to be transferred is "0".

In addition, as a result of executing the subroutine of the special figure state check process, CF = 0 and JF = 1
If so, it can be determined that it is not in the time saving state (no time saving), and if CF=1 and JF=0, it can be determined that it is in the time saving state (with time saving). Note that the determination itself can be made by either CF or JF.

At line number 2420, the special figure status check processing program returns to the calling processing program (code "RET").

[Starting port switch monitoring processing program]
FIG. 127 is a program list showing a program structure of part of the starting switch monitoring processing program corresponding to the starting switch monitoring processing (FIG. 17) according to the fifth embodiment. The starting port switch monitoring processing program starts at the top address corresponding to label P_SIDOSW (
ROM), and in step A2600 of the special game process (FIG. 16), CALL
It is a subroutine called by the R instruction (line number 1510).

In line number 2510, corresponding to A2701 of the start switch monitoring process, the address (label D_SIDCHK1) of the start gate 1 winning monitoring table is set to the relative address "D_SIDC".
HK1-5000h” and transferred to the HL register (code “LDD HL, D_S
IDCHK1-5000H"). As a result, the starting gate 1 prize-winning monitoring table is prepared.

At line number 2520, corresponding to A2702 of the startup switch monitoring process, a subroutine of hard random number acquisition process is called by the CALLR instruction and executed (code "CALL
RP_HRNDGET"). The hard random number acquisition subroutine is labeled P_HRN
It has an internal ROM address (head address) corresponding to DGET.

In the line number 2530, corresponding to A2703 of the starting opening switch monitoring process, when there is no starting opening winning in the target starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) and the carry flag (CF) is not set (in the case of NC) Then, it jumps to the ROM address corresponding to the label SIDOSW20 (code "JR NC, SIDOSW20"). The code described as "JR NC, label" corresponds to "JR NC, $+2+k" in the instruction table. Note that the carry flag (
CF) is set to "1" if there is a start-up win in the hardware random number acquisition process. If no jump, go to the next line number 2540 instruction.

Line numbers 2540 and 2550 correspond to A2704 of the starting switch monitoring process. In line number 2540, in order to determine whether the game state is to hit right, a subroutine of special figure state check processing is called and executed (code "CALLT P_TGMCH
K"). In this embodiment, the game state to hit to the right is a time saving state (specific game state AC), but when the specific game state C (c time saving) is used as a medium support as shown in FIG. 82, the specific game state C.
may be removed from the right-handed game state. When the carry flag (CF) is set by executing the subroutine of the special figure state check process (if CF=1), it is a time-saving state, that is, a game state to hit to the right.

At line number 2550, if the game state is to hit to the right, that is, if it is during special figure time saving, jump to the address in ROM corresponding to label SIDOSW10, line number 2590
Execute the following instructions (code "JR C, SIDOSW10"). If no jump, go to the next line number 2560 instruction.

At line number 2560, corresponding to A2705 of the starting port switch monitoring process, a right-handed instruction notification command is transferred to the BC register (code "LD BC, C_RIGHTCOM").
The right-handed instruction notification command is represented by a numerical value corresponding to the label C_RIGHTCOM.

Line number 2570 corresponds to A2706 of start switch monitoring processing, and calls and executes a subroutine of effect command setting processing (code "CALLT P_COMSET").
. The subroutine for effect command setting processing is registered in the n-th (n=value of label P_COMSET) in the vector table.

In line number 2590, corresponding to A2707 of the starting opening switch monitoring process, starting winning opening 36
Table address (label D_T1HOIN
F) is converted to a relative address "D_T1HOINF-5000h" and transferred to the HL register (code "LDD HL, D_T1HOINF-5000H").

In line number 2600, corresponding to A2708 of the start switch monitoring process, the subroutine of the special figure start switch common process is called and executed (code "CALLR P_TSID
OSW"). The subroutine of the special figure starting port switch common processing is labeled P_TSIDOSW
has an internal ROM address (head address) corresponding to .

[Hard random number acquisition processing program]
FIG. 128 is a program list showing the program structure of the hard random number acquisition processing program corresponding to the hard random number acquisition processing (A2702, A2710) according to the fifth embodiment.
The hard random number acquisition processing program is the start address (
ROM), for example, in step A2702 of the starting port switch monitoring process CA
It is a subroutine called by the LLR instruction (line number 2520).

At line number 3010, the carry flag (CF) is cleared to zero (code "CLR CF") as information indicating that there is no start winning prize.

From line number 3020 to line number 3040, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target switch. At line number 3020, after transferring the value stored in the address area currently specified in the HL register (for example, in the ROM data area) to the A register, the address in the HL register is updated to the next address. (Code "LD A, (HL+)"). Code "L
D A, (HL+)" corresponds to "LD r, (jj+)" in the instruction table.

The address currently stored (memorized) in the HL register is set by the line number 2510 of the starting port switch monitoring process program. The value stored in this address area is the switch bit data (non-zero determination value) of the target switch, for example, "00000001B". The target switch is the starter 1 switch 36a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2702, and the starter 2 switch 37a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2710.

In line number 3030, an area (R
AM) to obtain the rising edge information, switch bit data of the A register (judgment value)
and determine whether or not the switch is turned on (code "AND A,
(IY+R_SWCTL3+2)"). The addition address "IY+R_SWCTL3+2" is the sum of the value "2800h" of the IY register and the offset value corresponding to R_SWCTL3+2. The switch control area is a storage area for storing detection states of various switches provided in the gaming machine for each timer interrupt, and is provided in the RAM 111c in this embodiment. The rise information is information indicating that the target switch has changed from off to on.

Note that R_SWCTL3 is the start address of the switch control area (relative address from the start address "2800h" of the RAM 111c), the logic level information is stored at the first address R_SWCTL3+1 from the start address, and the rise information is stored at the second address from the start address. th address R_SWCTL3+2. When the target switch changes from off to on, the target bit of the 8-bit data of the address R_SWCTL3+2 changes from 0 to 1.

If there is no winning (ball entry) at the target start port (start port 1 or start port 2) and the target switch is off, the rising information (target bit) corresponding to the target switch is zero, and the operation result ( AND) becomes zero and the zero flag is set (ZF=1). If the rising edge information is the same as the switch bit data (judgment value) (for example, if the target switch bit is turned on with "00000001B"), the operation result (logical product) is non-zero (for example,
"00000001B") and the zero flag (ZF) is not set (ZF=0).

At line number 3040, when the operation result is zero and the zero flag (ZF) is set, the subroutine is terminated, and the hard random number acquisition processing program returns to the startup switch monitoring processing program (code "RET Z"). ). That is, when the target start port (start port 1 or start port 2) does not win and the target switch is off, the program returns to the start port switch monitoring processing program.

At line number 3050, the random number latch register status is input from port C_HRDCNT (i.e., the port with the numerical number corresponding to the label C_HRDCNT) to the A register (
code "IN A, (C_HRDCNT)").

Line number 3060 and line number 3070 determine whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register. At line number 3060, the logical product (code "AND A, (HL+)"). The address in the HL register is then updated to the next address ("HL+"). The judgment value is other than zero, such as "0
0000010B", and the operation result (logical AND) of the row number 3060 becomes zero when the random number latch register status, which is the value of the A register, does not match the judgment value, the zero flag (ZF) is set, and the random number latch register If the status matches the judgment value, it becomes non-zero (eg "00000010B") and the zero flag (ZF) is not set. If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register, the random number latch register status bit corresponding to the target random number latch register is 0, the random number latch register status does not match the judgment value, and the operation result (logical product) becomes zero.

At line number 3070, if the operation result at line number 2060 is zero (Z) (that is, if there is no latch data in the target random number latch register), the subroutine is terminated and the hard random number acquisition processing program returns (code "RET Z").

At line number 3080, to prepare the address of the target hard random number latch register, the region of the address currently stored in the HL register (e.g. in the data area of the ROM)
(the address of the target hard random number latch register) is transferred to the E register (code "LD E, (HL)").

In line number 3090, the value (2-byte jackpot random number,
16-bit fixed-length random number #0) into the WA register (code "INW WA, (E)
”).

At line number 3100, the value of the WA register (2-byte jackpot random number) is transferred to the IX register (code "LD IX, WA").

At line number 3110, a carry flag (CF) is set (code "SET CF") as starting entry winning information indicating that there is a starting entry winning.

At line number 3120, the subroutine ends and returns from the hard random number acquisition processing program (code "RET").

[Common processing program for special figure start switch]
FIG. 129 is a program list showing a program structure of a special figure starting opening switch common processing program corresponding to the special figure starting opening switch common processing (FIG. 18) according to the fifth embodiment.
The special figure starting port switch common processing program has a top address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_TSIDOSW, and is a subroutine called by the CALLR instruction at step A2708 (line number 2600) or A2715 of the starting port switch monitoring process, for example. be.

At line number 3510, in response to A2901 of the special figure starter switch common processing, the starter signal output count stored in the starter signal output count area of the addition address "IY+R_SIDOSIG" is transferred to the A register (code LD A , (IY+R_SIDOSIG)").

In line number 3520, in response to A2902 of the special figure starting opening switch common processing, the value of the A register (starting opening signal output count) is increased by 1 and +1 updated (code "INC A")
.

In line number 3530, in response to A2903 of the special figure starter switch common processing, if the starter signal output count of the A register overflows and returns to zero (ZF = 1), in the ROM corresponding to the label TSIDOSW10 Jump to the address and execute the instructions from line number 3560 onwards (code "JR Z, TSIDOSW10"). The code described as "JR Z, label" corresponds to "JR Z, $+2+k" in the instruction table. If no jump, go to the next line number 3540 instruction.

In line number 3540, in response to A2903 of the special figure starter switch common processing, if the number of times of starter signal output of the A register does not overflow, the value of the A register after updating (the number of times of starter signal output) It is transferred to the starting signal output count area of the addition address "IY+R_SIDOSIG" (code "LD (IY+R_SIDOSIG), A").

Line numbers 3560 to 3590 correspond to A2905 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. At line number 3560, the value stored in the pending information table (address area specified by the current HL register) is transferred to the W register as the offset address of the pending number area (code "LD W, (HL+)"). ). The code "LD W, (HL+)" corresponds to "LD r, (jj+)" in the instruction table. After that, the current address in the HL register is updated by +1 to the next address. For example, if the target start point is start point 1, the current address in the HL register (for example, in the ROM data area) is the value loaded (transferred) at line number 2590 . The hold information table (A2707, A2714) sets information related to hold (start memory) by winning the start winning port 36 (starting port 1) or the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37, starting port 2) Table (e.g. in ROM data area)
is.

In line number 3570, the value (holding number) stored in the area of addition address "IY+W" is stored in A
Transfer to register (code "LD A, (IY+W)"). Addition address "IY+W"
is the sum of the value stored in the W register (offset address of the reserved number area) and the value stored in the IY register (RAM top address "2800h"). The added address "IY+W" becomes the absolute address of the reserved number area. That is, at line number 3570, the number of reservations at present in the number of reservations area is stored in the A register.
is the pending number before being updated by +1 due to the current winning at line number 3600 (A2906).

At line number 3580, the pending number of the A register is compared with the upper limit (here, 4), and if it is less than the upper limit, the carry flag (CF) is set (CF=1); Flag (CF) is not set (CF=0) (code "CP A,4").

In line number 3590, when the number of reservations reaches the upper limit and the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC), the program returns from the special start switch common processing program to the start switch monitoring processing program (code "RET NC ”).

Line number 3600 corresponds to A2906 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. line number 36
In 00, as the target special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number), the number of reservations, which is the value of the reservation number area corresponding to the RAM address "IY + W", is updated by +1 (code "INC
(IY+W)"). The RAM internal address IY+W is an address obtained by adding the value stored in the IY register and the value stored in the W register.

Line numbers 3610 to 3640 correspond to A2907 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. In line number 3610, the pending number stored in the A register (+1 pending number before update) is changed to C
Transfer to register (code "LD C,A").

At line number 3620, the value stored in the address area of the HL register at this time (starting entry winning flag) is transferred to the B register (code "LD B, (HL+)"). The code "LD B, (HL+)" corresponds to "LD r, (jj+)" in the instruction table. Namely
Acquire the starting opening winning flag (value indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) from the reservation information table. After that, the value in the HL register is updated by +1 to the next address.

In line number 3630, the area (within RAM) of addition address "IY+R_SIDOFLG"
, the value stored in the B register (starting winning prize flag) is transferred (code "LD (IY
+R_SIDOFLG), B". The addition address "IY+R_SIDOFLG" is stored in the value stored in the IY register (RAM head address "2800h") with the label R_SIDOFLG.
It is obtained by adding the value corresponding to G. Note that the addition address "IY + label" is
indicates an address within

At line number 3640, the value of the BC register is saved in the stack area of RAM (code "
PUSH BC").

Line numbers 3650 to 3690 correspond to A2908 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. At line number 3650, the value stored at the address stored in the current HL register (1
transfer the number of bytes for one pending (8) to the W register (code "LD W, (HL
+)”). That is, the number of bytes (8) for one hold is obtained from the hold information table.
After that, the address in the HL register is updated by +1 to the next address.

In addition, in each reserved random number storage area of the special figure 1 reserved storage area or the special figure 2 reserved storage area, a 2-byte jackpot random number, a 1-byte jackpot pattern random number, a 1-byte support per pattern random number, a 2-byte variation Pattern random number 1, 1-byte variation pattern random number 2, 1-byte variation pattern random number 3
is stored, and the number of bytes (number of pending bytes) allocated for each special figure pending (each starting memory) is 8 bytes.

At line number 3660, the number of pending bytes (8) stored in the W register is multiplied by the number of pending bytes stored in the A register (+1 is the pending number before update, 0 to 3), and the operation is performed on the WA register. Store the result (number of pending times number of pending bytes (8)) (code "MUL W, A"). Since the operation result ranges from 0 to 24, the operation result is substantially stored in the A register of the lower byte.

At line number 3670, the value stored at the current address stored in the HL register (the address of the random number storage area) is transferred to the L register (code "LDL, (HL)"). That is, the address (head address) of the random number storage area is acquired from the reservation information table. For example, the top address of the random number storage area (reserved storage area) is 2830h in the special figure 1 reserved storage area
, and is 2850h in the special figure 2 reserved storage area.

At line number 3680, the value stored in the A register (the number of pending bytes x the number of pending bytes) is added to the start address of the random number storage area stored in the L register (code "ADD L, A").
. As a result of the addition, the value of the L register becomes the address of the area corresponding to the pending number (+1 pending number before update), that is, the top address of the pending random number storage area generated by this winning.
For example, if the hold generated by this winning is hold 3, the address of the area corresponding to the number of holds in the special figure 1 reserve storage area is 30h + 2 x 8 with the offset address (lower byte) for the start address "2800h" of the RAM 111c = 40h, and in the special figure 2 reserved storage area, the offset address (lower byte) for "2800h" is 50h + 2 x 8
= 60h.

At line number 3690, the value "28h" is transferred to the H register as the upper address of the address of the area corresponding to the pending number (code "LD H, 28H").

In line number 3700, in response to A2909 of the special figure start switch common processing, the 2-byte jackpot random number stored in the IX register is transferred to the address area (inside the RAM) specified by the HL register, After that, the address in the HL register is updated by +2 to the next address (code "LD (HL+), IX"). In addition, code "LD (HL+), IX"
corresponds to "LD (jj+), ss" in the instruction table.

Line number 3710 and line number 3720 correspond to A2910 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. At line number 3710, a 1-byte jackpot pattern random number (8-bit variable-length random number #0) is input from port C_RNSV0 (that is, the port with the numerical number corresponding to label C_RNSV0) to the A register (code "IN A, ( C_RNSV0)").

At line number 3720, the jackpot pattern random number in the A register is transferred to the area (within the RAM) of the address specified by the HL register, and then the address in the HL register is updated by +1 to the next address (code "LD ( HL+), A"). The code "LD (HL+),
A" corresponds to "LD (jj+), r" in the instruction table.

Line number 3730 and line number 3740 correspond to A2912 of the special figure start opening switch common processing. At line number 3730, a 1-byte pattern random number per support (8-bit variable-length random number #1) is input from port C_RDSV1 (that is, the port with the numerical number corresponding to label C_RDSV1) to register A (code "IN A, (C_RDSV1)").

At line number 3740, the support per pattern random number of the A register is transferred to the area (within the RAM) of the address specified by the HL register, and then the address in the HL register is updated by +1 to the next address (code "LD (HL+), A").

Line number 3750 to line number 3780 correspond to A2913 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. In line number 3750, 2-byte variable pattern random number 1 (16-bit fixed-length random number #
1) is input to the WA register from port C_RDLF1 (that is, the port with the numerical number corresponding to label C_RDLF1) (code "INW WA, (C_RDLF1)").

At line number 3760, the WA
The variation pattern random number 1 in the register is transferred, and then the address in the HL register is updated to the next address by +2 (code "LD (HL+), WA"). In addition, the code "LD (H
L+), WA" corresponds to "LD (jj+), ss" in the instruction table.

At line number 3770, 1-byte variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3 (8-bit variable length random numbers #2 and #3) are input to the WA register from port C_RDSV2 (that is, the port with the numerical number corresponding to label C_RDSV2) ( code "INW WA, (C_RDSV2)").

At line number 3780, the WA
Transfer the variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 of the register (code "LD (HL), WA"). The code "LD (HL), WA" corresponds to "LD (jj), ss" in the instruction table.

In line number 3790, in response to A2914 of the special figure start switch common processing, the subroutine of the special figure reservation information determination process is called and executed (code "CALLR P_THOI
NF"). The subroutine of the special figure reservation information determination process has a ROM internal address (leading address) corresponding to the label P_THOINF.

Line numbers 3800 to 3820 correspond to A2915 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. At line number 3800, the value of the BC register is restored from the RAM stack area (code "POP BC"). The value of the B register is the starting opening winning flag (value indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2), and the value of the C register is the number of reservations (the number of reservations before updating +1).

In line number 3810, the value of the B register is added to the value corresponding to the label C_THOMD (the value indicating the special figure hold mode) (code "ADD B, C_THOMD").

Line number 3820 adds 2 to the value of the C register (code "ADD C,2").

At line number 3830, in response to A2916 of the special figure starting entrance switch common processing, the subroutine (P_COMSET) of the effect command setting processing is called and executed (code "CA
LLT P_COMSET"). The subroutine for effect command setting processing is registered in the n-th (n=value of label P_COMSET) in the vector table. The effect command setting process is executed based on the values of the B and C registers.

At line number 2840, the subroutine ends and returns from the special figure starting port switch common processing program (code "RET").

[Special figure reservation information determination processing program]
FIG. 130 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the special figure reservation information determination processing program corresponding to the special figure reservation information determination processing according to the fifth embodiment. Special figure reservation information determination processing program has a top address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_THOINF, for example, in A2914 (line number 3790) etc. of special figure start mouth switch common processing CA
It is a subroutine called by the LLR instruction.

In line number 4010, the address (label R_
T2HORYU) to the DE register (code "LDY DE, R_T2HORY
U"). R_T2HORYU is an offset address based on the value "2800h" of the IY register, and it suffices to specify only the lower address of the pending number storage area as R_T2HORYU.

In line number 4020, the value obtained by subtracting 8 (the number of reserved bytes of special figure 2) from the top address (label R_T2RNDMEM) of the special figure 2 reserved random number storage area (special figure 2 reserved storage area) "
R_T2RNDMEM-8" is transferred to the HL register as a value (reference value) related to the address of the random number storage area reserved for special figure 2 (code "LDY HL, R_T2RNDMEM-
8").

At line number 4030, the number of pending bytes "8" for Toku-zu 2 pending is transferred to the W register (code "LD W, 8").

In line number 4040, the area (within RAM) of addition address "IY+R_SIDOFLG"
The starting opening winning flag stored in is compared with the value (label C_SIDO1) indicating special figure 1 (code "CPJ (IY+R_SIDOFLG), C_SIDO1"). Note that the code "CPJ (IY+R_SIDOFLG), C_SIDO1" is equivalent to "CPJ (
jj+d),n". If the starting opening winning flag indicates special figure 1 and the comparison result matches, the zero flag is set (ZF = 1), and if the starting opening winning flag indicates special figure 2 and the comparison result does not match, the zero flag Not set (NZ, ZF=0).

At line number 4050, when the starting entrance winning flag indicates special figure 2 and the zero flag is not set (NZ), jump to the ROM address corresponding to label THOINF10 and execute the instructions after line number 4150 (code " JR NZ, THOINF 10"). That is, if there is no winning at the starting port 1, the process branches. If no jump, go to the next line number 4060 instruction.

In line number 4060, the address of the reserved number storage area of the special figure 1 reserved number (label R_T1HO
RYU) to the DE register (code "LDY DE, R_T1 HORYU").

In line number 4070, the value obtained by subtracting 8 (the number of reserved bytes of special figure 1) from the top address (label R_T1RNDMEM) of the random number storage area (special figure 1 reserved storage area) reserved for special figure 1 "
R_T1RNDMEM-8" is transferred to the HL register as a value (reference value) related to the address of the random number storage area reserved for Special Figure 1 (code "LDY HL, R_T1RNDMEM-
8").

In the line number 4080, as in the line number 2540, in order to determine whether or not the game state is to hit to the right, the subroutine of the special figure state check process is called and executed (code "C
ALL P_TGMCHK"). In this embodiment, the game state to hit to the right is a time saving state (
Specific game state AC). When the carry flag (CF) is set by executing the subroutine of the special figure state check process (if CF=1), it is a time-saving state, that is, a game state to hit to the right.

In line number 4090, if the gaming state is to hit to the right (if CF = 1), the subroutine is terminated and the program returns from the special figure reservation information determination processing program (code "RET C
”). As a result, the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not pre-determined in the game state of hitting to the right. In addition, by the code of the line number 4050, when the start opening winning prize flag indicates the special figure 2, the command of the line number 4060 to the line number 4130 is not executed, so even in the game state to hit right, the special figure 2 fluctuation display The outcome of the game is pre-determined.

In line number 4100, the special game processing number area (added address "IY+R_TGAME
” area) (inside the RAM) and the value of the label C_TSFAN indicating that the small hit is in progress (code “CP (IY+R_TGAME), C_
TSFAN"). Here, the offset address corresponding to the label R_TGAME is IY
Based on the register value "2800h", the special figure game processing number area is shown. Label C_
The value of TSFAN is the special game processing number "3" of the small hit opening preprocessing. Note that the code "CP (IY+R_TGAME), C_TSFAN" is equivalent to "CP (jj+d
), n”. When the small win is in progress and the special game processing number is 3 or more, the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC, CF=0), and when the small win is not in progress and is smaller than 3, the carry flag. (CF) is set (CF=1).

In line number 4110, when the carry flag (CF) is not set during the small hit (NC, CF = 0), return from the special figure reservation information determination processing program (code "RET NC"). As a result, the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not determined in advance during the small hit.

In line number 4120, the character game processing number area (added address "IY+R_YGAME
”) area (within the RAM) and the value of the label C_YFAN indicating that the jackpot is in progress (code “CP (IY+R_YGAME), C_Y
FAN"). Here, the offset address corresponding to the label R_YGAME indicates the character object game processing number area based on the value "2800h" of the IY register. Label C_YF
The value of AN is the special game process number "1" in the process during fanfare. When the jackpot is in progress and the accessory game processing number is 1 or more, the carry flag (CF) is not set (N
C, CF=0), and if the jackpot is not in progress and is less than 1, a carry flag (CF) is set (CF=1).

At line number 4130, when the carry flag (CF) is not set during the jackpot (NC, CF=0), the program returns from the special figure reservation information determination processing program (code "RET NC"). As a result, the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not determined in advance during the big hit.

In line number 4150, the number of reservations (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) stored in the reservation number storage area corresponding to the address of the DE register is transferred to the A register (code "LD
A, (DE)"). Note that the code "LD A, (DE)" is equivalent to "LD r, (j
j)”.

In line number 4160, multiply the number of pending bytes stored in the W register (8) and the number of pending stored in the A register (special figure 1 pending number or special figure 2 pending number) (here 1 to 4) and W
Store the operation result (number of pending x number of pending bytes) in the A register (code "MUL W, A"
). Since the operation result is from 8 to 32, the operation result is substantially stored in the A register of the lower byte.

In line number 4170, the latest pending jackpot random number, which is the value of the area (2 bytes) corresponding to the addition address "HL+A", is transferred (loaded) to the IX register (code "LD IX,
(HL+A)"). Note that the code "LD IX, (HL+A)" is equivalent to "LD s
s, (jj+p)". The value of this add address is the sum of the value of the HL register and the value of the A register (number of pending times number of bytes of pending). The value of the HL register is the starting address of the random number storage area minus the number of reserved bytes, and is a value associated with the random number storage area. A.
The value of the register is the number of reservations multiplied by the number of bytes reserved, based on the number of reservations (the number of starting stores) multiplied by the number of bytes allocated per reservation.

The value of the HL register is the top address of the random number storage area, and the value of the A register is (
It is also possible to configure the number of pending-1) times the number of pending bytes.

Here, the addition address "HL+A" is the top address of the most recently generated latest pending random number storage area. The latest pending jackpot random number is stored in the area corresponding to the addition address "HL+A", and the latest pending jackpot random number is acquired in the IX register (
read out).

Line number 4180 calls and executes a subroutine for judging a big hit (code "C
ALLR P_BHITJUD"). The subroutine for the jackpot determination process is labeled P_BH
It has an internal ROM address (starting address) corresponding to ITJUD. In the big-hit determination process, it is determined whether or not the big-hit is a big-hit based on the latest pending big-hit random number.

At line number 4190, if the result of the jackpot determination process is not a jackpot (if the carry flag is not set (in the case of NC)), a jump is made to the ROM address corresponding to label THOINF30 in order to perform the process after line number 4300. (code "JR NC, T
HOINF30"). When not jumping, it moves to the next line number 4200 instruction.

In line number 4200, the address D_ZC of the jackpot pattern random number check table for special figure 1
Transfer HKTBL1 (starting address) to DE register (code "LD DE, D_Z
CHKTBL1").

Line number 4210 is the same code as line number 4040, and the addition address "IY+R_S
IDOFLG" area (inside the RAM), the starting point winning flag stored in the value indicating the special figure 1 (
label C_SIDO1) (code "CPJ (IY+R_SIDOFLG),
C_SIDO1").

In line number 4220, the start entry winning flag indicates special figure 1 and the jump status flag (J
F) is set (when JF=1, when T), jump to the address in ROM corresponding to label THOINF20 and execute the instructions after line number 4250 (code "
JRRT, THOINF20"). In other words, if the prize is won at the starting port 1, the process branches. The jump destination (label THOINF20) is a close address +4 bytes (+16 bytes or less) away from the address of this code "JRRT, THOINF20". When the starting opening winning prize flag does not show the special figure 1, it moves to the command of the next line number 4230.

In line number 4230, the address D_ZC of the jackpot pattern random number check table for special figure 2
Transfer HKTBL2 (starting address) to the DE register and overwrite it (code "LD D
E, D_ZCHKTBL2").

Line number 4250 adds 2 to the value of the A register (code "ADD A, 2").
A value obtained by adding “2” to (the number of pending bytes×the number of pending bytes) is stored in the A register.

At line number 4260, the value of the area (1 byte) corresponding to the addition address "HL+A" is
Transfer to A register (code "LD A, (HL+A)"). In addition, the code "LD A
, (HL+A)” corresponds to “LD r, (jj+p)” in the instruction table. Currently, the value of the added address is the sum of the value of the HL register (the value obtained by subtracting the number of reserved bytes from the start address of the random number storage area) and the value of the A register (the number of reserved bytes x the number of reserved bytes + 2). The value in the HL register is the value associated with the random number storage area, and the value in the A register is based on the product of the pending number and the number of bytes allocated per pending. Here, the value of the addition address is obtained by adding "2" to the top address of the latest pending random number storage area that has occurred most recently. and,
In the area corresponding to the addition address, the latest pending jackpot symbol random number generated most recently is stored, and the latest pending jackpot symbol random number is acquired in the A register.

At line number 4270, the value of the area (1 byte) corresponding to the addition address "DE+A" is
Transfer to A register (code "LD A, (DE+A)"). In addition, the code "LD A
, (DE+A)” corresponds to “LD r, (jj+p)” in the instruction table. The value of the addition address is the value stored in the DE register (the top address of the jackpot pattern random number check table)
and the value of the A register (the value of the jackpot symbol random number). Then, since stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number is stored in the area corresponding to the added address value, the latest reserved stop symbol information is acquired in the A register. Thus, the stop symbol information is acquired corresponding to the big hit symbol random number.

Line number 4280 jumps to the ROM address corresponding to label THOINF100 (code "JR THOINF100").

[Big hit determination processing program]
FIG. 131 is a program list showing a program structure of a big-hit determination processing program corresponding to the big-hit determination processing (FIG. 25A) according to the fifth embodiment. The jackpot determination processing program has a top address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_BHITJUD, for example,
It is a subroutine called by a call instruction such as a CALLR instruction in special figure reservation information determination processing (line number 4180), jackpot flag 1 setting processing, jackpot flag 2 setting processing and the like.

At line number 4510, the value of the HL register is saved to the stack area of RAM (code "
PUSH HL").

Line numbers 4520 to 4540 correspond to A3800 of the big hit determination process. At line number 4520, the address of the data table to be used (label D_BHITJUD) is
It is converted to a relative address "D_BHITJUD-5000h" and transferred to the HL register (code "LDD HL, D_BHITJUD-5000H"). In this data table, data (corresponding to a value obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit judgment value in FIG. 25A) is registered for each probability set value.

At line number 4530, the probability setting value stored in the area of addition address "IY+R_SETNUM" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (IY+R_SETNUM)").
.

At line number 4540, a subroutine for 2-byte data acquisition processing is called and executed (
code "CALLT P_GETWORD"). By the 2-byte data acquisition processing here, the data table data is acquired from the HL register value (data table address) and the A register value (probability setting value) and stored in the HL register. A value obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit judgment value (=upper limit judgment value+1) is stored in the HL register as the data (value) acquired from the data table.

Line number 4550 and line number 4560 correspond to A3801 and A3802 of the big hit determination process. In line number 4550, the IX register jackpot random number and the lower limit judgment value (label C_BHI
T_MIN) (code "CP IX, C_BHIT_MIN"). Note that the register in which the jackpot random number is stored may be a pair register instead of the IX register as long as it has a width (capacity) of 16 bits. The code "CP IX, C_BHIT_MIN" corresponds to "
CP rr, mn" (first comparison instruction), and can appropriately determine the magnitude relationship between the big hit random number and the lower limit judgment value. When the jackpot random number in the IX register is less than the lower limit judgment value C_BHIT_MIN, the carry flag (CF) and the jump status flag (JF) are set (CF
= 1, JF = 1 (T)), the carry flag (CF) and the jump status flag (JF) are not set (C
F=0, JF=0(F)).

In line number 4560, if the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (in the case of T), the label BHI
It jumps to the ROM address corresponding to TJUD10 and executes the instructions after line number 4600 (code "JRRT, BHITJUD10"). Jump destination (label BHIT
JUD10) is a close address +4 bytes (less than +16 bytes) away from the address of this code "JRR T, BHITJUD10". When the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value, the instruction of the next line number 4570 is performed.

Line numbers 4570 and 4580 correspond to A3803 of the big hit determination process. At line number 4570, the jackpot random number in the IX register and the value currently stored in the HL register (=
Upper limit judgment value + 1) are compared (code "CP IX, HL"). In addition, the code "CP I
X, HL" corresponds to "CP rr, gg" (first comparison instruction) in the instruction table, and can appropriately determine the magnitude relationship between the jackpot random number and the upper limit judgment value. The jackpot random number in the IX register is the upper limit judgment value + 1
If the hit random number is less than the upper limit judgment value, the carry flag (CF) and the jump status flag (JF) are set (CF=1, JF=1(T)). Here, a carry flag (CF) is set as big win information indicating a big win (CF=1).

In line number 4580, if the jackpot random number is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value (in the case of T), the label BHI
It jumps to the ROM address corresponding to TJUD20 and executes the instructions after line number 4620 (code "JRRT, BHITJUD20"). Jump destination (label BHIT
JUD20) is a close address +3 bytes (less than +16 bytes) away from the address of this code "JRR T, BHITJUD20". When the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value, the instruction of the next line number 4600 is executed.

At line number 4600, a carry flag (C
F) is cleared to zero (CF=0) (code "CLR CF").

At line number 4620, the value of the HL register is restored from the RAM stack area (code "POP HL").

At line number 4630, the program returns from the jackpot judgment processing program (code "RET"
).

The jackpot determination processing program described above is a subroutine that includes only a JRR instruction (second branch instruction) as a branch instruction. On the other hand, for example, special figure reservation information determination processing program,
Special figure normal processing program (described later), special figure display during processing program (described later), etc. are subroutines in which JR instruction (first branch instruction) and JRR instruction (second branch instruction) are mixed as branch instructions. And than the first subroutine such as special figure reservation information determination processing program (capacity of 52 bytes or more), special figure normal processing program (capacity of 59 bytes), processing program during special figure display (capacity of 89 bytes or more) The big hit determination processing program (second subroutine) with a capacity of 20 bytes has a small program capacity. Since the word length of the 1-byte JRR instruction is shorter than that of the 2-byte JRR instruction, the program capacity of the big hit determination processing program can be reasonably reduced. Therefore, the program can be designed rationally, and the efficiency of program development is improved.

The big hit determination processing program (second subroutine) is commonly called from a plurality of processing programs such as a special figure reservation information determination processing program, a big hit flag 1 setting processing program, and a big hit flag 2 setting processing program. This makes it possible to reduce the overall capacity (size) of the program.

[Special figure normal processing program]
Figure 132 is a program list showing the program structure of the special figure usual processing program corresponding to the special figure usual processing (Fig. 20) according to the fifth embodiment. The special figure normal processing program is a subroutine that has a start address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_TUSUL and is called by a CALL instruction at line number 1600 of the special figure game processing program.

Line number 5010 to line number 5040 correspond to A3200 of special figure normal processing. At line number 5010, the role game processing number stored in the area of the addition address "IY+R_YGAME" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (IY+R_YGAME)").

At line number 5020, if the character object game processing number is not "0", that is, if the character object normal processing is not in progress (NZ), jump to the ROM address corresponding to label TUSUL30, and execute the instructions after line number 5310. Execute (code "JR NZ, TUSUL30"). When not jumping, it moves to the instruction of the next line number 5030 .

At line number 5030, the value of the remaining ball counter stored in the area of addition address "IY+R_ZANZON" is transferred to register A (code "LD A, (IY+R_ZANZ
ON)").

At line number 5040, if the value of the remaining ball counter is not "0", label TUSUL30
jumps to the ROM address corresponding to , and executes the instructions on and after line number 5310 (code "JR NZ, TUSUL30"). When not jumping, it moves to the instruction of the next line number 5050 .

Line number 5050 and line number 5060 correspond to A3201 of special figure usual processing. line number 5
In 050, the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the area of the addition address "IY+R_T2HORYU" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (IY+R_T2HORYU)").

At line number 5060, if the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (for T, if JF = 1), jump to the ROM address corresponding to label TUSUL10 and execute the instructions after line number 5150 (Code "JRRT, TUSUL10"). Jump destination (label TUS
UL10) is a close address +13 bytes (less than +16 bytes) away from the address of this code "JRR T, TUSUL10". If the number of special figures 2 pending is not "0" (J
F=0), the process moves to the next line number 5070 instruction.

In line number 5070, corresponding to A3202 of special figure normal processing, the subroutine of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is called and executed (code "CALLR P_T2START"). The subroutine of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process has an address in ROM (head address) corresponding to the label P_T2START.

Line number 5080 to line number 5100 correspond to A3203 of special figure normal processing. In line number 5080, the numerical value corresponding to the label C_THOMD2 (the numerical value indicating the special figure holding mode) is transferred to the B register (code "LD B, C_THOMD2").

In line number 5090, the special figure 2 pending number stored in the area of the addition address "IY+R_T2HORYU" is transferred to the C register (code "LD C, (IY+R_T2HORY
U)”).

At line number 5100, the value of the C register is updated by +1 (incremented by 1) (code "IN
C C").

At line number 5110, corresponding to A3204 of special figure normal processing, the subroutine (P_COMSET) of effect command setting processing is called and executed (code “CALLT P_C
OMSET"). The effect command setting process is executed based on the values of the B and C registers.

In line number 5120, corresponding to A3205 of special figure normal processing, the subroutine of special figure fluctuation processing transition setting processing of special figure 2 is called and executed (code "CALLR P_T2HE
N_SET"). The subroutine of the special figure fluctuation process transition setting process of special figure 2 is labeled P_T
It has an internal ROM address (starting address) corresponding to 2HEN_SET.

At line number 5130, return from the special figure normal processing program (code "RET")
.

Line number 5150 and line number 5160 correspond to A3206 of special figure usual processing. line number 5
In 150, the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the area of the addition address "IY+R_T1HORYU" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (IY+R_T1HORYU)").

At line number 5160, if the special figure 1 reserved number is "0" (in the case of T, if JF = 1), jump to the ROM address corresponding to label TUSUL20 and execute the instructions after line number 5250 (Code "JRRT, TUSUL20"). If the special figure 1 pending number is not "0", it moves to the next line number 5170.

In line number 5170, corresponding to A3207 of special figure normal processing, the subroutine of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is called and executed (code "CALLR P_T1START"). The subroutine of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process has a ROM internal address (leading address) corresponding to the label P_T1START.

Line number 5180 to line number 5200 correspond to A3208 of special figure normal processing. In line number 5180, the numerical value corresponding to the label C_THOMD1 (the numerical value indicating the special figure holding mode) is transferred to the B register (code "LD B, C_THOMD1").

In line number 5190, the special figure 1 pending number stored in the area of the addition address "IY+R_T1HORYU" is transferred to the C register (code "LD C, (IY+R_T1HORY
U)”).

At line number 5200, the value of the C register is updated by +1 (incremented by 1) (code "IN
C C").

At line number 5210, corresponding to A3209 of special figure normal processing, the subroutine (P_COMSET) of effect command setting processing is called and executed (code "CALLT P_C
OMSET").

In line number 5220, in response to A3210 of the special figure normal processing, the subroutine of the special figure fluctuation process transition setting process of special figure 1 is called and executed (code "CALLR P_T1HE
N_SET").

At line number 5230, return from the special figure normal processing program (code "RET")
.

Line number 5250 and line number 5260 correspond to A3211 of special figure usual processing. line number 5
At 250, the customer waiting demonstration flag stored in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (in the RAM) of the addition address "IY+R_DEMO" is changed to the customer waiting demonstration started value (label C_DEMO).
) (code "CPJ (IY+R_DEMO), C_DEMO"). If the customer waiting demonstration in progress flag indicates that the customer waiting demonstration has already started and the comparison results match, the jump status flag is set (T, ZF=1 and JF=1), and if the comparison results do not match does not have the jump status flag set (F, ZF=0 and JF=0).

At line number 5260, if the customer waiting demonstration in-progress flag has a value indicating that the customer waiting demonstration has already started, and if the jump status flag (JF) is set (when JF=1, when T), it corresponds to the label TUSUL30. It jumps to the address in ROM and executes the instructions after line number 5310 (code "JRRT, TUSUL30"). If the customer waiting demonstration in progress flag is not the value indicating that the customer waiting demonstration has been started, the process proceeds to the next line number 5270 command.

In line number 5270, corresponding to A3212 of special figure normal processing, addition address "IY+R
_DEMO”, the numerical value corresponding to the label C_DEMO (customer waiting demonstration started value) is transferred and set (code “LD (IY+R_DEMO)
, C_DEMO").

At line number 5280, corresponding to A3213 of special figure normal processing, a numerical value (label C_DEMOCOM) corresponding to the customer waiting demo command is transferred to the BC register (code "LD B
C, C_DEMOCOM").

At line number 5290, corresponding to A3214 of special figure normal processing, the subroutine (P_COMSET) of effect command setting processing is called and executed (code "CALLT P_C
OMSET").

In line number 5310, corresponding to A3215 and A3216 of special normal processing, in the special game processing number area (RAM) of addition address "IY + R_TGAME", label C_TUSUL numerical value as special game processing number "0" transfer (code "LD (IY+R_
TGAME), C_TUSUL').

In line number 5320, corresponding to A3217 of special figure normal processing, addition address "IY + R
Transfer "0" to the fluctuation pattern discrimination flag area of _TZINF" and clear it (code "LD
(IY+R_TZINF), 0").

In line number 5330, corresponding to A3218 of special figure normal processing, addition address "IY+R
_DAIERR” value (
label C_CNTNG) (code "LD (IY+R_DAIERR), C_
CNTNG").

At line number 5340, return from the special figure normal processing program (code "RET")
.

[Special figure display processing program]
Figures 133A and 133B are processing during special figure display according to the fifth embodiment (Figures 36A and 36B
) is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the processing program during special figure display corresponding to. The special figure display processing program is a subroutine that has a start address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_TDISPLY and is called by a CALL instruction at line number 1600 of the special figure game processing program.

At line number 6010, by XORing the values of the A registers,
Clear the value of the A register and set it to 0 (code "XOR A, A").

Line number 6020 and line number 6030 correspond to A5101 during special figure display processing. In line number 6020, the variable pattern discrimination flag area (RA
M), the information of the variation pattern (special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in (code "CPJ (IY + R_TZINF), C_
TZ1HEN"). When the fluctuation pattern discrimination flag area indicates the special figure 1 and the comparison results match, the jump status flag is set (T, ZF = 1 and JF = 1), and when the comparison results do not match, the jump status flag is not set (F, ZF=0 and JF
= 0).

In line number 6030, the variable pattern determination flag area indicates special figure 2, and when the jump status flag (JF) is not set (JF = 0, if F), the label TDISP
It jumps to the ROM address corresponding to LY10 and executes the instructions on and after line number 6090 (code "JRRF, TDISPLY10"). Fluctuation pattern discrimination flag area is special figure 1
, the process proceeds to the next line number 6040 instruction.

At line number 6040, corresponding to A5102 and A5103 of the processing during special figure display, the value stored in the jackpot flag 1 area of the addition address "IY+BHITFLG1" is exchanged with the value of the A register by the exchange instruction XCH, Load register (code "XCH A,
(IY+BHITFLG1)"). Since the value of the A register was cleared to 0 before the exchange, the jackpot flag 1 area is cleared to 0 after the exchange.

Line number 6050 to line number 6070 corresponds to A5104 during special figure display processing. In the line number 6050, the value of the jackpot flag 1 of the A register and the numerical value indicating the jackpot (label C_BH
IT (eg 1)) is compared (code "CPJ A,C_BHIT"). The code "CPJ A, C_BHIT" corresponds to "CPJ p, n" (second comparison instruction) in the instruction table, and can appropriately determine whether the value of the jackpot flag 1 and the numerical value indicating the jackpot match. jackpot flag 1
indicates a jackpot and the comparison results match, the jump status flag is set (
T, ZF=1 and JF=1), if the comparison results do not match, the jump status flag is not set (F, ZF=0 and JF=0).

At line number 6060, if the jackpot flag 1 indicates a jackpot and the jump status flag is set (T, JF=1), jump to the ROM address corresponding to the label TDISPLY20 and execute the instructions from line number 6130 onwards. (Code "JRR T, TD
ISPLY20"). When the jackpot flag 1 does not indicate a jackpot, the instruction of the next line number 6070 is executed.

At line number 6070, it jumps to the address in ROM corresponding to label TDISPLY40 and executes the instructions after line number 6180 (code "JR TDISPLY40").
.

At line number 6090, corresponding to A5107 and A5108 of the processing during special figure display, the value stored in the jackpot flag 2 area of the addition address "IY+BHITFLG2" is exchanged with the value of the A register by the exchange instruction XCH, Load register (code "XCH A,
(IY+BHITFLG2)"). Since the value of the A register was cleared to 0 before the exchange, the jackpot flag 2 area is cleared to 0 after the exchange.

The line number 6100 and the line number 6110 correspond to A5109 during special figure display processing. In the line number 6100, the value of the jackpot flag 2 of the A register and the numerical value indicating the jackpot (label C_BHI
T) (code "CPJ A,C_BHIT"). If the jackpot flag 2 indicates a jackpot and the comparison results match, the jump status flag is set (T, ZF=1
and JF=1), if the comparison results do not match, the jump status flag is not set (F, ZF=0 and JF=0).

At line number 6110, if the jackpot flag 1 does not indicate a jackpot and the jump status flag is not set (F, JF=0), jump to the ROM address corresponding to the label TDISPLY40, and execute the instructions after line number 6180. Run (code "JRR F,
TDISPLY 40").

In line number 6130, in response to A5105 and A5110 of the special figure display processing, conditional device operation information (label C_SADO's value) (code "LD (IY+
JOSADO), C_SADO").

At line number 6150, corresponding to A5106 of the special figure displaying process, the subroutine of the special figure normal process transition setting process is called and executed (code "CALLR P_TUSUL_SE
T"). The subroutine of special-figure usual process transition setting process has an address in ROM (head address) corresponding to label P_TUSUL_SET.

At line number 6160, the processing program during special figure display returns (code "RET"
).

Line number 6210 and line number 6220 correspond to A5122 of the processing during special figure display. In line number 6210, the ceiling time reduction activation flag area (R
AM) is compared with the value of label C_TNJON (a value indicating that the ceiling time reduction activation flag has been set (e.g., "1")) (code "CPJ (IY+R_TNJ
FLG), C_TNJON"). If the ceiling time saving activation flag is set and the comparison results match, the jump status flag is set (T, ZF = 1 and JF = 1), and if the comparison results do not match, the jump status flag is not set. (F, ZF = 0
and JF=0).

In line number 6220, the ceiling time reduction activation flag is not set and the jump status flag (
JF) is not set (if JF=0, if F), label TDISPLY70
jumps to the ROM address corresponding to , and executes the instructions on and after line number 6270 (code "JRRF, TDISPLY70"). When the ceiling time saving activation flag is set, it moves to the command of the next line number 6230.

Line number 6230 and line number 6240 correspond to A5123 of the processing during special figure display. In line number 6230, the initial value "704" of the time reduction change count 1 is transferred to the time reduction change count 1 area of the addition address "IY+R_JTNCNT1" (code "LDW (IY+R_J
TNCNT1), 704''). Note that the code "LDW (IY+R_JTNCNT1),
704” corresponds to “LDW (jj+d), mn” in the instruction table.

In line number 6240, the initial value "700" of the time reduction variation count 2 is transferred to the time reduction variation count 2 area of the addition address "IY+R_JTNCNT2" (code "LDW (IY
+R_JTNCNT2), 700"). The code "LDW (IY+R_JTNCN
T2), 700" corresponds to "LDW (jj+d), mn" in the instruction table.

At line number 6250, it jumps to the ROM address corresponding to label TDISPLY110 and executes the instructions after line number 6530 (code "JR TDISPLY110
”).

Line number 6270 and line number 6280 correspond to A5124 of special figure usual processing. line number 6
At 270, the support hit flag 2 flag stored in the support hit flag 2 flag area of the addition address "IY+R_SAPFLG2" is set to a numerical value (label C_SAPON) indicating the support hit.
(code "CPJ (IY+R_SAPFLG2), C_SAPON"). Note that the code "CPJ (IY+R_SAPFLG2), C_SAPON" is the instruction table "
CPJ (jj+d),n". If the support hit flag 2 indicates a support hit and the comparison results match, the jump status flag is set (T, ZF=1 and JF=1
), and if the comparison results do not match, the jump status flag is not set (F,
ZF=0 and JF=0).

At line number 6280, if support hit flag 2 is support hit and the jump status flag is set, jump to the ROM address corresponding to label TDISPLY80, and execute the instructions after line number 6320 (code "JRR T, TDISPLAY8
0"). If the support hit flag 2 is not support hit, the instruction of the next line number 6290 is executed.

Line number 6290 and line number 6300 correspond to A5125 of special figure normal processing. line number 6
In 290, the support hit flag 1 flag stored in the support hit flag 1 flag area of the addition address "IY+R_SAPFLG1" is set to a numerical value (label C_SAPON) indicating the support hit.
(code "CPJ (IY+R_SAPFLG1), C_SAPON"). If the support hit flag 2 indicates a support hit and the comparison results match, the zero flag is set (Z, ZF = 1 and JF = 1), and if the comparison results do not match, the zero flag is not set (NZ, ZF=0 and JF=0).

At line number 6300, if support hit flag 2 is not support hit and the zero flag is not set (ZF=0 in the case of NZ), the RO corresponding to label TDISPLY120
Jump to the address in M and execute the instructions after line number 6550 (code "JR N
Z, TDISPLY 120"). If the support hit flag 2 is a support hit, the next line number 6
320 instruction.

Line number 6320 to line number 6510 correspond to A5126 of special figure normal processing. At line number 6510, the required data table address (label D_SAPCNT) is converted to a relative address "D_SAPCNT-5000h" and transferred to the HL register (code "
LDD HL, D_SAPCNT-5000H").

At line number 6330, the time reduction determination data stored in the area of the addition address "IY+R_SAPNUM" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (IY+R_SAPN
UM)”).

At line number 6340, the value of the time reduction determination data in the A register is quadrupled and stored in the WA register (code "MUL A, 4").

At line number 6350, a subroutine for 1-byte data acquisition processing is called and executed (
code "CALLT P_GETBYTE"). As a result, the value of the A register is added to the value of the HL register, and the added value of the HL register functions as a pointer indicating the address of the storage area for the new time reduction variation count 1 (initial value).

In line number 6360, time reduction variation count 2 area (additional address "IY+R_JTNCN
T2”) is transferred to the WA register (code “LD
WA, (IY+R_JTNCNT2)"). The time reduction variation count 2 here is the remaining execution count of the special figure 2 variation display game in the time saving state.

At line number 6370, the time reduction variation count 2 of the WA register is compared with the time reduction variation count 1 stored in the time reduction variation count 1 area (addition address "IY+R_JTNCNT1") (code "CP WA, (IY+R_JTNCNT1)"). ). The time reduction variation number 1 here is the remaining number of executions of the special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game and special figure 2 variation display game) in the time saving state. Note that the code "CP WA, (IY+R_JTNC
NT1)” corresponds to “CP rr, (jj+d)” (fourth comparison instruction) in the instruction table. When the time shortening variation count 2 is less than the time shortening variation count 1, the carry flag (CF) and the jump status flag (JF) are set (CF=1, JF=1 (T)). When the number of time reduction fluctuations 2 is equal to or greater than the number of time reduction fluctuations 1, the carry flag (CF) and the jump status flag (JF) are not set (CF=0, JF=0 (F)).

At line number 6380, if the number of time reduction fluctuations 2 is less than 1 (in the case of T), jump to the ROM address corresponding to label TDISPLY90, line number 64
40 and subsequent instructions (code "JRRT, TDISPLY90"). If the number of times of shortened time variation 2 is equal to or greater than the number of times of shortened time variation 1, the process proceeds to the next line number 6390 command.

At line number 6390, the new time reduction fluctuation count 1 (initial value) stored in the area of the address (HL register value) set at line number 6350 is transferred to the WA register (code "LD WA, ( HL)"). Note that the code "LD WA, (HL)" is the same as "
LD ss, (jj)".

At line number 6400, the new time-reduction change count 1 (initial value) of the WA register is compared with the time-reduction change count 1 (remaining count) stored in the time-reduction change count 1 area (addition address "IY+R_JTNCNT1"). (Code "CP WA, (IY+R_JTNCNT1
)”). Note that the code "CP WA, (IY+R_JTNCNT1)" is equivalent to "CP
rr, (jj+d)” (fourth comparison instruction) and is used for various judgments.
It is possible to appropriately determine the size relationship with respect to the number of time reduction fluctuations (the number of games) that must be read directly from the area of . When the new time reduction variation count 1 (initial value) is less than the time reduction variation count 1 (remaining count), the carry flag (CF) and the jump status flag (JF) are set (CF = 1, JF = 1 (T)). When the new time reduction variation count 1 (initial value) is equal to or greater than the time reduction variation count 1 (remaining count), the carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (JF) are not set (CF = 0, JF = 0 ( F)).

At line number 6410, if the new number of time reduction fluctuations 1 (initial value) is greater than or equal to 1 (remaining number of times) of time reduction fluctuations (in the case of F), jump to the ROM address corresponding to label TDISPLY100, and line number 6480 and later instructions (code "JRR F, TD
ISPLY 100"). If the new time reduction variation count 1 (initial value) is less than the time reduction variation count 1 (remaining count), the command of the next line number 6420 is executed.

At line number 6420, jump to the address in ROM corresponding to label TDISPLY120 and execute the instructions after line number 6550 (code "JR TDISPLY120
”).

At line number 6440, the new time reduction variation count 2 (initial value) stored in the area of addition address "HL+2" is transferred to the WA register (code "LD WA, (HL+2)").
).

At line number 6450, the new time-reduction change count 2 (initial value) of the WA register is compared with the time-reduction change count 2 (remaining count) stored in the time-reduction change count 2 area (addition address "IY+R_JTNCNT2"). (Code "CP WA, (IY+R_JTNCNT2
)”). If the new shortened time change count 2 (initial value) is less than the time shortened change count 2 (remaining count), the carry flag (CF) and the jump status flag (JF) are set (
CF=1, JF=1(T)). When the new time reduction change count 2 (initial value) is equal to or greater than the time reduction change count 2 (remaining count), the carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (J
F) is not set (CF=0, JF=0(F)).

At line number 6460, if the new time reduction change count 2 (initial value) is less than the time reduction change count 2 (remaining count) (in the case of T), jump to the address in ROM corresponding to label TDISPLY120, line number 6550 and later instructions (code "JRR T, TD
ISPLY 120").

At line number 6480, the new time-saving variation count 1 (initial value) stored in the area of the address (HL register value) set at line number 6350 is transferred to the WA register and stored in the HL register after transfer. Increment the specified address by 2 (code "LD WA, (HL+
)”). Note that the code "LD WA, (HL+)" is equivalent to "LD ss, (jj+)
” corresponds to

In line number 6490, time reduction variation count 1 area (additional address "IY+R_JTNCN
T1”), transfer the new time reduction change count 1 (initial value) of the WA register (code “
LD (IY+R_JTNCNT1), WA"). The code "LD (IY+R_J
TNCNT1), WA" corresponds to "LD (jj+d), ss" in the instruction table. In this way, when a support hit occurs, if the new time reduction variation number 1 as the initial value is greater than or equal to the time reduction variation number 1 as the current remaining time reduction number, the time reduction variation number 1 is the initial The value is updated to the new time reduction variation count 1. On the other hand, if the new time reduction variation count 1 is less than the current time reduction variation count 1, the value is not updated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time shortening variation count 1 from suddenly decreasing.

At line number 6500, the new time reduction fluctuation count 2 (initial value) stored in the area of the address (HL register value) updated at line number 6480 is transferred to the WA register (code "LD WA, (HL)").

In line number 6510, time reduction variation count 2 area (additional address "IY+R_JTNCN
T2”), transfer the new time reduction change count 2 (initial value) of the WA register (code “
LD (IY+R_JTNCNT2), WA"). Thus, when a support hit occurs, if the new time reduction variation number 2 as the initial value is greater than or equal to the time reduction variation number 2 as the current remaining time reduction number, the time reduction variation number 2 is the initial The value is updated to the new shortened time variation count 2. On the other hand, if the new shortened time variation count 2 is less than the current time shortened variation count 2, the value is not updated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time shortening variation count 2 from suddenly decreasing.

In line number 6530, corresponding to A5127 of special figure normal processing, the subroutine of support operation setting processing is called and executed (code "CALLR P_SAPSET").

In line number 6550, corresponding to A5128 of special figure usual processing, special figure usual processing transition setting processing (code "CALLR P_TUSUL_SET").

At line number 6560, return from the processing program during special figure display (code "RET"
).

Note that in this embodiment, unlike A5126 in FIG. 36B, even if a support hit occurs, the time reduction variation count 1 region and the time reduction variation count 2 region are not updated to the initial values under predetermined circumstances. Specifically, the number of time reduction fluctuations 2 as the remaining number of times is smaller than the number of time reduction fluctuations 1 as the remaining number of times, and the new time reduction fluctuation number 2 as the initial value is the number of time reductions as the remaining number of times. If it is smaller than the variation count 2, the time reduction variation count 1 region and the time reduction variation count 2 region are not updated to the initial values, and the support operation setting process is not executed (A5126 and A5127 are not executed). In this way, when the number of time reduction fluctuations 2 as the remaining number of times is less than the number of time reduction fluctuations 1 as the remaining number of times (for example, in the case of high support), the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is the main fluctuation during the time reduction Since it is executed as a display game, the initial value of the time reduction variation count 2 is compared with the remaining number of times, and the time reduction variation count 1 area and the time reduction variation count 2 are compared.
It is appropriate to determine whether to update the region to its initial value.

Specifically, even when a support hit occurs, the number of time reduction fluctuations 1 as the remaining number of times is less than or equal to the number of time reduction fluctuations 2 as the remaining number of times, and further, a new time reduction as an initial value If the number of times of variation 1 is smaller than the number of times of shortened variation 1 as the remaining number of times, the number of times of shortened variation 1 and the number of times of shortened variation 2 are not updated to the initial values, and the support operation setting process is not executed (A5126 and A5127). is not executed). In this way, when the number of time reduction fluctuations 1 as the remaining number of times is less than the number of time reduction fluctuations 2 as the remaining number of times (for example, in the case of medium support), the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is the main during the time reduction Since the game is executed as a variable display game, it is possible to compare the initial value of the time shortened variation number 1 and the remaining number of times to determine whether to update the time shortened variation number 1 area and the time shortened variation number 2 area to the initial values. Appropriate.

In order to reduce program capacity and simplify control, line numbers 6360, 6370, and 63
80, 6420, it is not necessary to compare the shortened time variation count 1 as the remaining count with the time shortened variation count 2 as the remaining count. As a result, if the new time reduction variation count 1 as the initial value is 1 or more as the current remaining time reduction count,
Or, if either the new time reduction variation count 2 as the initial value is greater than or equal to the time reduction variation count 2 as the current remaining time reduction count, the time reduction variation count 1 area and the time reduction variation count 2 The area will be updated to the initial value.

Also, line numbers 6360, 6370, 63
80 instructions and replace the code at line number 6410 with "JRRF, TDISPLY9
0" and the jump destination may be an address in the ROM corresponding to TDISPLY 90. As a result, when the new time reduction variation number 1 as the initial value is greater than or equal to the time reduction variation number 1 as the current remaining number of times of time reduction, and the new time reduction variation number 2 as the initial value is the current time reduction If the remaining number of times is 2 or more, the time-reduction variation count 1 region and the time-reduction variation count 2 region are updated to the initial values. By doing so, it is possible to prevent sudden decrease in both the number of times of shortening fluctuations 1 and the number of times of shortening fluctuations 2 .

[Starting mouth signal editing processing program]
FIG. 134 is a program list showing the program structure of the starting signal editing process program corresponding to the starting signal editing process (A9324) according to the fifth embodiment. The start-up signal editing processing program is a subroutine that has a start address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_SIDOINF and is called at step A9324 of the external information editing processing.

At line number 7010, by XORing the values of the W registers,
Clear the value of the W register and set it to 0 (off data) (code "XOR W, W
”).

In line number 7020, the lower byte of the address of the start signal output control timer area (R_S
IDOSIG+1) to the E register (code "LD E, R_SIDOSIG+
1"). The value of the DE register becomes the address of the start signal output control timer area.

Line number 7030 calls and executes a subroutine that updates the starting signal output control timer, which is the value of the starting signal output control timer area, by -1 if it is not 0 (code "CALL
TP_DECBYTE"). A subroutine that is a processing program for such -1 update processing (countdown) is the n-th (n=label P_DECBY
TE value). By this subroutine, the value of the starting signal output control timer after the -1 update is stored in the A register.

At line number 7040, when the starting signal output control timer is 0 (T, ZF=JF=1
), jump to the ROM address corresponding to the label SIDOINF10, line number 70
90 and later instructions (code "JRRT, SIDOINF10"). If the starting port signal output control timer is not 0, the process proceeds to the next line number 7050 command.

At line number 7050, the value of the start-up signal output control timer in the A register is set to a predetermined value (64/
T+1) (code "CP A,64/T+1"). Here, T is 4 corresponding to the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt. Therefore, the predetermined value (64/T+1) is 17. Note that the code "CP A, 64/T+1" is equivalent to "CP p, n" (
3rd comparison instruction). Then, the countdown processing program (subroutine P
_DECBYTE) is made common to the values of other timers, and the value of the starting signal output control timer is updated and stored in the A register. can be properly compared. When the starting port signal output control timer is less than a predetermined value,
Carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (JF) are set (CF=1
, JF=1(T)). When the starting port signal output control timer is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (JF) are not set (CF=0, JF=0 (
F)).

At line number 7060, when the starting signal output control timer is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (on timing) and the jump status flag (JF) is not set (when JF=0, when F), the ROM corresponding to label SIDOINF20 Jump to address, line number 71
60 and subsequent instructions (code "JRRF, SIDOINF20").

At line number 7070, it jumps to the ROM address corresponding to label SIDOINF30 and executes the instructions after line number 7180 (code "JR SIDOINF30").
.

At line number 7090, the value of the DE register is decremented by 1 to obtain the address of the starting signal output frequency area (code "DEC DE").

At line number 7100, the value (starting signal output count) of the starting signal output count area of the address currently specified by the DE register is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (DE)
”).

At line number 7110, when the number of times of starting signal output transferred due to no output request is "0" (when ZF=JF=0, when T), ROM corresponding to label SIDOINF30
jump to the inner address and execute the instructions after line number 7180 (code "JRRT
, SIDOINF30").

At line number 7120, the start signal output count is decremented by 1 and updated by -1 (code "D
EC (DE)").

At line number 7130, the value of the DE register is incremented by 1 to obtain the address of the start-up signal output control timer area (code "INC DE").

At line number 7140, the initial value (128/T+64/T) is transferred to the start-up signal output control timer area of the address currently specified by the DE register (code "LD (DE), 12
8/T+64/T"). The initial value (128/T+64/T) is 48.

At line number 7160, the ON data (value of label C_SIDO_INF) of the start-up signal is transferred to the W register (code "LD W, C_SIDO_INF").

At line number 7180, the ON data or OFF data of the start signal is transferred as the value of the W register to the external information output data area (added address "IY+R_SIDOSIG+2") (code "LD (IY+R_SIDOSIG+2), W"). As a result, the ON data or OFF data of the starting port signal is output from the external information terminal 71 to an external device (such as a hall computer).

At line number 7190, a return is made from the start signal editing processing program (code "RE
T").

According to the above starting signal editing processing program, unless the starting signal output count becomes zero, the initial value is set to the starting signal output control timer, and the initial value (128/T+64/T) is set.
to a predetermined value (64/T+1), the ON data of the starting port signal is output from the external information terminal 71 to an external device (hall computer, etc.).

[Safety device-related processing program]
FIG. 135 is a program list showing a program structure of a safety device related processing program corresponding to the safety device related processing (FIG. 56) according to the fifth embodiment. The safety device-related processing program is a subroutine that has a start address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_SAFSET and is called by the CALLR instruction (line number 1190) at step A1314 of timer interrupt processing.

Line numbers 7510 and 7520 correspond to A9401 of the safety device-related processing. At line number 7510, the safety device operating flag in the safety device operating flag area (added address "IY+R_SAFFLG") included in the intra-area work area is compared with the value (label C_SAFON) indicating that the safety device is operating. (code "CPJ (IY+R_SAFF
LG), C_SAFON"). If the comparison results indicate that the safety device is in operation, the zero flag is set (Z, ZF=1), and if the comparison results do not match, the zero flag is not set (NZ, ZF=0).

At line number 7520, if the safety device operating flag indicates that the safety device is operating and the comparison results match (Z), the subroutine is terminated and the safety device related processing program returns (code "RET Z ”).

Line numbers 7530 to 7550 correspond to safety device related processing A9402 and A9403. At line number 7530, safety device actuation information and old actuation information are extracted from a 2-byte area (having the start address of label R_SAFINF1) that is included in the work area outside the area and includes the safety device actuation information area and the old actuation information area. transfer to register (code "LD WA
, (R_SAFINF1)”). Old actuation information is transferred to the W register, and safety device actuation information is transferred to the A register. Note that the code "LD WA, (R_SAFINF1)
' corresponds to 'LD ss, (vw)' in the instruction table.

Line number 7540 compares the safeguard actuation information in the A register with the old actuation information in the W register (code "CPJ A,W"). Note that the code "CPJ A, W" corresponds to "C
PJ r,g". If the safety device actuation information has the same value as the old actuation information and does not change, and the comparison results match, the jump status flag is set (T, ZF = 1 and JF = 1), and if the comparison results do not match does not set the jump status flag (F, ZF=0 and JF=0).

At line number 7550, if the safety device actuation information is the same value as the old actuation information and the jump status flag (JF) is set (if JF=1, if T), label SAFS
It jumps to the ROM address corresponding to ET10 and executes the instructions after line number 7640 (code "JRRT, SAFSET10"). If the safety device actuation information is not the same value as the old actuation information and has changed, go to the next line number 7560 command.

At line number 7560, address (label D_SAF
COM) to the relative address "D_SAFCOM-5000h" and transferred to the HL register (code "LDD HL, D_SAFCOM-5000H").

At line number 7570, a subroutine for 1-byte data acquisition processing is called and executed (code "CALLT P_GETBYTE") corresponding to safety device related processing A9405.
). As a result, the value of the safety device activation information in the A register is added to the address of the safety device activation-related command table in the HL register, and the value stored in the address area specified by the HL register after the addition is transferred to the A register. do. Therefore, the command (ACTION part) obtained from the safety device activation-related command table corresponding to the safety device activation information is stored in the A register.

Line numbers 7580 and 7590 correspond to A9406 of safety device related processing. At line number 7580, the command in the A register (ACTION part) is compared with a numerical value indicating no command definition (label C_NONCOM) (code "CPJ A, C_NONCOM").
). If the command (ACTION part) has no command definition and the comparison results match, the jump status flag is set (T, ZF=1 and JF=1), and if the comparison results do not match, the jump status flag is set. is not set (F, ZF=0 and JF
= 0).

At line number 7590, if the safety device actuation information is no command definition and the jump status flag (JF) is set (if JF=1, if T), label SAFSE
It jumps to the ROM address corresponding to T10 and executes the instructions on and after line number 7640 (code "JRRT, SAFSET10").

At line number 7600, the command in the A register (ACTION part) is transferred to the C register (code "LD C, A").

At line number 7610, in response to safety device related processing A9407, a safety device activation related command (MODE section) is prepared as a performance command.
MODE part) value (label C_SAFMD) to the B register (code "LD B
, C_SAFMD").

At line number 7620, corresponding to A9408 of the safety device related processing, the subroutine of effect command setting processing is called and executed (code "CALLT P_COMSET").
The effect command setting process is executed based on the values of the B and C registers.

Line numbers 7640 and 7650 correspond to A9409 of safety device related processing. At line number 7640, the safety activation information in the safety activation information area (address R_SAFINF1) is compared with the safety activation information (value 3) at label C_SAFSADO (code "
CPJ (R_SAFINF1), C_SAFSADO'). The code "CPJ (
R_SAFINF1), C_SAFSADO') is the command table's 'CPJ (vw), n'
corresponds to If the safety device activation information is the safety device activation information (value 3) and the comparison results match, the zero flag is set (Z, ZF=1), and if the comparison results do not match, the zero flag is not set (NZ , ZF=0).

At line number 7650, if the safety device activation information is not the safety device activation information (value 3) and the zero flag (ZF) is not set (in the case of NZ), return from the safety device related processing program (code "RET NZ ”).

At line number 7660, a value (label C_SAFON, for example, "1") indicating that the safety device is operating is stored in the safety device operating flag area (added address "IY+R_SAFFLG") corresponding to A9410 of the safety device related processing. ) and save it as a safety device active flag (code "LD (IY+R_SAFFLG), C_SAFON").

At line number 7670, a return is made from the safety-related processing program (code "RET
”).

123 to 135, the internal program (first program) arranged in the first ROM area (first program storage area) in the address space has been described above.
In the local program, a 4-byte specific CALL instruction (first call instruction, specific call instruction) in which the address of the call destination is specified by the direct value mn is the line number 0620, line number 0710, line number 1280 It appears in three places to call out-of-bounds programs. The number of occurrences of a specific CALL instruction in the internal program is determined by the external program (
136 to 139), it is less than the number of occurrences of a specific CALL instruction (four or more).

In this way, the specific CALL instruction has a large word length of 4 bytes.
It is used less than the area (outside program area, second program storage area). As a result, the development efficiency of the game control program, which is the program in the area, can be improved by providing a margin in the capacity of the first ROM area.

Also, one subroutine can be called from a predetermined processing program that is part of the program in the area by either the CALLR instruction (second call instruction) or the CALLT instruction (third call instruction). In the subroutine, a JRR instruction (predetermined branch instruction,
second branch instruction). The JRR instruction does not branch to other subroutines called from a given processing program. In this way, the division between one subroutine and another subroutine can be clarified, and the efficiency of program development can be improved.

An example of a combination of a predetermined processing program and one subroutine is a combination of a timer interrupt processing program and a special game processing program. It does not branch into the accessory game processing program or the general-purpose game processing program, which are subroutines of . In addition, an example of a combination of a predetermined processing program and one subroutine is a combination of a special figure starter switch common processing program and a special figure reservation information determination processing program, JRR instruction (line number 4220), it does not branch into the production command setting processing program (P_COMSET), which is another subroutine of the special figure starting port switch common processing program. Furthermore, an example of a combination of a predetermined processing program and one subroutine is a combination of a special figure reservation information determination processing program and a big hit determination processing program. , Do not branch into the special figure state check processing program, which is another subroutine of the special figure reservation information determination processing program.

[Outside area integration processing program]
FIG. 136 is a program list showing the program structure of the out-of-area integration processing program corresponding to the out-of-area integration processing (FIG. 121) according to the fifth embodiment. The out-of-area integration processing program is a subroutine that has a top address (in ROM) corresponding to label P_OUTAREA and is called by a CALL instruction (line number 1280) at step A1322 of timer interrupt processing.

At line number 8010, corresponding to A9501 of the out-of-area integration processing, the value of the stack pointer in the SP register is stored in the stack pointer saving area (label R_ESTC
KPT address) (code "LD (R_ESTCKPT), SP"). Note that the code "LD (R_ESTCKPT), SP" is equivalent to "LD (vw), s
s”.

At line number 8020, the top address value (label C_S_STKTOP) indicating the top of the stack area outside the area is transferred to the stack pointer of the SP register as the value of the stack area outside the area (label C_S_STKTOP), corresponding to A9502 of the outside area integration process ( Code "LD SP, C_S_S
TK TOP"). The final address (maximum address) of the out-of-area stack area is the leading address (start address), and the out-of-area stack area ranges from the maximum address to the minimum address.

Line numbers 8030 to 8060 correspond to A9503 of the out-of-area integration processing. At line number 8030, to select register bank 0, a value of '0' is transferred to the register bank selector (RBS), a bit of flag register 1200 (code 'LD RBS').
, 0").

At line number 8040, the values of all general-purpose registers (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, IY register) of register bank 0 are saved (PUSHed) to the outside stack area (code "PUSH WA, BC, DE, HL, IX, I
Y").

At row number 8050, to select register bank 1, a value of "1" is transferred to the register bank selector (RBS) bit of flag register 1200 (code "LD
RBS, 1").

At line number 8060, the values of all general-purpose registers (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, IY register) of register bank 1 are saved (PUSHed) to the outside stack area (code "PUSH WA, BC, DE, HL, IX, I
Y").

From line number 8070 to line number 8100, test signal output processing (A10001),
A subroutine (outside area program) corresponding to the performance display device control process (A9504), the difference check process (A9505), and the safety device operation monitoring process (A9506) is called and executed. A call is executed by a specific 4-byte long CALL instruction (first call instruction) in which the address of the called subroutine is specified by the immediate value mn (label) (code "CA
LL P_SOUTPUT""CALLP_SHYMT""CALL P_DEFCH
K""CALLP_SAFCHK").

Regarding the call of test signal output processing, any address without using CALLT instruction (1-byte length) or CALLR instruction (2-byte length or 3-byte length) whose cycle number or word length is smaller than a specific CALL instruction. A specific CALL instruction (
4 bytes long). As a result, regarding the calling of the test signal output processing, versatility that does not depend on the address of the test signal output processing program is provided, and the developer can easily understand.

From line number 8110 to line number 8130, the saved registers are restored in response to A9507 of the out-of-area integration processing. At line number 8110, all general purpose registers of register bank 1 (
WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, IY register) from the stack area outside the area (POP) (code "POP WA, BC,
DE, HL, IX, IY").

At row number 8120, to select register bank 0, a value of "0" is transferred to the register bank selector (RBS) bit of flag register 1200 (code "LD
RBS, 0").

At line number 8130, the values of all general-purpose registers (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, IY register) of register bank 0 are returned (POP) from the outside stack area (code "POP WA, BC, DE, HL, IX, IY
”).

At line number 8140, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area (address of label R_ESTCKPT) of the outside work area is transferred to the SP register (code "LD SP, (R_ESTCKP
T)").

Line number 8150 returns from the out-of-bounds integration processing program (code "RET"
).

The out-of-area integration processing program has been described above, but as subroutines called from the out-of-area integration processing program, the subroutines corresponding to test signal output processing, performance display device control processing, difference ball confirmation processing, and safety device operation monitoring processing are as follows: Second ROM in address space
It is an out-of-area program that is placed in an area. When these subroutines contained in the program outside the area are further called from the outside integrated processing program contained in the program outside the area, only a specific CALL instruction is used without using the CALLT and CALLR instructions to perform the processing within the area. It is distinguished from calling a subroutine contained in the program. This can improve the efficiency of program development.

Even if the program outside the area calls a subroutine contained in the program inside the area, only the CALL instruction is used in the program outside the area. can distinguish between programs in the region and
Program development efficiency can be improved.

In addition, when calling a subroutine included in the outside program from the subroutine (a part of the outside program) corresponding to the test signal output processing, performance display device control processing, difference check processing, and safety device operation monitoring processing , the program development efficiency can be improved by using only the CALL instruction without using the CALLT and CALLR instructions, as distinguished from calling a subroutine contained in the program within the area.

[Test signal output processing program]
FIG. 137 is a program list showing the program structure of the test signal output processing program corresponding to the test signal output processing (FIG. 122) according to the fifth embodiment. The test signal output processing program has a start address (in ROM) corresponding to label P_SOUTPUT, and has a CALL instruction (line number 807
0) and is included in the out-of-bounds program.

Line number 8510 to line number 8560 are A10101 and A1010 of test signal output processing.
2. At line number 8510, the value stored in the area at address "R_SKNBF+0" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (R_SKNBF+0)"). In addition,
The code "LD A, (R_SKNBF+0)" corresponds to "LD s, (vw)" in the instruction table.

At line number 8520, the value stored in the area of the address "R_SKNBF+1" and the value of the A register are combined by taking the logical sum and stored in the A register (code "OR
A, (R_SKNBF+1)").

At line number 8530, the value stored in the area of the address "R_SKNBF+2" and the value of the A register are combined by taking the logical sum and stored in the A register (code "OR
A, (R_SKNBF+2)").

At line number 8540, the value stored in the area at address "R_SKNBF+3" is transferred to the W register (code "LD W, (R_SKNBF+3)"). In addition, the code "LD
W, (R_SKNBF+3)" corresponds to "LD t, (vw)" in the instruction table.

At line number 8550, the value stored in the area of the address "R_SKNBF+4" and the value of the W register are combined by taking the logical sum and stored in the W register (code "OR
W, (R_SKNBF+4)").

At line number 8560, the value of the WA register is output to port C_OUT05 (that is, the port with the numerical number corresponding to label C_OUT05) (code "OUTW (C_OU
T05), WA'). As a result, WA is applied to the test terminal output ports 1 and 2 on the relay board 70 .
The value of the register is printed.

Line number 8570 to line number 8620 are A10103 and A1010 of test signal output processing.
4. At line number 8570, the value stored in the area of address "R_TZ1STP" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (R_TZ1STP)"). address"
In the area of "R_TZ1STP", the bit signal of the symbol data of the special figure 1 is stored.

At line number 8580, the value stored in the area of the address "R_T1HENSKN" and the value of the A register are combined by taking the logical sum and stored in the A register (code "O
R A, (R_T1HENSKN)"). In the area of the address "R_T1HENSKN" is stored a signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation, which is a signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

At line number 8590, the value stored in the area of the address "R_SKNBF+5" and the value of the A register are combined by taking the logical sum and stored in the A register (code "OR
A, (R_SKNBF+5)").

At line number 8600, the value stored in the area of address "R_TZ2STP" is transferred to the W register (code "LD W, (R_TZ2STP)"). Address "R_TZ2S
TP" area stores a bit signal of the special figure 2 symbol data.

At line number 8610, the value stored in the area of the address "R_T2HENSKN" and the value of the W register are combined by taking the logical sum and stored in the W register (code "O
RW, (R_T2HENSKN)"). In the area of the address "R_T2HENSKN", a signal during special symbol 2 fluctuation, which is a signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, is stored.

At line number 8620, the value of the WA register is output to port C_OUT07 (that is, the port with the numerical number corresponding to label C_OUT07) (code "OUTW (C_OU
T07), WA'). As a result, WA is applied to the test terminal output ports 3 and 4 on the relay board 70 .
The value of the register is printed.

Row numbers 8630 to 8660 correspond to A10105 of the test signal output process.
At line number 8630, the value stored in the area of address "R_FZSTP" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (R_FZSTP)"). In the area of the address "R_FZSTP", a bit signal of the pattern data of the normal pattern is stored.

At line number 8640, the value stored in the area of the address "R_SKNBF+6" and the value of the A register are combined by taking the logical sum and stored in the A register (code "OR
A, (R_SKNBF+6)").

At line number 8650, the value stored in the area of the address "R_SKNBF+7" and the value of the A register are combined by taking the logical sum and stored in the A register (code "OR
A, (R_SKNBF+7)").

At line number 8660, the value of the A register is output to port C_OUT09 (that is, the port with the numerical number corresponding to label C_OUT09) (code "OUT (C_OUT0
9), A'). As a result, the numerical value of the A register is output to the test terminal output port 5 .

Line number 8670 returns from the test signal output processing program (code "RET
”).

[Different ball confirmation processing program]
FIG. 138 is a program list showing a program structure of a part of the differential ball confirmation processing program corresponding to the differential ball confirmation processing (FIG. 59) according to the fifth embodiment. The differential ball confirmation processing program has a start address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_DEFCHK, and is a subroutine called by the CALL instruction (line number 8090) in step A9505 of the outside area integration process (FIG. 121). Included in the program.

Line number 9010 and line number 9020 correspond to A9701 of the difference check processing. line number 9
In 010, the safety device activation flag area (address R_SA
FFLG) to a value indicating that the safety device is in operation (label C
_SAFON) with (code "CPJ (R_SAFFLG), C_SAFON"
). In addition, the address of the safety device active flag area is indicated by an absolute address in the program outside the area (here, the difference check processing program), unlike the program inside the area, without using the offset value d (relative address). . As a result, the independence of the out-of-area program is enhanced, making it easier to use the out-of-area program in common in various gaming machines, thereby enhancing versatility.
If the comparison results indicate that the safety device is in operation, the zero flag is set (Z, ZF=1), and if the comparison results do not match, the zero flag is not set (NZ, ZF=0).

At line number 9020, if the comparison result at line number 7510 matches (Z) (i.e., if the safety device is in operation), the subroutine is terminated and the program returns from the difference check processing program (code "RET Z ”).

Line number 9030 and line number 9040 correspond to A9702 of the difference check processing. line number 9
At 030, the value of the old operation information stored in the old operation information area (address R_SAFINF2) is compared with the value (2) of the label C_SAFWRN (code "CP (R_SAFIN
F2), C_SAFWRN"). If the value of the old operation information is 2 or more, the carry flag (
CF) is not set (NC, CF=0) and is less than 2, the carry flag (C
F) is set (CF=1).

In line number 9040, when the value of the old operation information is 2 or more and the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC), the program returns (code "RET
NC"). When the value of the old operation information is smaller than 2 and the carry flag (CF) is set, the instruction of the next line number 9050 is started.

Line number 9050 and line number 9060 correspond to A9703 of the difference check processing. line number 9
At 050, the rise information of the out ball detection switch 74 is acquired from the address "R_SWCTL4+2", and the switch bit data (determination value) corresponding to the label C_OUTSW is obtained.
and determine whether the switch is turned on (code "TEST (
R_SWCTL4+2), C_OUTSW'). In the area of the address "R_SWCTL4+2", rising information of the switch control area in which the information on the out ball detection switch 74 is stored is stored.

When the game ball does not pass and the out-ball detection switch 74 is off (when no game ball is detected), the rise information (target bit) corresponding to the out-ball detection switch 74 is zero, and the operation result (logical product ) becomes zero and the zero flag (ZF) is set. If the rise information is the same as the switch bit data (decision value) (for example, "00001000
B” when the switch bit is turned on), the operation result (logical product) is non-zero (for example,
"00001000B") and the zero flag (ZF) is not set.

At line number 9060, when the out-ball detection switch 74 is off and the zero flag (ZF) is set, jump to the ROM address corresponding to the label DEFCHK10 and execute the instructions from line number 9150 onwards (code "JR Z, DEFCHK10")
. When the game ball has passed and the out ball detection switch 74 is on (when the game ball is detected), the command of the next line number 9070 is executed.

Line numbers 9070 to 9130 correspond to A9704 and A9705 of the difference check processing. At line number 9070, the lower two bytes of the safety device counter value stored in the safety device counter area (address R_SAFCNT) are transferred to the HL register (code "LD H
L, (R_SAFCNT)"). As described above, the safety device counter area is a 3-byte area (3-byte size), and the safety device counter value consists of lower 2 bytes and upper 1 byte. The start address of the lower 2 bytes is the value of the label R_SAFCNT, and the start address of the upper 1 byte is R_SAFCNT+2.

At line number 9080, the upper byte of the safety device counter value is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (R_SAFCNT+2)").

At line number 9090, 1 is subtracted from the value of the lower 2 bytes of the safety device counter value (the value of the HL register) to update it by -1 (code "SUB HL, 1").

At line number 9100, the value of the carry flag corresponding to the borrowing caused by the subtraction of the lower 2 bytes is subtracted from the value of the upper 1 byte (the value of the A register) (code "SBC A, 0
”).

At line number 9110, the subtraction result of line number 9100 is negative and the carry flag is "1".
If (CF=1), that is, if the safety device counter value becomes negative (if it reaches the lower limit value "0" before the -1 update), jump to the ROM address corresponding to the label DEFCHK10. to execute the instructions after line number 9150 (code "JR C, DEF
CHK10"). If the safety device counter value is not negative, go to the next instruction on line number 9120 .

At line number 9120, the updated lower 2-byte value (HL register value) is transferred back to the lower 2 bytes of the safety device counter area (code "LD (R_SAFCNT)
, HL").

At line number 9130, the updated high-order byte value (A register value) is transferred back to the high-order byte of the safety device counter area (code "LD (R_SAFCNT+2
), A”).

[Safety device operation monitoring processing program]
FIG. 139 is a program list showing a program structure of a safety device activation monitoring processing program corresponding to the safety device activation monitoring processing (FIG. 60) according to the fifth embodiment. The safety device operation monitoring program is stored at the start address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_SAFCHK.
and a CALL instruction (line number 8100) in step A9506 of the out-of-area integration process
It is a subroutine called by and contained in an out-of-bounds program.

Line numbers 9510 and 9520 correspond to A9801 of the safety device activation monitoring process.
At line number 9510, the value of the safety device activation information in the safety device activation information area (address R_SAFINF1) is compared with the value (2) of the label C_SAFWRN (code "CP (R_
SAFINF1), C_SAFWRN"). If the safety device activation information value is 2 or more,
If the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC, CF=0) and is less than 2, the carry flag (CF) is set (CF=1).

At line number 9520, when the value of the safety device activation information is less than 2 and the carry flag (CF) is set (C), the safety device activation monitoring processing program returns (code "RET C").

Line numbers 9530 to 9560 correspond to A9802 of the safety device activation monitoring process. In line number 9530, the area (R
A special game process number stored in AM) and a label C_TS indicating that it is a small hit
Compare the value of FAN (code "CP (R_TGAME), C_TSFAN"). The value of the label C_TSFAN is the special figure game processing number "3" of the small hit opening pre-processing. In addition,
The address of the special figure game processing number area is indicated by an absolute address without using the offset value d (relative address) unlike the program inside the area in the outside program (safety device operation monitoring processing program here). As a result, the independence of the out-of-area program is enhanced, making it easier to use the out-of-area program in common in various gaming machines, thereby enhancing versatility. When the small win is in progress and the special game processing number is 3 or more, the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC, CF=0), and when the small win is not in progress and is smaller than 3, the carry flag. (C
F) is set (CF=1).

At line number 9540, if the carry flag (CF) is not set during a minor hit (NC, CF=0), the safety device operation monitoring processing program returns (code "RET NC"). If the carry flag (CF) is set without a small hit, the instruction of the next line number 9550 is entered.

At line number 9550, the area (R
AM) and the label C_YF indicating that the jackpot is in progress.
Compare the value of AN (code "CP (R_YGAME), C_YFAN"). Label C.
The value of _YFAN is the special game process number "1" during fanfare process. Note that the address of the accessory game processing number area is indicated by an absolute address in the program outside the area (here, safety device activation monitoring processing program), unlike the program in the area, without using the offset value d (relative address). there is This enhances the independence of the out-of-area program,
The out-of-area program is made easy to use commonly in various gaming machines to improve versatility. When the jackpot is in progress and the accessory game processing number is 1 or more, the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC, CF=0), and when the jackpot is not in progress and is smaller than 1, the carry flag (CF
) is set (CF=1).

At line number 9560, if the jackpot is in progress and the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC, CF=0), the safety device operation monitoring processing program returns (code "RET NC"). If the carry flag (CF) is set and the jackpot is not in progress, the instruction of the next line number 9570 is entered.

Line numbers 9570 and 9580 correspond to A9803 of the safety device activation monitoring process.
At line number 9570, the safety device activation information in the safety device activation information area (address R_SAFINF1) is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (R_SAFINF1)").

At line number 9580, the safety device actuation information in the A register is transferred to the old actuation information area (address R
_SAFINF2) (code "LD (R_SAFINF2), A").

At line number 9590, corresponding to A9804 of the safety device activation monitoring process, the safety device activation information (value 3) of label C_SAFSADO is transferred to the safety device activation information area (address R_SAFINF1) (code "LD (R_SAFINF1) , C_SAFSADO
”).

At line number 9600, the safety device operation monitoring processing program returns (code "R
ET").

136 to 139, the out-of-area program (second program) arranged in the second ROM area (second program storage area) within the address space has been described above.
In a program outside the area, a specific C where the address of the call destination is specified by the immediate value mn
The ALL instruction is 4
appear in places. Of course, a particular CALL instruction may appear in more than four places in the out-of-bounds program. In this way, the number (four or more) of specific CALL instructions (first call instruction, specific call instruction) appearing in the program outside the area is the same as in the program inside the area (FIGS. 123 to 135). Number of occurrences of CALL instructions (three)
more than In this way, the specific CALL instruction has a large word length of 4 bytes, so the first R
A second ROM area (second
program storage area). As a result, the development efficiency of the game control program, which is the program in the area, can be improved by providing a margin in the capacity of the first ROM area. In addition, by using only a specific CALL instruction that can call a subroutine at an arbitrary address without being affected by the arrangement of various processing programs (program modules) in the address space, in the program outside the area, different models of game machines It becomes easy to share the out-of-area program between them, and the development efficiency of the program is improved.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 109, the second ROM area is located on the larger address side of the second ROM area.
Certain CAs with long word lengths due to large unused regions between regions and program management areas
There is no problem even if many LL instructions are used. Also, CALLR and the like, which have an upper limit on the address of the called subroutine, may be difficult to use in the second ROM area when calling a subroutine in the second ROM area with a large called address.

In addition, the out-of-area integrated processing program, which is the out-of-area program explained in FIGS. It is a subroutine called by the CALL instruction (eg line number 1280, line numbers 8070-8100). In these subroutines, a JRR instruction (second branch instruction) whose branch condition includes a condition regarding the state of the jump status flag is not executed, and a JR instruction (first branch instruction) whose branch condition does not include a condition regarding the state of the jump status flag is executed. to run. In the example of the program list, the JR command is executed in the extra ball confirmation processing (line number 9060 and line number 9110), but the outside area integration processing program itself, the performance display device control processing, etc. also execute the JR command. may

The meaning of the jump status flag changes depending on the situation, and it matches the zero flag or the carry flag depending on the instruction used. However, since the out-of-area integrated processing program and its subroutines called by the CALL instruction in this way do not use the JRR instruction including the branch condition regarding the state of the jump status flag, it is easy for multiple developers to understand. Become. Therefore, the out-of-area integration processing program and its subroutines can be easily shared by a plurality of models, improving the efficiency of program development. Further, it becomes easy to distinguish between a subroutine called by a CALL instruction and a subroutine called by another call instruction (for example, a CALLR instruction) depending on whether only JR instructions exist or both JR and JRR instructions are present. , improve the efficiency of program development.

[Instruction of the CPU of the production control device]
FIG. 140 is an instruction table illustrating a comparison instruction in a set of instructions (instruction set) that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution circuit used in the program in the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300 . A CPU core (instruction interpretation and execution circuit) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing each comparison instruction. In addition, in this embodiment, the CPU 311 and the VDP 312 may be collectively configured as one VDP.

The CPU 311 has 15 general purpose registers (R0 to R14) of 4 bytes (32 bits).
have

The number of cycles of the operation clock required for the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300 to execute the comparison instruction is one cycle, and the word length (instruction size) of the comparison instruction is a fixed length of 2 bytes. The executable comparison command of the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300 is the CPU of the game control device 100
It is simpler with fewer cycles and shorter word lengths than the 111a executable compare instruction. In addition, since the length is fixed, the CPU 311 does not require time to determine the command length, and the time required to execute processing corresponding to the effect command is short. Since the number of cycles is one cycle, the comparison instruction can be executed at high speed, and the time for executing the process corresponding to the effect command can be shortened.

In the executable comparison instruction of the CPU 111a of the game control device 100, the flag register 12
Six flags (JF, ZF, CF, HF, SF, VF
) can be changed, whereas in the executable comparison instruction of the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300, only the 0th bit TF flag of the 32-bit flag register can be changed and simplified.

The comparison instruction in the instruction table is divided into an "opcode" (or "mnemonic") indicating operation content (operation content) and an "operand" for the instruction target. There may be a plurality of "operands" such as a first operand, a second operand, and so on.

"CMP/EQ #imm, R0" compares the value of the R0 register and the immediate value imm, and if both values match, the TF flag is set to "1"; otherwise, the TF flag is set to "
0" is set.

"CMP/EQ Rm, Rn" compares the value of the Rn register with the value of the Rm register,
If both values match, the TF flag is set to "1", otherwise the TF flag is set to "0".

"CMP/HS Rm, Rn" compares the value of the Rn register with the value of the Rm register,
When the value of the Rn register is unsigned (absolute value) and equal to or greater than the value of the Rm register, the TF flag is set to "1", otherwise the TF flag is set to "0".

"CMP/GE Rm, Rn" compares the value of the Rn register with the value of the Rm register,
If it is signed and the value of the Rn register is greater than or equal to the value of the Rm register, the TF flag is set to "1"; otherwise, the TF flag is set to "0".

"CMP/HI Rm, Rn" compares the value of the Rn register with the value of the Rm register,
When the value of the Rn register is unsigned (absolute value) and greater than the value of the Rm register, the TF flag is set to "1", otherwise the TF flag is set to "0".

"CMP/GT Rm, Rn" compares the value of the Rn register and the value of the Rm register,
If there is a sign and the value of the Rn register is greater than the value of the Rm register, the TF flag is set to "1", otherwise the TF flag is set to "0".

"CMP/PL Rn" compares the value of the Rn register with zero and sets the TF flag to "1" if the value of the Rn register is greater than zero; ” is set.

"CMP/PZ Rn" compares the value of the Rn register with zero and sets the TF flag to "1" if the value of the Rn register is greater than or equal to zero; 0" is set.

"CMP/STR Rm, Rn" compares the value of the Rn register and the value of the Rm register, and if either byte is equal, the TF flag is set to "1";"0" is set.

Of the comparison instructions, the machine language instructions are different, and the comparison instructions that can be executed by the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 are at least 47 types (=
18+9+15+5 types). On the other hand, the comparison instructions that can be executed by the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300 are nine types listed in the instruction table (FIG. 140). This facilitates development and simplifies the circuit configuration inside the CPU.

For example, the CPU 311 has only one type of comparison instruction "CMP/EQ #imm, R0" for comparing an arbitrary immediate value with a register value, which is simplified to less than 6 in the case of the CPU 111a. . In the case of the CPU 311, there is no comparison instruction for directly referring to the data (value) stored in the memory and comparing it with the immediate value or the data (value) of the register.

In addition, as a feature of the program executed by the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300, the program capacity of the safety device system processing program corresponding to the safety device system processing (B1330) is the safety device system processing program executed by the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 It is smaller than the total program capacity of (safety device information initialization processing program, safety device related processing program, out-of-area integration processing program, difference check processing program, safety device operation monitoring processing program). In the safety device system processing (B1330) of the production control device 300, the safety device related display (
This is because it is only necessary to execute the processing related to the display of the operation advance notice display 511, the operation warning display 512, and the operation display 513). Thus, since most of the processing related to the safety device is executed by the game control device 100, the load of the processing related to the safety device in the effect control device 300 is reduced.

In addition, conversely, the processing related to the safety device executed by the effect control device 300 may be increased to reduce the load of the processing related to the safety device in the game control device 100 . In this case
The program capacity of the safety system processing program executed by the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300 may be larger than the program capacity of the safety system processing program executed by the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 .

[Functions and Effects of the Fifth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment includes game control means (for example, the game control device 100) capable of executing a game (for example, a variable display game), and can give a game value to a player according to the result of the game. be. The game control means includes program storage means (for example, ROM) that stores programs, arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU) that performs predetermined arithmetic processing according to the program, and a plurality of registers in which values are stored when arithmetic processing is performed. and update information storage means (for example, RAM) capable of storing information updated by the arithmetic processing means. The plurality of registers includes a first register (for example, a 1-byte width register) and a second register (for example, a 2-byte width register: a pair register, an IX register, and an IY register) having twice the capacity of the first register. included. The arithmetic processing means compares different second register values, or compares the second
A first comparison instruction (for example, "C
P rr, gg" and "CP rr, mn"), and a second comparison instruction (for example, "CPJ p, n", "CPJ q, n") that can change the zero flag by comparing the value of the first register and the immediate value. )and,
is configured to be executable. The first comparison instruction can determine a random value (for example, a jackpot random number) related to the game result (line number 4550 or line number 4570), and the second comparison instruction can determine a flag value corresponding to the game result. (eg 6050).

In such a gaming machine 10, the carry flag can be changed by the first comparison instruction when judging the random number value related to the result of the game. can be determined. When determining the flag value corresponding to the game result, the zero flag can be changed by the second comparison instruction, and it is possible to appropriately determine whether the flag value corresponding to the game result matches the predetermined value. Therefore, by effectively combining with the conditional branch instruction executed after the first comparison instruction or the second comparison instruction, a program such as a game control program can be appropriately configured, and the program capacity (program size) can be reduced.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 can generate a specific game state different from the special game state that is advantageous to the player according to the game result. Arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU)
A third compare instruction (for example, "
CP p,n” and “CP q,n”), the value of the first register and update information storage means (for example, R
A fourth comparison instruction (e.g., "CP r, (vw)", "CP
r, (jj+d)""CP rr, (vw)""CP rr, (jj+d)"). The third comparison instruction can determine the magnitude relationship between the timer value (or counter value) and a predetermined value (eg, line number 7050). The fourth comparison command can determine the magnitude relationship between the number of remaining games in the specific game state that is occurring and the number of games in the specific game state that can newly occur (initial value) (for example, line number 6400 or line number 6450). When determining whether the timer value (or counter value) is zero or not, the comparison instruction is not used (for example, determination of time-up of the special game processing timer (line number 1550 and line number 1560)).

Therefore, the countdown and countup processing programs are made common and updated.
A third comparison instruction can be used to determine the magnitude relationship between a timer value or counter value (for example, 1 byte) stored in a register and a predetermined value. Further, the fourth comparison instruction can be used when determining the magnitude relationship with respect to the number of games which is used for various determinations and needs to be read directly from the area of update information storage means (for example, RAM). Therefore, the program such as the game control program can be appropriately configured, and the program capacity can be reduced. Further, since the process of determining whether the timer value (or counter value) is zero can be replaced with a process other than the comparison instruction, the program can be developed flexibly.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the program storage means (eg, ROM) includes a first program storage area (eg, first ROM area) and a second program storage area (second RO
M area) and an unused area between the first program storage area and the second program storage area. When the arithmetic processing means calls a second program in a second program storage area (for example, a subroutine for integration processing outside the area included in the outside program) from a first program in the first program storage area (for example, a program inside the area), First call instruction (for example, a specific CALL instruction in which the address of the callee is specified by the immediate value mn, a specific CA with a length of 4 bytes)
LL instruction). The arithmetic processing means uses only the first call instruction (for example, CALL) when calling the subroutine from the second program in the second program storage area, and uses a second call instruction (for example, CALLR) and a third call instruction (eg CALLT) are not used.

In such a gaming machine 10, when calling the second program from the first program, the first call instruction (for example, a specific CALL instruction) is used, and in addition to the first call instruction, the call instruction to call the subroutine is used in the second program. , the second program can be distinguished from the first program, and the efficiency of program development can be improved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the program storage means (eg, ROM) includes a first program storage area (eg, first ROM area) and a second program storage area (eg, second
and an unused area between the first program storage area and the second program storage area. The number of specific call instructions that appear in the program in the first program storage area to call the subroutine (e.g., three) is determined by the number of specific call instructions that appear in the program in the second program storage area to call the subroutine (e.g., four). less than one or more).

In such a gaming machine 10, a specific call command (for example, a first call command, a specific CAL
L instruction) is stored in the first ROM area (second program storage area) rather than the second ROM area (second program storage area)
first program storage area). This can improve the efficiency of program development. In particular, when the word length (instruction size) of a specific call instruction is large, it is possible to increase the efficiency of program development by providing a margin in the capacity of the first ROM area.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU), when calling a process related to the execution of the game (for example, a special figure game process, a character game process, a general figure game process), any address do not use a specific call instruction (eg, first call instruction, specific CALL instruction) that can call a subroutine of (line numbers 1140-1160). The arithmetic processing means does not use a specific call instruction when calling a process (for example, external information editing process) related to outputting external information to the outside of the gaming machine (line number 1240). The arithmetic processing means uses a specific call instruction when calling a process (for example, test signal output process) related to the output of the test signal related to the gaming machine (line number 8070).

In such a gaming machine 10, even if the word length or the number of cycles of a specific call instruction is large because a subroutine at any address can be called, the specific call instruction can be used for processing related to game execution and processing related to outputting external information. is not used when calling , but is used when calling processing related to test signal output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency and speed of the processing by the program. When calling a process related to the output of a test signal (for example, a test signal output process) related to the game machine, a specific call instruction that can call a subroutine at an arbitrary address is used. This makes it easy for the developer to understand, as well as providing versatility for calling the processing related to the output of the test signal, independent of the address of the subroutine related to the processing.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the arithmetic processing means executes a first branch instruction (eg JR instruction) and a second branch instruction (eg JRR instruction) for jumping the address of the instruction to be executed in the program storage means. Among subroutines configured to be capable and called by a specific call instruction (e.g., first call instruction, specific CALL instruction), a second branch instruction (
For example, the JRR instruction) is not executed, but the first branch instruction (for example, the JR instruction) is executed. for example,
The subroutines called by a specific call instruction are the outside area integration process, which is an outside area program, and its subroutines (for example, test signal output process, performance display device control process, difference ball confirmation process, safety device operation monitoring process) (line number 1280, line number 8070-8100)
.

In such a game machine 10, the efficiency of program development is improved. For example, if the branch condition of a second branch instruction (e.g., a JRR instruction) includes a condition on the state of a jump status flag (JF), the second branch instruction must be used within a subroutine called by a particular call instruction. , by avoiding referencing jump status flags whose meaning changes depending on the context (they match zero flags and others match carry flags, depending on the instruction used), so that when multiple developers see the program so as not to confuse the Therefore, a subroutine called by a specific call instruction can be easily shared among a plurality of models, improving the efficiency of program development. Also, a specific call instruction (e.g. the first
A call instruction, a specific CALL instruction) and a subroutine called by another call instruction (for example, a CALLR instruction) can be divided between the presence of only the first branch instruction, or the presence of the first branch instruction and the second branch instruction. are mixed, it becomes easy to distinguish them, and the development efficiency of the program is improved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, a plurality of call commands (for example, a second call command and a third
A subroutine can be called from a given processing program (e.g., part of an area program) by either of the JRR call instructions), and in one subroutine, a given branch instruction (e.g., a second branch instruction (JRR instruction )) is executed, and the predetermined branch instruction does not branch to another subroutine called from the predetermined processing program. For example, a combination of a predetermined processing program and one subroutine is a combination of a timer interrupt processing program and a special figure game processing program, a combination of a special figure start opening switch common processing program and a special figure reservation information determination processing program, special figure reservation information It is a combination of a determination processing program and a big hit determination processing program.

In such a game machine 10, it is possible to improve the efficiency of program development by clarifying the division between one subroutine and another subroutine.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the program uses the first branch instruction (
(e.g. JR instruction) and second branch instruction (e.g. JRR instruction) mixed first subroutine (e.g. special figure normal processing program, special figure display processing program, special figure reservation information determination processing program), and as a branch instruction, and a second subroutine (for example, a jackpot determination processing program) containing only two branch instructions. Of the first subroutine and the second subroutine, the second subroutine has a smaller program capacity.

In such a gaming machine 10, of the first subroutine and the second subroutine, the second subroutine, which has a smaller program capacity (program size), contains only the second branch instruction.
When the word length of the second branch instruction is shorter than the word length of the first branch instruction, the program can be designed rationally and the efficiency of program development is improved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the second subroutine (for example, a big hit determination processing program) includes a plurality of processing programs (for example, a special figure reservation information determination processing program, a big hit flag 1 setting processing program, a big hit flag 2 setting processing program ) is called from This makes it possible to reduce the overall capacity (size) of the program.

[Sixth embodiment]
A sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141A to 148. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fifth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to fifth embodiments, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The sixth embodiment mainly relates to effects on the display device 41 . Effects in the sixth embodiment can be set by the effect control device 300, for example, by predictive variable command processing (FIG. 66), variable effect setting processing (FIG. 69), winning command processing (FIG. 70), and the like.

[Example of production screen]
FIGS. 141A to 141F are examples (Example 1) of screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order regarding the sixth embodiment.

In (A), in the normal game state, mode display 6 corresponding to the normal mode of the production mode
As 79, "A mode" or the like is displayed. The variation count display 677 indicates the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the power is turned on or after the end of the big hit. shown as In addition, in the case of a model that can generate a probability variation state, the variation number display 677 is to make it easier to understand that the number of times is approaching the ceiling, except for the number of times in the probability variation state. It may indicate the number of executions of the display game. In addition, the variable count display 677 may indicate the remaining number of games up to the ceiling (number of times of ceiling - number of times of execution).

The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed (during variation), and the second predetermined image 676 is that the special figure 2 variation display game is being stopped. The symbol "x" indicates that A fourth symbol variation may be performed as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) by blinking the symbol "○".

On the display screen, a left pattern 611a, a right pattern 611b, and a middle pattern 611c can be variably displayed as decorative special patterns (large patterns). Left pattern 611a, right pattern 611b, middle pattern 611
In the variable display area 610, the variable display of c is displayed in the left variable display area 610A, the right variable display area 610B, and the center variable display area 610C, respectively. In this embodiment, the left pattern 611a, the right pattern 611b, and the middle pattern 611c are variably displayed by vertical scrolling. Furthermore, the variable display of the decorative reduced pattern (small pattern) is executed in the variable display area 615 on the right side of the display screen.

At the bottom of the display screen, the first start memory (special figure 1 start memory) before the execution of the variable display game is displayed as the first
The first suspension display portion 630a (standby area) displayed as a suspension display (first start memory display, specific image), and the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory) before the execution of the variable display game are displayed as the second suspension display ( A second hold display portion 630b, which is displayed as a second startup memory display, specific image), is displayed.
In this case, neither the first start memory nor the second start memory is generated, and neither the first hold display nor the second hold display is displayed. In addition, in the pending digestion area 640, a variable pending display 682b indicating variable pending related to the special figure 1 variable display game being executed (starting memory, specific image that was the execution right of this special figure variable display game) is displayed. , are displayed in the display mode of the character's face. Note that the pedestal may indicate the reserved digestion region 640 .

In the special figure 1 reservation number display part 650 and the special figure 2 reservation number display part 660 on the upper right of the display screen, the numbers "0" and special figure 2 indicating the special figure 1 reservation number (special figure 1 start memory number) respectively The number "0" indicating the number of reservations (special figure 2 start memory number) is displayed.

In (i), after (a), the special figure variation display game (here, the special figure 1 variation display game) becomes a small win result or a big win result, and the small win pattern or the big win pattern is a variation display area 610 as the decoration stop pattern. is displayed in the variable display area 615 . Here, an example is shown in which the jackpot pattern "3, 3, 3" by the pattern A1 is displayed as the decoration stop pattern. The big-hit symbol A1 is a big-hit symbol of the special-figure 1 variable display game in the state without the general electric support (mainly the big-hit in the normal game state). Also, the big-hit symbol A1 is not a big-hit by V winning, but a stop symbol determined by a big-hit symbol random number. It should be noted that the symbol A1 may be configured as a stop symbol for a big hit relating to a V prize in a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game.

The pending change display 682b disappears, and the first predetermined image 675 and the second predetermined image 676 are "x". In (i), similarly to (a), the mode display 679 continues to display "A mode", and the change count display 677 continues to display "170G". In addition, the special figure 1 reservation number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660 are respectively "0" and "0"
continues to be displayed.

Next, in (C), a round game of a small hit or a big hit (a game during a big hit or a small hit)
is executed in the first round (ROUND1). In the case of a small winning round game, a V winning occurs here, and a big winning state due to the V winning starts from the next second round. On the display screen, a round effect is being executed as a moving image or the like. Also, a right-handed hitting instruction display 502 is displayed to instruct right-handed hitting in response to the opening of the big winning hole. Since the big prize opening is open, a large number of prize balls (the number of winning balls and the number of safe balls) can be obtained by winning the prize in the big prize opening.

After that, in (e), the ending production of the big hit is executed, and the production executed in the time saving mode # 1 after the ending production (the production mode in the case of the time saving number ≤ 5 (for example, the time saving number 4 times), the challenge mode) ( A game description of time-saving effect #1, challenge effect) is displayed on the display screen, for example, "If you can defeat it, rush into RUSH". Similarly, when the small winning ending effect is executed, the time saving effect #1 can be executed in the time saving mode #1 after the ending effect, and the game explanation of the time saving effect #1 can be displayed during the ending effect. Further, the right-handed instruction display 502 is continuously displayed even during the ending effect. In addition, time saving mode # 1
(Challenge mode) may be executed as an effect mode consisting of a variable display game for four times of time saving, and an effect consisting of four times of time saving + four times after the end of the time saving state (8 times in total). mode.

Then, in (O) in the ending effect, the game title (effect title, effect name) of time saving effect #1 is displayed as, for example, "Dragon Battle" following the game explanation of time saving effect #1 of (E). Along with the characters displayed on the display screen, the voice corresponding to the displayed characters can also be output (for example, the voice "Dragon Battle" can be output).

After that, in (ka) in the ending effect, the right-hand hitting instruction display 502 moves slightly from the upper right of the display screen toward the center of the screen. The right-handed instruction display 502 indicates that the arrow instructing to hit to the right is the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) (see FIG. 2) or the passage through which the game ball flows down toward the second starting winning opening. It can be displayed at the side position of the second start-up opening or the aisle so as to face.

Along with the movement of the right-handed instruction display 502, a right-handed instruction display 703 for explaining the content (intention) of right-handed hitting to the player is displayed, for example, "Aim for the electric chu". The right-handed explanation display 703 is
The font of the characters can be displayed gradually smaller from left to right so that the player can easily pay attention to the right-handed instruction display 502 and the second start winning opening. In addition, in accordance with the right-handed instruction display 703, the right-handed instruction display 502, the second start winning opening, and the second start winning opening are displayed by making the right-handed instruction display 703 stand out.
An effect 704 may also be displayed to help draw attention to the upper passageway of the starting prize pool.

Along with the right-handed explanation display 703, a winning opening image 702 showing the vicinity of the second starting winning opening and an enhanced image 701 emphasizing the winning opening image 702 are displayed at the bottom of the display screen. The winning opening image 702 may display an image corresponding to the open state of the movable member (movable piece) 37b of the normal variable winning device 37, and the closed state or the open state may be displayed according to the rotation of the movable member 37b. You may switch a display mode to the image corresponding to . In the emphasized image 701 , an image composed of, for example, a row of a plurality of arrows pointing to the winning opening image 702 is displayed so that the player's line of sight is easily directed to the winning opening image 702 . Further, in order to make it easier to draw attention to the winning opening image 702, the plurality of arrows of the emphasized image 701 may be sequentially illuminated toward the winning opening image 702, and the emission colors of the plurality of arrows may be changed sequentially or gradually. (gradation). After that, the ending effect is finished, the time saving mode #1 (challenge mode) is started, and the display screen changes to the display mode of (ki) in FIG. 141B.

In (Ki), the time saving mode # 1 is started after the ending production, and the game ball wins in the second start winning mouth (normal variable winning device 37) opened by the general electric support, and the first special figure A 2-variation display game is executed. The first special figure 2 variation display game in time saving mode # 1 has a relatively long variation time compared to the second and third special figure 2 variation display games described below (for example, 60300ms for a hit, 40200ms for a loss) ). Therefore, while the first special figure 2 variable display game is being executed, it is easy to store the second start memory (easy to hold). While the large patterns in the variable display area 610 are hidden, the small patterns are variably displayed in the variable display area 615, so that the player confirms the small symbols that are variably displayed and the variable display game is executed. can be easily recognized. In addition, from (ki) to Fig. 10
Up to (ha) of 8E is the screen transition in the first special figure 2 variable display game in time saving mode #1.

The second predetermined image 676 is a symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed (during variation), and the first predetermined image 675 is that the special figure 1 variation display game is stopped. The symbol "x" indicates that In addition, there is no special figure 1 pending number (special figure 1 starting memory number) or special figure 2 pending number (special figure 2 starting memory number) while waiting, A number "0" is displayed in each of the pending number display portions 660 of FIG. In addition, in response to the execution of the first special figure 2 variation display game, the variation count display 677 indicates that the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the end of the big hit is 1, and "1G". is shown as

Also, when the time saving mode # 1 is started in (Ki), for example, a preparation image 710 with the words “preparing for battle” is displayed in the center of the display screen, and “24:30” is displayed in the upper left of the display screen.
is displayed (seconds: milliseconds). The character display of "preparing for battle" in the preparation image 710 is the first special figure 2 variable display game (1
Only the character display (one character) of "Battle" is displayed in a bright luminous mode (emphasis mode) in response to the variable hold related to the round change). On the other hand, the character display of "preparing for battle" is displayed in a dark extinguished mode (non-emphasized mode). Note that in the emphasized mode of the preparation image 710, the characters may be displayed larger or thicker than in the non-emphasized mode, or may be displayed in a different color so as to stand out.

At the lower right of the display screen, a right-handed shot instruction small window image 706 is displayed by reducing the display mode of all or part of the display screen immediately before the end of the ending effect and displaying it in a small window to instruct right-handed shooting. be. The right-handed instruction small window image 706 is located in front of the winning opening image 702 (player side, upper layer)
can be displayed overlaid on

(8) is the first special figure 2 variable display game in time saving mode # 1, and is the display mode of the display screen when three second start memories are withheld. The timer 708 at the upper left of the display screen indicates "2
1:40” is counted down, and the special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660 displays the number “3” indicating the special figure 2 reservation number.

In addition, the character display "preparing for battle" in the preparation image 710 emits light brighter than the character display (4 characters) of "preparing for battle" corresponding to suspension during fluctuation and the three suspended second start memories. It is displayed in a mode (emphasis mode). On the other hand, the character display of "medium" in the preparation image 710 is displayed in a dark extinguished mode (non-emphasized mode). As the second starting memory increases in this way, the display mode of the preparation image 710 is switched to the emphasized mode character by character.

Then, as shown in (ke), in the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the time saving mode # 1, when the second start memory is held four, the special figure 2 in the special figure 2 pending number display unit 660 The number "4" indicating the number of pending characters is displayed, and all the characters (five characters) of "preparing for battle" in the preparation image 710 are displayed in a bright luminescence mode (emphasis mode). The number of special figures 2 pending becomes the maximum number of 4, and the preparation image 7
The preparation image 7
10 may be flash-displayed (blinking display) so that the preparatory image 710 is more conspicuous.
An effect image such as flame may be added around the . Also, the timer 70 on the upper left of the display screen
8 becomes "20:11", and the number "4
” is displayed.

Subsequently, in (c), the timer 708 at the upper left of the display screen becomes "17:82", and three panels 713a, 713b, and 713c are displayed side by side on the display screen. panel 713a,
713b and 713c can notify the degree of expectation of winning according to the color scheme, as will be described later with reference to FIG. Still images and moving images may be displayed in the panels 713a, 713b, and 713c (for example, three moving images can be displayed). Also, for example, the panel 713a is displayed in blue, the panel 713b is displayed in green, and the panel 713c is displayed in blue. In addition, panel 713a corresponds to the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game, panel 7
13b corresponds to the second special figure 2 variation display game, and the panel 713c corresponds to the third special figure 2 variation display game. It should be noted that these panels 713a ~ 713c may not correspond to the 1st ~ 3rd special figure 2 fluctuation display game.

Also, images (still images and moving images) of enemy characters corresponding to the battle effects may be displayed in the panels 713a to 713c, respectively, so that a battle effect with the selected enemy character develops (the battle effects are shown in FIG. 7). A selection effect that chooses an opponent). In addition, in the selection effect, the enemy character of the opponent may be displayed according to the degree of expectation of winning (the degree of expectation of big win or the degree of expectation of small win), and the player can operate the effect button 25, the cross key switch 450, or the like. can be selected by . At that time, the panels other than the selected panel (unselected panel) among the panels 713a to 713c can be displayed in a smaller size or hidden.

Then, at (sa), the timer 708 at the upper left of the display screen is set to "16:57", and the character "Ready Complete" is displayed superimposed in front of the three panels 713a, 713b, and 713c (front, upper layers). . Therefore, when the player completes the battle preparation, that is, the special figure 2
It is possible to make it easier to recognize that the number of reservations has been reserved (accumulated) up to the maximum number of 4.

After that, at (shi), the timer 708 at the upper left of the display screen is set to "15:59", and the three panels 713a, 713b, and 713c are hidden, while the characters "not yet" are displayed in the center of the display screen. Is displayed. It should be noted that an effect such as an explosion may be given when displaying the characters "not yet". In addition, the characters "not yet" are displayed on the three panels 713a.
, 713b, and 713c (front, upper layers).

Next, in (S) of FIG. 141C, the timer 708 at the upper left of the display screen becomes "11:54", and the three panels 713a, 713b, 713c are displayed again on the display screen. and,
Light spherical (or light circular) effects 716a, 716b, and 716c fly toward at least one of the three panels 713a, 713b, and 713c from the bottom right and spread and grow in size (second effect ( Luminous effect)) is executed. In the light ball production, for example, after reaching the maximum value of special figure 2 (here 4), when the game ball wins the second start winning opening (
At the time of over winning), it is possible to generate a photosphere effect. Effects 716
Occurrence of a, 716b, and 716c makes the over-winning more interesting, and improves the amusement of the game. Also, when the game ball wins the second start winning opening, LE near the second starting winning opening
D (a part of the board decorating device 46) is made to emit light, and a photosphere-like effect is generated from the lower right of the display screen, so that a photosphere-like effect of photosphere presentation is generated for the player in response to over-winning. It can make it easier to recognize what you are doing.

In (se), the timer 708 at the upper left of the display screen is "11:48", and the rightmost panel 7
A panel change effect (first effect) in which the color of 13c changes, for example, from blue to red is executed. A panel change is made corresponding to the over winning. Therefore, it seems to the player that the lumisphere effect and the panel change effect are continuously executed on the rightmost panel 713c, and the expectation for the big win can be aroused, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced. . In addition, the light ball effect and the character display of "not yet" also function as an effect that suggests the occurrence of the panel change effect to be performed thereafter. In addition, in the panel change effect (first effect), in addition to the color change (blue → red, etc.), the shape and pattern of the panels 713a to 713c, size, display position, still image content and video content in the panel, etc. You may make it change.

In addition, by hiding the effect 716a on the leftmost panel 713a and the effect 716b on the center panel 713b, which are not the target of the panel change effect, the rightmost panel 71
The light sphere effect 716c on 3c can be conspicuous and easily recognized by the player. Also,
The light sphere effect 716c spreads and grows larger over time, making it even more noticeable. Note that even if no over-winning occurs and the lumisphere effect is not executed, the panel change effect can be executed according to the lapse of time. As a result, the interest in the game is improved even if the player does not positively generate over-winning. In addition, a panel change effect is executed with the passage of time, for example, when the rightmost panel 713c changes to red, and a panel change effect is executed after the light ball effect, for example, when the rightmost panel 713c changes to red. 2
The degree of expectation that the stop result of the displayed game will be a special result (big win or small win) can be made the same, and the player's expectations for red color can be unified. Also, a movable member (not shown) may be moved to the front side (player's side) of the display screen to overlap the display screen in accordance with the panel change effect.

In addition, even if a weak error (abnormality) such as a run-out error or an overflow error occurs, the panel change effect (first effect) can be executed as it is after the light ball effect (second effect) occurs. . When a weak error occurs, the panel change effect (first effect) may be executed only when the light ball effect (second effect) does not occur and time has passed. Since the panel change effect can be executed even if an error (abnormality) occurs in this way, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting during the occurrence of the error (abnormality).

In (2), the timer 708 on the upper left of the display screen changes to red and becomes "3:59", and 3
In front of the three panels 713a, 713b, 713c (front, upper layer), a countdown display 719 of "3" indicating the remaining seconds of the countdown is displayed. A countdown display 719 displays 3→2→1→0 every time the timer 708 decrements from "3:59" by one second.
(4 counts including 0) is displayed for 4 seconds. Note that the timer 708 is "2:59"
The countdown display 719 may be displayed for 3 seconds such as 3→2→1 (3 counts not including 0) every time the count is decreased by one second.

(ta) is the display mode of the display screen when the timer 708 on the upper left of the display screen reaches "0:00". The timer 708 keeps displaying "0:00" not only during the countdown but also for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) after the countdown ends. By adopting such a mode, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize that the timer 708 has counted down to "0:00".

(h) is the display mode of the display screen when the timer 708 is hidden and the friend character 721 (for example, the main character) is displayed in a large size on the display screen. Three hand (gear) icons 723a, 723b, and 723c are displayed on the lower right of the display screen. The three hand (gear) icons 723a, 723b, and 723c are in display modes corresponding to the colors of the three panels 713a, 713b, and 713c displayed immediately before. That is, the icon 723a is blue, the icon 723b is green, and the icon 723c is red. Therefore, the panel change effect is such that the display mode of the hand (gear) icon is determined, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, the display mode of the panel and the hand (gear)
Since the display mode of the icon is the same color correspondingly, even if one of the panel and the hand (gear) icon is overlooked, the missing display mode can be recognized by visually recognizing the other, which benefits the player. . As will be described later in FIG. 144, the combination of the three panels 713a, 713b, and 713c changes the hit expectation of the series of variable display games in the time saving mode #1, but each of the three panels 713a, 713b, and 713c It is also possible to notify the hit expectation degree of a single player for the 1st to 3rd fluctuations during time saving as a look-ahead effect.

(3) shows the display mode of the display screen when the characters "Battle START" are displayed in front of the ally character 721. FIG. By displaying the characters "Battle START" in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the battle will develop into a performance, and to arouse expectations for the big win. Note that three hand (gear) icons 723a, 723b, and 72
3c, the small pattern in the variable display area 615, and the right-handed instruction display 502 are "Battle START
” can be preferentially displayed in front of the character (front, upper layer).

In (te) of FIG. 141D, a meter 728 is displayed at the top of the display screen, and an enemy character 726 is displayed at the center of the display screen. The meter 728 has, for example, a 40-level meter (gauge, meter scale) and a frame 728d surrounding it. For the 40-step meter, for example, the 1st to 10th steps are indicated by a red meter 728a, the 11th to 20th steps are indicated by an orange meter 728b, and the 21st to 40th steps are indicated by a purple meter 728c. be done.

In (and), characters 729 of "1st ATTACK" are displayed on the display screen. The character 729 and the characters described below may be displayed, for example, superimposed on the enemy character 726, or the character 729 and the like may be displayed alone with the enemy character 726 hidden. Also, an effect may be given to the surroundings so that the character 729 can be emphasized.

An effect (icon moving effect) is executed in which the left (first) hand (gear) icon 723a is moved to the center of the display screen in accordance with the character display of "1st ATTACK".
Icons to be moved (for example, icons 723a, 723b, 72
3c) may be enlarged.

In (na), the character 729 "1st ATTACK" is hidden, and the blue hand (
A blue technique name display 731 of "hitting" is displayed corresponding to the gear icon 723a.

In (2), the technique name display 731 of "hitting" is hidden, and a light condensing effect 733 that gathers light in the center of the display screen is displayed. For example, the teammate character 721 may be displayed behind the light collection effect 733 (back side, lower layer) so that the player can recognize that the teammate character 721 is collecting light.

Then, in (N), the light collection effect 733 is switched to a production button image 735a imitating the production button 25 at the center of the display screen. Below the effect button image 735a, a gauge 735b indicating the effective time of the button operation of the effect button 25 is displayed. in this way,
An operation prompting display 735 is configured by the effect button image 735a and the gauge 735b.
In addition to displaying the effect button image 735a and the gauge 735b as the operation prompting display 735, the LED of the effect button 25 or the like may be illuminated to promote the operation.

Further, when the player presses (operates) the effect button 25 within the effective time of the button operation (that is, before the gauge (meter) in the gauge 735b runs out), the operation effect is executed.

The operation effect is a effect related to the operation, and the display effect on the display device 41, the board effect device 44
, the light emitting effect of the frame decorating device 18 and the board decorating device 46, the sound effect from the speaker, and combinations thereof. In addition, in the operation effect, an operation prompt display 735 (pre-operation effect, pre-operation processing) for prompting the player to operate, and an operation response effect 737 (post-operation effect) executed in response to the operation being performed production, post-operation processing), or a display including both of them is performed.

In (2), in response to pressing (operation) of the effect button 25 by the player, an operation corresponding effect (cut-in effect) is executed by cut-in or the like, and an ally support character 737 is displayed on the display screen as an operation corresponding image. Is displayed. By changing the content of the support of the support character 737 (contents of operation-response presentation, content of cut-in presentation), for example, depending on the degree of expectation for winning, it is possible to arouse the player's expectation for a big win. If the player does not operate the effect button 25, the operation corresponding effect may be performed after the valid time of the button operation expires (that is, after the gauge 735 runs out). You can choose not to do it.

Subsequently, in (no) of FIG. 141E, for example, "12 HIT" and a meter decrease number 738 are displayed over the enemy character 726 displayed in the center of the display screen. Meter decrease number 7
In accordance with the number 38, the meter 728 at the top of the display screen also changes from 40 to the 28th level (12
scale) meter decreases. Therefore, the meter display of the meter 728 becomes a red meter 728a for the 1st to 9th steps, an orange meter 728b for the 10th to 20th steps, and a purple meter 728c for the 21st to 28th steps.

Then, at (ha), the first variation during the time saving (first special figure 2 variation display game) ends,
The small patterns (reduced decorative patterns) in the variable display area 615 stop changing, and the lost patterns such as "2, 3, 9" are displayed as decorative stopped patterns. Then, the second predetermined image 676 becomes a symbol "x" indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. In addition, although the friend character 739 is displayed at the end of the variation during the time saving, the enemy character 726 may be displayed.

Subsequently, in (H), the second variation (second special figure 2 variation display game) during time saving starts, and the small pattern (decorative reduction pattern) of the variation display area 615 starts to vary. The second special figure 2 variation display game has a relatively short variation time compared to the first special figure 2 variation display game (small variation time,
For example, it takes 33800 ms for a hit and 13700 ms for a miss). With the start of the second variation during time saving, the second predetermined image 676 becomes a symbol "O" indicating that the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed (during variation). In addition, the number "3
is displayed, and the variation count display 677 indicates that the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the end of the big win is 2, such as "2G".

In the center of the display screen, characters 729 of "2nd ATTACK" are displayed, and in line with the display of the characters 729, a central (second) hand (gear) icon 723b is displayed in the center of the display screen. A moving effect (icon moving effect) is executed. Then, FIG. 141D
The battle effect during the second variation is executed in the same manner as the effect mode of the battle effect during the first variation described above with reference to (na) to FIG. 141E (no).

(F) is the display mode of the display screen when the battle production during the second variation is completed and the second variation during the time saving (the second special figure 2 variation display game) is completed. When the second variation during the time saving is completed, the small symbols in the variation display area 615 stop varying, and the missing symbols such as "5, 8, 4" are displayed as decoration stop symbols. And the second predetermined image 676 is a special figure 2
The symbol "x" indicates that the variable display game is stopped. In addition, in the battle effect during the second fluctuation, in response to the meter decrease number 738 being, for example, "8 hits" (not shown), the meter 728 at the top of the display screen also goes from 28 to 20 steps (eight scales). ) meter decreases. Therefore, the meter display of the meter 728 is the red meter 728a of the 1st to 9th stages.
, the 10th to 20th stage orange meter 728b is displayed. In the second fluctuation during the time saving, the number of special 2 reservations that decreased to "3" at the start of the fluctuation is the maximum value "4" due to winning the second start winning opening
It is displayed in the special figure 2 pending number display unit 660 that it returned to.

Subsequently, in (to), the third variation (the third special figure 2 variation display game) during time saving starts, and the small pattern (decorative reduction pattern) of the variation display area 615 starts to vary. The third special figure 2 variation display game can be executed in the same variation time as the second special figure 2 variation display game (variation time is small, for example, 33800 ms for winning, 13700 ms for losing). With the start of the third variation during time saving, the second predetermined image 676 becomes a symbol “◯” indicating that the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed (during variation). In addition, the number "3" is displayed in the special figure 2 pending number display unit 660, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the big hit is 3 in the variation number display 677, such as "3G". shown in

In addition, characters 729 of "FINAL ATTACK" are displayed in the center of the display screen.
An effect (icon moving effect) is executed in which c moves to the center of the display screen. After that, the battle effect during the third change is executed in the same manner as the effect mode of the battle effect during the first change and the second change described above.

(Ho) is the display mode of the display screen when the battle production during the third variation is completed and the third variation during the time saving (the third special figure 2 variation display game) is completed. When the third variation during the time saving is finished, the small symbols in the variation display area 615 stop varying, and the missing symbols such as "6, 8, 7" are displayed as decoration stop symbols. And the second predetermined image 676 is a special figure 2
The symbol "x" indicates that the variable display game is stopped. In addition, in the battle effect during the third fluctuation, in response to the meter decrease number 738 being, for example, "14 hits" (not shown), the meter 728 at the top of the display screen also goes from 20 to 6 stages (14 scales). ) meter decreases. Therefore, the meter display of the meter 728 is the red meter 728 of the 1st to 6th stages.
only a.

Subsequently, in FIG. 141F (until), the 4th variation (fourth special figure 2 variation display game) during time saving starts, and the small pattern (decorative reduction pattern) of the variation display area 615 starts to vary. The fourth special figure 2 variation display game is longer than the second or third special figure 2 variation display game, and has a shorter variation time than the first special figure 2 variation display game (during the variation time, for example, 48000 ms in the case of a hit
, 35000 ms in case of deviation). With the start of the fourth fluctuation during time saving, the second predetermined image 676 is a symbol "O" indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed (fluctuation)
becomes. In addition, the number "2" is displayed in the special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660, and the number of fluctuations display 67
In 7, it is shown as "4G" that the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the end of the big hit is 4.

Also, large letters 741 of "JUDGEMENT" are displayed in the center of the display screen.

Next, as shown in (b), a right-handed hitting instruction display 743 is displayed in the center of the display screen to give a large instruction to hit right-handed. The right-handed instruction display 743 is displayed larger than the right-handed instruction display 502 displayed on the right side of the display screen. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that there is an opportunity to store the second start memory (second start memory). Also, an effect such as a lightning bolt may be appropriately added to the large right-handing instruction display 743, and by displaying only the effect related to the right-handing instruction display 743, it is possible to more easily encourage the player to hit right.

After that, a spiral effect 745 is displayed in the center of the display screen with (Mu), and the right-hand hitting instruction display 743 and meter 728 are reduced and displayed on the right side of the display screen. In addition, a time gauge 748 indicating the time until the transition to the next effect is displayed.
A gauge (meter) in 48 decreases. Also, a preparation image 747 labeled “battle preparation” is displayed above the time gauge 748 . Similar to the preparation image 710 "preparing for battle" in FIG. It is possible to switch to the emphasis mode. If the second starting memory has been previously suspended before the spiral effect 745 is displayed, the character corresponding to the suspended second starting memory will be displayed in accordance with the decrease of the gauge of the time gauge 748. It is possible to switch to the emphasize mode character by character at intervals (for example, intervals of 1 second). You can also see any holds that have occurred (
A hand icon or a friendly character may appear over the spiral effect 745 corresponding to the second starting memory).

When the time gauge 748 runs out, a large character 750 reading "Ready" is displayed in the center of the display screen. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the battle preparation is completed, that is, the special figure 2 reservation number has been reserved up to 4 (accumulated).

Then, in (also), in the center of the display screen, the effect button 25
and a gauge 735b indicating the effective time of the button operation of the effect button 25 are displayed. In addition, along with the operation prompting display 735, the effect button image 73
A character 735c of "punched out" is displayed on the upper part of 5a. The character 735c suggests the action of the ally character 739 in the subsequent battle presentation, but can also function as a character prompting the player who wants to appreciate the battle presentation to operate the presentation button 25.

In (Ya), after the production button 25 is operated (pressed), the battle production by the ally character 729 and the enemy character 726 (not shown) is executed, and then the fourth change (4
The second special figure 2 fluctuation display game) ends. By the end of the 4th variation (4th special figure 2 variation display game) during time saving, the small pattern in the variation display area 615 stops varying, for example, "6, 8
, 7” is displayed as a decorative stop symbol. Then, the second predetermined image 676
is a symbol "x" indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. When the fourth fluctuation during time saving ends, the time saving mode #1, which is the number of times of time saving four times, also ends, and the production mode shifts to the remaining reservation consumption mode. In the remaining pending digestion mode, the second starting memory (remaining pending) suspended (up to 4 pieces) during the time saving mode #1 is digested in order. Although the variable time can be set as appropriate, for example, if there are four remaining holds, the variable time in the case of losing the special figure 2 variable display game that digests the first to third remaining holds can be relatively short (variation small time, e.g. 400 ms for a miss),
The variation time in the case of loss of the special figure 2 variation display game that consumes the fourth remaining hold can be relatively long (variation time is large, for example, 2000 ms in the case of loss). Also, the fluctuation time in the case of winning the 1st to 4th remaining pending can be the same (large fluctuation time, for example 10000 ms in the case of winning)
).

[Another example of the production screen]
Next, another example of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 142A to 142C.

FIGS. 142A to 142C are another examples (example 2) of screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order in the sixth embodiment. Note that the same configurations and effects as those in FIGS. 141A to 141F can be performed in the same manner, and descriptions of the same configurations and effects will be omitted as appropriate. For example, (1) of FIG. 142A to (1 of 1) of FIG. 142C are only partially different from (1) of FIG. 141C to (1) of FIG. are omitted as appropriate.

(S) in FIG. 142A is the same as (S) in FIG. 4 is a screen transition diagram; FIG. That is, after the screen transition (a) to (shi) as described above, the time saving production # 1 can transition to the screen transition diagram of another example (example 2) shown after FIG. 142 (su).

After that, in another example (example 2), the screen transitions to (set 1), and the timer 708 at the upper left of the display screen reads "
11:48", and a panel change effect (first effect) is executed in which the three panels 713a, 713b, and 713c are switched to one large rainbow panel 713a. By displaying one large panel 713a in rainbow colors by the panel change effect, the player can increase his expectation for the big win, so that the interest in the game can be increased. In addition, there is no over-winning in (S) and photospheric effects 716a, 716b, 716c
Even if the second effect (photosphere effect) in which the sphere flies is not generated, a panel change effect that switches to a large rainbow panel 713a over time may be performed. It should be noted that the ratio of occurrence of the panel change effect to switch to the large rainbow panel 713a (occurrence probability of the rainbow panel change effect) is higher than the case where the rainbow color panel change effect occurs over time. The occurrence probability can be made higher when the rainbow color panel change effect occurs after the effect). As a result, the player tries to generate the second effect (light ball effect) by over winning, and the interest in the game is improved. In addition, "1st" is displayed on the lower right of the panel 713a, and the panel 713a is the left panel 71 among the three panels 713a, 713b, and 713c.
3a can be recognized. In the panel 713a, for example, a moving image (image) in which an ally character 721 or the like moves can be displayed.
The frame of a may be separately and independently vibrated (for example, in the direction of the arrow).

Then, in (1), similarly to (3), the timer 708 at the upper left of the display screen changes to red to indicate "3:59", and a countdown is displayed in front of the large panel 713a (front, upper layer). A countdown display 719 of "3" indicating the number of seconds remaining is displayed.

(Ta 1) is the display mode of the display screen when the timer 708 at the upper left of the display screen reaches "0:00". A countdown display 719 from "3" to "0" is displayed on the large panel 7
The whole can be overlapped and displayed inside 13a. By adopting such a mode, the sense of unity between the large panel 713a and the countdown display 719 can be improved, and the countdown display with good visibility can be achieved.

In (C1), the timer 708 is hidden, an ally character 721 (for example, the main character) is displayed in a large size on the display screen, and a large rainbow-colored hand (gear) is displayed on the lower right of the display screen.
icon 753 (hand icon (large)) is displayed. The hand (gear) icon 753 has a display mode (rainbow color) corresponding to the rainbow color of the single large panel 713a that was displayed immediately before. Therefore, if the player sees the rainbow-colored hand (gear) icon 7
By visually recognizing 53, the expectation of a big hit can be greatly improved, so that the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

In (1), the characters "Battle START" are displayed in front of the ally character 721, and the player is notified that the battle will develop. The large rainbow-colored hand (gear) icon 753, the small pattern in the variable display area 615, and the right-handed instruction display 502 can be preferentially displayed in front of the characters "Battle START" (front, upper layer). .

In (Te 1) of FIG. 142B, a meter 728 of, for example, a 40-level meter (gauge) is displayed at the top of the display screen, and an enemy character 726 is displayed at the center of the display screen.

In (and 1), characters 729 of "1st ATTACK" are displayed on the display screen.
An effect (icon moving effect) is executed in which a large rainbow-colored hand (gear) icon 753 moves to the center of the display screen in accordance with the character display of "1st ATTACK". During the icon movement effect, the moving icon 753 may be displayed in a larger size, rotated, or the icon itself may be animated and moved (for example, closing the fingers to make a fist). It should be noted that the panel 713a of (Se 1) to (Ta 1) is replaced by a panel 713b labeled "2nd" at the bottom right and a panel "
3rd" is displayed on the panel 713c, for example, the second change during time saving is "2n
d ATTACK” is displayed, or “FINAL ATT” at the third change during the time saving
ACK" is displayed, the icon movement effect of the large rainbow-colored hand (gear) icon 753 can be prevented from being executed.

In (Na 1), the character 729 "1st ATTACK" is hidden, and a rainbow-colored technique name display 7 corresponding to the large rainbow-colored hand (gear) icon 753 "strike until you fall down" 7
31 is displayed. Therefore, by visually recognizing the rainbow-colored technique name display 731, the player can further improve the anticipation of a big win, thereby making the game more interesting.

In (1), the technique name display 731 of "punch until you fall down" is hidden, and a condensing effect 733 that gathers light in the center of the display screen is displayed.

Then, in (N 1), the light collecting effect 733 is switched to a production button image 735a imitating the production button 25 at the center of the display screen. That is, as the operation prompting display 735, an effect button image 735a and a gauge 735b indicating the effective time of the button operation of the effect button 25 are displayed below the effect button image 735a. In addition to displaying the production button image 735a and the gauge 735b as the operation promotion display 735, the LED of the production button 25
or the like may be illuminated to promote the operation. If the button is operated within the valid time, or if the button is not operated, the operation corresponding effect can be executed after the valid time ends.

In (1), an operation-responsive effect (cut-in effect) is executed by cut-in or the like, and an ally support character 737 is displayed on the display screen as an operation-responsive image.

Subsequently, in (1) of FIG. 142C, the enemy character 726 displayed in the center of the display screen
For example, "100 HIT" and the number of meter decrease 738 are displayed on top of . The meter 728 at the top of the display screen also changes from 40 to the 0th level (4
0 division) meter decreases. Therefore, the meter display for meter 728 is red meter 7
All meters such as 28a are gone. Also, when the meter of the meter 728 runs out (becomes the 0th level), instead of displaying the number of HITs for the remaining scale in the meter decrease number 738 (for example, "40 HIT" for the remaining 40th level). , a large value of "100 HIT" can be displayed. Therefore, a HIT that greatly exceeds the remaining scale of meter 728
By making the number (overkill) visible to the player, the player can have a greater sense of anticipation that the ally character 721 will win the battle production and win a big hit, so that the interest in the game can be improved. .

Then, in (Y), a large character 755 of "defeat" is displayed in the center of the display screen. Note that the characters 755 of "defeat" can be displayed in rainbow colors, for example. Also, the background image displayed behind the character 755 and the effect applied around the character 755 may be displayed in rainbow colors. By thus displaying the character "destroy", which suggests that the player has won the battle effect, the player can have a premonition of a big win, which can enhance the interest in the game. Also, by displaying the characters 755 and the like in a rainbow color display mode, the player can similarly heighten the expectation of a big win, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. It should be noted that a movable accessory (not shown) may be moved so as to be superimposed in front of the display screen in accordance with the display of the characters 755 of "defeat". In addition, the character 755 "defeat"
After the display of , a victory effect in which the ally character 721 wins against the enemy character 726 may be displayed.

In (Y), after the characters 755 "defeat" are displayed, gold characters 757 "RUSH confirmed" are displayed. By displaying in this way, it is possible to make it easier to emphasize and notify the player that a big win game can be played after this. Note that the characters 757 "RUSH confirmed" may be displayed in another color such as rainbow color.

In (wa), the first variation during the time saving (first special figure 2 variation display game) is completed, and the decoration special design (large design) of the variation display area 610 and the small design (decoration reduction design) of the variation display area 615 )
stops fluctuating, and a small winning symbol (or a big winning symbol) by the symbol S1 such as "7, 7, 7" is displayed as a decoration stop symbol. The small-hit pattern S1 is a small-hit pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the state with general electric support (mainly the big hit in the specific game state AC with general electric support). The small-hit symbol S1 is a stop symbol determined by a small-hit symbol random number. In addition, the symbol S1 may be configured as a jackpot stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game. Then, the second predetermined image 676 becomes a symbol "x" indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped.

After that, the display screen transitions to (C), and a small win or big win round game (a game during the big win or during the small win) is executed. (C) is the display mode of the display screen when the round game is executed in the first round (ROUND1). In addition, when there is a V winning during the small winning round game, a big winning occurs, and a big winning state due to the V winning starts from the next second round.

[Example of fluctuation time by fluctuation pattern]
Next, with reference to FIG. 143, an example of the variation time of each variation pattern in the time saving mode #1 will be described. FIG. 143 is a table for explaining the variation time of each variation pattern in the time saving mode #1. Note that the fluctuation time in FIG. 143 matches the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern in FIGS. 141A to 142C. Further, the fluctuation time is not limited to the example in FIG. 143, and can be appropriately set within a range in which the magnitude relationship (inequality sign relationship) of each variation pattern is not changed.

As shown in FIG. 143, as each variation pattern in the time saving mode # 1, the variation pattern due to the 1st to 4th variation in the time saving (1st to 4th variation during the time saving, 1st to 4th special figure 2 variation display game), and the remaining There is a variation pattern by the reserved 1st to 4th special figure 2 variation display game.

For example, the variation time of the time reduction first variation is 60,300 ms in the case of winning, and 40,200 ms in the case of losing (large variation time). In addition, the fluctuation time of the second and third fluctuations in time saving is
It takes 33,800 ms in the case of a hit, and 13,700 ms in the case of a loss (small fluctuation time). Then, the variation time of the fourth time reduction variation is 48000 ms in the case of winning, and 35000 ms in the case of losing (during the variation time). Therefore, the variation time of the fourth time-saving variation is longer than the variation time of the second and third time-saving variation, and shorter than the variation time of the first time-saving variation (second and third time-saving variation < fourth time-saving variation < time-saving variation 1st change).

In this way, by setting the first time-saving variable time longer, it is possible to easily store the hold (special figure 2 start memory) up to the maximum (4 pieces) during the first time-saving variable display game, so the interest of the game can increase In addition, since the fluctuation time of the fourth time reduction is set relatively long, it is easy to store up to the maximum (4 pieces) of the remaining hold digested in the remaining hold digestion mode after that,
It is possible to increase the interest of the game. On the other hand, by setting the second and third time-saving variable times to be short, time-saving performance #1, which does not require holding, can be advanced at a good tempo.
It is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the remaining 1 to 3 special figure 2 fluctuation display games is 400 m in case of deviation
s, and the variation time of the 4th remaining reserved special figure 2 variation display game is 2000 m
s. The variation time of the remaining 1 to 4 special figure 2 variation display games is 100 in the case of a hit.
00 ms.

In this way, the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game of the 1st to 3rd remaining reservations is set to be short, so that the remaining reservation digestion mode can be advanced at a good tempo and the interest of the game is enhanced. be able to. In addition, since the variation time of the 4th remaining pending special figure 2 variable display game is set longer, it is possible to secure time to display the results etc. when all are lost in the remaining pending digestion mode, and an easy-to-understand display It can be performed. On the other hand, since the fluctuation time of the remaining reserved 1 to 4 special figure 2 fluctuation display games is set to be the same and longer in the case of a hit, it is possible to secure enough time to perform the production when hit. , it becomes easy to highlight the big win presentation, so that the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

[Example of hit expectation by combination of panels]
Next, referring to FIG. 144, the hit expectation level (big hit expectation level or small An example of hit expectation) will be described. It should be noted that the example of the winning expectation in FIG. 144 can also be applied to the winning expectation due to the panel combination before the panel change effect ((ko) to (su)).

FIG. 144 is a table for explaining the degree of expectation of winning according to combinations of panels 713a to 713c. "1st" corresponds to the left panel 713a, and "2nd" corresponds to the central panel 713a.
13b and "3rd" corresponds to the right panel 713c.

The rainbow panel shown at the bottom of the table corresponds to one large rainbow-colored panel 713a in (Set 1) after the panel change effect. ). Instead of the hit expectation of 100%, a value close to 100% (such as 99.9%, the hit is almost certain) may be used. In addition, the rainbow panel is not displayed before the panel change effect, and is a dedicated panel (premium panel (appearance probability is extremely low)) due to the panel change effect. Therefore, by changing to the rainbow panel, which is rarely displayed, it is possible to create a performance with a special feeling, and the player's expectation for the big win can be aroused, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, the gold panel is also not displayed before the panel change effect, and is a dedicated panel (semi-premium panel (low probability of appearance)) for "3rd" (left panel 713c) due to the panel change effect. By changing to a gold panel, it is possible to suggest that the expectation of winning is high (expectation (medium) to (high)), and similarly, it is possible to produce a special feeling.

In addition, even if all (three) panels 713a to 713c are of the same color, the probability of winning is 10.
0% (hit confirmed). Specifically, when the panels 713a to 713c are all blue panels, all are green panels, and all are red panels, the hit expectation is 100% (hit confirmed).

On the other hand, when the panels 713a to 713c are a combination of "blue panel, blue panel, and green panel", the expectation level is the lowest (expectation level (low)), and the ratio of the green panel and the red panel increases. As shown in FIG. 144, the degree of expectation for winning is set to increase little by little. For example, when the panels 713a to 713c are a combination of "red panel, red panel, and green panel", the expectation of winning is the highest (expectation (Big)). In this way, when the colors of the panels 713a to 713c do not match, the hit expectation is set higher in the order of the blue panel<the green panel<the red panel.

It should be noted that when a panel with a high probability of winning, such as a red panel, is displayed as the "1st" panel (left panel 713a), the "2nd" (center panel 713b) or "3
rd" (right panel 713c), the expectation of winning can be set higher as shown in FIG. Similarly, when a panel with a high probability of winning is displayed as the “2nd” panel (central panel 713b), it is displayed as the “3rd” panel (right panel 713c). As shown in FIG. 144, the expectation of winning can be set high.

[Example of effect production]
Next, referring to FIG. 145, the effect production at the time of winning (at the time of over winning) after reaching the maximum pending value (four) of (S) (S) in FIG. 141C and (S 1) in FIG. 142A An example of the hit expectation (big hit expectation or small hit expectation) will be described.

FIG. 145 is a table for explaining the degree of expectation of winning by the effect presentation at the time of over winning.

For example, as shown in FIG. 145, the content of the effect production is a case where only a photosphere effect (second production) with a photosphere effect is performed without promotion (effect generation (no promotion)), and a panel change production (first production). ) occurs (effect generation → panel promotion), and when air is activated in conjunction with the photosphere effect and panel change effect (effect generation + air activation).

Then, when the contents of the effect production are effect generation (no promotion), the hit expectation (big hit expectation or small hit expectation) is small. Also, if the content of the effect rendering is effect generation→panel promotion, the degree of expectation for winning is medium, and the corresponding movable accessory can be operated to overlap, for example, the front side of the display screen.

On the other hand, if the content of the effect presentation is effect generation + air operation, the degree of expectation of winning is 100% (determined winning), and the player can feel the air by the air shooting device (not shown) of the frame decoration device 18. (wind) can be sent to the player (air actuation). Therefore, since the player can feel the effect performance other than visually and aurally, it becomes an unexpected performance, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

[Example of speech production corresponding to the color of the hand icon in the icon movement production]
Next, referring to FIG. 146, a hand (gear) icon (icon 72 for icon movement effect)
3a to 723c, 753) will be described below.

FIG. 146 shows hand (gear) icons (icons 723a to 723c) for icon movement effects.
, 753) is a table for explaining the contents of dialogue effects corresponding to colors.

Specifically, the icon movement effect is (to) in FIG. 141D, (hi), (to) in FIG. 141E.
, (and 1) in FIG. 142B, the icon moves to the center of the display screen. Note that the hand (gear) icons (icons 723a to 723c,
753) correspond to the colors of the previously displayed panels 713a-713c, respectively.

For example, when the color of the icon of the hand (gear) that has moved is blue (blue), (na) in FIG. 141D
The technique name display 731 is blue and displays "hit". In addition, in accordance with the blue technique name display 731, for example, the lines at the time when the technique name appears, such as "Let's go with all our strength!" 19a and lower speaker 19b
) can output audio.

When the technique name display 731 of blue "hitting" is displayed, the expectation of winning is set low (expectation (low)), the production button 25 does not vibrate (vibration "x"), and the production button 25 does not vibrate. When the image 735a appears, there is no button image appearance dialogue ("-"). In addition, when the blue technique name display 731 of “hitting” is displayed, for example, the lines of attacking “Uh!” can be output. It should be noted that these lines and the following lines in the case of green to rainbow may be output only by voice without being displayed on the display screen, or conversely may be displayed only on the display screen without being output by voice.

Next, for example, when the color of the icon of the hand (gear) that has moved is green (green), the technique name display 731 of (na) in FIG. !” can be displayed and voice output when the technique name appears. When the technique name display 731 of green "Bunch" is displayed, the degree of expectation for winning is set slightly low (expectation degree higher than the expectation degree (small)), and there is no vibration of the production button 25 (vibration "x"), and there is no dialogue at the time of appearance of the button image when the effect button image 735a appears ("-"). In addition, when the green technique name display 731 "Bunch" is displayed, for example, similar to the blue display, the words "Uh!" Audio can be output.

Subsequently, for example, when the color of the icon of the hand (gear) that has moved is red (red), the
The technique name display 731 of (na) is displayed in red as "Hit me!", and for example, it is possible to display the lines at the time of appearance of the technique name, "Let's make a flashy decision!", as well as voice output. When the technique name display 731 of red "punching" is displayed, the expectation of winning is set slightly high (expectation one step lower than the expectation (high)), and the production button 25 does not vibrate ( Vibration "x"
). In addition, when the effect button image 735a appears, for example, the dialogue at the time of appearance of the button image 721 can be displayed and output as a voice. In addition, when the technique name display 731 of red "Hit me!"
” can be displayed and output as a voice when attacking.

Further, for example, when the color of the icon of the hand (gear) that has moved is gold, the technique name display 731 of (na) in FIG. Miyagare!" can be displayed and output as a voice when the technique name appears. When the golden technique name display 731 "Hit at a short distance" is displayed, the expectation of winning is set high (expectation (high)), and the production button 25 does not vibrate (vibration "x"). . In addition, in the line at the time of button image appearance when the effect button image 735a appears, for example, the line "Shoot through!"
) can be displayed and output as audio. In addition, when the golden technique name display 731 "hitting at a short distance" is displayed, for example, the attack line "ultimate mystery!" can be done.

Subsequently, for example, when the color of the icon of the hand (gear) that has moved is rainbow (rainbow color), the
The technique name display 731 of (Na 1) is displayed in rainbow color as "Beat until you fall down", and for example, the line when the technique name appears, "Protect everyone!", can be displayed and output as a voice. When the rainbow-colored technique name display 731 of "punch until you fall down" is displayed, the probability of winning is 100% (
hit confirmed), and the vibration of the production button 25 can be generated (vibration "
〇”). For example, the vibration of the effect button 25 may occur when the operation prompting display 735 is displayed. In addition, when the effect button image 735a appears, for example, when the effect button image 735a appears, the dialogue "Press!"
st ATTACK") can be displayed and output by voice. Also,
When the rainbow-colored technique name display 731 of "punch until you fall down" is displayed, for example, it is possible to display and voice-output the words of the attack "Overboost!" can.

[Example of meter circumference effect color corresponding to meter scale color]
Next, with reference to FIG. 147, an example of the meter circumference effect color corresponding to the color of the meter scale will be described.

FIG. 147 is a table for explaining the color of the effect surrounding the outer periphery of the frame 728d corresponding to the color of the meter scale (40-level meter, gauge) of the meter 728, that is, the contents of the meter periphery effect color.

The color of the meter scale (40-step meter, gauge) of the meter 728 is, specifically, as described above in (te) of FIG. The 10th to 20th stages may be displayed with an orange meter 728b and the 21st to 40th stages may be displayed with a purple meter 728c.

For example, as shown in (te) in FIG. 141D, when the meter scale of the meter 728 is displayed from the 21st to 40th stages of the purple meter 728c, that is, the remaining points (remaining number of meter scales) are 40 to 21pt (steps). , the meter circumference effect color of the frame 728d is "none" (transparent).

Also, for example, as shown in (f) of FIG.
When the orange meter 728b of the tier is displayed, ie, when the remaining points (remaining number of meter scale) are 20 to 10 pt (step), the meter periphery effect color of the frame 728d becomes "orange". Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to visually recognize that the enemy character 726 is being damaged as the battle effect progresses, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Further, for example, when the meter scale of the meter 728 is displayed from the 1st to 9th stages of the red meter 728a as shown in (ho) in FIG. stage), the meter periphery effect color of the frame 728d is "
become red. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize that the battle effect progresses and the enemy character 726 has received considerable damage, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Example of the color of the meter decrease number corresponding to the decrease number of the meter scale]
Next, with reference to FIG. 148, an example of the color of the meter decrement number corresponding to the decrement number of the meter scale will be described.

FIG. 148 is a table for explaining the contents of the color of the meter decrement number 738 displayed on the display screen (decrement number display color) corresponding to the decrement number of the meter scale of the meter 728 (40-step meter, gauge). is. The meter decrement number 738 is, for example, "12
HIT" or the like can be displayed on the display screen.

In the display of the meter decrease number 738, the display color of the decrease number is silver (silver, gray) when the meter decrease number is 0 to 9, green (green) when the meter decrease number is 10 to 19, and 20 to 40. , it becomes red (red). For example, when the meter decrease number 738 is 12 (“12HIT”) as shown in FIG. 141E, the display color of the decrease number is green. Thus, in the display of the meter decrease number 738, the decrease number is displayed as it is with the letters "HIT" attached ("**HIT"). When the meter runs out (becomes 0), as shown in (1) of FIG. 141C, the meter decrease number 738 can be displayed with a value ("100 HIT") larger than the actual decrease number.

[Example of meter decrease number corresponding to the color of the hand icon]
Next, referring to FIG. 149, a hand icon (icon 72
3a to 723c, 753), examples of meter decrements corresponding to colors will be described.

FIG. 149 shows hand icons (icons 723a to 723c) that move in an icon movement effect.
, 753) corresponding to the color of the meter decrement (the number of decrements of the meter scale of the meter 728). As shown in FIG. 141E, the meter decrease number 738 is "12H
IT" is displayed on the display screen, the meter scale of the meter 728 is also decremented by the number of meters (1
2 graduations, 12 steps).

As shown in FIG. 149, a hand icon (icon 723a
723c, 753) is blue (blue), the number of meter decrements for meter 728 is a value selected from the range of 4-40. Also, icons of the hand (icons 723a to
723c, 753), the number of meter decrements is selected from the range of 8-40 when green (green), and the number of meter decrements is selected from the range of 14-40 when red (red). Also, gold (
In the case of gold), the meter reduction number is selected from a range of 20 to 40, and in the case of rainbow (rainbow color), the meter reduction number is 40 (determined hit (defeated)). Except for the case of rainbow, the number of meter reductions can be selected by lottery or the like.

Specifically, for example, in the (and) of FIG. 141D, when a movement effect is performed by the blue hand icon 723a, the meter decrement number of the meter 728 is 1 as shown in (no) of FIG. 141E.
2 (a value selected from the range of 4 to 40). In addition, as shown in (1) of FIG. 142B, when the movement effect by the rainbow-colored hand icon 753 is performed, the meter decrement number of the meter 728 is 40 (confirmed) as shown in (1) of FIG. 142C. value).

Note that hand icons (icons 723a to 723c, 75
Since the color of 3) becomes the same as the color of the panels 713a to 713c after the panel change effect (first effect), the meter decrease number can also correspond to the color of the panel 713a to 713c.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment described above, in the third specific game state (a time saving, specific game state A) after the special game state, part of the production of time saving mode # 1 (time saving production # 1, challenge production) , it has been explained that effects such as a panel change effect (first effect), a light ball effect (second effect), and an icon moving effect can be executed. However, these effects are the first specific game state (b
Time saving, specific game state B) or second specific game state (c time saving, specific game state C) may be executed.

[Functions and effects of the sixth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment displays a plurality of specific images (hand icons 723a to 723c, 753, panels 713a to 713c) as effects related to the game (variation display game, special figure variation display game). A game state (special game state (big win or small win), specific game state) that is provided with a production control means (production control device 300) that can be displayed on (display device 41), can execute a game, and is advantageous to the player can be generated. In the gaming machine 10, the display mode of the specific image includes a first display mode (blue display mode) and a second display mode (rainbow display mode). The effect control means provides a predetermined effect related to the display of the specific image (rainbow-colored panel change corresponding to the display mode (color) of the rainbow-colored hand icon 753) in a game capable of generating a game state advantageous to the player. A production (first production) and a photosphere production (second production) by the effects 716a to 716c can be executed. When displaying the second display mode (rainbow display mode) of one specific image (hand icon 753, panel 713a) according to a predetermined effect, other specific images (hand icons 723a to 723c, panel 713b to 713c) are hidden.

According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, when a predetermined effect is executed in a game capable of generating a game state advantageous to the player, and the second display mode of one specific image is displayed, another specific image is displayed. Since the display is hidden, the visibility of the one specific image can be improved, and the player's expectation for the occurrence of a game state advantageous to the player can be heightened, so that the amusement of the game can be enhanced. can.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, the display mode of the specific image further includes a third display mode (red display mode), and a predetermined effect (red panel change corresponding to the display mode (color) of the red hand icon 723c). One specific image (hand icon 723c, panel 7
13c), when displaying the third display mode, other specific images (hand icons 723a to 723a
3b, enabling panels 713a-713b).

According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, when the predetermined effect is executed in the game with the special result and one specific image in the third display mode is displayed, the other specific image is also displayed. The panel change effect (first effect) can be executed even in the specific image of (1), and the degree of expectation for winning can be easily suggested (notified). In addition, since both one specific image and another specific image can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether the effect being executed (battle effect) corresponds to one specific image or to another specific image. can be easily understood, and the contents of the performance can be easily understood by the player, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, a predetermined effect (a rainbow-colored panel change effect (first effect) corresponding to the display mode (color) of the rainbow-colored hand icon 753 and a light ball effect (second effect) by the effects 716a to 716c )), the second image of one particular image (hand icon 753, panel 713a)
When displaying the display mode (rainbow display mode), other specific images (hand icons 723a to
723c, panels 713b to 713c) can be hidden, and a change effect (a rainbow-colored panel change effect (first effect)) can be executed to switch the specific image to the second display mode. and the case where the second display mode of one specific image is displayed with the passage of time without executing the change effect, the degree of expectation that the game result will be in a game state that is advantageous to the player ( The expected degree of winning) is the same.

According to such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to unify the player's expectations for the second display mode of one specific image, and to perform a consistent performance, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. can be done.

In addition, the game machine 10 is provided with a movable means (movable accessory) that can operate according to an effect, and a predetermined effect (a rainbow-colored panel change effect corresponding to the display mode (color) of the rainbow-colored hand icon 753 ( The second display mode (rainbow display mode) of one specific image (hand icon 753, panel 713a) is displayed according to the first effect) and the light ball effect (second effect) by the effects 716a to 716c). other specific images (hand icons 723a to 723c, panels 713b to 713
c) can be hidden and the movable means can be operated.

According to such a game machine 10, when the second display mode of one specific image is displayed, the performance effect can be enhanced by operating the movable means, and the player's expectation for the big win can be enhanced. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

[Seventh Embodiment]
A seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to sixth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to sixth embodiments, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The seventh embodiment relates to indication of hitting to the right.

FIG. 150 shows a case where the stop pattern becomes a time-saving design in the final special figure variation display game (time-saving final game) of the specific game state, and then becomes a c time-saving specific game state (time-saving state).
In addition, in FIG. 150, in particular, the specific game state related to the final special figure fluctuation display game (final game of time saving) is a time saving state due to a time saving that occurs immediately after the big hit due to the big hit, or after the big hit state ends It is a time-saving state due to b time-saving that occurs when the number of times of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (excluding the number of times in the probability state) reaches the ceiling number of times, but it may be in other time-saving states, and the time-saving state Instead, it may be in a definite variable state.

As shown in FIG. 150, when the variable display (final variation) of the last special figure variation display game of a time saving or b time saving is completed, the time saving pattern is displayed as a special figure 2 during the display time (stop display time) of the stop pattern. It is displayed on the device 52 (or the special figure 1 display device 51) and the display device 41. After the stop display time elapses, the final game of time saving ends, and c time saving starts. In addition, here, since the start memory is zero and the special figure variation display game in c time saving has not started yet, it is assumed that the display of the time saving pattern continues even after the stop display time.

In addition, as described above, the timing when the a time saving or b time saving ends is the timing when the time saving end setting process (A4812, FIG. 33) is executed in the special figure fluctuation process, that is, the timing when the final fluctuation stops .

The game control device 100 terminates the state of the right-handed notification (display for notifying that it is right-handed) when the time-saving a or the time-saving b ends in the first game state display unit 57 of the collective display device 50, and c When the time saving starts, the state of hitting to the right is resumed. Therefore, during the stop display time, there is no notice of hitting to the right on the collective display device 50 .

When an effect command corresponding to the opening of the electric power is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, the effect control device 300 can display a right-handed instruction display on the display device 41 according to the opening of the electric power. (solid line). As in FIG. 150, just before a time saving or b time saving ends, if the normal variable winning device 37 (universal electricity) is opened, a time saving or b time saving ends and right hitting in the batch display device 50 Even if the notification state ends, the right-handed instruction display on the display device 41 can be maintained, and is continuously displayed from a time saving or b time saving to c time saving. As a result, the right-handed instruction display is not frequently displayed or hidden on the display device 41 corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific game state, and the player is no longer confused.

As indicated by the dotted line, during the specific game state, the game control device 100 may display the right hitting information on the collective display device 50, and the effect control device 300 may display the right hitting instruction display on the display device 41. be. Even in this configuration, even if the time-saving a or the time-saving b ends and the right-handed notification state on the collective display device 50 ends, the effect control device 300 continues to display the time-saving pattern on the display device 41 during the stop display time. Try to keep the right-handed indication.

As described above, after the specific game state (for example, a time saving or b time saving) ends, again, when the specific game state (for example, c time saving) starts, the right-handed instruction display is displayed after the end of the previous specific game state It continues until the later specific game state (for example, c short time) resumes without ending. As a display suggesting a game ball shooting mode that is advantageous to the player, a game state (
You may continue and display the mode display suggesting production mode). In this way, the right-handed instruction display is not frequently displayed or hidden on the display device 41 corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific game state, and the player is no longer confused.

[Functions and effects of the seventh embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment includes game control means (game control device 100) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effect control means (performance control device 300) capable of executing effects related to the game. It is possible to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player. The game control means can generate a specific game state (eg, short time c) again after the end of the specific game state (eg, short time a or short b time). The effect control means does not end the display suggesting the shooting mode of the game ball that is advantageous to the player in the specific game state (for example, right-handed instruction display or mode display) after the end of the previous specific game state. It is possible to continue to the display means (for example, the display device 41) until the specific game state (for example, c time saving) resumes.

In such a gaming machine 10, a display suggesting a shooting mode of a game ball that is advantageous to the player in a specific game state (for example, right-handed instruction display or mode display) is frequently displayed corresponding to the presence or absence of the specific game state. It is no longer displayed or hidden by the display means, and the player is no longer confused.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes are possible within the scope of the technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. is. For example, it is also possible to replace the time saving state with a probability variable state. For example, the production control device can also execute a part of the processing that the game control device is executing, and conversely, the game control device can also execute a part of the processing that the production control device is executing. . for example,
Various combinations of multiple embodiments and multiple modifications are also possible. Also, for example, the present invention can be applied not only to pachinko machines but also to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, and is intended to include all changes within the scope of the claims and equivalent meanings and contents.

For example, when the above-described embodiment is applied to a slot machine, the game media used in the game are medals (coins) instead of game balls, and the number of prize balls is replaced with the number of medals to be paid out. The number of game media used is the number of inserted medals, which is the number of inserted medals inserted into the slot machine. And in a slot machine, the payout rate (base) as performance information is
It is the ratio (%) of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted into the slot machine.

10 game machine 25 effect button 30 game board 32 game area 34 normal figure start gate 36 first start winning opening (first starting winning area)
37 normal variable winning device (second starting winning area)
38 First special variable winning device 39 Second special variable winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 50 Collective display device (LED)
86 Specific Area (V Winning Gate)
100 Game control device (main board)
200 Payout control device 300 Effect control device (sub board)
511 Operation notice display 512 Operation warning display 513 Operation display 520 Ball out error display 522 Overflow error display 524 Two-dimensional code 541 Specific model display (complete function equipped display)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of generating a game state advantageous to a player, comprising effect control means capable of displaying a plurality of specific images on a display means as effects related to a game, and game control means capable of executing the game. ,
A game-disabled state in which a game cannot be executed can be generated by establishment of a predetermined condition,
The production control means is
In a game capable of generating a game state advantageous to the player, a predetermined effect related to the display of the specific image can be executed,
The game control means is
program storage means for storing programs;
Arithmetic processing means for performing predetermined arithmetic processing by the program;
a plurality of registers in which values are stored when performing the arithmetic processing;
an update information storage means capable of storing information updated by the arithmetic processing means;
The arithmetic processing means is
without using a specific call instruction that can call a subroutine at an arbitrary address when calling a process related to the execution of the game;
without using the specific call instruction when calling a process related to outputting external information to the outside of the gaming machine,
A game machine, wherein the specific call command is used when calling a process related to the output of a test signal related to the game machine.

Images